#SAP PP interview questions

[dhirajshinde]

What Are the Most Common SAP PP Interview Questions That I Should Prepare For?

If you are gearing up for a career in SAP Production Planning (SAP PP), one of the primary concerns you might have is: What are the most common SAP PP interview questions, and how can I answer them effectively? Preparing for an SAP PP interview can be challenging, especially if you are not familiar with the type of questions that hiring managers typically ask. Understanding the key SAP PP interview questions is crucial because it allows you to demonstrate your knowledge, skills, and practical understanding of the SAP PP module.

In this article, we’ll discuss some frequently asked SAP PP interview questions, provide tips on how to answer them, and guide you on what to expect during the interview process. These SAP PP interview questions will help you feel more confident and prepared, increasing your chances of landing the desired role.

What are the Basic SAP PP Interview Questions for Freshers?

If you’re a fresher, you might be wondering which SAP PP interview questions you’ll encounter in the initial stages of your career. The focus of these questions is usually on basic concepts and definitions. Some of the commonly asked SAP PP interview questions include:

What is SAP PP, and how does it integrate with other SAP modules?

Answer: SAP PP stands for Production Planning. It is used to plan and control the manufacturing processes within an organization. SAP PP integrates seamlessly with other SAP modules such as SAP MM (Materials Management), SAP SD (Sales and Distribution), and SAP QM (Quality Management) to manage the entire supply chain.

What are the key components of the SAP PP module?

Answer: The main components include Demand Management, Material Requirements Planning (MRP), Capacity Planning, Bill of Materials (BOM), Work Centers, Routing, and Production Orders. Understanding these components is essential for answering more advanced SAP PP interview questions.

What is a Bill of Materials (BOM)?

Answer: A BOM is a complete list of materials, components, and assemblies required to produce a product. It is a foundational concept that you’ll often come across in SAP PP interview questions.

What is a Work Center in SAP PP?

Answer: A Work Center is a physical location where operations are performed. It is an essential concept in production planning, making it one of the top SAP PP interview questions asked by recruiters.

How Should I Approach Scenario-Based SAP PP Interview Questions?

As you gain experience, the SAP PP interview questions become more scenario-based to test your problem-solving skills and practical application of the SAP PP module. Here are a few scenario-based SAP PP interview questions:

What would you do if there is a material shortage during the production process?

Answer: First, I would check the stock levels and analyze the Material Requirements Planning (MRP) run. If there is indeed a shortage, I would either adjust the production plan, reschedule production orders, or coordinate with the procurement team to expedite the purchase of raw materials. Such SAP PP interview questions test your ability to handle real-world challenges.

How do you handle a capacity overload at a Work Center?

Answer: I would perform Capacity Leveling to distribute the workload across different time periods or other Work Centers. This helps in maintaining efficiency and avoiding production delays. Mastering such SAP PP interview questions can set you apart as a candidate.

Can you explain how Production Orders are managed in SAP PP?

Answer: Production Orders are created, released, and scheduled to ensure smooth production operations. They are updated with the status of materials, operations, and costs. Questions like these are common in SAP PP interview questions for experienced professionals.

What Advanced SAP PP Interview Questions Should I Expect?

If you have a few years of experience, the SAP PP interview questions will delve into advanced topics like integration with other modules, complex production planning scenarios, and configuration settings. Some advanced SAP PP interview questions include:

What is the difference between Discrete Manufacturing and Repetitive Manufacturing in SAP PP?

Answer: Discrete Manufacturing involves production processes that are carried out in distinct batches or lots, where each order is unique. Repetitive Manufacturing, on the other hand, involves a continuous production process for the same product. Such SAP PP interview questions are aimed at understanding your knowledge of different production strategies.

What is the role of Demand Management in SAP PP?

Answer: Demand Management determines how demand is managed for a material, whether it’s through a Make-to-Order or Make-to-Stock strategy. Knowing how to answer these SAP PP interview questions showcases your ability to manage planning effectively.

Can you explain the MRP process and its impact on Production Planning?

Answer: The MRP (Material Requirements Planning) process calculates the materials and components needed to meet production requirements. It ensures that the right quantity is available at the right time. Expect such SAP PP interview questions to test your grasp of fundamental concepts.

How Can I Prepare for Technical SAP PP Interview Questions?

Technical SAP PP interview questions often require you to explain specific functionalities, configuration settings, and T-codes used in the SAP PP module. Here are some examples:

Which T-codes are commonly used in SAP PP?

Answer: Common T-codes include:

MD04 for Stock/Requirements List

CO01 for creating Production Orders

CS01 for creating Bill of Materials (BOM)

OPP1 for customizing Demand Management Mastering these T-codes is crucial for acing technical SAP PP interview questions.

What are Control Keys in SAP PP?

Answer: Control Keys are used to define the operations in the production process, such as scheduling, costing, and confirmation. Expect such SAP PP interview questions if you’re applying for a role that involves system configuration.

How do you configure the scheduling parameters in SAP PP?

Answer: Scheduling parameters are configured using the scheduling profile in the work center, which defines the time, sequence, and capacity planning. Such SAP PP interview questions are often asked to test your technical configuration skills.

How Important Is Practical Experience in Answering SAP PP Interview Questions?

While theoretical knowledge is essential, having practical experience will give you an edge in answering SAP PP interview questions. Try to get hands-on experience with real-time projects or SAP PP simulation software. This will help you tackle scenario-based SAP PP interview questions confidently.

What Soft Skills Should I Highlight During an SAP PP Interview?

In addition to answering SAP PP interview questions correctly, it’s important to showcase your communication, teamwork, and problem-solving skills. Employers value candidates who can collaborate effectively with cross-functional teams. So, while focusing on SAP PP interview questions, don’t forget to prepare for questions that assess your soft skills and overall fit for the company culture.

Conclusion

Preparing for SAP PP interview questions requires a strategic approach, combining theoretical knowledge with practical experience. Whether you’re a fresher or an experienced professional, understanding the types of SAP PP interview questions you’ll face can help you craft well-structured answers. Remember, confidence and clarity are key when tackling these SAP PP interview questions. With proper preparation, you can ace your SAP PP interview and move one step closer to landing your dream role in the SAP domain.

[proexcellencybanglore]

How is the SAP PM Online Training Structured at ProExcellency?

SAP Plant Maintenance, or SAP PM, is a module of SAP ERP that assists an organization in performing maintenance activities in an efficient manner. At ProExcellency, we provide structured online training for SAP PM. Professionals learn expertise with good knowledge and practical experience here. Our training follows industry standards so that learners are equipped for actual applications. This article outlines the structure of our SAP PM online training, including course modules, learning methodology, practical sessions, and certification guidance.

1. Introduction to SAP PM

Training Introduction into SAP PM This forms part of explaining how it's very significant for the management of assets in enterprise and also informs on the functions and its potential integration with the rest of SAP modules like MM, PP, FI. In a way, there will be some general introduction and real-time industry applications related to SAP PM functionalities.

2. Modules in Course Topics covered

Our SAP PM training has divided the respective modules into a well-defined manner based on aspects of plant maintenance. Some of the major topics discussed are as follows:

Master Data in SAP PM: Functional locations, equipment, and work centers

Maintenance Planning: Preventive maintenance, task lists, and maintenance plans

Breakdown and Corrective Maintenance: Notification processing and work order management

Maintenance Order Management: Order creation, release, and execution

Integration with Other Modules: Interaction of SAP PM with MM, SD, FI, and PP.

Reporting and Analytics: Standard reports, KPIs, and dashboard analysis of SAP PM.

Each module includes theoretical concepts along with practical demonstrations to ensure learners gain deep insights into the process of SAP PM.

3. Learning Methodology and Delivery Mode

ProExcellency applies the blended learning method so that the training will be interactive and effective. The online training of our company is done in the following manners:

Live Instructor-led Sessions: These are provided by experienced consultants of SAP PM. Learners are given an opportunity to ask questions and interact in real time.

Hands-on Practice: Providing the learners with the SAP PM sandbox system for hands-on practice.

Recorded Sessions: Recorded lectures are provided for the students for review and learning at their own pace.

Case Studies and Real-Time Scenarios: Industry-specific case studies are provided with an understanding of the real-time implementation.

Assignments and Assessments: Quizzes and assignments are provided at regular intervals for checking learning.

4. Hands-on Practical Sessions

We train through the most evident hands-on aspect. Our participants will be exposed to step-by-step procedures when performing critical operations in the SAP PM system. These practical exercises are as follows: 

Functional location and equipment creation, management.

Set up of the task lists and plans concerning maintenance.

Handling of maintenance notification and work orders.

Preventive and corrective execution of maintenance tasks.

Generation of maintenance reports for performance metrics.

The hands-on sessions will give participants confidence in the usage of SAP PM tools in real-world scenarios.

5. Certification and Career Counseling

At the end of the course, we give participants guidance on the SAP PM certification exams. Our trainers guide the participants through the process of getting certified, exam pattern, and key areas of focus. Moreover, we also provide:

Mock Tests and Practice Exams: This will help learners know their level of preparedness for SAP certification.

Resume Building and Interview Preparation: Job assistance and help in resume building for SAP PM job interviews.

Placement Support: ProExcellency provides job assistance and connects learners with potential employers.

6. Who Can Take SAP PM Training?

The SAP PM online training is suitable for the following professionals:

Maintenance Managers and Engineers

SAP Consultants and Functional Experts

IT Professionals interested in SAP PM

Fresh Graduates looking to start a career in SAP

No prerequisite knowledge about SAP is expected since we are going to build the base and further step up toward advanced concepts.

7. Why ProExcellency for SAP PM Training?

ProExcellency is remarkable in its well-planned manner, highly competent trainers, and focus on high-quality learning. Here's why our learners opt for our SAP PM training course:

Experienced Instructors: Our trainers hold significant industry exposure along with their knowledge of SAP PM.

Diversified learning style: Live sessions, recorded video classes, and self-learning

Hands-on Experience through Real-time Projects

Affordable and Support: Lifetime access to study materials at value-for-money price.

Conclusion

SAP PM Online training in Proexcellency is crafted to help individuals become an efficient plant maintenance master. Our courses are designed with practical sessions, certification support, and industry expert guidance so that participants who complete the training will be effective at working jobs. Whether you are looking forward to advancing in your current role or entering into a new role with SAP PM, our training program is going to equip you for your needs.

Join today at ProExcellency and learn the best to start SAP PM mastering!

(Q&A)

Q1: What are the prerequisites for SAP PM training at ProExcellency?A: There are no strict prerequisites. However, a basic understanding of maintenance processes and ERP systems can be beneficial. The course covers fundamental concepts, making it suitable for beginners and professionals alike.

Q2: Will I get hands-on experience during the training?A: Yes, our training includes hands-on practice with access to an SAP PM sandbox system. Participants will perform real-time exercises on creating maintenance notifications, orders, and reports to gain practical expertise.

Q3: Does ProExcellency provide job assistance after course completion?A: Yes, we offer placement support, including resume building, interview preparation, and job referrals to help learners secure relevant positions in the industry.

[sapficocourseinpune]

SAP FICO Interview Questions for 5 Years Experience 

If you are preparing for an SAP FICO interview and have 5 years of experience, this blog will guide you through frequently asked questions that can help you ace the interview. Additionally, if you are looking to enhance your knowledge further, you can explore advanced SAP FICO courses in Pune (sapficocourseinpune), which offer in-depth training to refine your expertise.

What to Expect in an SAP FICO Interview?

With 5 years of experience, interviewers expect you to have a solid understanding of SAP FI (Financial Accounting) and CO (Controlling) modules. You will need to demonstrate your ability to solve real-world business scenarios, implement SAP solutions, and optimize financial processes.

Below are some commonly asked questions to help you prepare:

SAP FICO Interview Questions for 5 Years of Experience

1. What are the key components of SAP FICO?

FI (Financial Accounting): Manages external financial transactions, reporting, and accounting processes.

CO (Controlling): Focuses on internal reporting, cost management, and performance monitoring.

Follow-up question:How have you used both FI and CO in your previous projects to deliver business solutions?

2. Explain the difference between a Company Code and a Controlling Area.

Company Code: A legal entity for which financial statements are prepared.

Controlling Area: A management unit that tracks internal costs across multiple company codes.

Pro tip: Mention how you have worked on multiple company codes under a single controlling area to showcase real-world application.

3. Describe your experience with General Ledger (GL) accounting in SAP FI.

Explain the GL configurations you worked on, including:

Creating Chart of Accounts

Managing Primary and Secondary GLs

Setting up Field Status Variants

Also, mention how you optimized reconciliation processes using GL master data.

4. What are the major configurations required in SAP CO?

Some important configurations include:

Defining Cost Elements

Configuring Cost Centers

Setting up Profit Centers

Creating Internal Orders

Highlight any experience you have with Profitability Analysis (COPA) to impress the interviewer.

5. How do you handle Parallel Accounting in SAP?

Parallel accounting allows a company to maintain multiple sets of financial statements (e.g., local GAAP vs. IFRS). Describe how you:

Implemented parallel ledgers

Configured document splitting for parallel reporting

Used alternate valuation approaches in different accounting principles

6. What are the most common SAP FICO issues you have resolved?

This is a scenario-based question. Share specific challenges you faced, such as:

Errors in asset accounting or depreciation runs

Bank reconciliation issues

Cost center allocations discrepancies

Provide details on how you identified, analyzed, and resolved these issues.

7. What is your experience with SAP FICO integration with other modules?

Explain your hands-on experience with:

SD (Sales and Distribution): Handling revenue postings

MM (Material Management): Managing GR/IR accounts

PP (Production Planning): Costing integration

Demonstrating cross-module integration knowledge can give you an edge in interviews.

8. How do you ensure data accuracy in SAP FICO?

Describe techniques you have used for:

Validations and Substitutions in FI

Automated batch input sessions

Internal audits and reconciliations

9. What are your strengths as an SAP FICO consultant?

This is your chance to highlight both technical and soft skills. Mention:

Expertise in configurations and end-user support

Ability to communicate with cross-functional teams

Experience in project management and SAP implementations

10. What is your experience with SAP S/4HANA Finance?

SAP is moving towards S/4HANA. Explain:

Any projects you’ve handled in migration to SAP S/4HANA

Use of Universal Journal

Improvements in real-time reporting

If you have limited exposure to S/4HANA, consider enrolling in advanced SAP FICO courses in Pune (sapficocourseinpune) to upskill yourself.

Tips to Crack SAP FICO Interviews

Prepare real-world scenarios: Use your experience to explain business challenges and how you resolved them.

Stay updated with SAP S/4HANA trends: Many companies are migrating to S/4HANA, so demonstrate your awareness of new features.

Refine your financial skills: Ensure you understand key accounting concepts like IFRS, GAAP, and asset accounting.

Mock interviews: Attend mock interviews offered by SAP training institutes like sapficocourseinpune to build confidence.

Explore SAP FICO Courses in Pune (sapficocourseinpune)

To stay relevant in the industry and gain advanced knowledge, many professionals enroll in SAP FICO courses in Pune. These courses offer:

Hands-on training with real-world scenarios

Guidance for SAP certification exams

Placement assistance to help secure jobs in top companies

Exposure to the latest trends in SAP S/4HANA Finance

Some of the popular institutes for sapficocourseinpune are:

Atos India

SevenMentor

QuickXpert Infotech

Udemy (for online learning options)

Conclusion

SAP FICO interviews for candidates with 5 years of experience require thorough preparation. By focusing on practical challenges, cross-module integration, and the latest trends in SAP S/4HANA, you can stand out from other candidates. Additionally, enrolling in advanced SAP FICO courses in Pune (sapficocourseinpune) can help you sharpen your skills and boost your career prospects.

Good luck with your interview preparation!

[bestonlinetraining]

SAP S4 HANA PPDS online training | SAP S4 HANA PPDS Training Best Online career providing SAP S4 HANA PPDS online training  by real time faculty with course material and 24x7 support.  we provide SAP S4 Hana PPDS online training in All over india, UK, USA Etc. Learn more about SAP APO PPDS process flow, with All tutorial, SAP PPDS pdf, PPT & preparations SAP APO PPDS interview questions.  We also provide SAP S/4 HANA PP/DS server access with 24x7 accessibility and technical support, so that students can log in even from their home and practice. In case you miss out on any batch we provide S/4 HANA PP/DS training videos. For SAP S4 HANA PPDS online training Free Demo Class contact us on: https://bit.ly/3HP2SZR  Call us: +1 678 389 8898 / +91 8408878222

[iexcelerp-blog]

SAP Training Online | SAP online courses

SAP Training Online | SAP online courses

Welcome to iEXCELERP, We provide SAP Training Online and also SAP online courses. We suggest every candidate Join our Sap Online Training to comprehend all topics. Sap Online Course and SAP Online Training for all Sap Modules will be offered by 35+ years experienced consultants working on live projects with big MNC's. Examine our SAP FICO course online module, SAP Online Training as well as materials for ABAP module, Sap Training online for SAP MM, SAP online classes for SAP SD, SAP Program Online for SAP HCM, Ideal Sap online training institute for SAP PS, Sap online training SAP Basis, SAP online training course for HCM component, SAP PP and also meeting questions.   SAP FICO Online Training In our SAP FICO Online Training for SAP Financial Accounting and also Controlling, training product educates you in a very easy technique detailed with live circumstances. We are most likely to cover all the ideas of FICO. Read more for SAP FICO online internet training. SAP MM online training SAP MM online training by SAP MM specialists and it is designed to set up SAP MM component in an easy way step-by-step. Find out more for SAP MM Training online. SAP SD online courses SAP SD online courses are just one of the essential modules of SAP systems and also deals with the processes of order to shipment activities. Our SAP SD online training classes cover all the principles of sales activities. Learn More SAP SD Online Training. SAP HCM training online SAP HCM training online SAP HR is among the essential practical component of SAP systems and also handles all functions from hiring a staff member and also to its last discontinuation of the staff members in an organization. Find Out More SAP Human Resources Online Training Course. SAP PS Online Training SAP PS Online Training module is an incorporated job management tool used for planning as well as managing jobs and aids to take care of as well as sustain all the SAP tasks in firm. Read more SAP training PS on the internet classes. SAP ABAP online training SAP ABAP online training is just one of the brat technical program components in SAP. It is utilized to develop the SAP where application programs are written in the kind ABAP language. Learn More SAP ABAP Online Training. Check list of all our SAP Online Training Courses

SAP Online Training - What We Offer

Students can download video recording tutorials of the SAP training sessions, so in case if the prospect missed any type of class he/she can use those video clip tutorials. All our online SAP training programs are based on live projects. All our training modules are up to date as per market standards. Training will certainly be performed on a daily regular basis and additionally, we can tailor the training timetable based on the prospect demands. Online SAP trainer have more than 15 to 25 years of experience. Our Labs are very well updated with the most up to date version of hardware and software. Our classrooms are equipped with projectors &  Wi-Fi access. 100 % job assistance which includes handling mock interviews. SAP Training Course Conclusion Certification, as soon as you've completed the training course.  

Why SAP Online Course from iEXCELERP

Instructors with collectively +35 years of experience in their respective domain in addition to they are presently working with Top MNCs As all Instructors are working professionals so they are having numerous real-time jobs, instructors will use these jobs experience during training sessions. Read the full article

[siva3155]

400+ TOP SAP MM Interview Questions and Answers

SAP MM Interview Questions for freshers and experienced :-

1. What Mrp Procedures Are Available In Mm-cbp (consumption Based Planning)? Various material planning methods are used in MRP (Material Requirements Planning). Reorder point procedure (VM) Forecast-based planning (VV) Time-Phased materials planning (PD) These are specified in material creation (MM01) under the MRP 1 tab. 2. Under What Conditions Are Planned Orders Created? What May Planned Orders Be Converted To And How Is That Conversion Accomplished? Planned orders are always created when the system creates an internal procurement proposal. In the case of vendor procurement, the MRP Controller may create a planned order or directly create a PR. The next step for a planned order is to be converted to a PR so it goes to purchasing and is to eventually become a PO. A planned order can be converted to a PR using transaction code MD14. 3. What Are The Organizational Levels Of The Enterprise Structure In R/3? The top level of the organizational plan is the Client, followed by Company Code, which represents a unit with its own accounting, balance, P&L, and possibly identity (subsidiary). The next level down is Plant, an operational unit within a company (HQ, Assembly Plant, Call Center, etc.). The Purchasing Organization is the legally responsibly group for external transactions. This group is further subdivided into Purchasing Groups. 4. What Are The Different Ways To Organize Purchasing Organizations? A Purchasing Organization may be responsible for multiple plants and this is referred to as “Distributed Purchasing”. On the other hand, “Centralized Purchasing” features one Purchasing Organization per Plant. A Purchasing Organization doesn’t necessarily need to be assigned to a Company Code. This would enable procurement for every company code as long as buyers are acting for an individual Plant, and that Plant is assigned to the Purchasing Organization. Hence, a plant may be assigned to more than one Purchasing Organization. 5. What Are Special Stocks? Special Stocks are stocks that are accounted for but are not owned by the client, are not stored at a regular facility. Consignment, sales order, and project stock are examples. 6. What Are Some Of The Options Available To Transfer Materials From One Plant To Another? Although it is possible to transfer materials from one plant to another without a Stock Transport Order, many advantages are lost including entering a vendor number, planning a goods receipt in the receiving plant, monitoring process from PO history, and the ability to create STO directly from a MRP PR. 7. What Are Some Of The Common Stock Transport Order Movement Types? One step transfers of materials can be posted using MT 301. Other various transport scenarios differ in the MTs by the Goods Issues and Good Receipts. Common Goods Issues may use MTs 303, 351, 641, or 643 in the STO. A STOs Good Receipt often uses MT 101. 8. What Is The Difference Between A Purchase Order And A Purchase Requisition? A Purchase Requisition is a document type that gives notification of a need for materials or services. A Purchase Order is a document type that is a formal request for materials or services from an outside vendor or plant. Procurement types may be defined at the line item and can be standard, subcontracting, consignment, stock transfer, or an external service. 9. What Is An Indirectly Created Purchase Requisition? An indirectly created Purchase Requisition has been initiated by CBP, the PS Project System, PM Maintenance, and Service Management, or PP Production Planning and Control. The “directly created” Purchase Requisition, on the other hand, is created by a person manually in the requesting department specifying what materials/services, units, and a delivery date. 10. What Is An Rfq And How Is It Different From The Quotation Form? A RFQ is a purchasing document and an invitation to a vendor(s) for quotation regarding needed materials or services. If multiple an RFQ is sent to multiple vendors, the system can automatically determine the best quote and send rejection letters in response to all others. The RFQ and the Quotation Form are one in the same in the system as vendor’s quotes are entered directly in the RFQ.

SAP MM Interview Questions 11. What Are The Transactions That Will Result In A Change Of Stock? A Goods Receipt is a posting acknowledging the arrival of materials from a vendor or production, which results in an increase in warehouse stock, a Goods Issue which results in a reduction in stock, or a Stock Transfer moving materials from one location to another. 12. When Would It Be Prudent To Post Goods Movements Via The Shipping Application? If picking, packing, and transportation operations need to be planned in detail. Also, in shipping, you can manage movements like returns from customers, vendors, and returns to stock. Movement Types in shipping start with a 6. 13. What Is A Reservation? A Reservation is a document used to make sure that the warehouse keeps a certain amount of a material or materials ready for transfer at a later date. It contains information on what, quantity, when, where from and to. Reservations help effective procurement by utilizing the MRP system to avoid out of/lack of stock situations. 14. Can You Manually Generate A Purchase Requisition Referencing A Purchase Order Or A Scheduling Agreement? A Purchase Requisition cannot be created with reference to either of these, as they are documents controlled by the purchasing organizations. Requirements can be automatically generated with MRP that reference a Scheduling Agreement if the source list is maintained for item-vendor combination. 15. How Is Gr/ir Account Related To Inventory? If you are involved with inventory, then you need the GR/IR account (Inventory Account) when the IR is posted. If you are not involved about inventory, then the system does not need the GR/IR account when the IR is posted; the system needs a G/L instead of the GR/IR account. 16. How Do Planned And Unplanned Consumption Affect Movement Types? In a customized Movement Type, you have defined which consumption value gets posted in the movement. Many will always be planned or unplanned, but for some there is a dependency on if the movement references a reservation. This would be planned consumption. 17. What Are Departmental Views? All functional areas of the system use the same material master data. The material master data is defined in individual screens (departmental views) that can be added as needed. Thus a material can be created with only basic data and other departments can add other information later as it becomes available. 18. Is Material Data Valid For All Organizational Levels? Control of master data depends largely on how each company sets up its Organizational levels - centralized or decentralized. Some material data is valid for all organizational levels while other data is valid only at certain levels. (I.e.: client, plant, sales org., etc.). 19. Why Would You Want To Create Physical Inventory Sheets To Perform An Inventory Cycle-count On A Material Or Materials? For a cycle counting procedure, physical inventory documents need to be created. These are used to record inventory levels of the material being cycle counted. Use transaction MICN. Click on the Execute button. On screen “Batch Input: Create Physical Inventory Documents for Cycle Counting”, perform the following, Click on the Generate Session button and Click on the Process Session button. This procedure details how to create the physical inventory documents for cycle counting in a batch, rather than one at a time, based on certain criteria. This would print physical inventory documents for all material/batches that meet those requirements. 20. What Is The Difference Between A Blanket Purchase Order And The Framework Order? In general, the Blanket POs are used for consumable materials such as office paper with a short text, with item category B. There need not be a corresponding master record, for the simplicity of the procurement. The FO, Framework Order, document type is used. Here, the PO validity period as well as the limits are to be mentioned. The GR, or Service Entry for the PO are not necessary in the case of Blanket POs. One need not mention the account assignment category during creation of the PO. It can be U, or unknown and be changed at the time of IR. 21. What Is Release Procedure? Release Procedure is approving certain documents like PRs or POs by criteria defined in the configuration. It is sensible to define separate release procedures for different groups of materials for which different departments are responsible, and to define separate procedures for investment goods and consumption goods. 22. How Do You Display Parked Documents? There are two possible transactions to use here. They are FB03 and FBV3. The first shows all posted document types. This is the best choice if you think the document has been posted to you actual balance. The later shows only parked documents that have not yet posted to your expenditure balance. These documents are still encumbrances. It is the best choice if you are trying to find which documents are still awaiting completion or approval. This transaction is very similar to the FBV2 transaction used with P-Card reconciliation and marking parked documents complete. 23. How Do You Perform An Invoice Verification? If the Invoice refers to an existing document (PO, etc.), then the system pulls up all of the relevant information like Vendor, Material, Quantity, Terms of Delivery, and Payment Terms etc. When the Invoice is entered, the system will find the relevant account. Automatic posting for Sales Tax, Cash Discount, Corrections etc. When the Invoice is posted, certain data such as Average Price of Material and Price History are updated. Use Transaction MIRO. 24. How Do You Perform A Goods Issue? Use Transaction MIGO. On the initial screen, enter the header data (you need not enter the Movement Type or the Plant as these are automatically copied from the order). Choose Goods Issue ,Create with Reference, To Order. If you know the order number, enter it directly. Using the By-products Indicator, you can simultaneously post the Goods Receipt of planned by-products. Using the Choose transaction/events indicator, you can display all transactions/events for an order and choose the transaction/events for which you want to post a Goods Issue. Copy the desired item(s). Check data on the overview screen. Post the document. 25. Where Do You Perform A Goods Issue? Use Transaction MIGO. It is possible that when MIGO is accessed that a different document screen appears than the one required. This occurs because SAP remembers the last Goods Movement transaction accessed per user login. To reach the Goods Issue Purchase Order screen, click the Dropdown Icon in the transaction field and select “Goods Issue”. 26. How Will Items Be Returned To The Vendor? When you are posting a Goods Receipt for a PO, you can also enter items that you want to return to the vendor. To do this, you no longer have to reference the purchase order with which the goods were originally delivered. From the item overview, choose 161 (Return for PO) as the default value for the Movement Type. Enter the data for the return item(s) and post the document. 27. How Do You Create A Source List? Use Transaction ME01. Enter the Material Number and the Plant Data. Enter source list records, validity period, period of time material is procurable, Vendor Number, responsible Purchasing Organization (or number of the Agreement or Contract), PPL (if the material can be procured from another plant), Fixed Source (?), MRP control. Also, a check should be done to see whether any source list records overlap. To do so, choose Source List Check. 28. How Do We Get A Proper List Of Vendors To Send An Rfq? Either use the Information Record to see who has sold a particular material to the organization in the past, or go through the Source List. 29. What Are The Components Of The Master Data That Details A Companys Procurement Used By, Vendor Evaluation For Example? The key components of Master Data are: Info Record (ME11), Source List (ME01), Quota Arrangement (MEQ1), Vendor (MK01), Vendor Evaluation (ME61), and Condition Type (MEKA). 30. What Is Vendor Evaluation And How Do You Maintain It? Vendor Evaluation helps you select the Source of Supply by a score assigned to a particular vendor. The scores are on a scale of 1 to 100 and are based on differing criteria. Use Transaction ME61 and enter the Purchasing Organization and Vendor Number. 31. How Do We Create Consignment Stocks? Everything is the same as a normal PR or PO, except: Enter the item category “K” for the consignment item. This ensures that the Goods Receipt is posted to the consignment stores and an invoice receipt cannot be generated for the item. Also, do not enter a net price. 32. Can You Change A Purchase Requisition After It Has Been Created? Yes. Use Transaction ME52N. Check to see if the PR has already had a PO issued against it. If so, you must inform the Purchasing Group. Check if the PR has been approved. If so, you may only make changes to a limited extent and may be subject of approval. Check if the PR was created by MRP. In this case, you don’t have much control over the modification process. All changes to items are logged and stored. Information stored includes when the information was changed, who changed it, what the changes were, etc. Select the desired item in the item overview and choose Go To Statistics Changes. 33. What Is The Difference Between A Pr With A Master Record And Without A Master Record For The Material Being Ordered? If the master record exists, then all of the information about the Source List, Information Record, and Vendor Evaluation already exist in the system. If we don’t have a Master record for the material we are ordering, the material is generally being ordered for direct usage or consumption. You can specify which consumption account is to be charged which is also known as Account Assignment. For example, we assign the purchase costs associated with a requisition to our sales order or cost center. If the first situation exists, many times purchasing enters into a longer-term purchasing agreement with a Vendor, which is called an “Outline Agreement”. If the Outline Agreement is done, then Purchasing cannot issue a purchase order against a PR. It can only set up such an agreement (either a “Contract” or a “Scheduling Agreement”). 34. How Do We Know If A Po Has Been Issued? Bring the Requisition up by using Material Management, Purchasing, Purchase Requisition, Display. Where the requisition overview screen is displayed, select an item by clicking on the selection box to the left of the item. Click on the General Statistics icon on the application tool bar. Select item. General Statistics icon. The screen appears, in the middle, under Order Statistics, in the field Purchase Order, if there is no number the PO has not been issued. 35. Where Is Material Master Data Saved? Tables MARA and MARC. 36. Where Is The Header Level And Item Level Data Saved In A Po? In SE11, we can see this information in table EKKO and EKP0 respectively. 37. How Do You Generate An Automatic Po After Creating A Pr Using A Particular Material? In MMR and VMR check Auto PO (MM02/XK02). Maintain the Source List and select the indicator for the source list record as MRP relevant (ME01). If more than one source list record is generated, make one of them fixed. Run MRP and the PRs generated will be pre-assigned with the source of supply (MD01). Enter ME59 for automatically creating POs from PRs. 38. How Can You Disable A Reservation In Mrp? Use Transaction Code OPPI to check “block stock”. 39. How Do You Find The Logical Value For Stock Item By Date? Use Transaction MC49. 40. If You Have Created A Custom Movement Type And You Get A Not Allowed Error, Where Should You First Look For The Cause? Using Transaction Code OMJJ, check “Allowed Transactions” for the customized Movement Types. 41. How Do You Display A List Of All Reservations In The System? Run report RM07RESL. 42. How Can You Post A Goods Receipt If The Po Number Is Not Known? If you selected PO Number Not Known in Transaction MIGO, you can specify search criteria for the POs on the initial screen. The system then displays a list of purchase orders. Select and copy the required PO items. 43. How Do You Perform A Goods Receipt? Use Transaction MIGO. Enter the Header Data, select the Movement Type, Enter the PO Number, select the PO items to be copied, and then post the document. 44. How Can An Invoice Be Verified? Transaction Code OLMR may be utilized. 45. How Can You Process Vendor Returns Without A Purchase Order Reference? Use Transaction Code ME21N. Look for the Return columns and click it at the item details, MIGO_GR, Goods Receipt for Return Purchase Order Movement type will be 161 to deduct the stock and 162 for reversal. Before saving, check if there is a check in the Return Column to ensure that it is a return Purchase Order. 46. What Are Some Of The Initial Configuration Steps For Physical Inventory? Define Default Values for Physical Inventory Document, Batch Input Reports, Tolerances for Physical Inventory Differences, and Inventory Sampling. Cycle Counting should be configured as well. 47. What Are Some Of The Initial Configuration Steps For Inventory Management? Plant Parameters, Define System Message Attributes, Number Assignment (Allocate document type FI to transactions), Goods Issues, Transfer Postings, Define Screen Layout, Maintain Copy Rules for Reference Documents, Setup Dynamic Availability Check, Allow Negative Stocks (). 48. When, In Initial Configuration, Why Would You Have To Setup Stock Transport Order? If it is required to carry out an inter-plant Stock Transfer through SD, then this configuration is required and must be carried out. 49. What Are Some Of The Initial Configuration Steps For Purchase Requisitions? Define Document Types, Processing Time, Release Procedure (with and without classification), Setup Authorization Check for G/L Accounts, Define Number Range. 50. What Data Does The Information Record Contain? The Information Records has data on Units of Measure, Vendor price changes after a certain level, what materials have been procured by a specific vendor, price and conditions for relevant Purchase Organization, Tolerance limits for over/under delivery, Vendor evaluation data, planned delivery time, and availability time the vendor can supply the material. 51. How Do You Create A Vendor? Use Transaction Code XK01. Add the Vendor name, Company Code, Purchasing Organization, Account Group, and the Vendor address. Next add the country, Bank Key, Bank Account, Account Holder (an actual name), and then save the data. 52. What Are The Lot Size Attributes A Material Can Posses? Lot Sizing dictates the reorder quantity for a material. A material can have a static, periodic, optimum, or fixed lot size. 53. What Are Some Of The Data Points Provided By Purchasing For A Material? Some of the key inputs when creating a material are Base Unit of Measure, Purchasing Group, Reminder days, tolerance levels, shipping instructions, GR processing time, JIT schedule indicator, Critical part (), etc. 54. How Do You Create A Material? Use Transaction Code MM01. Name the material, choose an industry sector, choose a material type, create or copy the views, add a basic description, give it’s attributes/values, MRP information, reorder point, accounting valuation, warehouse management information and then save the data. 55. What Are The Main Purchasing Tables? EKBN Purchase Requisition EBKN Purchase Requisition Account Assignment EKAB Release Documentation EKBE History of Purchase Document 56. What Are The Key Fields For The Material Master? Material Groups, External Material Groups, Divisions, Material Status, Labs & Offices, Basic Materials, Storage Conditions, Temperature Conditions, Container Requirements, and Units or Measure Groups. 57. Will Roh Have A Sales View? Will Fert Have A Purchasing View? They shouldn’t because ROH type materials are procured from the outside not sold and FERT type materials are created inside and aren’t procured. In some special cases, we have to sell raw materials (ROH) and buy finished goods (FERT) from outside sources. The views must be extended in these cases using transactions OMS2 and MM50. 58. How Do You Configure The Release Procedure? Use Transaction OMGQ. 59. How Do You Create A Class? Class is defined as the group of characteristics, which can be attributed to a product. Use Transaction CL01. Enter the value for the Class name and a small description. Select the group from it. The values on the different tabs are not mandatory, so you can skip the values if you wish or you can go to any extent needed. Save, and the Class is created. 60. How Do You Change Characteristic? Use Transaction Code CT04. Follow these steps: Format (numeric, character, etc.), Unit of Measure, Templates, Required Entry, Intervals as Values (?), descriptions for texts for characteristics and characteristic values, display options for characteristics on the value assignment screen, Allowed Values, Default Values that are set automatically on the Value Assignment Screen. 61. How Do You Define A Release Procedure For Prs And Pos? Use Transaction ME54 and ME28 respectively. 62. How Can One Keep Users From Using Standard Mm Movement Types? Standard Movement Types should not be deleted from the system. The account assignments, however, may be deleted for a particular Movement Type in table T030 using transaction OBYC. Another way to achieve the same result is to enter Movement Type in transaction OMJJ. Remove MBXX from allowed transactions. 63. What Needs To Be Present In Order For Material Type To Be Automatically Copied From One View To Another? When creating any view, the Industry Sector and Material type will be automatically copied from an existing view, so long as at least one view exists. 64. How Do You Determine Which Views Of A Material Need To Be Added Or To See Which Plants A Material Has Been Extended To? You can use transaction MM50. To extend a material to a different plant requires selecting the new plant on the organizational level screen. Note that all views of a material are not extended unless they were selected on the initial screen. In addition, each plant may have a different system configuration requiring additional inputs on each of the departmental screens. Material changes made in one plant do not change that material in other plants. 65. When Creating A New Material, What May Prompt Some Of The Possible Material Types? Pressing F4 gives a list of choices. Select the material type for the material you are creating. For example, FHMI for Prod. Resources/tools, ROH for Raw Materials, FERT for Finished Products, etc. 66. When Can A Production Resource/tool Be Defined As A Material? A Production Resource / Tool can be defined as a material if purchasing and inventory functions are to be carried out for that PRT. The information required to be input is dependent upon which department views are being created. Thus, material master information is typically entered at different times by numerous system users. Note that to add a view, the “Create Material” transaction is used rather than the “Change Material” transaction. 67. What Views Are Possible For A Material? The material type selected controls the views possible for material. For a material to be used in the system it needs to be created for each plant. Multiple views of a material are possible but at a minimum, the material needs to have a description and a base unit of measure assigned on the basic data view. Additional department views (i.e. Accounting, Sales, Purchasing, MRP, Warehouse) can be added at a later time by extending the material. As additional plants are added, a material will need to be extended to the plants before it can be used there. 68. What Sap Program Is Used To Update Or Create Material Master Records? RMDATIND is used to update Material Master Records and can be used for such assignments as extending all materials to a new plant. 69. Where Can You Dictate How Planned Orders Are Converted Into Requisitions In Mrp? Look at the Transaction Code OPPR indicator. Assign proper indicator. 70. What Are Some Of The More Important Materials Management Tables? EINA contains general data of the (Purchasing) Information Record; EINE includes Purchasing Organization of the same. MAKT is the Materials Description table, MARA-General Materials data, MARC-Plant Data for Materials, MARD-Storage Location Data for Material, MAST-Material to BOM Link, MBEW-Material Valuation, and MKPF-Header Material Document. Some of the tables that directly pertain to the document types are T156 Movement Type and T023/T024 Groups Material and Purchasing. 71. How Are The Various Mm Configuration Transactions Accessed? Transaction Codes OLMD accesses MM-CBP, OLMB accesses MM-IM, OLME accesses MM-PUR, OLML accesses MM-Warehouse Management, OLMS accesses Material Master Data, and OLMW is the proper transaction for valuation and account assignment. 72. How Do You Access The Materials Management Configuration Menu? Transaction Code OLMS has a host of options that are not accessible through the IMG. 73. How Do You Set Price Control For Receipts (goods/invoice) Telling The System How To Value Stocks? Transaction Code OMW1 allows you to set price control to S (Standard Price) or V (Moving Average Price). Under Standard Price (S), the materials and accounting documents are both valid. The one with the lower value will be posted with a price variance entry. 74. Why Would An Organization Need To Allow Negative Stocks? Negative Stocks are necessary when Goods Issues are entered necessarily (business process reasons) prior to the corresponding Goods Receipts and the material is already located physically in the warehouse. 75. What Is An Invoice Verification? The Invoice Verification component completes the material procurement process and allows credit memos to be processed. Invoice Verification includes entering invoices and credit memos that have been received, checking accuracy of invoices with respect to price and arithmetic, and checking block invoices (these are the ones which differ too much from the original PO). 76. What Is The Source List? The Source List identifies preferred sources of supply for certain materials. If the Source List has been properly maintained, it will identify both the source of a material and the period of time in which you can order the material from the source. 77. What Is A Quotation? Once a vendor has received an RFQ, the vendor will send back a quote that will be legally binding for a certain period of time. Specifically, a Quotation is an offer by a vendor to a purchasing organization regarding the supply of material(s) or performance of service(s) subject to specified conditions. The Quotation then need to be maintained in the “Maintain Quotation: XXXX” screens. 78. Give Some Examples Of The Information Relating To A Materials Storage/warehousing? Some examples are Unit of Issue, Storage Conditions, Packaging Dimensions, Gross Weight, Volume, and Hazardous Materials Number. Also, there are various Storage Strategies information and options. 79. What Are The Various Steps In The Mm Cycle From Material Creation Through Invoice? The following creates a rough picture of the MM Cycle. Create material, create vendor, assign material to vendor, procure raw material through PR, locate vendor for certain material, processing GR, goods issue, and invoice verification. 80. What Is A Source List? The Source List identifies preferred sources of supply for certain materials. If it’s been maintained, both the source of supply and the time period. The Source List facilitates gaining a fixed source of supply, blocked source of supply, and/or helps us to select the priffered source during the source determination process. 81. What Is A Price Comparison? Perform a price comparison using ME49 and one may compare quotations from different vendors. 82. What Is A Material Type? A Material Type describes the characteristics of a material that are important in regards to Accounting and Inventory Management. A material is assigned a type when you create the material master record. “Raw Materials”, “Finished Products”, and “Semi-Finished Products” are examples. In the standard MM module, the Material Type of ROH denotes an externally procured material, and FERT indicates that the relevant material is produced in-house. 83. If You Have A Multi-lineitem Po, Can You Release The Po Item By Item? No, a PO is released at the header level meaning a total release or “With Classification”. PRs, on the other hand, have two release procedures possible. “With Classification” as described above, and “Without Classification” where it is only possible to release the PR item by item. 84. What Is Sap? How Is It Used In Industries? SAP is the most popular Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) software application used to provide enterprise business solutions. It was first introduced in 1972 in Mannheim, Germany. SAP stands for Systems Applications and Products in Data Processing. SAP provides complete business solutions by integrating various business tasks, such as sales, purchase, and production. It takes information from one business process and incorporates the same into another business process, thereby speeding up business processes. For example, the information about the raw material in stock is used by the production department to prepare products. It is most widely used in industries, because it automates business processes and provides real-time solutions for them, that is, it updates and processes the data very quickly. 85. What Is Sap R/3? SAP R/3 is an ERP software officially launched in 1992. It is a replacement for the SAP R/2 mainframe computing based ERP software and is based on client-server computing. With the advent of client-server computing, SAP AG, Germany (founder of the SAP ERP software), launched SAP R/3 in the market to provide client-server based real-time business solutions. The letter R in SAP R/3 represents the real-time business data processing, while 3 represents the three-tiers in client-server computing. The three-tiers in client-server computing are: Presentation (Client), Application (Business logic), and Database (Stores the actual business data). SAP R/3 integrates the various business areas, such as sales, purchase, and procurement, by using its different functional modules, such as Material Management (MM), Sales and Distribution (SD), Financial and Controlling (FICO), and Human Resource (HR). Different versions of SAP R/3 are 3.1i, 4.0b, 4.5b, 4.6b, and 4.6c with the latest version 4.70. 86. What Are The Core Functionalities Of The Sap System? The core functionalities of the SAP system consists of Sales and Distribution (SD), Materials Management (MM), Financial Accounting (FI), and Production Planning (PP). In the first phase, the companies implement the SAP software with these core functionalities and later in the second and third phase, they may also introduce other functionalities, such as Controlling (CO), Warehouse Management (WM), Human Resource (HR). However the type of modules and the phasing of implementation solely depends on the type of industry the client works as well as the organization's readiness and urgency for the need to adopt integrated enterprise system such as SAP. 87. How Can You Define An Mm Module? What Is Its Importance In Sap R/3? MM stands for Material Management and is a part of the Logistic functional area of SAP R/3. It is an important SAP R/3 module, because it helps manage broad-level business activities, such as procurement, valuation and assignment, batch management and material storage. Since the materials are the most precious resource of an organization, extreme care needs to be taken in all the processes related to materials management. Efficient material management is the essence of the MM module of SAP R/3. 88. How Is The Mm Module Integrated With Other Modules Of Sap? The MM module deals with material procurement on the basis of the production required; therefore, it is linked with the Purchasing Planning (PP) module. The Sales and Distribution (SD) module is proportionally related to the MM module, because it uses information about the quantity of material sent for production. The MM module is related to the Warehouse Management (WM) module, because the MM module maintains information about the material storage and material transfer inside an organization. The MM module is also related with the Financial Accounting (FI) module, because every operation performed in the MM module directly impacts the financial process of the organization. 89. What Are The Levels Of Organizational Units Of Enterprise Structure In R/3? The client is the top level of the organizational units of Enterprise Structure in R/3. The client is followed by the company code, which represents a unit with its own accounting, balance, and P&L The next level of organizational units of Enterprise Structure is plant, representing an operational unit of a company. 90. Define Client. What Is Its Importance In Sap? A client can be defined as a person, company, or an organization that purchases goods from another person, company, or organization and pays for that. In terms of SAP, a client can be defined as a unit that has its own master records and a set of tables. It is important in SAP because it stores and maintains data about the organization where SAP is implemented. 91. How To Create A Client In Mm Module? You can create a client in MM module either by using the transaction code SCC4 or by performing the following steps: 1. Click SAP menu-->Tools-->Administration-->Client Administration. 2. Double-click SCC4 Client Maintenance. The display View "Clients": Overview screen appears. 3. Click the Display -> Change button. The Information dialog box appears. 4. Click the Continue button. The Change View "Clients": Overview screen appears where you can create a new client. 92. How To Create A Company Code In Sap? In SAP, the company code is created using the transaction OX02. The company code field is defined as a four-character alphanumeric string. You can create a company code in SAP by performing the following steps: 1. Open the SAP Customizing Implementation guide. 2. Click Enterprise Structured-->Definition-->Financial Accounting-->Edit, Copy, Delete, Check Company Code. The Choose Activity dialog box appears. 3. Double-click Edit Company Code Data. The Change View "Company Code": Overview screen appears where you can create a company code. 93. How Can You Assign A Company Code To A Company In Sap? You can assign a company code to a company by performing the following steps: 1. Open the SAP Customizing Implementation guide. 2. Click Enterprise Structured Assignments Financial Accounting -> Assign company code to company. The Change View "Assign Company Code - Company": Overview screen appears where you can assign a company code to a company. 94. How Many Charts Of Accounts Can Be Assigned In A Company? In a company, only one chart of accounts can be assigned. 95. How Many Company Codes Can Be Assigned In One Chart Of Accounts? You can assign many company codes in a chart of accounts. 96. How Many Company Codes Can Be Assigned To A Company? You can assign one or more company codes to a company. 97. What Is A Plant In Mm? A plant is an organizational unit, where materials are produced or goods and services are provided. In SAP, it is represented by a unique four-digit alphanumeric number. A plant is allocated to one company code and a company can have many plants. In an organizational unit, a plant can be at one of the following locations: Corporate headquarters Central delivery warehouse Manufacturing facility Regional sales office 98. How Many Company Codes Can Be Assigned To A Plant? You can assign only one company code to a plant. 99. Can A Company Code Be Assigned To Many Plants? Yes, you can assign a company code to many plants. 100. Define Storage Location In Sap. In SAP system, a storage location is the place where you can store your stock of goods, within the premises of a plant. Each plant has at least one storage location assigned to it. 101. Can Storage Locations Be Created Automatically? How Can They Created Automatically? Storage locations can be created automatically when an inward goods movement for a material is performed. In order to create a storage location automatically, open the Sap implementation guide and then follow this path: Materials Management->Inventory Management and Physical Inventory->Goods Receipt->Create Storage Location Automatically. 102. Can Two Plants Have A Common Storage Location? A storage location is a unique four-character alphanumeric key; therefore, it cannot be common for two plants. 103. What Is The Menu Path To Configure The Storage Location? You can configure the storage location by navigating the following menu path: Select Display IMG ->Enterprise structure ->Definition->Maintain storage location 104. What Are The Different Ways Of Organizing Purchasing Organizations? The different ways to organize purchasing organizations is distributed purchasing and centralize purchasing. Distributed purchasing represents multiple purchasing organization for multiple plants and centralized purchasing represents one purchasing organization per plant. 105. What Is The Reference Purchasing Organization In Sap? The reference purchasing organization can be defined as an organization whose conditions or contracts are linked to other purchasing organizations. This organization can make conditions or contracts that can easily be used in other purchasing organizations. 106. What Is Master Data In Mm Module? Master data in MM module acts as a reference data defining various business entities and plays a key role in the core operation of a business. 107. How Is Master Data Important In Mm Module? A Master Data in MM module contains all the basic information needed to manage a material. The data is stored and sorted on the basis of different criteria, such as the descriptive nature of the material (size, dimension, and weight), control function of the material (material type and industry sector). Apart from the data maintained by the user, it also stores data that is automatically updated by the system (such as stock levels). 108. What Is A Material Master File? The complete information related to managing a material is stored and maintained in a data record in the material master, which is sorted on the basis of different criteria. 109. Why Are Material Master Records Used In Sap? Material master records are used in the SAP R/3 system to manage the materia I-specific data. The material information stored in material master records is used by all logistics areas in the SAP R/3 system. The material master records integrate all the material-specific data into a single database object that eliminates the problem of data redundancy. Since material master records store data in a single database object, the same data can be shared by all departments, such as purchasing, inventory management, materials planning, and invoice verification. 110. How Is The Information Of Material Master Records Updated? You can manually update the information of the material master records; however, there are some exceptions that can be updated by the system only, for example, the administrative data that is updated by the SAP R/3 system only. 111. What Data In Material Master Is Maintained At The Client Level? The general data, that is, the data applicable to the company as a whole is stored at the client level. 112. What Are The Data In Material Master That Are Maintained At The Company Code Level? The data that is specific to a particular company and the plant and storage areas assigned to the company is maintained at the company code level. 113. What Are The Plant-specific Data In Material? The MRP data and forecast data are the plant-specific data in material. 114. What Is The Lot Size Attribute Of A Material? The lot size attribute represents the reorder quantity for a material. A material can have a periodic, optimum, or a static or fixed lot size. 115. How Is Material Information Structured In Material Master Records? Material information is structured in material master records on the basis of different criteria, such as material's master detail (such as name size dimension , and weight), that shows its descriptive nature and material's detail with a control function (such as material type, price control and industry sector). Material master records also store the information about the data that can be automatically updated by the system. For example, the stock level can be automatically updated by the system on the basis of the material data update. 116. What Is A Batch? A batch is a group of materials combined together quantity-wise for various reasons. Very often, the materials with the same characteristics and values are grouped into a batch. For example, in a chemical industry, a certain number of containers of a specific product may be considered a batch as these products were produced at the same time and have the same physical and chemical characteristics. 117. Why Is Batch Record Important? A batch represents a quantity of a particular material processed at the same time with the same parameters. These materials, produced under one batch, have the same characteristics and values. However, these characteristics may vary from the materials of another batch produced on the same day. A batch record is important as having a batch record indicates that it conforms to the current Good Manufacturing Procedures (cGMP) and contains specifications of the product tested, analytical methods, and test results. 118. How To Create A Batch? You can create a batch record manually by using the transaction code MSC1N. The navigation path of creating a batch is: SAP Menu -> Logistics -> Materials Management -> Material Master -> Batch -> Create. 119. How Can Batch Records Be Changed? You can change a batch record by using the transaction code MSC2N. The navigation path of changing the batch record is: SAP Menu -> Logistics -> Materials Management -> Material Master -> Batch -» Change. You can change the batch record, but you should note that these changes are also available for review. 120. How To Delete A Batch? You can delete a batch by using the MSC2N transaction code. You can delete a batch record by flagging the batch master record. For this, you need to first select the batch in the Change mode. 121. What Is Batch Information Cockpit? The Batch Information Cockpit (BIC) is the main switching point having a wide range of options for scrutiny and control. It stores all the information related to the analysis of a particular batch at a single location. 122. What Is A Serial Number? A serial number is provided to an item to identify it and to store information about it. A serial number is mostly used to refer to equipments such as motors, drills, or vacuums. In MM, an item of a material contains serial number as well as a material number. This combination of the material number and serial number helps to uniquely identify an item of a material. 123. State The Importance Of Classification Data. The classification data allows you to search for the materials on the basis of the characteristics values entered into the classes. This feature is very important when the customer wants to search for a particular vendor and batches. 124. What Are The Main Master Files Used In Mm? The following are the main master files used in MM: Material master file Inventory master file Vendor master file 125. Give Some Example Of Master Data In Material Management (mm). Material master, material master general data (MARA), tax classification material (MLAN), info records, source list, and vendor master are the examples of master data in MM. 126. What Is Vendor Master Data? Vendor master data contains details of each vendor who supplies materials or services to an enterprise. The vendor master data is stored in individual vendor master records consisting data, such as vendor's name vendor's address currency used for the transaction payment terms and contact person's name sales staff. 127. What Are The Different Fields In A Vendor Master Data? The different fields in a vendor master data are as follows: The name and address of the vendor The currency in which the transaction would be done The terms and conditions of payment The names of important contact persons The different accounting information, such as the reconciliation account in the general ledger 128. How To Create A Vendor Number Range? When you create a number range, it is important to remember that vendor numbers, such as material numbers can be assigned externally or internally. You can create vendor number ranges by selecting the following navigation path: IMG -> Financial Accounting -> Vendor Accounts -> Master Data -> Preparations for Creating Vendor Master Data -» Create Number Ranges for Vendor Accounts. For configuring the vendor number range, you should enter a unique number for the range which is a two character field and then specify the limit for the number range. The current number field is used to define the current number. The Ext. field defines whether the number range is defined externally by the user. 129. What Is The Transaction Code To Access The Materials Management Configuration Menu? The OLMS transaction code is used to access the Materials Management Configuration menu. 130. What Are Purchasing Information Records? The purchasing information records, also known as info record, contain information related to the material and vendor who is supplying the material. It also contains details about the material, such as the current price of the material. 131. What Are The Categories Of Purchasing Information Record? The following are the categories of purchasing information record: Standard — Contains information for the standard purchase order. In this type of purchasing info record, you can create info records for materials and services which do not have master record. Subcontracting— Contains the ordering information for subcontract orders. Pipeline— Contains information of the commodity that is sent through the pipeline such as oil, water. Consignment— Contains information of the material that is in vendor's possession and is kept by the vendor at some other premises at his own cost. 132. What Are The Prerequisites Of Creating A Purchasing Info Record? The prerequisites of creating a purchasing info record are as follows: Material number — Before creating a purchasing info record, the material number of the Material Master record should be known Manufacturer Part Number (MPN) Material number — Before ordering a material having a MPN, you must know its MPN material number Vendor number— The number of the vendor master record should also be known Organizational level — Suppose the purchasing info record is for a particular purchasing organization or plant then the code specific to that purchasing organization or plant is required 133. How Can You Create A Purchasing Information Record? You can create a purchasing information record either manually or automatically by setting the Info update indicator when maintaining a quotation, a purchase order, or an agreement. 134. Can Purchasing Info Record Be Created Without A Material Number? Yes, you can create a purchasing info record without a material number. If the material is without the material number, you need the following information for creating the purchasing info record: Material short text Order unit Material group Short term key 135. How Is An Information Record Based On The Material Master Created? At first, you need to create the info record by selecting SAP Menu->Master Data-Info Record->Create. Details, such as vendor number, material number, purchase organization, or plant number, are then entered. The number of the information record (in case of external assignments) is then entered. Next, the general data for vendors, ordered quantity, origin of data, supplying information, and Customs Tariff Number is entered. The planned delivery time, purchasing groups, and standard purchasing quantity are then entered. The control data is then checked. The default value of tolerance data and purchasing group are taken from the material master record. The net price is entered and then select Go TO->Texts to display the text overview. If the PO text is already defined, it appears in the material master record; otherwise, it needs to be entered. After all these entries, the record is saved. 136. What Is Document Management System In Sap? Document management system (DMS) in SAP helps you store external documents, such as the goods or material pictures. By using the DMS, you can set the maximum size of the picture that can be uploaded in a document. The DMS helps to link these external documents with the appropriate SAP objects. 137. How Will You Create A Document? You can create a document by using the CV01N transaction code or by using the following menu path: SAP Menu -> Logistics -> Central Functions -> Document Management System -> Document -> CVOIN-Create. 138. Name The Key Fields That You Must Specify While Creating A Document. The key fields that you must specify while creating a document are: Document Number — Refers to a unique alpha-numeric number that is used to identify the document. . Document Type— Refers to a document type that categorizes a document. Document Part— Refers to a document's section that is treated as an in dividual document. Document Version— Refers to a two-character number that represents the document version 139. How Will You Link A Document To A Material Master Record? After creating a document, you can link it with the Material Master record by using the MM01 transaction code or by using the following menu path: SAP Menu -> Logistics -> Materials Management -> Material Master -> Material -> Create (General) -> MM01- Immediately. 140. How Will You Link A Document To A Vendor Master Record? Once you complete creating a document, you can link that document with the vendor master record by using the XK01 transaction code or by using the following menu path: SAP Menu -> Logistics -> Materials Management -> Purchasing -> Master Data -> Vendor -> Central -> XK01- Create. 141. How Classification System Is Used To Describe A Document? A Document Management System (DMS) stores large number of documents; thereby, it becomes quite difficult to find the right document. In such a case, the classification system is used to describe a document that uses a set of characteristics combined together to form a class, which is later assigned to a document. The class assigned for a document can be used to find a specific document from the DMS. 142. What Is The Source Of Error "not Allowed" In Case Of Custom Movement Type Creation? You need to check the allowed transaction for the customized movement types and use the OMJJ transaction code. 143. Give The Names Of The Tables Where The Header Level And Item Data Are Stored In A Purchase Order. The EKKO and EKPO are the two tables where the header and item level data are stored, respectively. 144. Give The Names Of The Tables Where The Material Master Data Is Stored. The MARA and MARC are the two tables where the master data is stored. 145. What Is The Vendor Evaluation? How Is It Maintained? The vendor evaluation is an activity to find a vendors performance by giving a particular score on a scale of 0 to 100. Alternatively, you can use a transaction code ME61 and enter purchase organization and vendor number to view the details. 146. Write The Name Of The Sap Program Used To Updated Or Create Material Master Records (mmr). The RMDATIND program of SAP is used to update or create Material Master Records (MMR). 147. What Is The Storage Location-specific Material Master Data? There might be a case when you need to store a material at more than one storage locations. In this case, to store the data, you need to create different material master records for each storage location. This is called the storage location-specific material master data. 148. When Is A Production Resource Tool (prt) Defined For A Material? If purchasing and inventory functions are carried out for Production Resource Tool (PRT), then a PRT is defined for a material. 149. What Transaction Code Is Used To Extend The Material View? The MM50 transaction code is used to extend the material view. 150. What Is Source List? What Is The Menu Path To Define A Source List? A source list is used to identify sources of supply for certain materials. The following is the menu path to define a source list: Select Logistics -> Materials management -> Purchasing -> Source list. 151. What Do You Mean By Material Numbers In Sap? Material numbers are unique numbers used to identify a material. 152. What Does An Industry Sector Control? While creating the material master record for a material, you need to classify the material according to the industry type. This is called the industry sector. The industry sector controls the screen appearance, the screen sequence, and the appearance of industry-specific fields on individual screens in the material master record. 153. Can We Change The Industry Sector Of An Existing Material? No, once assigned you cannot change the industry sector of an existing material. 154. What Is Valuation Category? The valuation category specifies the standard used to differentiate the different partial stocks. In simple words, you can say that valuation category is the criteria to define partial stocks. The standard system comprises a variety of valuation categories, such as B and H. B is used for procurement type that is here the stock is divided up depending on whether the stock is procured externally or manufactured in-house. On the other hand, H is used for origin, that is here the stock is divided oh the basis of from where it was delivered. The valuation category in the Material Master record holds every material that is assigned for valuation. 155. What Does The Material Type Control? The material type controls the materials stock management, which implies: If there is a change in the quantity of the material, it should be updated in the material master record. Along with the change in the material master record, there should be changes in the stock accounts also. 156. What Is The Transaction Code To Create A Material Type? MOS2 is the transaction code to create a material type. 157. What Material Types Are Prompted While Creating A New Material? Click the F4 key to select the material type for a material that you want to create. For example, the material type FHMI is used for Prod. Resources/tools, the material type ROH is used for raw materials, and FERT is used for finished product. 158. What Is The Menu Path To Define Material Type Attributes? The following is the menu path to define material type attributes: Select Logistics Master Data: Material Master -> Material -> Control data -> Define material type attributes. 159. Can We Change The Material Type Of A Material? Yes, we can change the material type of a material. 160. How Are User Defaults Set For Views? You can set user defaults for views by selecting Defaults->Views. 161. List The Steps To Create A Profile. You can create a profile by following these steps: 1. Select Profile -» MRP Profile from the Menu screen to display the Initial Create Profile screen. 2. Enter the value in the key file that you want to assign in the profile. 3. Select Goto -> Selection to display the Selection screen. 4. Enter a profile description and select the fields that you want to include in the profile. 5. Select Goto -> Data to display the Data screen. 6. Enter your data in the Data screen and save the profile by selecting Profile -> Save. 162. How Are The Characteristics Changed? The characteristics are the properties that describe the length, color, and other related features of an object. Perform the following steps to change the characteristics of an object: Select SAP Menu->Gross App. Components->Classification System->Master Data->Characteristics Alternatively, the CT04 transaction code is used to change the characteristics. 163. How Is A Class Created? A class is a collection of the group of the characteristics for a particular object. You need to enter the class name and a description for it and then select the group. After saving the details, the class is created. Alternatively, you can use CL01 T-code for this purpose. 164. Can You Include An Roh (raw Material) Type In The Sales View? Usually, the raw materials cannot be included in the sales view. However, the raw materials can be included in the sales view only when they are sold to procure finished products in return. 165. List The Key Fields Of The Material Master Table. The key fields of the material master table are material groups, material status, divisions, storage conditions, labs and offices, basic materials, container requirements, measure groups, container requirements, and temperature. 166. What Are The Major Purchasing Tables? List The T Codes For Them. The major purchasing tables along with their T-codes are as follows: 167. What Is Non-valuated Material? The material that is maintained on the basis of the quantity rather than its value is called the non- valuated material. The non-valuated material can only be withdrawn from the stores or warehouses only when it is transferred to "valuated" stock. 168. How Can You Access The Additional Data Screen? You can access the additional data screen in a material master record from any view by selecting additional data in the standard material master. 169. How To Move A Material Master Record From One Sap System To Another? You can use either of the two ways to move data from one SAP system to another. 1. Using direct input 2. Using Application Link Enabling (ALE) 170. What Is The Transaction Code To Display Material Of Sap Mm? MM03 is the transaction code to display material of SAP MM. 171. What Is The Purchasing Value Key? It is the key, which determines the following: Reminder keys— Keys that help determine the number of the days before or after the vendor has to be reminded for the material procurement Under delivery tolerance limit & Over delivery tolerance limit Order acknowledgement requirements in purchase order 172. How Can You Configure The Purchasing Value Key? You can configure the purchasing value key by performing the following steps: 1. Open the SAP implementation guide. 2. Click Materials Management->Purchasing->Material Master->Define Purchasing Value Keys. This opens the Change View "default Values: Material Master": Overview page. 3. Enter the New Entries button. This opens the New Entries: Details of Added Entries page. 4. Enter the appropriate values in the fields. 5. Click the Save button on the toolbar. 173. What Is Vendor Sub-range? The vendor sub-range is defined as a subdivision of the total range of products provided by a vendor. Vendor sub-ranges are required when you create or maintain Material Master data. 174. What Is A One-time Vendor? A one-time vendor is the vendor who rarely or only once supplies the materials or articles to your company. For such vendors, you do not need to create a separate master record because the master records have no use after the business transaction is completed. Therefore, you can collectively create a master record for all the one-time vendors. 175. Why Is Negative Stock Needed In An Organization? Negative stock is needed in an organization when a material is shipped to a customer and the production is not confirmed or there is not enough stock to satisfy the requirement. The system allows issuing the material and inventory shows a negative quantity of stock, until the product of material is confirmed. 176. How Are The Consignment Stocks Created? The consignment stocks are created in the normal purchase order or requisition, but the main thing to consider is that the K category is to be entered for the consignment item. As a result, the goods issued are posted to the consignment stores and the invoice receipt is not generated. 177. Define The Consignment Cycle? Consignment cycle is much more similar to the purchase cycle except that when you create goods receipts of the consignment stocks, only QTY (quantity) is updated without creating any accounting documents. Once the goods are utilized, consignment is settled. The value of the consumed or issued consignment stocks is used from the active purchase info record. 178. How Is Consignment Material Procured? The consignment material is procured through purchase requisitions, purchase orders, and outline agreements. 179. How Can We Take Consignment Stocks Into Our Own Stock? You can take consignment stocks from the vendor into your own stock by performing the following steps: 1. Select Goods movement->Transfer posting to display the initial screen. 2. Enter the plant name and the location where you want to store the materials. 3. Select Movement type->Transfer posting->Consignment->Consignment to own. 4. Select Continue to display the collective entry screen. 5. Enter the name of the vendor, the materials, and the quantity of materials. 6. Enter the receiving storage location if you want to store the materials in another storage location. 7. Post the document. This makes the vendor liable to change the storage location of the materials. 180. How Can You Do Invoicing In Case Of Consignment Stocks? You can do the invoicing of consignment stocks by performing either of the following: Invoicing with purchase order Invoicing without purchase order 181. How Can We View The Stocks Provided To Vendor? The stocks of material provided to vendor can be viewed by using the SC Stock Monitoring for Vendor report. The report can be accessed by selecting Purchase Order->Reporting->SC stocks per vendor from the menu. With this report, the current status of the stocks, the planned issues, and the planned receipts can be viewed. 182. How Are Components Consumed In Case Of Subcontracting? In subcontracting, the end product is ordered by using a subcontract order. The materials or components required by the vendor to manufacture the end product are mentioned in the purchase order. The components are posted to the stock of material provided to vendor in Inventory Management. When the components are supplied to the vendor, the vendor manufactures the end-product and delivers it. At this point, the goods receipt with reference to the subcontract order is posted. The goods receipt also contains the posting of the consumption of the components from the stock of material provided to vendor. In case the components consumed by the vendor are more or less than that specified in the purchase order, an adjustment needs to be posted to correct the consumption of components. 183. What Is The Need Of Creating Physical Inventory Documents For An Inventory Cycle-count Procedure Of A Material Or Materials? For a cycle-count procedure, the physical inventory documents are needed, because these are used to record inventory levels of the materials. 184. What Is The Difference Between Planned And Unplanned Consumption? The difference between planned consumption and unplanned consumption is that planned consumption is updated if goods are withdrawn due to reservation, whereas unplanned consumption is updated, if goods are withdrawn from stock without a reservation. 185. How Can One Vendor Obtain Components From Another Vendor Or Third-party? The components can be provided by a third party, such as another vendor. In this case, the subcontractor is specified as the delivery address in the purchase order. This implies that the components are directly delivered to the subcontractor. To order components for a subcontract order from another vendor, perform the following steps: 1. Select Purchase order->Create->Vendor known from the Purchasing menu. 2. Enter the vendor of the components and the desired plant. 3. Enter the components. 4. Select Item->More functions-> Delivery address. A dialog box appears in which the delivery address can be entered. 5. Enter the number of the subcontractor in the Vendor field. 6. Select the SC vendor box. As a result, the components at the goods receipt are posted to the stock of material provided to the vendor. 7. Save the purchase order. 186. How Is Invoice Verification Of Subcontracting Po Done? The invoice verification of subcontracting PO is done in the same way as it is done in purchase order. 187. How Do You Attach A Document In The Purchase Order? A document can be manually attached to a purchase order by using the document management system in SAP. In case when the purchase order is prepared using the T-code ME21N, then no attachment can be added. You need to save the purchase order and re-open with the T-code ME22N. Click the service for object button, select Service Object Button-> Create-> Create Attachment, and then select the file to be attached. 188. How Can A Subcontract Order Be Created? A subcontract order can be created by performing the following steps: 1. Enter the end-product to be ordered and the item category for subcontracting (L) in the order item. 2. Press the Enter key to display the screen for component processing. 3. Enter the components required by the vendor to manufacture the end-product. 4. Save the purchase order. 189. What Do You Mean By The Lot Size? The lot size is the quantity of materials used for re-ordering. It can be static, periodic, optimum, or fixed in attributes. 190. What Do You Mean By A Reservation? A reservation is a document that ensures availability of materials in the warehouse when materials are required for transferring materials to a customer. It contains information, such as which materials are needed, what quantities of materials are required, and when or where the materials are needed. It helps the Material Requirement Planning (MRP) system to avoid lack of stock in the warehouse. 191. What Transaction Codes Are Used With Reservations? The following transaction codes are used with reservations: The MB21 transaction code: Creates a reservation The MB22 transaction code: Changes a reservation The MB23 transaction code: Displays a reservation The MB25 transaction code: Displays lists of reservations 192. How Is The List Of All Reservations In The Systems Displayed? The reservation list can be displayed by running the RM07RESL report. 193. State The Difference Between Stock Transfer And Transfer Posting? Stock transfer is the physical movement of goods from one store to another store or one plant to another plant. Transfer posting is movement of goods from one stock type to another or from one storage location to another storage location within a plant. 194. What Is The Transaction Code To Create Movement Types? OMJJ is the transaction code to create movement types. 195. How To Create Movement Type? Perform the following steps to create a movement type: 1. Select the standard movement type 201 from the Determine Work Area Entry dialog box. 2. Click the copy icon and then overwrite 201 with Z01. 3. Select the new movement type Z01 from the Determine Work Area Entry dialog box. 4. Select Reversal-> follow-on movement. 5. Enter the reversal movement type. 196. How Is Stock Transferred In A Cross-company Scenario? Stocks can be transferred between plants that belong to different company codes. Such a stock transfer process can be done in any of the following ways: One-step plant-to-plant stock transfer Two-steps plant-to-plant stock transfer STO without delivery through shipping STO with delivery through shipping 197. How Can A Stock Transfer Be Monitored In Purchasing? A stock transfer can be monitored in Purchasing by using the following stock documents: Purchase requisition Stock transport order (STO) Stock transport scheduling agreement 198. Can A Purchase Requisition Be Generated Automatically? You can generate a purchase requisition automatically only in case where a material is sent out for external processing, for example subcontracting work. Another situation where you may need to generate a purchase requisition automatically is when the bill of materials is for a material other than a non-stock item. 199. State The Configuration Steps For Purchase Requisition? The steps for the purchase acquisition are as follows: 1. Defining of document type 2. Processing Time 3. Release Procedure 4. Authorization Check 5. Defining of the number ranges 200. How Do You Change A Purchase Requisition Once It Is Issued? To change a purchase requisition after it is issued, the first task is to check whether a purchase order against was issued or not. If it is issued, then the purchase groups are informed. Next step is to check whether the purchase requisition is approved or not. If it is approved, then only change to the limited extent is possible. Also if the purchase requisition is created by the MRP, then much less interference in the process is possible. Keeping all these parameters in mind, regarding all the changes that are going to be brought into effect, select the desired item and select Go To-> Statistics ->Changes link. 201. State The Differences Between The Purchase Requisition With A Master Record And Without A Master Record? In case of the purchase requisition with the master record, the source list, information record, and vendor evaluation are present in the system. In this case, the outline agreements are generated due to the changing of the short-term purchasing into the long-term agreement. As a reason, the purchase order cannot be issued against a purchase order, but only an agreement can be set up. If the material master is not present, then the material is ordered as a consumable item. The account assignment is done by specifying the consumption accounts against this acquisition. For example, the purchase information related with this requisition can be assigned to a specific cost center. 202. State The Importance Of The Vendor Evaluation In The Purchase Department? Vendor evaluation is an important function of the purchase department as it supports in optimizing the procurement process by selecting vendors to supply materials or services. 203. What Are The Main Criterias Of Vendor Evaluation? The main criterias of vendor evaluation are as follows: Price Quality Delivery Service and Support External Service 204. What Are The Document Types Used In Prs? Purchase requisitions (PRs) are internal documents of an enterprise. These documents are used to request the Purchasing department of the enterpriser to procure a particular material or a service. The quantity of the requested material and the date of the procurement are also specified in the PRs. The document types used in PRs are as follows: 1. Request for Quotation (RFQ). 2. Outline Agreement. 3. Purchase Order. 205. What Is The Difference Between An Indirectly Created And Directly Created Purchase Requisition? A purchase requisition is said to be created indirectly when it is initiated through another SAP component, such as consumption-based planning, project system, plant maintenance, and production planning and control. On the other hand, a directly created purchase requisition is the one that is manually created through the requesting department. The person concerned has the full control to decide the item, the quantity to be ordered, and the delivery date of the order. 206. Can A Purchase Requisition Be Manually Generated Through The Reference Of A Purchase Order Or A Scheduling Agreement? A purchase requisition cannot be generated either by using the reference of a purchase order or by using a scheduling agreement. 207. What Is A Purchase Order? What Does A Purchase Order Contain? A purchase order is a document issued by a buyer to a seller which consists of the type and quantity of the goods or services the seller will provide to the buyer at a specified date. A purchase order consists of: Document Header — Relates to the entire purchase order Number of Items — Relates to the number of items to be provided by the seller to the buyer. 208. Where Do We Define Payment Terms In Po? The payment terms in PO represent the agreements of customers and vendors. You can define the payment terms in PO in the master records of customers and vendors. 209. What Are The Document Types Used In Po? The document types used in PO are: Standard Purchase Order (NB) Stock Transport Order (TB) Framework Order 210. What Is The Difference Between Blanket Purchase Order And The Service Order? The blanket purchase order is used for consumable materials, such as office paper with a sort text. In case of blanket purchase order, no Good Receipt (GR) is required for the purchase order. In framework order, the document type is used for purchase order and GR and Service Entry (SE) are required for purchase order. 211. What Is Price Comparison? Price comparison is used to compare quotations from different vendors. You can use transaction code ME49 to perform a price comparison between different vendors. 212. What Are The Document Types Used In Sa? The document types used in SA are: LP for standard scheduling agreements LT for stock transport scheduling agreements LPA for scheduling agreements with release documentation 213. What Are The Document Types Used In Contract? The document types used in Contract are: MK WK 214. What Is A Contract? A contract is an agreement between a customer and a vendor that states that the vendor will supply material to the customer at an agreed price for a specified period of time. It can be based on either a total quantity or a total price. A contract avoids the need to create a new purchase order each time the material or service is required. 215. What Are The Different Types Of Contracts? A contract can be one of the following two types: Quantity contract — In this type of contract, the purchasing department agrees with the vendor for supply of a specified quantity of material, or services. Value contract — In this type of contract, the purchasing department can limit the total spending for a material with a vendor. The release orders are valid only till the total spending for the value contract equals the total agreed upon value. 216. What Is The Difference Between A Scheduling Agreement And A Contract? A scheduling agreement contains the details of a delivery schedule whereas a contract contains only quantity and price information and does not contain any details of specific delivery dates. 217. What Is The Difference Between Release Procedure In Internal Documents And External Documents? The release procedure differs for internal and external documents. The internal document and the purchase requisition can be released either at the item level or at the header level. Additionally, the internal document can be released ether with classification or without classification. The external document, such as the purchase order or the request for quotation, can only be released at the header level by the classification method. 218. What Are The Main Documents Used In Mm? The following are the main documents used in MM: Purchase requisitions Purchase orders Goods transfers Goods receipts Goods issues 219. What Are The Various Steps Of The Mm Cycle? The following are the different steps of the MM cycle: Create material Create vendor Assign material to vendor Procure raw material by using purchase requisition Locate vendor for certain material Process goods receipts Goods issue, and Invoice verification 220. What Is The Definition Of Procurement? Procurement can be defined as the purchase of goods or services at the best possible total cost in correct amount and quality. It is the process of acquiring goods and services that covers both acquisitions from third parties and from in-house providers. 221. What Is An Account Assignment Category In A Po Document? The Account assignment category field plays an important role in the purchasing documents. It contains many control functions that help to determine the objects that are charged in case of an ordered material. The ordered material must be procured for direct usage or consumption. With the help of account assignment category in the purchasing documents, the cost of the material can be allocated to a single Controlling object or it can be allocated among various Controlling objects. 222. What Is The Difference Between A Purchase Order And Purchase Requisition? A purchase order is a document type that gives notification about formal requests for materials or services from an outside vendor or plant. A purchase requisition is a document type that gives notification about the need for materials or services. 223. What Is The Creation Indicator? The creation indicator defines whether or not the planned orders, purchase requisitions, or schedule lines must be created for materials that are procured externally. It also defines whether or not MRP lists need to be created. 224. Define Automatic Generation Of Purchase Orders From Purchase Requisitions. The SAP system can automatically convert purchase requisitions into purchase orders. This task can be performed either online or in the background. In the process of conversion, the SAP system attempts to merge as many purchase requisition items as possible to form one purchase order. Automatic processing of conversion of purchase requisitions to purchase orders is recommended only in the case when you have a well-maintained SAP system, else manual processing is advised. 225. What Is Quotation? Quotation is offered by a vendor to a purchasing organization that contains the details regarding the supply of materials or performance of services subject to specified conditions. A quotation is a legal document that binds the vendor for a certain period. The quotation is created by the vendor in response to a request for a quotation issued by a purchasing organization. A quotation consists of all the details, such as the total quantity and delivery date of a material or service offered. 226. What Is Request For Quotation (rfq)? A request for quotation (RFQ) is a document sent to a vendor by a purchasing organization and the vendor sends quotations with prices in response. An RFQ consists of two parts: RFQ header— Contains general information, for example, the name and address of the vendor Items — Contain information about the total quantities and delivery dates for the materials or services specified in the RFQ 227. How Rfqs And Quotations Are Processed In Sap? The RFQs and quotations are processed in the following manner in SAP: 1. RFQ is created either manually or by using an already existing RFQ, requisition, or outline purchase agreement by the company. 2. Company creates the list of vendors who are to receive the RFQ. For this purpose, a separate document is created for each vendor. 3. Company enters the prices and conditions set out in the quotation submitted by the vendor into the RFQ document. 4. Company carries out a comparative appraisal of all of the vendor quotations by means of the price comparison list. The quotations given by each vendor are compared item by item. The mean value quotation represents the average value of the individual quotes. 5. Company enters the most favorable quotation in an info record and sends rejection letters to the other unsuccessful bidders. 6. Finally, company monitors the status of follow-on activities related to the RFQ and quotation (e.g. a contract is set up or a purchase order issued). 228. What Are The Ways A Rfq Can Be Created? RFQs can be created in either of the following ways: Using manual approach — Data for an RFQ is entered manually for the materials for which you wish prices to be quoted. Using copying approach — An RFQ is copied from an existing RFQ. Using referencing approach — An RFQ is created by using reference requisitions or an outline purchase agreement. Using automatic approach — An RFQ is created automatically by using a requisition. 229. What Are The Rfq Types? The RFQ type is a two-character field used in the configuration of RFQ document types. It helps the company to differentiate between the different types of RFQs that they can send out. 230. List The Important Key Fields For Rfq? Different important key fields for RFQ are as follows: RFQ Date Quotation Deadline RFQ Document Number Organizational Data Default data for Items Collective Number Validity Start/Validity End Application By Binding Period Reference Data or RFQ Item detail RFQ Delivery Schedule Additional Data Vendor Selection 231. What Is Rfq Delivery Schedule? RFQ delivery schedule refers to the information entered by the purchaser that comprises date, time, and amount required on that date. You can access the delivery scheduling screen by pressing the SHIFT+F5 key combination from the keyboard in the SAP interface. 232. How Will You Release A Rfq? Follow this navigation path to release a RFQ: SAP Menu -> Logistics -> Materials Management->Purchasing->RFQ/Quotation->ME45-Release. A screen appears; enter all the information in the screen and the RFQ is released based on the information entered. 233. How Can The List Of Vendors Be Found To Send A Request For Quotation (rfq)? You can use the information record to find the list of the materials to find out the vendors from whom the goods have been purchased in the past. Thereafter, the request for purchase requisition is issued. Alternatively, you can go for a source list. 234. What Is The Purchasing Document Category For Rfq? The Purchasing Document Category for RFQ is the single character A, and for other documents such as for Purchase Orders, the category is F, for Contracts it is K, and for Scheduling Agreements it is L. 235. What Is The Role Of The Confirmation Control Key? The confirmation control key is used to specify whether or not a notification for shipping is expected PO item. 236. What Is Purchasing Document? A purchasing document is a document type used by the purchasing department to procure materials or services. 237. Name Some Of The Data Points Provided By Purchasing For The Materials. Some of the data points provided by purchasing for the materials are Base unit of measure, purchasing group, remainder days, shipping instructions, tolerance levels, GR processing time, critical part, and JIT schedule indications. 238. How Does The Sap System Differentiate Between Purchasing Documents? Document type is the unit to differentiate between different kinds of purchasing documents in the SAP system. Each document consists of a unique number, which determines the significant number range and the fields that are offered to you for data maintenance purposes. 239. How Are Purchasing Documents Numbered? In the SAP system, each document is assigned a unique number. These numbers can be alphanumeric also. You can assign these numbers in two ways, either internally or externally, depending on the policy of your company or enterprise. An internal number depicts that the SAP system assigns the number automatically, whereas an external number depicts that the person creating the document must supply manually. Alphanumeric assignment of numbers is only possible in the latter case. 240. Can A Line Item In A Purchase Order Be Blocked After It Has Been Created? Yes, a line item in a purchase order can be blocked after it has been created. Blocking a line item stops acceptance of any goods receipts related to that line item. 241. What Are The Account Assignment Categories In A Purchase Order? SAP provides you with a number of account assignment categories that you can use for a purchase order. An account assignment category indicates the account assignment details that are required 242. Can Multiple Accounts Be Assigned To A Purchase Order Line? Yes, you are allowed to assign multiple accounts to one purchase order line. Multiple account assignments may be required in a situation where the cost of the item to be purchased is divided among multiple people. 243. What Are The Different Types Of An Item Category? An Item Category is a field in purchase requisition that specifies the category of purchase requisition. The following are the different types of Item Categories: Blank-Standard K-Consignment L-Subcontracting S-Third party D-Service U-Stock Transfer 244. What Is Service Procurement? Service procurement consists of activities, such as bidding, contract management and operational procurement processes from requisition to payment. 245. What Is The Difference Between Procurement For Stock And Procurement For Consumption? In procurement for stock, when you order a material, the system does not require an account assignment because the posting to the appropriate stock and consumption occurs automatically every time the transaction related to goods takes place. In procurement for consumption, you need to enter the account assignment (such as cost center) that specifies the purpose of consumption. On the receipt of goods, the material or service is shown as it has been consumed. 246. What Is The Difference Between External Procurement And Internal Procurement? In the external procurement, the procurement of raw material, trading goods, and services is made from the external supplier for the organizational units of an enterprise that need such items or services. In the internal procurement, the procurement of raw material, trading goods, and services is made from an organizational unit of an enterprise for other organizational units of the same enterprise that needs such items or services. 247. What Is A Document Type? A document type is used to differentiate between different kinds of purchasing documents. In other words, different purchasing documents are distinguished on the basis of their document types. Document types are defined for RFQs, purchase orders, and contracts. 248. What Are The Ways Of Converting Planned Orders Into Purchase Requisitions? You can convert the Planned Orders into Purchase Requisitions either by converting them individually or by collectively converting all the planned orders. 249. What Transaction Code Is Used To Convert Planned Orders (po) Into Requisitions In Material Requirement Planning (mrp)? The OPPR transaction code is used to convert Planned Orders (PO) into requisitions in Material Requirement Planning (MRP). 250. Can You Add Custom Fields To Purchase Order(s) And Request For Quotation (s)? Yes, you can add custom fields to a Purchase Order and Request for Quotation. 251. How Is Framework Order Different From Standard Po? Framework Order (FO) is a purchasing document used for procuring materials or services. This type of purchase order has an extended validity period instead of a stipulated delivery date as in case of the Standard Purchase Order (PO). 252. What Document Type Can Be Used In Case Of Service Procurement? The service procurement is used by the organizations to procure the services or part of the services. It consists of activities, such as bidding, contract management, and all the activities from requisition to payment. 253. What Do You Mean By Using Multiple Account Assignment In A Po? Using multiple account assignment in a PO allows you to apportion the cost associated with a PO item. When you use the multiple account assignment, the account assignment data takes the form of individual account assignment items. 254. How Is The Sto Different From The Standard Po? In STO, UB document type is used and it also requires a supplying plant for the movement of materials, whereas in the standard PO, NB document type is used and requires a vendor for the procurement of material. 255. How Can We Return A Material That We Have Received With Reference To A Po? In case of external vendor, when your company returns a good, received with reference to a purchase order, the reference of the PO is not mandatory to post the return in the system. The system just posts a goods receipt correction and issues to a credit memo against the vendor. However, if the vendor is internal, you may require the reference of the PO. In this case, the system automatically updates the stock, without any internal billing. 256. How Are Free Items Managed In A Po? Mark the item as FREE in the Purchase order. The price for such PO items will be zero. 257. Which Documents Are Used As References When We Create Po? At the time of creating PO, we take the reference of Purchase Requisition, Request for Quotation, and any other Purchase orders. However, it is not necessary to take the reference of these documents as most of the values are automatically taken by the SAP R/3 system. 258. What Is The Transaction Code To Set Price Control For Receipts (goods/invoice)? The transaction code OMW1 is used to set price control for receipts (goods/invoice). 259. What Is The Difference Between Quantity And Value Contracts? Quantity Contracts— When the total quantity to be ordered is known in advance during the validity period, the quality contract is used. This contract is considered as fulfilled when totaling of release orders of a given quantity has been issued. Value Contracts — When the total value of the release orders does not exceed a definite and predefined value, the Value contract is used. The contract is considered as fulfilled when totaling of release orders of a given value has been issued. 260. What Is A Centrally Agreed Contract? A centrally agreed contract type is created without specifying the name of the plant. The plant specification is provided at the time of creating the contract release order. In centrally agreed contract, different conditions for individual plants can be maintained easily. Moreover, different ordering addresses or goods suppliers in the vendor master record can also be specified in this type of centrally agreed contract. The centrally agreed contract is useful in the enterprises that have a central purchasing department and the materials are required to be bought for different plants. In this case, they create a high-level contract used by the other department-specific purchase organizations within the enterprise. The use of such centrally agreed contracts usually results in more favorable conditions of purchase and helps maintain consistency in process of purchasing throughout the enterprise. 261. List The Important Fields Of A Service Master Record? The important fields of a Service Master Record are as follows: Service number— Defined for external or internal numbering of the service Service Category— Distinguishes between the types of services Descriptive text— Contains a short or long description of the service Base unit of measurement— Contains the unit in which you can measure the service Material/Service group— Allows the service to be selected for grouping purpose Valuation class— Finds the general ledger accounts that are related with the service 262. What Is A Standard Service Catalog (ssc)? A Standard Service Catalog (SSC) is a general standardized catalog that contains the detailed explanation of services. The descriptions of these services are stored as master records and help to remove data duplication. 263. How Can Services Be Purchased? The services can be purchased by first creating a document in system which forms the base of the purchasing process. This document can be a purchase requisition, an RFQ, or a purchase order. Now, determine the possible sources that can provide the service. For this, you can either select a new service or a service that has been previously used. If the service is requested for the first time, a bid invitation process is started. In the bid invitation process, you first need to create an RFQ and then record the incoming quotations in it. The best quotation is determined based upon certain factors, such as price, warranty period. The order is then placed to the successful bidder who receives either a standard purchase order or a release order issued against an existing contract. 264. What Is A Service Entry Sheet? A service entry sheet is a transaction in which the data related to the service that has been ordered is recorded using a purchase order. You can use the ML81N transaction code to locate the service entry sheet. You can also locate the service entry sheet by using the following path: SAP menu->Logistics->Materials Management -> Service Entry Sheets Maintain. 265. What Is A Blanket Purchase Order? How Can It Be Created? A purchase order that has a validity period and contains a simple process of procuring materials or services is referred as a blanket purchase order. For creating a blanket purchase order, use the ME21 or ME21N transaction code. 266. In What Cases Item Category M (material Unknown) And Item Category W (material Group) Can Be Used In Contract? The Item category M is used when the material issued is unknown. The item category W is used when the value and quantity of material are unknown. 267. How Can We Create An Sa In Sap? You can create a Scheduling Agreement (SA) in SAP either manually or by using the referencing techniques. To create a SA manually, you have to enter all the information on scheduling agreement manually. You can even use reference documents from where you will copy the information related to the scheduling agreement. These reference documents can be Purchase requisitions, Request for Quotations, and Centrally agreed Contract. 268. What Are Schedule Lines? Schedule Lines — The Schedule lines are generally created adjacent to the schedule agreements. For example, you have a material that is procured through a subcontract and you are required to ensure the delivery of this material on specific days. For this, you can create a schedule line for the schedule agreement of that material. In the source list of the schedule line, you have to provide information regarding the vendor and schedule agreement along with the validity dates of delivery and also specify the agreement, which is relevant for MRP. 269. What Is Tax Code? The tax code defines how the tax will be calculated and posted in SAP R/3 System. Each item on which the tax is applicable is allocated to a tax code. The R/3 System reads this tax code for each item and calculates tax for it. This tax and tax code is a part of Purchase order. 270. What Is Material Requirement Planning (mrp) In Sap? Material requirement planning guarantees the procurement and production of the required quantities of materials on time. The MRP helps a company to determine which materials are to be produced and in what quantity they are to be produced. 271. List The Types Of Mrp? The three types of MRP are as follows: Reorder-point planning — In this type of MRP, the procurement starts when the existing stock and the receipts fall below the reorder point. Forecast-based planning — In this type of MRP, the forecast values and the future requirements of the material is decided by the forecasting program. Time-based planning— In this type of MRP, the date of the planned requirement should match with a known date, such as the date when the vendor delivers. If the vendor delivers the material on the same date, then you can start the planning procedure from that date itself. 272. What Is A Mrp List? The MRP list is a static list which is the initial working document for the MRP controller to start working from and contains the planning result information for a material. You can access the MRP list for an individual item by using the MD05 transaction code. You can also access the MRP list by using the following navigation path: SAP menu->Logistics-> Materials Management->MRP->Evaluations->MRP List - Material. 273. What Is The Difference Between Material Requirement Planning (mrp) And Consumption- Based Planning? MRP and Consumption-based planning are two types of SAP planning used to determine a product's requirements. When you plan materials by using MRP, you need to plan the materials requirement based on Sales and Operations Planning (SOP). When you follow the consumption-based planning approach to plan the materials, you need to plan the future demand of the product. This can be done by using the historical demand of materials. 274. What Important Values Are Used To Define The Reorder Point? The following important values are used to define the reorder point: Safety stock Replenishment lead time Average consumption 275. What Is A Procurement Proposal? What Are The Types Of Procurement Proposal? Procurement proposals are created by the system and are based on the settings defined by the purchasing department. They help in ascertaining the required materials. The different types of procurement proposals are: Purchase requisitions: Required for a material that is procured externally. Schedule lines: Required when a material is procured externally and the material has an identifiable source and scheduling agreement. Planned orders: Required for materials that are procured internally. 276. How Is The Automatic Purchase Order Generated After Creation Of Pr By Using A Particular Material? You need to maintain the source list and select the source list indicator record. In case of more than one source code list, one of them is fixed. You then need to run the MRP. As a result, a purchase requisition is generated with the pre-assigned list of the supply source. Lastly, the ME59 T-code is entered for automatic creation of purchase order from the purchase requisition. 277. What Is Forecasting In Sap System? Forecasting is a future prediction which is an uncertain process. Most business decisions are based on forecasts, such as decision of material requirements. While making business decisions, forecasts are continuously needed. The impact of the forecast on actual results is first evaluated and the initial forecasts are updated and then accordingly the decisions are modified. 278. Can Forecast Model Be Selected Automatically? The forecast model can be selected automatically by entering the value J in the Forecast Model field in the Material Master record where the value J is used for Automatic Model Selection. 279. What Do You Mean By Forecast-based Planning? Forecast-based planning is a process used in consumption-based planning which depends on predictions of future requirements calculated on the basis of forecast. 280. What Are The Different Types Of Forecast Model? The following are the different types of forecast model: Constant Trend Seasonal Seasonal trend 281. Define Time-phased Planning. Time-phased planning is an MRP procedure, where materials are planned to be delivered in a particular time interval. In the time-phased planning technique, there is a planning file that contains an MRP date to plan the delivery of materials. When the material master is created and is reset for each running plan, then MRP date is set. If you need to plan the delivery of a material earlier than the specified MRP date, you can enter an MRP date while running the plan. For example, if the running plan is set to Wednesday, you can get it forwarded to Monday. 282. Define The Planning Process Flow. The planning process flow describes the business process and the technical system process that are involved in CBP. The system accomplishes the following partial processes in the planning run: 1. The system first checks the planning file entries and also checks whether or not the material is changed in the planning run. 2. The system accomplishes a net requirement calculation for every material. It checks whether, or not the requirement quantity is covered by available warehouse stock. 3. After carrying out a net requirement calculation for every material, the system then carries out the log-sizing calculation. 4. The scheduling is done for the start and finish dates of the procurement proposals. 5. The system determines the type of procurement proposals and creates planned orders, purchase requisitions, or schedule lines for the materials. 6. The system creates exception messages and accomplishes a rescheduling check to recognize critical situations of the planner that has to be processed manually in the planning results. 7. The system also computes the actual days supply and the receipt days supply of the materials. 283. What Is The Condition To Create The Planned Orders? The condition to create planned orders is that the system creates an internal procurement proposal and then planned orders are created. In the case of vendor procurement, a planned order is created by the MRP Controller. 284. What Is The Transaction Code To Convert Planned Order Into Purchase Requisition (pr)? MD14 is the transaction code to convert planned order into PR. 285. What Is Total Planning? The planning of all materials that are related to requirement planning is known as total planning . It includes the Bill of Material (BOM) explosion for the materials. The total planning can be used for a single plant. It can also be used to control the total planning run for multiplant. Total planning can be used in the following areas: Several plant areas One MRP area Several MRP areas A combination of plants and MRP areas 286. Define Planning Time Fence. The fence, which protects the master plan from automatic changes in the master plan items, is called the Planning Time Fence. The system does not create or update the order proposals for the planning time fence during the planning run. It dynamically calculates the end date of the planning time fence beginning from the planning date. The planning time fence is used for materials planned in MRP, master schedule items in master production scheduling, and materials in long-term planning. 287. Give An Overview Of Inventory Management In Sap System? Inventory management in SAP system helps in recording and tracking of stocks of materials. It also involves planning and documentation of all goods movements. 288. What Tasks Are Covered Under Inventory Management? The inventory management is an important part of the material management. The optimal inventory management not only ensures the uninterrupted supply of the material at the required time, but also prevents wastage of the items. The material management covers the following tasks: Material stock management Planning, entry and documentation of goods transfers from/to the inventory Physical stocking of items 289. What Is Physical Inventory? Physical inventory is a process in which all the transactions related to the movement of goods are stopped and the company physically counts inventory. It is required in financial accounting rules or for regulating taxes by placing an accurate value on the inventory. 290. What Are The Initial Configuration Steps For Physical Inventory? The steps for the purchase acquisition are as follows: Defining the default values for physical inventory document Reporting batch inputs Recording tolerances for physical inventory differences Inventory sampling as well as configuration of cycle counting 291. With Which Modules In Sap Is The Inventory Management Integrated? The inventory management is an important constituent in the SAP MM module. The business activity of an organization revolves around the inventory of materials that serves as the input for the manufacturing process or the inventory of prepared goods for delivery or selling. The material is purchased from the concerned vendors on the basis of request from the Material Requirement Planning (MRP) module. The delivered items are recorded in the inventory management as the goods receipt. The material are then stored either for delivery to the customer or for manufacturing processes. Inventory management is integrated with other modules, such as FI, SD, PP, PS and QM. 292. How Is The Inventory Management Integrated With Mm? The inventory management is directly linked with the material management module because any movement of goods to/from the inventory comes under the MM module. The material requirement planning, purchasing, and invoice verification are some of the MM components that are also linked with inventory management. After the ordering of the material it is posted as a goods receipt with reference to the purchase order. The actual data of the quantities are checked in the vendor's invoice. 293. What Are The Initial Configuration Steps For Inventory Management? The steps for the inventory management are as follows: Defining plant parameters Defining system message attributes Defining Number Assignment Defining good issue, transfer posting, screen layout Maintaining copy rules for reference documents Setting up dynamic availability checks Confirmation of the negative items 294. What Is Goods Movement? What Type Of Documents Is Created After Goods Movement? Goods movement refers to the movement of stock. This movement of stock could be either inbound from the vendor, outbound to a customer, between different plants, or even between different stocks within a plant. After goods movement, the SAP system creates two types of documents: material document and accounting document. 295. Why Is Goods Receipt Important To A Company? Goods receipt indicates a receipt or inward movement of stock of materials or goods. When an external vendor provides stock to the company, the goods receipt is generated as a purchase order and when the material is produced in-house, the goods receipt is generated as a production order. A goods receipt is important to a company as using a goods receipt moves material into stock, updates the stock levels, and thereby indirectly enables the production process. 296. How Do You Post The Goods If The Po Number Is Not Known? If the PO number is not known, you must enter the search criteria for the PO in the initial screen. As a result, the list of purchase orders is displayed. The desired PO items can then be copied. 297. How Can A Goods Receipt Be Posted When Purchase Order Number Is Unknown? If the goods receipt does not have a purchase order, some companies do not accept the goods receipt and refuses to accept the delivery. On the other hand, other companies accept the delivery of materials and keep the materials into the quality or blocked stock till the situation is resolved. For obtaining the goods receipt without a purchase order number, the companies use the MIGO transaction. After entering the required details of the material, the goods receipt is posted and the material becomes a part of the plant stock. 298. How Do We Receive Goods From Production? The goods from the production can be posted either to the warehouse or consumption. They are posted with the same movement type. 299. How Can The Logical Value For The Stock Items Be Found? You need to use the MC49 transaction code to find the logical value of the stock items by date. 300. What Are The Ways Of Receiving Goods? The goods can be received as per the reference to inbound delivery. The following are the different ways of receiving the goods: Order Others Outbound Delivery Purchase Order Reservation Transport Transport ID code 301. What Is Movement Type? While implementing the goods movement in an organization, the movement type is required to be entered. It is a three-digit identification key that is entered as per the movement type. The following are the common movement types that are used in SAP: 102: Goods that are receipt against a purchase order 201: Goods that are issued 321: Goods released from quality inspection stock 302. What Does A Movement Type Control? The movement acts as a controlling factor in inventory management. It handles the following activities: Updating of quantity Updating of consumption and stock Displaying of particular fields in a document 303. List The Movement Types For Unplanned Goods Received? The following are the movement types used for unplanned goods received: 501 561 531 304. How Will An Item Be Returned To A Vendor? While posting the goods to the goods receipt in the purchase order, you need to enter the items that can be returned to the vendor. There is no need to explicitly reference the purchase order. 305. What Is Goods Issue Reversal? The process of issuing the material back to the stock of material is known as a goods issue reversal. For example, if goods issued to the production order are 500 kg of material and only 300 kg is consumed, then the rest 200 kg is returned to stock. 306. Name The Documents That Are Created When A Goods Issue Is Posted? The following documents are created when a goods issue is posted: Material document Accounting document Goods issue slip Stock changes General ledger account changes 307. What Are The Different Ways Of Stock Transfer? A stock transfer can be made physically or logically. In other words, when you move material from one storage location to another it is said that the stock transfer is done physically. Whereas when you move stock from the quality inspection status to the unrestricted status, it is said that the stock transfer is done logically. The different ways of stock transfer are as follows: From storage location to storage location From plant to plant From company code to company code 308. What Is Transfer Posting? The physical and logical stock transfers are collectively called the transfer posting. The stock transfers typically change the stock type, batch number, or material number. The transfer posting is related to the documentation of the stock changes resulting from a stock transfer. 309. How Is Stock Transfer From One Storage Location To Another Done? The stock transfer from one place of location to another place of location is carried out in a plant. The posting of this kind of transfer is done without entering the value of the stock material as the management of the items is done within the same plant. 310. How Is Stock Transfer From One Plant To Another Plant Done? The transfer of the stock from one plant to another is a bigger activity as compared to transfers done under the same plant. The material planning as well as accounting details is affected in case of the transfer of goods within a plant. In case of plant to plant transfer, the accounting data of the two stocks is affected if they are assigned to different valuations. In other words, if there are any changes in the value of the stock items from the source plant to the destination plant, the accounting entries need to be adjusted accordingly. In this case, the stock value and G/L accounts need to be updated. The materials planning are also affected, because the stock transfer is scheduled and implemented according to the guidelines in materials planning. The plant to plant stock transfer is done by one-step or the two-step procedure but only the one-step procedure can be planned with a reservation. 311. How Is The Stock Transferred From Company Code To Company Code? The stock transfer between different company codes is done in a way similar to that of inter-plant transfer, but differs in the company code. During the stock transfer process, two accounting statements are created, one for removal of stock from the source company and the other for receiving in the destination company. 312. What Is A Stock Posting? Stock posting is defined as a transaction, which occurs when you update an item quantity in the system, for example, updating the database after goods issue or goods receipt. 313. What Do You Mean By Physical Inventory? Physical inventory is the recording of actual stock levels (quantities) of materials by counting, weighing, or measuring at a given storage location at a specific time. 314. How Is The Value Of The Cross-company-code Stock Displayed? You need to perform the following steps to display the value of the cross-company-code stock in transit: Select Environment-> Stock-> Stock in transit. 315. What Is Returnable Transport Packaging (rtp)? Returnable transport packaging is a medium used to transport goods between vendors and customers. Once the goods are received, the returnable packaging is returned to the vendor. The best example is the crate for cold drinks; it needs to be returned back after receiving the cold drinks. 316. What Is Sales Order Stock? The stocks assigned to a sales order but still available in the company premises is called the sales order stock. The raw material ordered by the customer for processing a specific order and finished goods are the type of materials that come under the category of sales order stock. 317. What Is Project Stock? The stock available in the company premises to execute a project is called the project stock. It is allotted to a work breakdown structure element and is specific to the project only. All accounting treatment in MM is done for the specific project head. 318. What Is Invoice Verification? Invoice verification is used to store details of vendor invoices and forms an important part of purchasing and inventory management. It consists of entering invoices and credit memos, checking accuracy of invoices in accordance to price, and checking block invoices. 319. What Are The Different Types Of Invoice Verification? The different types of invoice verification are as follows: Invoices based on purchase orders Invoices based on goods receipts Invoices without an order reference 320. Name The T Code For Invoice Verification? An invoice is verified by using the OLMR T code. 321. How Do You Perform Invoice Verification? Invoice verification is a process of checking the accuracy of an invoice in terms of the quantity, price, and other related information. The invoice can be issued for several processes. For example, if an invoice is issued for a purchase order, then the system checks for the relevant information, such as vendor, material, quantity, delivery date, and payments details. 322. Define Ers? ERS stands for Evaluated Receipts Settlement. It refers to the process of settling down receipts of the goods in an automatic manner. In this process, an agreement is made between the vendor and the user that vendors do not prepare any invoice for the goods ordered. Rather, the system would automatically generate and post the invoice document on the basis of purchase order and receipts of goods. In addition, ERS also offers the following advantages: Using ERS, all the purchasing transactions are quickly closed. Errors of communication are avoided. Invoice verification is not prone to price and quantity variances. 323. With Reference To Which Documents Can Invoice Verification Be Done? In SAP, invoice verification is done on the basis of the following: Document date, purchase order number, invoice amount, tax amount, and terms of payment(if required) Purchase order that comprises vendors, terms of payment(if required), currency , and invoice items Purchase order history that comprises quantity and amount R/3 system settings that comprise the rate at which the tax is calculated Vendor master record that comprises bank information 324. What Are The Benefits Of Document Parking? The benefit of document parking is that you can modify the invoice in a parked status whereas the invoice that is placed on hold cannot be modified. 325. How Do You Display The Parked Document? You can display the parked documents by using either FB03 or FBV3. The FB03 transaction code displays all the posted documents; whereas, the FBV3 code shows only the parked documents that have not been posted to the expenditure balance. 326. What Is Stochastic Block? Stochastic Blocking is the process of checking the incoming invoices. In this process, blocking of the invoices is done randomly. Invoices with high value have the highest probability to get blocked. It is set for the whole invoice instead at the item level. When posting of the invoice is done, an R is set in the Payment Block field in the document header data. 327. What Are The Different Accounts Used In Invoicing? Different accounts used in invoicing are as follows: Vendor accounts Stock accounts GR/IR clearing accounts Tax account Price differences account Cash difference clearing account Freight clearing account 328. What Are The Different Types Of Variances In Invoices? Describe Them. The different types of variances in invoices are listed and described as follows: Quantity Variance— If there is a difference between the quantity mentioned in the invoice and the quantity delivered. Price Variance— If there is a difference between the price mentioned in the invoice and in the purchase order. Quantity and Price Variance—If there are differences in both the quantity and price. Order Price Quantity Variance — If there is a difference between the price per ordered quantity, such as $50 per piece is mentioned on the purchase order but the invoice contains $60 per piece. 329. Why Does The Invoices Get Blocked? Invoices can be blocked due to the following reasons: Variance in the invoice item Amount of an invoice item Stochastic block Manual block 330. What Happens When An Invoice Is Blocked? What Are The Different Ways To Block An Invoice? When an invoice is blocked, the invoice amount cannot be paid to the vendor. Blocking an invoice also blocks the individual items. The different ways to block an invoice are listed as follows: Manual Block Stochastic or Random Block Block due to Amount of an Invoice Item Block due to Variance of an Invoice Item 331. How Can We Post An Invoice Directly Without Any Reference? In case of invoices posting without a reference, proposed values for the invoice items are not displayed by the system, because the system does not determine any purchase order items and posted goods receipt for the invoice. As a consequence, information related to the accounts changed by the offsetting entry for the vendor line item,is not found in the database of the system. 332. What Is The Menu Path To Create A Document/e-mail Notification For Your Supplier? The following is the menu path to create a document/e-mail notification for your supplier: Select Material Management-> Logistics Invoice Verification -> Message Determination. 333. What Is The Difference Between Gr-based Iv And Po-based Iv? GR-based IV means Goods Receipt based Invoice Verification. In this process, each receipt of the individual goods is invoiced separately. On the other hand, PO-based IV means Purchase Orders based Invoice Verification. In this process, all the items that are in the purchase order list are arranged and are placed together. It is not taken into consideration whether the item is received in a single delivery or multiple deliveries. After all the items are collected, these items are then posted in the form of one single item. 334. How Do You Create The Vendor Account Group? Perform the following steps to create the vendor account group in SAP: Select Display IMG->Financial Accounting->Account Payable/Receivable->Vendor Accounts-> Master Records-> Preparation of Creating Vendor Master Records->Define Accounts Groups with Screen Layout /Define Screen Layout Per Activity. 335. What Is The Purpose Of Material Valuation? Material valuation in SAP MM module is necessary to determine the stock value of materials. 336. How To Determine Stock Value? The stock value of the materials is calculated using the following formula: Stock value = Stock quantity * Material price. 337. How Material Valuation Is Associated With Financial Accounting? Material valuation in MM module is associated with Financial Accounting as any change in the stock value also updates the G/L account in Financial Accounting. 338. What Are The Factors Controlling Material Valuation? The factors that control material valuation are: System settings Material master record 339. What Is Valuation Area? Valuation area is the organizational level at which the material valuation is carried out. 340. Define Valuation Class? Valuation class is a group of different materials that share some common properties. This group is defined so that you do not have to manage a separate account for each material. 341. What Is The Significance Of Account Assignment Category? Account assignment category determines the account assignment details that are required for the purchase order item, such as cost center or account number. It is useful in SAP MM as it helps in determining the following: The type of account assignment The accounts that will be charged when you post the invoice or goods receipt The account assignment data that you should provide 342. What Are The Different Types Of Account Assignment Categories? The different types of account assignment categories are: Single account assignment: Specifies one account assignment for an item in the purchase order Multiple account assignment: Allocates the costs associated with the purchase order item 343. What Is Lifo Valuation? LIFO is a balance sheet valuation technique. It stands for last in-first out principle, i.e. the material added to the stock in last is valuated first. In this technique, the pricing of old material in stock is not affected by the pricing of new material. In this technique, a layer of stock increased or decreased is created for a fiscal year, on the basis of which the valuation is done. For example, if the stock is increased then a layer is created for that stock. However, to use the LIFO, you have to configure it. 344. What Is The Release Procedure? The release procedure allows you to create condition records for the planning process. It is used to creating Purchase Requisitions (PR), Purchase Orders (PO), Request for Quotation (RFQ), Outline Agreements, and Service Entry Sheets. 345. What Is Release Strategy? How Many Release Points Can Be Involved In A Release Process? The release strategy specifies the release codes with which a purchase document must be released and the sequence in which the release must be used. You can define a maximum of eight release codes with their respective release strategies. You can involve 8 release points in a release process. 346. Can You Release The Po Item By Item When You Have A Multiline-item Po? No, you cannot release the PO item by item. PO can be released at the header level by using the with classification release procedure. 347. How Are The Release Procedures For Pr And Po Defined? The transaction codes ME54 and ME29N are used to define the release procedures for PR and PO, respectively. 348. How To Release Blocked Purchase Documents? You can release a blocked purchase document by using your release code. This process is called the release transaction. After you have released the document, you can also cancel the document using the same release code. 349. How To Reject Approvals In Sap-r/3? Will It Affect The Sap Business Workflow? You can use the ME54N transaction code or purchase requisitions and ME29N transaction code for purchase order to reject approvals in SAP R/3. This does not affect the SAP business workflow. 350. How Many Procedures Are Available To Release Purchase Requisition? There are two types of procedures available to release purchase requisition: With classification: In this procedure, you can release the purchase requisition both at item level and in total. Without classification: In this procedure, you can release the purchase requisition only at item level. 351. How To Release Purchase Order? Which Transaction Code Is Used To Display As Well As Reset The Release Of Po? You can release a purchase order at header level. You cannot release a single item in purchase order. You need to release all the items at a time. The ME29N transaction code is used to display as well as reset the release of purchase order. 352. How Many Types Of Release Procedure Are Available For Po? There are two types of release procedures available for PO: Individual release: In this type of release procedure, you can release only one item at a time. Collective release: In this type of release procedure, you can release all the items at a time but using the release code. 353. What Is A Release Criterion? The release criterion defines the strategy with which a purchase requisition or an external purchase document is released. The release criteria contains the characteristics and the values of the characteristics which determine the status of the document, that is, either blocked or not blocked (a characteristic can be the total value of the document, say greater than $100,000). The criterion can be based on any one of the following or a combination of these: i. Account assignment category ii. Material group iii. Plant iv. Total value 354. What Is Release Code? The release code is a two-character field or ID that represents the person responsible for the approval of the release procedure. 355. What Do You Mean By Release Group? Release group is a two-digit code that is assigned with a class and contains one or more release strategies. For example, release group 01 is defined for purchase requisitions and release group 02 is defined for purchase order. SAP MM Questions and Answers Pdf Download Read the full article

[devsinghus-blog]

The Materials Management (MM) module is the business process area that handles daily activities of a business such as Procurement, Inventory Management, Materials Requirement Planning, Master data (Material and Vendor), Material Valuation, Vendor Evaluation, Invoice Verification and so on. Most business that operate in the manufacturing sector find this SAP module very useful as it helps in optimizing business processes. Cranesoft is providing you SAP course in Bangalore in Affordable price. Here we are offering all SAP Modules, like SAP MM, SAP PP, SAP HR, FICO and Success Factors are in great demand. We are providing 100% placements to the candidates who are undergoing SAP Course in Bangalore at Cranesoft. We are also willing to provide unlimited lab facility for the all candidates.

[iqonlinetraining]

SAP MM Interview Questions and Answers

1. What do you know about SAP MM?

SAP MM is the functional module of SAP. It looks after the management of the material and obtains handling. To complete the procurement to pay process this module consists mainly of master data, a configuration of system and transactions.

2.  What are the benefits or uses of material management?

Material valuation

Multi-location inventory

Bin management

The lot and serial traceability

Product life cycle management

Inventory replenishment

Scheduling and resourcing

3. What are the features of material management?

Purchasing

Production and material control

Non-production stores

Transportation

Material handling

Receiving

 Looking to Start Your Career in SAP MM? Here you go Enroll for SAP MM Training

 4. List out the essential components of material management.

Determine requirements

Source determination

Vendor Selection

Order Processing

Order follow up

Goods receipts and Inventory management

Invoice Verification

5. What is material requirement planning (MRP)?

It is a module in SAP enterprise resource planning. It is a type of planning tool to help production and procurement planners to create feasible and realistic plans which help to quickly initiate procurement and production process.

6. What is consumption-based planning (CBP)?

CBP is based on past consumption values which make use of the forecast or other statistical procedures to determine future requirements. Consumption-based planning (CBP) always triggers when the stock level plunge below the predefined reorder point or forecast requirements calculated using past consumption values.

7. What is the difference between MRP and CBP?

In material requirement planning, the prediction of material requirement is based on sales and operations planning while in, consumption-based planning the prediction of material requirement is made, based on historical demand for materials.

8. What is the Master production schedule (MSP)?

It is a plan for individual commodities to be produced in each period such as staffing, production, etc. It is mostly linked with manufacturing in which the plan denotes when and how much of each product will be demanded.

9. What is the planned order in material management?

In Material Management, planned order is sent to an industry and is a material requirement planning request for the procurement of a particular material at a determined time. It certainly specifies when the internal material movement needs to be made and the amount of material that is demanded.

10. What is production order and purchase order?

A production order defines which components and sequence of operations are to be used and how the order costs are to be resolved. It also determines which material is to be prepared, at which location, and at what time and how much quantity is required.

Formal requests or guidance from a purchasing firm to a vendor or factory to supply a certain quantity of goods (or) services at a certain point of time is called purchase order.

11. What is the process order?

Process Orders (PP-PI-POR) are the central component used for the accurate planning and execution of process manufacturing. A process order constitutes the production of batches (materials) in a production run or the rendering of services.

12. What is meant by transaction code in material management?

A transaction code (or t–code) consists of letters, numbers, or both, and is entered in the command field at the top of any SAP GUI screen. Every function in SAP ERP has an SAP transaction code that is associated with it. By using t-codes you can directly access any function in SAP.

13. What are contracts in material management?

A contract is a long-term agreement with a vendor to supply a material or provide a service for a certain period of time. These are specified consequently in release orders issued against the contract when the customer requires them.

14. Define purchase requisition?

A Primary document that is used as a part of the accounting method to launch a merchandise or supply purchase is called Purchase Requisition. By processing a purchase order, suitable controls can identify the business requirements for the products, as well as monitor the legitimacy of purchase.

15. How do you release and create purchase requisition in SAP material management?

Purchase requisition creation can be done in T-code ME51N and is a straightforward process:

Execute ME51N transaction.

Purchase requisition document type: NB – standard.

Source determination: ON or OFF.

Header note.

Material: material number.

Quantity and UoM.

Storage location: in which the material is stored.

Vendor: It is automatically determined by using source determination – the field number

Tracking number: As covered in previous topics, the desired value can be entered manually

Valuation price: This should be copied from material master data if it is maintained there if not it has to be entered manually (if this field is not set as optional).

We can save transaction data, after entering the desired information in the fields.

16. What is meant by special stock in material management?

Special Stocks are stocks that belong to a company code. These are not placed in any storage location & no physical inventory is performed.

17. Mention the different types of stocks.

a) Valuated Stock

Unrestricted Stock

Quality Inspection Stock

Blocked Stock

b) Non-Valuated Stock

c) Special Stock

Subcontracting

Consignment

Stock Transport Order

Third-Party Processing

Returnable Transport Packaging

Pipeline Handling

18. What is meant by master data?

Basically, Master Data is created centrally and is valid for almost all the applications. It remains constant over time but it is required to update it on a regular basis. For example, the Vendor is like a type of master data and he is used for creating purchase orders.

19. What is master data management?

A comprehensive method of enabling an enterprise to link all of its critical data to a common point of reference is called Master data Management. MDM also improves data quality, while streamlining data sharing across personnel and departments. In addition, it also can facilitate computing in multiple system architectures, platforms, and applications.

20. What is inventory management?

Inventory management is based on several key processes like Definition of movement types, reservations, goods issue, and goods receipt. Inventory management is used to manage a good inventory.

21. What are quotations in SAP material management?

Quotations in SAP MM are certain requests for vendors which give us information about their terms and conditions, best prices, schedules of deliveries and other information.

22. What is invoice processing?

The process in which a company’s account payable is used to manage supplier invoices is called Invoice Processing. It begins when you accept an invoice and ends when payment has been made and reported in the general ledger.

23. How is the quota rating checked?

The formula for checking the quota rating is an addition of the base quantity of the quota and the allocated quantity quota and divides it by the overall quota.

24. Mention the last stage in the cycle of procurement?

The last stage of the procurement cycle is the verification of the invoice. This also updates the documents which are related to the accounts and finances. There is a difference between the real invoice and the blocked one the real invoice can be handled by verification of the invoice.

25. What are the different types of ERPs?

Different types of ERPs are as follows: SAP, Microsoft Dynamics, PeopleSoft, Oracles, Siebel, BAAN. These are some of the different types of Enterprise Resource Planning.

For More Info. visit our website: https://www.iqonlinetraining.com call:+917672046498(IND) +19043042519(USA)

[jobisitejobs]

SQL Training – JanBask Training with JanBask

The position listed below is not with New York Interviews but with JanBaskNew York Interviews is a private organization that works in collaboration with government agencies to promote emerging careers. Our goal is to connect you with supportive resources to supplement your skills in order to attain your dream career. New York Interviews has also partnered with industry leading consultants & training providers that can assist during your career transition. We look forward to helping you reach your career goals! If you any questions please visit our contact page to connect with us directlyBA,QA,SQL,Salesforce,Java,SAP,iOS,VMware,Oracle,Dot Net, WebSphere,Weblogic IT Courses - Real Time IT Training We are an IT consulting firm with one objective " To develop and deliver the best quality consultants for our clients and customers. We invite serious candidates to join our venture to garnish their career in IT Industry. CALL or TEXT US 908-###-#### for FREE CONSULTATION CLASS TIMINGS:- Monday to Friday (Either evening or morning timing). Every Saturday Test for the classes covered. Excellent Study Material for a better learning process. Who Can join us => US Citizens, GC or EADs, Students with OPT/CPT, IT Job Oriented Practical IT Training Classes: SQL Server- Developer/DBA & BI (SSIS, SSRS, SSAS) BA - Business Analyst (Business Domains Covered) QA Testing - Manual, Automation, QTP, Selenium Salesforce CRM (Cloud Computing) " Admin + Development + Certification Dot Net (C sharp, Asp .Net, WPF,WCF,Silver light, MVC) SAP - FICO, MM,PP,Basis,ABAP,Security and more. Java " (Core Java, Advanced Java, Spring, Hibernate, Struts) Oracle Apps Oracle DBA Oracle PL/SQL OBIEE SAN Admin IOS - I-phone application Development Android applications Development IBM WebSphere Admin VMWare Admin Drupal Basic & Advanced Training Training Schedule: Online Classes - Mon - Fri. Company Methodology: We help you choose the career which not only suits your skill set and align with your future goals but also join the best technology in the current IT sector. Our designed syllabus delivers in-depth training on a specific role within the business process covering broader scope in that technology. We hire the best trainers in the industry. All our trainers come with industry-specific technology experience, and they maintain proper communication with the student throughout their training, placement, and job assistance. Students are guided and motivated by the IT marketing experts during the entire career shaping process. Mentoring is hands-on as part of real-time project experience => More Practical/Less Theoretical Training Getting the job for the right candidate within the promised period of time. Limited Students are accommodated in every batch. H1 & GC Sponsorship for Students F1 OPT/CPT Qualified students. H1 Transfer Candidates can also contact us. Contact us to know more. Email: ...@janbask.com, ...@gmail.com Phone: 908-###-#### Associated topics: data administrator, data analytic, data architect, data center, data integration, data integrity, data manager, data warehouse, database, hbase  SQLTraining–JanBaskTrainingwithJanBask from Job Portal http://www.jobisite.com/extrJobView.htm?id=90121

[usajobsite]

SQL Training – JanBask Training with JanBask

The position listed below is not with New York Interviews but with JanBaskNew York Interviews is a private organization that works in collaboration with government agencies to promote emerging careers. Our goal is to connect you with supportive resources to supplement your skills in order to attain your dream career. New York Interviews has also partnered with industry leading consultants & training providers that can assist during your career transition. We look forward to helping you reach your career goals! If you any questions please visit our contact page to connect with us directlyBA,QA,SQL,Salesforce,Java,SAP,iOS,VMware,Oracle,Dot Net, WebSphere,Weblogic IT Courses - Real Time IT Training We are an IT consulting firm with one objective " To develop and deliver the best quality consultants for our clients and customers. We invite serious candidates to join our venture to garnish their career in IT Industry. CALL or TEXT US 908-###-#### for FREE CONSULTATION CLASS TIMINGS:- Monday to Friday (Either evening or morning timing). Every Saturday Test for the classes covered. Excellent Study Material for a better learning process. Who Can join us => US Citizens, GC or EADs, Students with OPT/CPT, IT Job Oriented Practical IT Training Classes: SQL Server- Developer/DBA & BI (SSIS, SSRS, SSAS) BA - Business Analyst (Business Domains Covered) QA Testing - Manual, Automation, QTP, Selenium Salesforce CRM (Cloud Computing) " Admin + Development + Certification Dot Net (C sharp, Asp .Net, WPF,WCF,Silver light, MVC) SAP - FICO, MM,PP,Basis,ABAP,Security and more. Java " (Core Java, Advanced Java, Spring, Hibernate, Struts) Oracle Apps Oracle DBA Oracle PL/SQL OBIEE SAN Admin IOS - I-phone application Development Android applications Development IBM WebSphere Admin VMWare Admin Drupal Basic & Advanced Training Training Schedule: Online Classes - Mon - Fri. Company Methodology: We help you choose the career which not only suits your skill set and align with your future goals but also join the best technology in the current IT sector. Our designed syllabus delivers in-depth training on a specific role within the business process covering broader scope in that technology. We hire the best trainers in the industry. All our trainers come with industry-specific technology experience, and they maintain proper communication with the student throughout their training, placement, and job assistance. Students are guided and motivated by the IT marketing experts during the entire career shaping process. Mentoring is hands-on as part of real-time project experience => More Practical/Less Theoretical Training Getting the job for the right candidate within the promised period of time. Limited Students are accommodated in every batch. H1 & GC Sponsorship for Students F1 OPT/CPT Qualified students. H1 Transfer Candidates can also contact us. Contact us to know more. Email: ...@janbask.com, ...@gmail.com Phone: 908-###-#### Associated topics: data administrator, data analytic, data architect, data center, data integration, data integrity, data manager, data warehouse, database, hbase  SQLTraining–JanBaskTrainingwithJanBask from Job Portal http://www.jobisite.com/extrJobView.htm?id=90121

[siva3155]

800+ TOP SAP SD Interview Questions and Answers

SAP SD Interview Questions for freshers experienced :-

1. What Is The Further Subdivision Of A Plant? The further subdivision of a plant are the storage locations, which allows stocks of materials to be broken down according to predefined criteria such as the location and materials planning aspects. It can also be subdivided into locations and operational areas. They are further subdivided into locations takes geographical criteria into account, operational areas reflects responsibilities for production is also a subdivision. 2. In Sd, Mm, Pp, Fi/co Which Are The Highest Organizational Units? The highest organizational units in SD, MM, PP, FI/CO are: SD: Sales Organization. MM: Plant. PP: Plant. FI: Company Code CO: Controlling Area. 3. What Is The Definition Of A Plant According To Sap? According to SAP a plant is a place where either material is produced or goods and services provided. Plant is classified into Business Object. In Organizational unit within Logistics, serving to subdivide an enterprise according to production, procurement, maintenance, and materials plan aspects. Coming to the Structure a plant can assume a variety of roles. As a part of maintenance plant, it includes the maintenance objects that are spatially located within this plant. The maintenance tasks that are to be performed are specified within a maintenance planning plant. As a retail or wholesale site, it makes merchandise available for distribution and sale. The plant is the organizational unit for material valuation, according to a rule. For the placement of materials in storage (stock put-away), a storage location is assigned to a plant. The storage location depends on the storage condition and the stock placement situation. The preferred shipping point for a plant is defined as the default shipping point, which depends on the shipping condition and the loading condition. The business area that is responsible for a valuation area is determined as a function of the division. As a rule, a valuation area corresponds to a plant. 4. Is It Possible Sales Organization Sell From A Plant Belonging To A Different Company Code? It is possible for a sales organization sell from a plant belonging to a different company code 5. For Which The Distribution Channels And Divisions Are Assigned And How Many Shipping Points Can Be Assigned To A Plant, Sales Organization And If There Is A Warehouse Management System Active, Where Is Warehouse Number Is Assigned? The Distribution Channels and Divisions are assigned to Sales Organization. A plant can be assigned with many shipping points, coming to sales organization there will be shipping points that are assigned to that. When a ware house management system is active it would be assigned with a Plant and Storage Location in a ware house number. 6. Is It Possible To Assign Two Different Sales Organizations To The Same Company Code? Yes, it is possible to assign two different sales organizations to the same company code 7. Define To Which Organizational Element Is Central In Shipping? Organizational unit at a fixed location that carries out shipping activities is called Shipping Point. A shipping point could, for instance it can be a company's mail department or a plant's rail depot. Each delivery is processed by only one shipping point. 8. What Would Make The Immediate Delivery In Cash Sales? When immediate delivery in cash sales is made the Order type delivery switch on immediately. 9. Is It Possible To Create Sales Order For 40 Items If The Quotation Is Sent For 30 Items? Yes, it is possible to create sales order for 40 items if the quotation is sent for 30 items. 10. In Case Of Third Party Sales What Would Trigger For The Automatic Creation Of Pr Or Po? It has to be set an item category as “automatic PO” so that PO and PR will automatically generate after saving the order.

SAP SD Interview Questions 11. Briefly Explain Any Three Organizational Elements Make Up A Sales Area And Their Function? Product groups can be defined for a wide-ranging spectrum of products. For every division you can make customer-specific agreements on, for example, partial deliveries, pricing and terms of payment. Within a division you can carry out statistical analyses or set up separate marketing is known as Division. 12. In Access Sequence What Is The Importance Of Requirement Field? In access sequence, the system will not go to access condition type system will reply through formula. 13. What Is The Relation Between Credit Control Area And Company Codes And Explain The Credit Control Area? More than one credit control areas is not possible to assign to a company code, since a credit control area can include one or more company codes. Credit control area is an organizational unit in an organization that specifies and checks credit limits for customers. 14. What Are The Steps Included For The Sales Person As A Partner Function In The Partner Determination? The steps that are included for the sales person as a partner function in the partner determination, that a partner function sales representative or person responsible for these two we can add through partner function in partner procedure 15. What Is The Central Organization Element In Purchasing And The Relationship Between Sales Organization And Plants, Company Codes, Plants And Company Codes? The Central Organizational element in purchasing is Purchasing Organization and the relationship between sales organizations and plants is Many to Many, to Company codes its Many to One and for Plants and Company codes its Many to Many to One. 16. Which Sub Module Of Sap Could Make Business Areas Obsolete And Can One Business Area Be Assigned To Several Company Codes? And What Is Z Transaction? CO is the sub module of SAP that could make business area obsolete and it is possible that one business area can be assigned to several company codes. Z transaction is a copied standard transaction code or objects that rename it by Z which is basically standard name which will stat from Z as user defined. 17. What Is Business Area And How Is It Used? The costs and revenue according to the business area posted by the system is called as Business Area. It is used in Sales Area if the accounts are to be posted according to sales and Plant Division if the accounts are to be posted according to products. The business area is defined in Customizing for Sales. A unit in an enterprise, grouping product and market combinations as homogeneously as possible for the purpose of developing unified business policy. Business Area according to Financial Accounting (FI) defines that the business area is an organizational unit within financial accounting which represents a separate area of operations or responsibilities within an organization. Financial accounting transactions can be allocated to a specific business area. 18. What Is A Delivery Group? Basic grouping of all individual deliveries for Billing is called Delivery Group. It should have the same Ship to Party, Shipping Point, etc. 19. Briefly Explain The Internal Organizational Elements Within A Sales Organization And Their Function? The Geographical aspects of the organization in business development and sales are defined using the term sales office. A sales office can be considered as a subsidiary. Sales offices are assigned to sales areas. If a sales order is entered for a sales office within a certain sales area, the sales office must be assigned to that area. The staff of a sales office may be subdivided into sales groups. For example, sales groups can be defined for individual divisions. Individual personnel master records are used to manage data about salespersons. A sales person can be assigned to a sales group in the personnel master record. 20. What Is Cumulative Condition Record? Cumulative Condition Record is a field that Condition Update during configuration for a condition type that has anything to do with the cumulative condition records. 21. How Can A Company's Structure Represent By Defining And Assigning Corporate Structure Elements In R/3 System And What Is The Purpose Of Doing That? The Enterprise organization chart shows the organizational structure of an enterprise, its organization units and how they are related. A combined structure can be created from the point of view of accounting, MM, SD. This structure forms a framework in which all business transactions can be processed. 22. What Are The Views In A Material Master? The views in a material master are Basic data, Additional basic data, Accounting views, MRP views, Purchasing views, Storage views, forecasting views, sales views and in IS Retail there is also a Listing view and POS view. 23. What Is A Sales Organization? Sales organization is an organizational unit that sells, distributes products, negotiates terms of sales and is responsible for all the transactions involved with a sale. 24. What Is A Legacy System And What Is Cut Over Strategy? Migrating from the existing system on which currently working to the SAP system is called the legacy system. Cutover strategy that depends upon how the organizations design their data load strategies. Normally, it decide the sequence of Data loads for Configuration settings, Master data, Transaction data which follows whom and then it make a copy of the system as a Production system a day before and after checking the successful data loads, you go-live 100% or partial again depending upon organizational setup and policies. Cutover planning is highly site specific. There's no thumb rule. The stock data as on the date of going live should be correctly entered. But stock being a highly dynamic quantity, the strategy for loading should be crystal clear. Then you have to load all the back dated transaction on the stock. Some stock comes into your plant/storage location as return and some stock is actually delivered to your customer through sales orders of various kinds. 25. What Is The Transaction Code For Creating A Material In Sap And What Is The Transaction Code To Extend A Material? The transaction code for creating a material in SAP is MM41. MM01 is the transaction code to extend a material. 26. In A Material Master What Is The Base Unit? The base unit is a measure which is used as a basis for all the transactions, all movements of quantities will be converted to that base unit of measure which is specific to an article 27. What Happens When A Value Is Not Entered For A Manual And Mandatory Condition Type And Does A Header Condition Type Have An Access Sequence? When a value is not entered for a manual and mandatory condition type the pricing procedure will reject the conditions in the sales order. There would be no header condition type to have an access sequence. 28. What Are The Examples Of Global Settings? The examples of Global Settings are Currencies, Countries etc and this data is application independent 29. What Is A One Time Customer? A general customer that is created for those customers for which it do not want to create separate records is called a one time customer. This customer can be reused. 30. In A Customer Master Record Who Is A Payer? According to customer master record a Payer is the individual or company who will settle the invoices for products or services sold. 31. Who Defines The Account Groups And Give Some Tables In Sap Sd For Customer Master? Normally account groups are defined by the finance team and some of the tables in SAP SD for customer master are KNVV, RF02D, KNA1 etc. 32. What Is The Procedure To Know Whether The Customer Is One-time Or Regular? The procedure to know the customer is one-time or regular since one can maintain Account Group for One-time customers 33. Is It Possible To Have Specific Customer Material Information Entered In Sap? Yes, it is possible to have specific customer material information entered in SAP since VD51 is the transaction or inside VA02 also you can add customer material information records. 34. Give The Transaction Code For Creating A Customer In Sap Sd? The transaction codes for creating a customer in SAP SD are VD01, VA01 and XD01 35. What Are Inter-company Customers? This customer represents the sales customers within the same client but between different company codes. 36. What Happens When The Exclusive Field Was Ticked In The Access Sequence? When the exclusive field of all access sequences is ticked, it will try to get available data from the first. Only in case, data is not available, will it move on to the next one. 37. In Sap Sd What Is A Sales Office? According to SAP SD, a sales office is a geographically located unit of a sales organization. 38. What Is The Purpose Of Partner Determination? Partner determination is used to find out who is responsible for A/R process and where the products are going. 39. Describe The Components Of Sap Sd Module? Master data Basic functions Sales(foreign sales and sales support) Shipping and transportation Billing Sales support Information systems are the important components of SAP’s SD module 40. Explain The Concept Of Sales Organization? The topmost organizational unit in SD module is called the sales organization. All the transactions relating to selling and distribution of products or services are represented by the sales organization unit. One sales organization can be associated with more than one distribution channel. It is represented by a 4 character code in SAP and is assigned to more than one plant. These plants are in turn assigned to company code. So obviously n number of sales area can be brought under a single company code. 41. Explain The Concept Of A Distribution Channel? After a product or service is sold, it takes various channels before it reaches the intented audience (customers). A distribution channel depicts such channels(eg. Retail, wholesale, direct sale etc).In sap it is identified by a 2 char code. It is assigned to more than one sales areas. 42. Explain What Is A Distribution Chain ? A distribution chain is the possible combination of sales organization and distribution channels. 43. Explain In Detail What A Sales Order Is? Sales order is a contract between Sales organization and a customer, for supply of specified goods and/services over a specified time frame and in agreed quantity or unit. A sales order contains, Organizational Data Header data Item data Schedule line data 44. Name All The Special Sales Document Types? SO-Rush order G2-Credit RE-Return order KN-FoC(Free of charge) subsequent delivery order. RK-invoice correction request. 45. Explain What Is Consignment Stock Process? There can be business scenario where we allow our stock to be stored at the customer’s site. Or even if the stock or material is stored in our place, a particular amount is reserved for the customer. He may sell or redistribute this stock allocated for him at his wish. We bill him only the amount he has consumed. This business process is called ‘consignment stock process. The special stock(consignment) in our system both customer wise and material wise. The standard sales order document type used is KB and delivery type is LF. 46. We Create An Order For A Sales Bom With Three Sub Items. Since The Sub Item Components Must Not Be Delivered Without The Main Product We Declared The Main Item Category As Delivery Group. The Problem Arises When There Is Zero Availability For The Main Item And No Schedule Line Can Be Confirmed. The Main Item Is Defined As Delivery Group But The Delivery Is Created Without The Main And Only The Component Sub Items. The Delivery Group Becomes Broken Up. This Occurs Only In Vl01n And Vl10 Dialogue Mode. In Vl10 Background It Works Ok, So No Delivery Item Is Created At All For Those Unconfirmed Items. How Do We Fix This? The message is not configurable; at least in releases Formulas-> Condition value. There you divide quantity by 100, and multiply the integer part of result by 3. New condition-calculate type-G-formula. Input condition in your pricing procedure and input AltCTy (Condition formula for alternative calculation type) - new formula. 51. I Have Two Condition Types For Cost. One Is Customized And The Other Is Vprs. Their Values Are Determined Correctly In Sales Order. A Problem Arises When I Create The D/o And Billing Document. The Condition Type Vprs Is Incorrect With Value '0,' While The Customized One Is Correct. What Is The Cause Of This? The VPRS is a valuation condition, normally the cost of goods sold. If it comes from the material master record, it is a standard valuation price. However, if it comes from the information record, it is the very cost of goods sold. You may have a difference from the price you valued your material at and the real cost of purchase. Check if you have a standard value in your master record or if you have a relevant info record. Another possibility is your customized condition is undoing the VPRS. 52. Which Report Will Show The Serial Number Assigned In A Delivery Document? Take a look at function modules with SERIAL_*. For example, SERIAL_LS_PRINT. 53. I Received The Error Message, "condition Type Z928 Is Not In Procedure Zcs928 Av." How Do I Include The Condition Type Z928 In Pricing Procedure Zcs928? Follow pathway: SPRO ->Sales and Distribution ->Basic Functions ->Pricing ->Pricing Control -> Define and Assign Pricing Procedures From here select "Maintain pricing procedures." Next, select procedure ZCS928, then “Control Data.” Add Z928 to your procedure. 54. Is It Possible To Use Transaction Mass To Assign A Sales Representative As A Partner? Yes. Using the MASS transaction, select object KNA1. Then select table name KNVP. 55. Where In The Sale Order Would You Enter The Serial Numbers For Material? Serial numbers are entered on the delivery document and not a sale order, as this allows for multiple serial numbers to be entered for a single line. For example, you may have 10 serial numbers for a quantity of 10. 56. I Need To Have An Additive Price Based On A Variant Characteristic Selected And Then Provide A Discount For Each Of The Characteristics. I Must Discount The Correlating Characteristic, Not The Gross Value. Price ------ Char 1 = 1.00 Char 2 = 2.00 Char 3 = 3.00 Gross Price = 6.00 Discount ------ Char 1 = 10% Of 1.00 = .10 Char2 = 20% Of 2.00 = .40 Char3 = 15% Of 3.00 = .45 Total Discounts = .95 The Discount May Vary By Customer. How Do I Find Out How Configure This? You can find out how to configure this by taking a look at the documentation for $SET_PRICING _FACTOR,” in LO-VC. 57. I'm Working In Se43, Area Menu Maintenance. I Am Copying An Existing Area Menu Where The Name Of The Main Node Is Already Specified. I Took Standard Menu Cond_av And Made Its Copy As Zcond_av. I've Changed Its Description From "condition Maintenance" To Another Description. However, In The Area Menu Itself The Main Node Still Has Condition Maintenance.how Do I Change This? This can be solved through SE43 itself. Create a new menu area then the name of that area menu is automatically assigned to the main node. 58. We Have Two Types Of Customers Industrial And Domestic. The Domestic Customers Have A Price List. For The Industrial Customers, The Price Is Calculated On Basis Of Percentage Of The Cost. Since There Is A Possibility That Industrial Customers Might Also Buy Domestic Products At Any Given Point Of Time, We Are Forced To Make One Pricing Procedure. Is There Another Solution? You can create a VOFM subroutine (transaction code VOFM-Formulas ->Condition value) and set this subroutine in your procedure as transaction code V/2 in field AltCTy (Condition formula for alternative calculation type). In the ABAP coding you can describe all of your requirements. 59. How Can I Transfer The Payment Method From Customer Master To Sales Order Automatically? Use the user exit “userexit_move_field_to_vbkd” in report MV45AFZZ with this coding: DATA: via LIKE knb1-zwels. IF vbkd-zlsch IS INITIAL. IF NOT vbak-kunnr IS INITIAL. SELECT SINGLE zwels INTO via FROM knb1 WHERE bukrs = vbak-bukrs_vf AND kunnr = vbak-kunnr. vbkd-zlsch = via(1). ENDIF. ENDIF. 60. How Can You Send Output Through An Email Instead Of A Fax Or Printout? Check whether the transmission medium has been maintained for the processing routines for your output type. Make sure that this transmission medium is placed in the partner functions evenly. Follow this path: SPRO -> SD-> Basic Functions-> output control-->output determination->determination using condition technique->maintain O.deter.for sales documents-> Maintain output types. Use transaction code V30. 61. We Have A Problem With Bapi_salesorder_change. We Need To Change A Position In A Sales Order But When We Fill The Structures Bapi Does Not Change The Sales Order. What Should We Do? You must fill the update structures properly. The order header needs to read “order_header _ inxupdateflag = 'U',”. The item must read “order_item_inx = 'U'.” Each field touched in “order_item_ in” needs to have an 'X' in the corresponding field of “order_item_inx.” 62. We Have Two Company Codes And New Infostructure S004 For Filling. We Must Fill It With Data From First Cc Only. Is There Any Problem If The People Who Create Orders, Deliveries And Billing Of Second Cc Work At This Time? You can control the updating of infostructure at both header level and tem level using IMG. If you do not want the second company code data to be updated in the info structure, do not include the sales organizations assigned to the second company code in the updating of info structure. For your information, the codes are OVRO and OVRP 63. I Am Working In A System Where Someone Has Changed Standard Sap And The Sap Standard Pro Forma Invoice. Where Is This Set? (there Is No Account Determination Procedure Assigned To The Document In Sd But It Is Picking Up The Standard One And Posting To Accounts.) In VOFA check the SD Document category. It should be set to U and the transaction group should be set to 8. Likely these were changed to real invoices. The transaction group tells pro forma invoices not to be posted to accounts. If you have a posting block, wait until someone releases it to accounting in change mode. 64. I Need A Modification To Make The System Issue An Error Message When The User Enters Two Sales Orders With The Same Reference To The Customer's Purchase Order. What Should I Do? In the transaction VOV8 (sales document type definition) under general control put an "A" in the check PO number field. In the transaction OVAH (change system messages) change the message category of V4 -115 to "E" from "W". 65. I Want To Issue Goods Where The Storage Location Has A Negative Quantity. The System Is Not Allowing Me To Make A Goods Issue. How Do I Configure This? Follow these steps: OMJ1-Allow negative stocks-at plant level and at storage location level. MM02-Plant data/stor.2-check negative stock in plant. 66. What Transaction Do We Use To View All Messages Including Warning Messages In Sap? You can view these in transaction code SE91. 67. I Would Like To List The Partner Functions In A Delivery. In Which Table Can I Find That Information? This information is located in table VBPA. 68. We Have A Situation Where There Will Be Two Pricing Procedures And Depending Upon The Materials Used, Either One Of Them Will Get Picked Up. For Example We Have A Field In Customer Master That Helps Determine Pricing Procedure. Similarly, Is There Any Field In The Material Master That Can Determine The Pricing Procedure Determination? The pricing procedure applies to the whole document(header and items). You cannot change it at material (item) level. 69. There Is A Configuration Setting For Sd Where You Are Able To Activate The Account Assignment On Both Header And Item Level. The Activation Will Basically Open Up All The Respective Cost Objects. What Setting Is This? Use transaction code VKOA 70. How Do You Create Two Customer Hierarchies For The Same Payer? Create an order and delivery, and then perform a PGI for first customer hierarchy. Do the same for the second customer hierarchy. 71. I Have Created Two Pricing Procedures. One Is For Normal Pricing And The Other For Taxes. When I Am Trying To Do A Sales Order, Only The First Pricing Procedure Is Applying And It Is Not Accepting The Second One. Why? What Is The Exact Link Between These Two Pricing Procedures And The Condition Types? The pricing procedure is determined according to: sales area, customer pricing procedure field in the customer master (sold-to), document pricing procedure field in the sales document type. You may need to identify the criteria to determine the right pricing procedure when you enter a sales order. The transaction code to define pricing procedure determination is OVKK. Normally taxes are included in the actual pricing procedure, as part of the determination of the actual price (including taxes) the customer will pay. Taxes need to be calculated based on the given prices in the pricing procedure. 72. While Creating Quotation, I Am Getting The Error "mandatory Condition Mwst Is Missing" . Although Mwst Is Present In Procedure Rvaa01, What Are The Steps To Solve This? Use transaction code VK11 and enter condition type MWST. Next, enter the details in that document. 73. When We Create A Bom Through Cs01, What Effect Does Bom Usage Field Have On Subsequent Configuration? For Example, If We Take It As 1=production Or 5=sales What Effect Will It Have On Subsequent Processes? A sales usage means that production will not see it, and a production usage means that sales will not see it. The components each may or may not be saleable, but as a sales BOM is intended to explode onto a sales order, a non-saleable item on a sales BOM would generally not be recommended. The usage is precisely what it sounds like; which function will use the particular BOM. 74. How Do You Copy Item Text From Sales Order, To Delivery,to Invoice? Use text control function, SD-> basic function-> text control. 75. How Do You Delay Billing To The Next Month In A Delivery Note? You can postpone the invoice date in the sales order that belongs to that particular delivery under the billing tab. Otherwise by default, the invoice will pick up the GI date of the delivery. If it is acceptable to put the GI on hold until the day of invoicing you could also suggest this as a procedure. 76. How Should I Assign Gl Account To The Company Code? I Am Doing Sd/fi Interface. By Using Transaction Code Fsso I Am Able To Enter Gl Account And Company Code. But When I Try To Save It I Am Getting The Error "account Xyz Does Not Exist In Company Code Xyz." You must create the GL account for the company code, exactly like you create a customer master for a CC, or a material in a plant. 77. When We Create A Third Party Customer Order, It Generates A Po To The Vendor. When We Receive The Vendor Invoice, It Is Entered In Miro, Which Then Generates An Order-related Customer Invoice. If We Create For Example, Three Different Sales Orders And Three Separate Pos And Also Make Three Separate Invoice Receipts That Are Done On The Same Day, These Invoices Are Not Combining Into A Single Invoice For The Customer. We Need This To Only Be One Invoice Per Sales Order. Where Is The Logic That Controls This And How Do We Change It? You will have to take a look at copy control (from Sales document to Billing document), on item level. Most likely the routine will show 001. If you change that routine to 003, then you should get an invoice per sales order. 78. I Have A Requirement To Send The Invoice Copy To The Customer Or Agent That Will Be Specified At The Time Of Sending The Invoice (it Should Not Be Configured Before). How Do I Configure This And Where Do I Set The Indicators? Use transaction code NACE. Define the output type here. In application V3, define the correct transmission medium. If you want to send it at your convenience select the dispatch time as 3 (Send with applications own transaction). Attach the output type to the correct output determination procedure defined for the document type. Use T Code VF31 to send the message. You will need basis while configuring the email addresses because SCOT and SOST will be used by it. 79. I Have A Bom Item And Another Item, Which Is A Free Gift For Child Model. This Was Not Delivered To The Dealer, But Delivery Order Status Indicates "complete Delivery" And The Scheduled Line Appeared Fine As Well. After My Analysis, I Found Some Things. The Initial Quantity Of The Bom Item Is 5 And Free Good Is 0. How Do I Go About Fixing This? You cannot manipulate and make changes afterwards expecting the system to honor your requirements. You must add the child items as a separate order. 80. A Problem Occurs While Releasing Invoice To Accounting. Billing Is Created Successfully, But The Invoice Is Not Released To Accounting. The Error Message I Receive After Saving The Document States Error In Account Determination. How Should I Solve This Problem? The first thing you should do is check the account determination log in the invoice. Follow these steps: transaction code VF02-> Environment-> Acc.determ.analysis-> Revenue Accounts. 81. I Am Facing A Problem In The Internal Number Range Assignment Of Customer Data. I Have Created A New Account Group And With Each Customer I Create, The System Gives An Increment Of 5. For Example It Increases From 10005 To 10010 Instead Of 10005, 10006. How Do I Fix This? The problem is with the number range buffering. Go to transaction code SNUM, and then object type “debitor.” Click on the pencil (change mode) and change the number in buffer. 82. How Does The Term Characteristic Relate To Transaction Code Cto4? Material master leads to classification, and then you select the desired class. Based on class you can choose the characteristics. These characteristics are defined in CT04. 83. What Process Do You Use To Create A Consignment Stock? Follow pathway : SAP Library-> SAP R/3 Enterprise Application Components-> Logistics-> Sales and Distribution (SD) -> Sales-> Special Business Processes in Sales-> Consignment Stock Processing. 84. What Is The Business Process Of Excise Tax And How Do You Relate That In Sap? Excise tax is the duty charged on manufacture of goods listed in the chapter and section head of Central Excise Tariff Act. Process should amount to manufacture and separate identifiable finished goods should emerge having marketability and specified in Tariff Act. As far as SAP is concerned you, find CIN version integrated with standard SAP. There are two places where you need to configure CIN. The first is Financial Accounting-> Tax on Sale and Purchase and the other is Logistic General-> Tax on Goods Movement. 85. I Created A New Info Structure And Activated Update Rules For It. What Is The Best Way To Transport Them Into A Productive System? After rigorous testing in the QA environment and approval of the user community you should transport the info structure and related items into a production environment during “down time,” possibly when no billing documents are being created and posted. 86. Are There Any User Exits Or Any Other Way To Include New Fields In The Sales Order Va01? There are two ways to approach this. You can go to transaction code SE93 and give the Transaction as VA01. It will lead to a screen where you can click on a program that will take you to mod.pool. In this program click Find Icon and key in customer there. It will show you the user exits in that particular program. Another way is using SPRO. Follow path : IMG->SD->System Modifications->User Exits. There you can click on the help document and it will show all the user exits with program name. Select the suitable one. 87. For Sto When The Invoice Receipt (mm) And Invoice Issue (sd) Is Completed, How Do We Perform A Price Adjustment If We Find The Price Is Incorrect? If We Do A Subsequent Credit/debit In Mm, How Do We Create Subsequent Credit/debit In Sd? First cancel your invoices (SD and MM). Change the price in the STO PO. Then create new invoices SD and MM. The new values will be picked up if properly configured. The difference in the material value will be automatically posted to the appropriate stock account when you create the invoice in MIRO. 88. I Am Making An Inquiry In Which I Have A Configurable Material. When I Create A Quotation With Reference To The Inquiry, The System Is Not Allowing Me To Change The Configuration In The Quotation. I Checked The Copy Control And Found That At The Item Level Copy Control Between Inquiry And Quotation, We Have An Option For Configuration. I Have Tried These, Yet I Am Still Unable To Change The Configuration. What Should I Do? The document may already exist. Once fixed you cannot “unfix” the configuration by changing the customizing. You must create a new quote/order. Use setting “A.” 89. Is It Possible To Have To Have Two Delivery Notes In Two Different Languages? The destination country will decide which language the output should be printed. Make sure that you are identifying that in the program attached to the output and accordingly open the desired form. 90. Can I Copy Text From The Delivery Note To The Billing Document? How Can I Do This Through Text Determination? You can copy text from Delivery Note to invoice. Go to the IMG (SD>Basic Functions>Text Control) and click on the help icons next to text types. Define access sequences for determining texts and define and assign text determination procedures. You need to check the delivery text field in the relevant billing document type. If you do not check this field you will not be able to copy the delivery texts to the billing document. 91. I Am Working On Intercompany Sales. How Do I Create Material In Both Company Codes? Use transaction code MM01 to create material with organizational data pertaining to the plants and sales organizations. 92. I Do Not Know Why The Tax Field In The Customer Master And Material Master Is Hidden. This Field Is Not Suppressed In Customer Master. How Do I Make This Field Appear? Make sure you have a tax category defined for your countries in OVK1. Then check if the tax classes are defined in OVK3 and OVK4. 93. On The Sales Order Shipping Tab There Is A Field With The Text "shipping Point." I Would Like To Add New Shipping Points To Certain Plants. Where Is This Configured In Sap? New shipping points are defined in enterprise structure. Follow these steps: logistics execution -> define shipping points and assign the shipping point to plant in assign in enterprise structure under logistics execution. Next, click: shipping -> shipping point and good receipt determination. Configure for automatic determination of shipping point based on shipping condition, loading group, and plant. Maintain relevant shipping condition in customer master. Maintain relevant loading group in material master (normally the standard). For the combination that you derive from the sales order, you should have a configuration entry for automatic determination in sales order. 94. If Several Items With Different Vat Rates Are Included In One Invoice, These Different Rates Are Displayed In Theinvoice Header Including The Respective Amount. After Saving The Invoice, The System Determines One Vat Rate Including One Tax Code And Transfers This Tax Code To The Accounting Document. How Does This Determination Work? What Is The Rule Behind This Determination? In FS01/02/03 you will see that there is a tax category field where you enter the used tax code for this account. Normally tax conditions have specific account keys. Through transaction code VKOA or OV35 you assign which account (using key fields from sales) will be used for the account doc. Check V08 price procedure for the used account key as well. 95. When A User Releases An Invoice To Accounting It Creates An Accounting Document. The Status Of The Accounting Document Is Cleared If The User Cancels This Invoice. Is It Necessary To Delete The Previously Created Accounting Document? No, but you will have a credit note in your customer account. 96. I Have A Problem With Lis. After Client Copy, Our Test System Does Not Update Lis Info Structures. When I Save A Sales Order, Delivery Or Billing Document I Receive An Error Message That Says, "update Was Terminated". How Do I Fix This? Generate the infostructure and update group again in the client in which you are facing the problem. 97. How Do You Trace The Changes Made In The Sales Order In Regards To Changes To The Partner Function In The Sales Order? If you go into the change mode of the sales order click on environment, and then change. This menu will show you that partner functions like SH / BP / PY in the document are changed. It also shows old and new values. 98. I Am Working On Cross Company Sto. After I Create Sto, I Cannot Create Outbound Delivery By Using Vl10d. When I Check The Sto, I Find That The Delivery Creation Date Is Blank. It Seems The System Does Not Add The Sto To Delivery Due List Automatically. Is Some Setting In Sd Affecting This? The delivery creation date is blank because the STO is blocked by release strategy. 99. Typically You Receive A Standard Credit Check When You Save The Sales Order. What Is The Best Way To Trigger It At The Start Of The Sales Order Creation So That One Does Not Have To Enter A Lot Of Data In Case You Reach The Credit Limit? The ideal way is to check the credit limit of the customer much before the processing the sales order. Follow the path mentioned within the sales order. Also check: Sales Order-> Environment-> Partners-> Display Credit Account. 100. Is There A Way To Print An Invoice Five Times? (one Original And Four Copies) Use transaction code VF02. Once inside the document, click on Go to-> Header ->Output. Select the output type (normally RD00). Click on Communication method and in the field "Number of messages", enter the number of copies you want to print. 101. What Is The Difference Between Order Quantity And Confirmed Quantity? The confirmed quantity is the allocated quantity by the availability check (ATP). 102. How Do The Subtotals That Have Carry Over Value Kompkzwi1, Komp-kzwi2, Work With Respect To Condition Types? Subtotals are not tied to condition types per say.You control what goes into the field by assigning subtotals within you pricing procedure. If you assign a particular line in your pricing procedure to be subtotal 5, its value will be moved to KOMP-KZWI5. 103. When We Run The Transaction For Vf04 No Authorization Check Is Done For This Division. This Is Causing Some Problems Because Some Users Run The Transaction Vf04 And Create Billing Documents For A Division For Which They Are Not Responsible. Is There A User Exit Or Other Way That We Can Force Transaction Vf04 To Look At The Division As Part Of The Authorization Check? Make the modification to include a check within the copying requirements of the division in the source document instead of the user authorization. 104. I Have Created A New Material In Sap, And Now Wish To Add Stock For That Material Into A Particular Plant. What Is The Best Transaction Code As Well As Movement Type To Use? Use transaction code MB1C and movement type 561. 105. I Defined Manually A Condition Type Z004 (as A Copy Of The Condition Type K004). I Then Tried To Create Condition In Transaction Code Vk31 In The Section Discount/surcharges -> By Material. The System Reported, "table 304 Is Not Defined For Use With Condition Type Zec1." How Should I Resolve This? VK31 works with pricing reports. If you want to have a new condition type to be maintainable via VK31 or VK32., you need to do the following: Create pricing report via transaction code V/LA and include the tables you need. Extend the price area menu via SE43. Area menu = COND_AV. 106. How Do I Assign Movement Type? You assign movement type against the schedule line category. 107. A Certain Customer Has Credit Payment Terms Wherein If The Invoice Is Cut Between Dec 1-15 2005, Then The Invoice Due Date Should Be Jan 15, 2006. I Have Nfigured The Payment Terms In The Transaction Code Obb8. I Created The Sales Order With The Customer And Got The Specific Payment Terms In The Overview Screen, And Then I Made The Delivery And Then The Invoice. Can I View The Invoice Due Date In The Invoice? You should be able to see the due date in the AR Module. If you go into fbl5n and search for the customer, you can see the due date in the overview screen. 108. I Am In The Va02 Transaction For A Sales Order And Want To Reject The Line Items And Cancel The Entire Sales Order. What Is The Menu Path Needed To Achieve This Goal? Click the reject document button and then enter a reason for rejection. This will reject the line items and the sales order. You can enter a reason for rejection on the line item sales a tab. 109. Under Transaction Code Sdo1, I Try To Save A Display Variant With The Pathway:settings -> Display Variants. However The Save Option Is Grayed-out. How Should I Resolve This Issue? There is an unapplied SAP Note that will correct the error. Once the correct note is applied the save option will not be grayed-out. 110. A Sales Document Type Of A Sales Order Can Be Changed After Getting Saved. How Do You Do This? One way is through the configuration of document type in transaction code VOV8 (O Another way is in the "Transaction Flow" section. You can also perform “Alt sales doc type 1” and “Alt sales doc type 2.” 111. We Have Only One Distribution Channel In Our Company. Can We Default It In The Transaction Field That Needs Distribution Channel Data? How Can We Configure That? You can use the user master data to achieve this. Use transaction code SU01 and input the user ID. Go to the parameters tab page and add parameter VTW. Input your default distribution channel in the parameter value. The only drawback with this method is you will have to individually do this for all your users. 112. I Want To Use Automatic Packing And I Have To Create The Procedure For Packing Instructions. Where And How Can I Link The Procedure With My Delivery Type Or Item Category? The procedure is assigned in transaction OVHU2. You will have to assign the procedure to 0002 Outbound Delivery. Here you cannot specify the delivery type or item category. To some extent, you can control this with the packing indicator in the delivery item category, however, you can have better control by designing the access sequence with the available fields. 113. Is It Possible To Perform An Availability Check Based On The Plant Yet Exclude One Storage Location? You can make a storage location not available to the availability check in MM. 114. Is It Possible To Copy Texts From Sales Order Header To Billing Document Header? Use transaction VOTXN, and then create an access sequence with text object VBBK. Also make sure that the requirement of access sequence is given as '1'-Ref doc. Header. 115. I Must Create An Order. Whenever A Sales Order Is Created In The Schedule Line Items, The Check Box "fixed Date And Quantity" Is Checked. In The Md04 Transaction, Customer Requirements For The Sales Order Are Not Appearing. Why Is This? Regarding fix date and quantity check box check transaction OVZJ for your sales area. With the second problem regarding MD04, you must check two things; requirements class and scheduling category. Check your document to see whether they are activated for requirement transfer. 116. In Transaction Xd03 We Can Print Details For A Single Customer. Is There Any Transaction Code To Print All The Customers Address Or Details At One Time? For this requirement check TC: S_ALR_87012179 & S_ALR_87012180 117. What Table Do I Use In Creating Abap Program That Would Output The Sales Based On Sales Organization Of Customers? If you have SIS update turned on, you can use transaction code MTCE against infostructure 001 to display sales by sales ganization and so forth. Apart from SIS, you may create simple ABAP query with LDB VAV. If you want to create an ABAP report only, then use transaction code VBRK ->billing header table and VBRP -billing item table. 118. Name Two Ways To Start A Transaction? i.Dynamic Menu ii.Command Field 119. What Does The Material Type Control ? The material type determines a material's procurement type. It also controls screen sequence field selection number assignment type in material master maintenance inventory management type account determination 120. Can You Specify When Output Should Be Created? If Yes, What Possibilities Do You Have? Yes. Print out, Mail, EDI, Fax. 121. Give Examples For Standard Output Types In Sd? Order Confirmation, Delivery Note , Invoice. 122. Can You Make Texts Mandatory For A Customer Master Or A Sales Document? Yes. 123. Where Do You Assign Text Determination Procedures For Customer Master Records And For Documents? Account Group, Item Category. 124. What Is The Scope Of Check During Availability Check And What Do You Specify With It? i. Stocks ii. Safety stock, stock in transfer, stock in quality inspection, blocked stock. iii. Inward and outward movements iv. purchase orders, purchase requisitions, planned orders, production orders, reservations, dependent reservations, dependent requirements, sales requirements, delivery requirements. 125. What Is A Partner Type? Give Some Example? The partner type is an indicator which informs you of the type of partner, for example, partner type customer "KU". 126. What Does The Billing Type Control? i. The document number ii. The partner functions allowed at header level iii. The partner functions allowed at item level iv. The billing type that can be used to cancel the billing document v. The transfer status of the billing document: vi. Transferred to financial accounting vii. blocked from transfer viii. not transferred ix. The procedure for account assignment in Financial Accounting x. The allowed output for a business transaction and the procedure for output. 127. Do You Have Schedule Lines In The Delivery? No. 128. What Do You Control At Item Category Level In The Delivery? Relevance for Picking, Determination of Picking Location, Minimum Delivery Quantity. 129. At Which Levels In The Sales Document Can You Have Different Incompletion Procedures? Sales Document Type, Item Category, Schedule Line Category, Partner Functions, Sales Activities. 130. Once The System Determined The Item Level Schedule Line Category Automatically In The Sales Order, Can You Still Change It Manually? Yes. 131. Explain How The System Can Automatically Determine The Item Category In The Sales Order? Sales document type + Higher level Item category + Item category group + Item Usage. 132. Name At Least Five Features That You Can Control For The Schedule Line Category? Relevance for delivery, Availability check, Transfer of Requirements, Goods Movement, Purchasing and Incompletion log. 133. Name At Least Five Features That You Can Control For The Item Category? Pricing, Relevance for delivery, Relevance for billing, Incompletion log, Partner, Tax. 134. Name At Least Three Features Controlled By The Sales Document Type? Pricing, Taxes , Delivery. 135. Why Do You Have Different Sales Document Types In R/3? For business transactions. 136. Give An Example Of When You Would Specify That A Sales Document Can Only Be Created Referencing Another Sales Document? Returns can only be created referencing sales order. 137. Name At Least Five Features That You Can Control For The Sale Document Type? Text, Partner, Pricing, Taxes, Output, Delivery. 138. What Are The Two Influence Factors For Field Selection For Customer Master Record Maintenance? Account Group, Transactions. 139. What Does The Account Group Of The Customer Control? Number assignment, Screen Layout. 140. Can You Share Master Data Between Several Sales Areas? Yes. 141. What Two Ways Of Number Assignment For Documents Or Master Data Do You Know? Internal & External. 142. Explain Shortly What The Sap Business Navigator Is And How It Can Be Used In An Implementation? i. The Reference Model integrated into the R/3 System. ii. The various ways into Business Navigator (the views) help you call just the models and list displays you need in the R/3 Reference Model. iii. You can access other R/3 System components directly from the models. iv. for example: data models, transactions, documentation. 143. What Is The Procedure Model And How Can It Be Used In An Implementation? i. The R/3 Procedure Model is both the methodological framework for the implementation and upgrade processes and a powerful tool that supports you at every stage of the implementation process. ii. The R/3 Procedure Model provides iii. all the fundamental understanding you need at the cross-application level for implementing R/3 application components successfully, iv. a hierarchically-structured plan of the activities, v. a correct sequence of the activities vi. the link to the system setting activities 144. What Is The Procedure Model And How Can It Be Used In An Implementation? i. The R/3 Procedure Model is both the methodological framework for the implementation and upgrade processes and a powerful tool that supports you at every stage of the implementation process. ii. The R/3 Procedure Model provides. iii. all the fundamental understanding you need at the cross-application level for implementing R/3 application components successfully. iv. a hierarchically-structured plan of the activities. v. a correct sequence of the activities. vi. the link to the system setting activities. 145. Is It Possible To Link R/3 Projects To The Ms Project? Yes. 146. If You Deactivate The Module Co In The Company Img Could You Still Select The Co Module In A Project You Create? No. 147. Once You Have Activated The Company Img Can You Still Add Modules/areas? Yes. 148. Explain What The Img Is? Tool for configuring the SAP System to meet customer requirements. Also referred to as the 'Implementation Guide'. 149. Can You Partially Settle Rebate Accruals? Yes. 150. Can You Name The Two Types Of Billing Plans In The Standard R/3 System? Periodic billing, Milestone billing. 151. What Is A Product Hierarchy And For What Can It Be Used? i. Alphanumeric character string for grouping materials by combining various characteristics. The product hierarchy is used for evaluation and pricing purposes. ii. In Product Cost Controlling (CO-PC) : Structure consisting of the plant, product group, product, and order. Used for the interactive analysis of the product costs for each level of the hierarchy. 152. What Is Rebate Processing? A rebate is a special discount which is paid retroactively to a customer. This discount is based on the customer's sales volume over a specified time period. 153. There Is An Interface Between Sd And Fi In Invoicing . Can You Think Of Another Interface Between Sd And Fi? Credit check, Tax calculation, Cost estimate. 154. What Are The Two Possible Ways To Transfer Sales Data To Business Areas? Where Do You Specify Which Way You Want To Use? i. sales area (if the accounts are to be posted according to sales). ii. plant/division (if the accounts are to be posted according to products). 155. Can One Business Area Be Valid For Several Company Codes? Yes. 156. Can You Split Deliveries Into Several Invoices? When Would You Do That? Yes . If the data from the related reference documents differs in the header fields of the billing document. The system will automatically split the invoice. 157. Can You Combine Orders Into One Invoice? Yes. 158. Can You Combine Deliveries Into One Invoice? When Would You Do That? Yes. If the header data and header partners for specified delivery or sales order are identical and if requirements for splitting do not apply. 159. In R/3 How Can You Make Sure That Invoices For A Customer Are Always Created At A Specific Date? Billing Schedule. 160. When You Create A Credit Memo Request Do You Always Have To Refer To A Sales Order Or Any Other Previous Document? Only sales order. 161. From Which Documents Can You Create A Proforma Invoice? Based on sales order or delivery. 162. When You Create An Invoice Can You Carry Out Pricing Again? Yes. 163. Can You Delete An Invoice? No. You can cancel it and create cancellation document. 164. Do You Have To Create A Condition Record For Taxes In The Sd Application? Yes. 165. Where Can You Specify That A Condition Is Mandatory? In Pricing Procedure. 166. If You Create A New Condition Type-do You Also Have To Create A New Condition Table And A New Access Sequence? Yes. 167. Can You Copy Condition Records? If Yes, Are There Any Restrictions? Yes. Field specific. 168. Name The Influencing Factors For Pricing Procedure Determination During Sales Order Entry? Customer, Sales Document Type and Sales Area. 169. If You Want To Make Sure That Conditions Records Apply For A Certain Time Period Only What Would You Have To Do? Validity Period to be specified in condition record. 170. What Is A Group Condition? Condition which can be used to determine a scale value based on more than one item in a document. The system groups the items using either the condition key for the appropriate condition record or a separately defined condition key. 171. Can You Track Cumulative Values In R/3? If Yes, It Could Be Based On What? Yes. Maximum Value, Maximum Orders, Maximum Quantity. 172. For What Do You Use Customer Hierarchies? Pricing , Rebate. 173. Give An Example For A Statistical Condition? VPRS. 174. What Does The Condition Exclusion Indicator Do For You? The system can exclude conditions so that they are not taken into account during pricing in sales documents. 175. Which Data Do You Have To Maintain In Sd So That The System Can Determine The Sales Taxes In The Sales Order Automatically? Tax rate with or without Jurisdiction. 176. Does The Pricing Procedure Apply For The Pricing Data At Item Level Or For The Pricing Data At Header Level? Both. 177. You Want To List All Condition Records For A Certain Material Or A Certain Sales Organization. How Would You Do That? By creating Pricing Reports. 178. If Somebody Adds Price Elements Manually In The Sales Order Or If Somebody Changes A Discount The System Determined Automatically, Do You Have A Possibility To See That In The Sales Order? Yes. 179. Where Would You Specify That A Condition Type Is A Discount Or A Surcharge? In Condition Type Details Screen. 180. You Can Create Scales For Prices And Discounts. Name The Four Possible Scale Basis In R/3? Value, Quantity, Gross weight, Net weight, Volume. 181. Name At Least Three Different Condition Types In Pricing? Price, Discounts, Freight. PROO, K007, KF00. 182. Which Partner Function Is Relevant When It Comes To Tax Calculation In The Sales Order? Ship-to party. 183. Is Sd The Only Module That Uses Condition Technique? No. 184. Please Explain Graphically The Relationship Between The Four Basic Elements In Condition Techniques? Procedures à Condition Types à Access Sequence à Condition Tables à Condition Records. 185. What Are The Four Basic Elements Of Condition Technique? Condition Types, Condition Tables, Access Sequences, Pricing Procedures. 186. Name Three Areas/processes Which Use Condition Technique In Sd? Material determination, Output determination, Account determination. 187. Can The Delivery Quantity And The Picking Quantity In The Delivery Document Be -different? Yes. 188. Is It Possible To Work Without Specifying A Pick/pack Or Loading Time For A Shipping Point? Yes. 189. Define A Shipping Unit? Combination of materials which are packed together in a shipping material at a particular time. Shipping units contain items which in turn are made up of shipping units or delivery items. 190. What Is A Transfer Order And For What Would You Use It? i. Document used to support every stock movement in the warehouse. ii. It contains all the important movement data, such as the material to be transferred, the quantity to be transferred, the storage bins involved, and so on. 191. How Does The System Automatically Determine The Picking Storage Location In The Delivery? i. Storage Condition. ii. Shipping Point. iii. Plant. 192. Can You Change The Shipping Point Determined In The Sales Order Manually? Yes. 193. Explain The Relationship Between Sales Organizations And Plants? Many to Many. 194. Explain The Relationship Between Sales Organizations, Plants And Company Codes? Many to Many to One. 195. Which Organizational Element Is Central In Shipping? Give A Definition Of It? Shipping Point: Organizational unit at a fixed location that carries out shipping activities. A shipping point could, for example, be a company's mail department or a plant's rail depot. Each delivery is processed by only one shipping point. 196. Can A Sales Organization Sell From A Plant Belonging To A Different Company Code? Yes. 197. How Many Shipping Points Can You Assign To A Plant? Many. 198. Would You Have Different Customer Numbers If Your Customer Was Serviced By More Than One Company Code? No. 199. Would You Have Different Customer Numbers If Your Customer Was Serviced By More Than One Sales Organization? No. 200. A Material Is Produced In Plant Boston, Plant Dallas And In Plant Chicago. How Many Different Material Master Number Do You Need? Only one. 201. Is It Possible To Have Different Data For The Same Customer For Different Sales Areas? Yes. 202. Give Examples Of General Data In The Customer Master Record ? Address, Control data, Marketing, Payment transactions, Contact person, Unloading points. 203. Do You Find Any Sales Prices In The Material Master Record? Yes. 204. Can You Assign A Material To More Than One Division? No. 205. Which Are The Two Partner Functions In Sd That Have To Be Maintained In Fi Too ? sold-to party, payer. 206. If You Want To Create Language Specific Sales Texts For Your Material Master, Would You Have To Create A New Material Master Record? No. 207. What Is A Material Type And Which Material Types Do You Know? Raw materials, semi- finished products, finished products, trading goods, operating supplies. 208. Give Examples Of Objects You Can Classify In R/3? Variant Pricing of configurable products. Objects can be customers, products, condition types. 209. What Are The Two Possible Ways Of Control For The Cost Of A Material In The Material Master Record? Standard Price, Moving Average Price. 210. What Is The Difference Between An Inquiry And Quotation ? i. Inquiry: Request made to a vendor for a quotation for required materials or services. ii. No availability check is done for inquiry. iii. Quotation: Offer from a vendor to a purchasing organization regarding the supply of materials or performance of services subject to predefined terms and conditions. iv. A quotation consists of a number of items, in which the total quantity and delivery date of an offered material or service are specified. v. The total quantity can be subdivided into several partial quantities with different delivery dates in the lines of a delivery schedule. 211. Can You Have Alternative Items In A Sales Order? Yes. 212. If You Reference An Inquiry When Creating A Quotation, Would The Inquiry Be Updated? Yes. 213. Can You Copy One Inquiry To Many Quotations ? No. 214. Can You Copy Several Previous Documents Into One Sales Order? Yes. 215. Do You Always Have To Copy The Entire Quantities At Item Level When You Reference A Previous Document? No. 216. Can You Make Sure That Business Data In A Sales Order Is Only Possible To Maintain At Header Level? Yes. 217. From Where Is The Delivering Plant Transferred Into The Sales Order? Customer Master, Material Master. 218. Which Partner Function Is Relevant For The Delivering Plant? The Sold-to-party , Bill-to-party, Payer, Carrier Or The Ship- To- Party? Ship-to party. 219. Can You Manually Change The Delivering Plant In The Sales Order Once It Was Defaulted From The Master Data? Yes. 220. Can You Have Different Incompletion Logs For Different Item Categories? Schedule Line Categories? Yes. 221. If A Document Is Incomplete Can You Still Save The Document? Yes. 222. Can You Change Addresses Of Partners Manually In The Sales Document? Yes. 223. Name Several Input Tools That Make Order Entry Faster And Give A Definition Of Them? Customer Material Information, Product Proposal , Referencing Documents. 224. In Which Business Environment Would You Use Only The Single-line Entry Screen To Create And Save The Order? Telephone Sales, Simple Business. 225. If You Do Not Specify The Delivering Plant In The Sales Order, What Could The System Then Not Do? Delivery Scheduling. 226. For What Would You Use The Fast Change Function In Sales Entry? Alternate Plants, Delivery or Billing Blocks 227. Name Two Ways To Control That Customers Can Receive Only Certain Materials? Material Listing, Exclusion. 228. Name The Influencing Factors For Determining The Item Category In The Sales Document? Sales Document type, Item Category Group, Higher Level Item, Item Usage. 229. Name The Influencing Factors For Determining The Scehdule Line Category In The Sales Document? Item Category, MRP Type. 230. Can The Sales Document Type Be Determined By The System? No. 231. In R/3, Can You Automatically Substitute One Product For Another? What Would You Have To Create? Yes. Product Selection / Material Determination. 232. Give A Definition Of Replenishment Lead Time? Total time for the in-house production or for the external procurement of a product. In in-house production the replenishment lead time is determined to cover all BOM levels. 233. Name At Least Three Item Categories? i. Standard Items : AFN, AGN, TAN. ii. Free of charge Items: AFNN, AGNN, TANN. iii. Non-stock Items : AFX, AGX, TAX. iv. Text Items : AFTX, AGTX, TATX. 234. Can You Change Existing Standard Item Categories? Yes. 235. Can You Create New Sales Order Types? Yes. 236. If You Run Out Of Stock In A Specific Plant Can You Check If There Are Quantities Available In Other Plants? Yes. 237. Can You Maintain Texts For A Specific Customer And Store Them In The System? If Yes, Where? Yes. Customer Material Information. 238. When The System Checks Availability Which Scheduling Would It Use First? Backward Scheduling. 239. Name The Three Delivery Possibilities When There Is Not Enough Stock Available? One Time Delivery, Complete Delivery, Partial Deliveries. 240. On Sales Order, When The System Confirms 20 Pieces To Be Available At A Certain Date, Would These 20 Pieces Still Be Available For Other New Sales Order Coming In Later? No. 241. What Is A Delivery Group And Why Would You Use It? The complete delivery and delivery group functions enable you to combine some or all of the items in a sales order so that they are delivered to the customer together. The system determines automatically the latest delivery date possible for the delivery group and adjusts the schedule lines accordingly. Corresponding requirements for material requirements planning (MRP) are changed or re-determined. 242. What Is Backorder Processing? i. The backorder processing functions enable you to list relevant sales documents for specific materials and process them from the point of view of availability. You can assign available to promise (ATP) stock to outstanding order quantities. In addition, you can withdraw already confirmed quantities and reassign them to different items. ii. Backorder processing is only available for materials with individual requirements. 243. Can You Link Items In A Sales Order? If Yes, When Would You Do That? Yes. Promotional Items. 244. What Are The Two Techniques In Delivery Scheduling? Backward Scheduling & Forward Scheduling. 245. Credit Limit Checks Is An Example Of A Very Close Link Between Which Two Sap Modules? SD & FI. 246. Name The Several Steps In Consignment Processing? Consignment fill-up, Consignment issue, Consignment pick-up, Consignment return. 247. Can You Control That An End User Cannot Copy A Quote Of Customer A To A Sales Order For Customer B? If Yes, Where? Yes. By customizing Copying Control for header data. 248. How Many Documents Do You Create When You Release, Deliver And Invoice The First Order From A Contract? Three : Sales order, Delivery note, Invoice. 249. What Types Of Output Can You Have In Sales? Printer, Telex, Fax, Mail, EDI. 250. Where Would You Specify Which Data Should Be Copied (at Header, Item And Schedule Line Level)when You Copy From One Document To Another One? Customizing Copy Control. 251. What Is The Difference Between The Availability Check 01 (daily Requirement) And 02 (individual Requirement) In Material Master? 01 and 02 are the checking group. Availability check is carried out with the help of these checking group and checking rule. Checking group 01 and 02 are maintained on the material master. 01 - Individual requirement -For this system generates transfers the requirement for each order to the MRP .So that MM can either produce or procure. 02- Collective requirement.-In this all the requirements in a day or in a week are processed at a time. System stores all request and passes on to the MRP in MRP run. In this system performance is high however you can not do the backorder processing whereas in other you can do. 252. What Is Purpose Of Maintaining Common Distribution Channels And Common Divisions Common Distribution Channel and Common Division are maintained so that if any master data like customer or material maintained with respect to one distribution channel can be used in other DCh. It prevents the multiplication of master records. Eg: A customer is created for say sales area 1000/20/00 then the same customer can be used in sales area 1000/30/00 if we maintain 20 as common distribution channel. Hence no need for extending the customers...the same for materials also. 253. How To And Where To Maintain Copy Controls? Check for yourself in IMG (Sales Document types and Delivery Document Types) 254. What And Where Types Of Copy Controls We Change? Copy Control: is basically meant so that Data is copied from preceding Document to subsequent one. What subsequent Document is required is to some extent determined by Customer Requirements as well as Document Types. e.g. In general case of Standard Order, it will be Copy Control (Order to Delivery) from OR to LF . 255. What Is The Purpose Of Shipping Point Determination Not Menu Path? So that Shipping Point is determined automatically once the settings for the same are done. 256. What Type Of Reports Generally A Support Consultant Maintain And Report? Depends on Customer requirements. 257. What Do You Do Really In Pricing Determination, And What Are The Main Deifferences Between Pricing Procedures? Pricing is determined by combination of Sales Organization, Distribution Channel, Division, Customer Pricing Procedure and Document Pricing Procedure. 258. What Is Meant By Transfer Of Data From Legacy Code To Sap Legacy Code ? It should be legacy data to SAP. What it means is you want to transfer all the customer and materials and all other information from Older (legacy system) to new SAP system. You can do it using many tools, most noticeably MDMs. 259. What Are The Five Imp Fields To Be Maintained In Account Determination? Account Determination: Sales View, Sales Organization, Distribution Chanel, Chart of Accounts, Account Assignment Group for Customer and Material and Account Keys. 260. What Are Some Of The Material Master Data Tables? MARA - Material highest level data MBEW - Data referring to accounting MVKE - Data referring to sales MARC - Data at the plant level WLK1 - Listing information MARD - Data storage locations 261. How Would You Find All The Tables In Sap? SE16 (or) SE11. 262. How Would You Find Which Table Is Being Used In A Particular Field? Bring your cursor to the field in a transaction and press F1 and then technical info. 263. What Are Some Of The Tables In Sap Sd? VBAK - Order header VBAP - Order Item VBEP - Order schedule line LIKP - Delivery Header LIPS - Delivery Item VBPA - Partners VBFA - Document flow 264. What Is A Customer Group? Give Me Some Examples. Customer group is 2 digit numbers that is configured within IMG and allows logical grouping of customers. For example you may want to group International customers, Domestic customers or military customers separately. 265. What Do You Mean By Drop Shipment? A drop shipment is based on an order from a customer to a Distributor. The distributor initiates the shipment by Informing the wholesaler. 266. Can You Have Specific Customer Material Information Entered In Sap? Yes, VD51 is the transaction or inside VA02 also you can add customer material information records. 267. What Is A Base Unit Of Measure In Material Master? This is a unit of measure used as a basis for all the transactions, all movements of quantities will be converted to that base unit of measure which is specific to an article. 268. What Is The Use Of Sales Area? Sales area is the geographical aspect of that particular Company code, from there we can generate the reports. 269. What Are Some Of The Views In A Material Master? Basic data, additional basic data, Accounting views, MRP views, Purchasing views, Storage views, forecasting views, sales views and in IS Retail there is also a Listing view and POS view. 270. How Do You Extend A Material, Which Transaction? MM01 271. How Does The Rule Mala Decide The Picking Location? SHIPPING POINT PLANT STORAGE CONDITION STORAGE LOCATION 272. What Is The Transaction Code For Creating A Material/article In Sap? MM41 for creating article in SAP IS Retail and MM01 in SAP Industry solution for creating a material. 273. What Is The Purpose Of Material Master Data? Master data responsible for representing all information related to products or services that a company produces or sell. 274. Is It Possible To Do Delivery Without Shipping Point? No. Shipping point is the destination of the goods, how we can ship the goods. It is like mailing letter without TO address. 275. Explain About Smart Forms? Smart form - it is a form. Basically it is using in output. 276. How Sales Document Is Structured? Header responsible for all the documents Item for materials Schedule line for quantity and delivery. 277. In Sales Order How System Does Picks Up Plant? We assign particular material master to particular Plant it picks up from there. 278. Without Delivery Can You Do Billing? Without delivery invoice is not possible. 279. Could You Explain About Sales Deals? Company Has Launched a new product, for a that material you Want to have a promotion for this you will creating a sales deal and assign it to sales promotion and you maintain condition groups. 280. What Is The Use Of Pricing Date In Condition Type? It shows date of calculation of pricing procedure for that Particular document. So that in future you can see the date On which pricing calculated for that particular doc. 281. What Does A/c Group Control Customer? Account Group is like a control Parameter for the customer master. Most of the fields in the customer master are controlled Using Field Selection, which is internal function of Account Group. 282. Can You Explain About Higher-level Item Category And Item Usage? Sales Document Type (OR) + Item Category Group (NORM) + Item Usage (FREE) + Higher Level Item Category (TAN) + Item Category of Free Goods (TANN) 283. Why Do You Need Project Img? IMG is required for the purpose of customizing and Configuration. There is no role of functional consultant Without it. 284. How We Assigned Sales Organization To Delivering Plant? Path: SPRO-IMG-Enterprise Structure-Assignment-SD-Assign Plant to Sales Organization/Dist.Channel T.Code: OVX6 285. What Are Some Of The Examples Of Global Settings? Currencies, countries etc. This data is application independent. 286. How To Extend Material And Customer To Other Sales Areas? Sales area is a combination of s.org, dist channel & Division. Division is a logical grouping of products. So u Cannot extend material to other sales areas. But u can Extend customer to other sales areas through common Distribution channel & division. 287. How Can We Process Out Bound Deliveries Without Shipping Point? Shipping point is a mandatory Organizational unit for outbound delivery process. 288. Why Do I Use Condition Indexes? How Do You Activate Them? Condition Index is used to search all the conditions Records for a particular condition type (eg PR00). We Activate condition index in the customizing screen of the Condition type. 289. Is It Possible To Release Change Request, Without Releasing Task? Once we can release the task, then only we can release the Change/customizing request. 290. Product Attributes Means? Product attributes is nothing but the features of product. 291. Can One Have Multiple Packing For Delivery? Yes, we can have multiple packing for a single delivery. 292. Explain Edi And Its Usage? Edi - it helps for data transfer. That means from sap or non sap to sap. 293. To Extend Material One Plants To Another Plant What Are The Configuration You Done In Your Project? We have to create in new plant as we have followed for First plant, where as in first plant system will give Internal number but for second plant we have to mention Material number. 294. What Is The Client Specific Data? Give Two Examples Of Client Specific Data? master data transction data. 295. How To Stop Pgi? In credit management we stop the pgi by through credit limit or through customization. 296. How Sap Support To The Client To Know The Customer Requirements? Support to client: implementation method. Correction method. 297. Can We Assign Multi Distribution Channel To A Single Customer In Sap Sd Sales Process. If Yes Then How? While creating customer we need to assign the customer to The respective sales area, we should copy from previous Sales area in XD01 through reference. 298. What Is The Difference Among Sales Deal Promotion Price, Price Agreement? Sales deal promotion-- specific product for a period of time price will be less than MRP. Price agreement-- means an agreement between customer and Vendor for a specific product or with a specific price mentioned in their agreement. 299. Can You Give Me Some Tables In Sap Sd For Customer Master? Some of the tables are KNVV, RF02D, KNA1 etc. 300. Who Is A Payer In The Customer Master Record? Payer is the individual or company who will settle the invoices for products or services sold. 301. Who Defines The Account Groups? Normally these are defined by the finance team. 302. How Does The Sap System Knows Which Fields To Turn On And Off When You Create A Customer Master Record? Using the account group which is assigned to the customer. 303. What Is The Difference Between Inbound And Outbound Delivery? Out bound delivery--- is Post goods Issue (PGI) In bound delivery--- is Post Goods Received (PGR) PGI will come under Sales Area PGR will come under MM Module PGI decreases physical stock and PGR increases 304. From Which Tcode Can I View Customer Wise Back Order (open Order?) V_RA. 305. What Are Inter Company Customers? These customers represent the sales customers within the same client but between different company codes. 306. What Is Retro Active Billing? Who Is Will Create This? Retro active billing means rebate process. When ever the customer reaches the target quantity or volume in specified time Peried.we issues the credit memo for the customer. 307. What Are The Basic Elements Of A Customer Master Record? The sold to party, the ship to party, bill to party, and the payer record. 308. Where Do You Assign Movement Type? We assign movement type in schedule line category. 309. Can Anyone Explain About Purchase Order & Purchase Requisition? In third party if a customer places an order if the Material is not available in our company if the order Document is saved automatically purchase is raised.withthe help Of this purchase group is created Purchase requisition--- For production of material raw Materials are required, but materials are not available in Stocks, then the production dept. request send to the MM manage simply request him to arrange Materials for production of finished materials. 310. What Is The Transaction Code For Creating A Customer In Sap Sd? VD01, VA01, XD01. 311. What Is A Shipping Point And Loading Points In Sap Sd? Shipping points are the points from where deliveries are initiated. One shipping point can be assigned to more than one store or plant. A Loading point is just a subdivision of a shipping point and manually entered into the header data of the delivery. 312. In One Sales Order There Are Two Materials Can Maintain Two Different Pricing Procedures For These Materials? No, you cannot maintain 2 separate pricing procedure for same Material in single order. But u can change the price Manually by selecting the material and then the conditions Tab....u can also see the changed status as manually later. 313. What Is A Sales Office In Sap Sd? A sales office is a geographically located unit of a sales organization. 314. What Is A Division In Sap Sd? A division is a product group that can be defined for a wide range of products or services. Customer specific arrangements can also be made in a division. A sales organization can have many divisions. 315. List The Basic Steps For Sd Configuration. Enterprise structure Partner determination Master data Business process customization Pricing Output determination 316. How You Can Extent The Rebate? What Are The Procedures, What Is The Customisation For It? The transaction coed for extend rebate is "VB D" in that You should fill the field like recipient and rebate Agreement. 317. What Is Accounting Group? Accounting group is simply the classification of customers, Whether its sp, sh, bp, or py, and it also controls the Fields in cmr. 318. What Are The Differences Between Invoice And Billing Document? Billing Doc is the broad view Invoice (F2) is one of type of billing doc. 319. What Is Pricing? How Will It Affects The Billing Procedure? Pricing has the basic price of the item. It also has the Discounts, Taxes, Rebates, & also the Cost of the item. 320. What Is Act Key? And How It Works? Normally How Many Pricing Procedures Do In Implementation? Account key determine a correct G/L account to be posted the data corresponding G/L accounts. You need to assign a G/L account to account key that is assigned to a condition type in a pricing procedure. 321. Tell Me Account Key And Accruals? A/c keys determine a correct g/l a/c to be posted the data corresponding g/l a/c. All customer Rebate accounts are posted in accruals. 322. What Is The Docu.flow? Inquiry ----->Quotation----->Sales Order----->Delivery ----->Transfer Order----->Post Goods Issue ----->Billing ----->Accounting. 323. What Is The Transfer Order? Transfer order is basically picking order where u pick the Material from storage and loading area or picking area. 324. What Are The Five Imp Fields To Be Maintained In Account Determination? Sales org., A/c keys, condition type, a/c group for the customer, a/c group for the material. 325. What Is Meant By Transfer Of Data From Legacy Code To Sap? Before installation of SAP, Data maintained by Company is called Legacy Data. At the time of installation, it is required to transfer Data from Legacy to SAP like Masters (Material/Customer, etc). 326. What Do You Do Really In Pricing Determination, And What Are The Main Differences Between One Pricing Procedure Determination To The Others, Which Data Control These Differences? Pricing prosier determination-----Pricing is determined by combination of Sales Organization, Distribution Channel, Division, Customer Pricing Procedure and Document Pricing Procedure. Pricing prosier----Pricing prosier is the simple prosier of pricing .It identify different- 2 step, counter of condition. 327. What Is Meant By Transfer Of Data From Legacy Code To Sap Legacy Code? It should be legacy data to SAP. What it means is you want to transfer all customer and materials and all other information from Older (legacy system) to new SAP system. You can do it using many tools, most noticeably MDMs. 328. What And Where Types Of Copy Controls We Change? Copy Control--- is basically meant so that Data is copied from preceding Document to subsequent one. In general case of Standard Order, it will be Copy Control (Order to Delivery) from OR to LF 329. What Do You Do Really In Pricing Determination And What Are The Main Differences Between Pricing Procedures? Pricing is determined by combination of Sales Organisation, Distribution Channel, Division, Customer Pricing Procedure and Document Pricing Procedure. 330. How To And Where To Maintain Copy Controls? Sales Document types and Delivery Document Types. 331. What Is Purpose Of Maintaining Common Distribution Channels And Common Division? Common Distribution Channel and Common Division are maintained so that if any master data like customer or material maintained with respect to one distribution channel can be used in other DCh. It prevents the multiplication of master record. 332. Can You Deference Between Contract & Scheduling Agreement? Scheduling Agreement--- is the agreement between consumer and Company having fixed delivery dates and fixed quantity. Contract--- is the agreement between company and consumer for certain period of time. 333. What Is Pmin? PMIN is a Condition type to define minimum prices. It can be Control minimum prices below which a material should not be sold to the customer. 334. Explain About Dunning Procedure? Dunning procedure is used in credit management if Customer does pay back his amount, then using this dunning Procedure Company sends reminders to customer then after That company has to take legal action. 335. What Is Client Requirement In Schedule Line Category? Schedule line category is nothing but delivery date and Delivery quantity is must. 336. In How Many Places We Can Block The Sales Document? Sales document can be blocked at three places depending on The customer risk categories, they are: Sales order level (high risk customer). Delivery level (medium risk customer). Goods issue level (low risk customer). 337. What Is The Difference Between Reconciliation A/c And Normal Posting A/c? Manual entries can be posted in the normal G/L account and the same is not possible in the Reconciliation account, as these are automatically updated. 338. Can You Make Texts Mandatory For A Customer Master Or A Sales Document? Yes. 339. Where Do You Assign Text Determination Procedures For Customer Master Records And For Documents? Account Group, Item Category. 340. What Happens If We Check 'exclusive' Indication In Access Sequence, And What Happens If We Do Not Check? Basically access sequence finds the exact condition record in cond.table by search statuary with the help of exclusive indication. 341. What Is A Partner Type? Give Some Example? The partner type is an indicator which informs you of the type of partner, for example, partner type customer "KU". 342. Can Anyone Tell About Types Of Free Goods? In paste: 25% extra more -it’s inclusive When you buy paste you get a brush free, it’s exclusive. 343. What Are The 14 Steps In The Pricing Procedure? Step, Counter, Condition type, Description, Form, To, Manual, Mandatory Statistics, Print Subtotal, Requirement, Alt condition type, Alt condition base value, Act key and, Accruals. 344. Difference Between Plant And Storage Location? A plant is a manufacturing unit and it is a place where Materials have to be kept. Storage location is a place in plant, where in materials Has to be stored. 345. When I Creating The Sales Order The System Show Error "no Customer Master Record Exist For Sold To Party". How To Rectify It? Because that customer is not create that sales area. 346. When U Creating The Delivery, The System Shows Like "no Zero Ea Material Available". How To Rectify? The system is giving error because material is not available in plant so check the material mb1c. 347. Do U Have Any Link For Customer Master And Credit Management? We can maintain individual customer credit limit in customer Master. In t.code (fd32).we can define the total credit limit For sales area and credit limit for individual sales area. 348. What Should You Do If The Ship To Party & All Other Partner Functions Are Not Being Determined At The Time Of Sales Order Creation? The Net Price Is Zero. Can Any Body Tell What The Problem Would Be? Because we not maintain the base price of material. So that we use vk11 for base price. 349. Explain About Sales Order Cycle? INQUIRY ----->QUOATATION ---- >ORDER ----->DELIVERY BILLING. 350. What Is The Relation Between Sales Organization And Company Codes? Many to One. 351. I Have Created The Outbound Delivery And Have Done Pgi & Made Factory Invoice But When I Try To Make The Final Invoice , It Is Not Allowing To Make The Final Invoice's System Is Showing The Error "delivery Type Zinc Cannot Be Invoiced With Billing Type F2 ". Just go to sales Document Type (VOV8), Check for Sales Order - > Delivery Type -> Billing type assignment and correct accordingly. 352. Can One Create Delivery With Reference To The Project? Yes. 353. What Is The Difference Between Cash Sales And Rush Order? In rush order if a customer places an order delivery will Take place immediately billing will be letter. In cash sale if a customer places an order delivery and Billing will be on the same day. 354. How System Picks Up Pricing While Doing Billing? From Sales Order. 355. Diff Between Business Sale Cycle Nd Customer Sale Cycles? Contract is the business sale cycle and schedule line is the cust.sale cycle. 356. How Do We Control The Credit Checks With Specific To Distribution Channel And Division? By assigning credit control area to specific sales area. 357. What Is Erp And Sap? And Why Implementing Sap In An Organization? Explain The Special Features Of Sap Over Other Erps? ERP---- ERP is a package with the techniques and concept for the integrated management of business as a whole enterprise. ERP is software designed for basic process of company software. SAP----sap is an enterprise information and management package in word wide use of this package it makes possible to track and manage. Is an ERP package. SAP can be fit it any language. Using of sap means there is no need to maintain SAP is able to integrate all functional organizational units. SAP are usually use because SAP there are no. of technical reasons no. of company are planning to implementation Sap highly configurable, secure data, minimum redundancy, maximum consistency. 358. Can U Give Some Master Data In Mm And Sd.? Master Data MM: Material Master, Info Records, Source List, Vendor Master. Master Data SD: Customer Master, Condition Records, Metrical Determination, Item Proposal. 359. Assigning Sales Organization- Distribution Channel- Plant (tvkwz) ? Plant is created by MM Consultant. IMG -> Enterprise Structure -> Assignment -> Sales and Distribution -> Assign sales organization - distribution channel - plant. 360. Can You Configure Two Diff Free Goods Items For One Single Item? Example- On Purchasing Of Item A U Wants To Give Item B & C Free .is It Possible? How? Yes , it is possible by the exclusive free goods. 361. Assigning Shipping Point To Plant (tvswz)? This assignment ensures that goods from different Plant can be dispatched from different Shipping Points. IMG -> Enterprise Structure -> Assignment -> Logistics Execution -> Assign shipping point to plant. 362. Define, Copy, Delete, Check Plant (t001w)? Plant is created by MM Consultant. IMG -> Enterprise Structure -> Definition -> Logistics - General -> Define, copy, delete, check plant. 363. Can You Delete Order? You can delete the order but there should not be any transcations on the particular order. 364. Define Shipping Points (tvst)? Shipping Point is the Organizational element, which is responsible for shipping the Materials to the Customers. IMG -> Enterprise Structure -> Definition -> Logistics Execution -> Define, copy, delete, check shipping point. 365. Mwst? Pl Explains In Detail? MWST is Tax Condition Category which will be Assigned to Country IN. 366. Assign Sales Group To Sales Office (tvbvk)? you can assign as many sales groups as desired to the sales offices. Any one sales group can belong to several sales offices. IMG -> Enterprise Structure -> Assignment -> Sales and Distribution -> Assign sales group to sales office 367. What Makes Listing & Exclusion Work Differently Than Each Other? Listing--- only the materials which is applicable to the Customers. Exclusion--- The materials which is not applicable to the Customers. 368. Assign Sales Office To Sales Area (tvkbz)? IMG -> Enterprise Structure -> Assignment -> Sales and Distribution -> Assign sales Office to Sales Area. 369. Maintain Sales Office (tvbur)? you define the sales offices in your company. The definition of sales offices is optional. For each sales office, you can determine the printer for output based on the sales documents in different ways. IMG -> Enterprise Structure -> Definition -> Sales and Distribution -> Maintain Sales Office. 370. How To Do Customization Of Rebate Processing In Sap Sd? activate rebate in customer master data selling material should be activated in MM data sales org. should be activated billing doc should be activated 371. Setting Up Sales Area (tvta)? All the sales are made from a particular sales Area. For creating a Sales Order Sales Area is compulsory. IMG ->Enterprise Structure -> Assignment -> Sales and Distribution -> Set up sales area. 372. Assigning Division To Sales Organization (tvkos)? IMG -> Enterprise Structure -> Assignment -> Sales and Distribution -> Assign division to sales organization. 373. Which Partner Function Realent For Credit Limit? Sold to party is relevant for credit limit. 374. Maintaining Division (tspa)? Division is a way of grouping materials, products, or services. IMG -> Enterprise Structure -> Definition -> Logistics - General -> Define, copy, delete, check division. 375. Name Three Areas/processes Which Use Condition Technique In Sd? Material determination, pricing determination, Output determination, Account determination. 376. Assigning Distribution Channel To Sales Organization (tvkov)? This assignment ensures, a Sales Organization can supply Materials to Customers through this Distribution Channel. IMG -> Enterprise Structure -> Assignment -> Sales and Distribution > Assign distribution channel to sales organization. 377. Explain What A Condition Table And An Access Sequence Are And The Relationship Between Them? Condition table defines the combination of fields (the key) that identifies an individual condition record. Access sequence is a search strategy that the system uses to find valid data for a particular condition type. 378. Maintaining Distribution Channel (tvtw)? Distribution Channel is the way, in which Products or Services reach Customers. IMG -> Enterprise Structure -> Definition -> Sales and Distribution -> Define, copy, delete, check distribution channel. 379. What Is A Condition Type? What Are The Two Main Groups Of Condition Types? Condition type is a representation in the system of your daily pricing activities. Fixed Amount & Percentage. 380. Assigning Sales Organization To Company Code (tvko~bukrs)? This assignment ensures all the sales made through this Sales Organization are accounted for in the assigned Company Code (Company Code is created by FI Consultant). IMG -> Enterprise Structure -> Assignment -> Sales and Distribution -> Assign Sales Organization to Company Code. 381. Which Partner Function Is Relevant When It Comes To Tax Calculation In The Sales Order? Ship*to party. 382. Maintaining Sales Organization (tvko)? Sales Organization is an organizational unit responsible for the sale of certain products or services. IMG -> Enterprise Structure -> Definition -> Sales and Distribution -> Define, copy, delete, check Sales organization. 383. Where Would You Specify That A Condition Type Is A Discount Or A Surcharge? In Condition Type Details Screen. 384. Define Credit Control Area (t014)? Company is created by FI Consultant. The credit control area is an organizational unit that specifies and checks a credit limit for customers. A credit control area can include one or more company codes. It is not possible to assign a company code to more than one control area. Within a credit control area, the credit limits must be specified in the same currency. IMG -> Enterprise Structure -> Definition -> Financial Accounting-> Define Credit Control Area. 385. You Want To List All Condition Records For A Certain Material Or A Certain Sales Organization. How Would You Do That? By creating pricing Reports. 386. Edit, Copy, Delete, Check Company Code (t001)? Company is created by FI Consultant. The company code is an organizational unit used in accounting. It is used to structure the business organization from a financial accounting perspective. IMG -> Enterprise Structure -> Definition -> Financial Accounting -> Define, copy, delete, check Company Code. 387. Can You Explain What A Statistical Condition Is? Give An Example For A Statistical Condition? VPRS. 388. For What Do You Use Customer Hierarchies? Pricing, Rebate. 389. Name The Influencing Factors For Pricing Procedure Determination During Sales Order Entry? Customer, Sales Document Type and Sales Area. 390. Can You Copy Condition Records? If Yes, Are There Any Restrictions? Yes. Field specific. 391. Tax Jurisdiction Processing Is A Close Link Between Which Two Modules? FI & SD. 392. What Is The Difference Between Erb And Eru Account Keys? Erb--- is the sales deduction account key used for rebate processing. Eru--- is the accruals key used in pricing For rebate processing it is used for difference in sales Revenues. 393. From Which Documents Can You Create A Performa Invoice? Sales order or delivery. 394. What Is The Difference Between Pgi Cancellation And Returns Order? PGI cancellation--- is done before the transportation of goods. Return order--- means it’s already transported reached customer in requested date. 395. When You Create A Credit Memo Request Do You Always Have To Refer To A Sales Order Or Any Other Previous Document? Only sales order. 396. What Are Incoterms? Where Do We Fix Them? Where Do You Find In Regular Process? Incomers or international comm. terms and u find in CMR - Sales area Data - billing Tab. 397. Can One Business Area Be Valid For Several Company Codes? Yes. 398. Explain The Business Flow Of An Implementation Project? Project preparation -------->Business blue prints, Realization-------->Support. 399. There Is An Interface Between Sd And Fi In Invoicing. Can You Think Of Another Interface Between Sd And Fi? Credit check, Tax calculation, and Cost estimate. 400. An Order Item With Different Shipping Point Copied Into The Sales Deliveries? Yes,but delivery split will be resulted. 401. How To Close The Backorders? Through availability check and TOR you can close the back Order process. 402. Tell Process Of Ticket Flow From Client Side To You? Normally tickets will come to the helpdesk which were sent By End-users thru client specific internal mail id, then we will take up the tickets ans then access the production Server according to the ticket. 403. What Is The Team Size? Duration Of The Project.? Hardly the team of the SD will be 4 to 5 and entire team of the project will be around 20-24 (all modules like fi/co, SD, mm, pp, hr, QM, pm). If its big project, it will be around 40. Team size means the employees who you are working on sap r/3 implementation. For the project completion it will take around 8-10 months to get into golive. After that, post implementation for 3 months. After that supporting it depends as project time line for every company is different. 404. What Is Sap R/3? A third generation set of highly integrated software modules that performs common business function based on multinational leading practice. Takes care of any enterprise In R/3 system all the three servers like presentation; application server and database server are located at different system. 405. What Are Wf And Its Importance? Business Work Flow: Tool for automatic control and execution of cross-application processes. This involves coordinating the persons involved, the work steps required, and the data, which needs to be processed (business objects). The main advantage is reduction in throughput times and the costs involved in managing business processes. Transparency and quality are enhanced by its use. 406. What Two Ways Of Number Assignment For Documents Or Master Data Do You Know? Explain The Difference Between Them? Internal & External. 407. What Is Ides? International Demonstration and Education System. A sample application provided for faster learning and implementation. 408. Can You Share Master Data Between Several Sales Areas? Yes. 409. Why Do You Usually Choose To Implement Sap? There are number of technical reasons numbers of companies are planning to implement SAP. It’s highly configurable, highly secure data handling, min data redundancy, max data consistency; you can capitalize on economics of sales like purchasing, tight integration-cross function. 410. What Does The Account Group Of The Customer Control? Number assignment, Screen Layout. 411. What Is Sap? SAP is the name of the company founded in 1972 under the German name (Systems, Applications, and Products in Data Processing) is the leading ERP (Enterprise Resource Planning) software package. 412. Different Types Of Erp? SAP, BAAN, JD Edwards, Oracle Financials, Siebel, PeopleSoft. Among all the ERP’s most of the companies implemented or trying to implement SAP because of number of advantages aver other ERP packages. 413. What Are The Two Influence Factors For Field Selection For Customer Master Record Maintenance? Account Group, Transactions. 414. Can Bw Run Without A Sap R/3 Implementation? Certainly. You can run BW without R/3 implementation. You can use pre-defined business content in BW using your non-SAP data. Here you simply need to map the transfer structures associated with BW data sources (Info Cubes, ODS tables) to the inbound data files or use 3rd part tool to connect your flat files and other data sources and load data in BW. Several third party ETL products such as Acta, Informatics, Data Stage and others will have been certified to load data in BW. 415. Name At Least Five Features That You Can Control For The Sale Document Type? Text, Partner, Pricing, Taxes, Output, Delivery. 416. Why Do You Want To Leave Your Current Employer? State how you are looking for a new challenge, more responsibility, experience and a change of environment. 417. What Are Datasets? The sequential file is called datasets. They are used for file handling in SAP. 418. What Are The Different Types Of Source System? SAP R/3 Source Systems, SAP BW, Flat Files and External Systems. 419. Name At Least Five Features That You Can Control For The Schedule Line Category? Relevance for delivery, Availability check, Transfer of Requirements, Goods Movement, Purchasing and Incompletion log. 420. Can One Specify User Specific Dates In Delivery Documents? we can sepcify the dates but with respect to avilability,check and schdule line combination. 421. Explain How The System Can Automatically Determine The Item Category In The Sales Order? Sales document type + Higher level Item category + Item category group + Item Usage. 422. Explain How The System Can Automatically Determine The Schedule Line Category In The Sales Order? Item category + MRP type. 423. Once The System Determined The Item Level Schedule Line Category Automatically In The Sales Order, Can You Still Change It Manually? Yes. 424. At Which Levels In The Sales Document Can You Have Different Incompletion Procedures? Sales Document Type, Item Category, Schedule Line Category, Partner Functions, Sales Activities. 425. What Is The Item Category Group? Where Do You Maintain It? Item category group is define the features of item and it represent the’s the function and it how will work in sales process. 426. You Want To Set Up A New Condition Type. Name The Necessary Steps You Have To Do If You Want The System To Determine The New Condition Type Automatically During Sales Order Entry? Use this vk11 transaction code. 427. When You Think Of The Five Possible Elements Necessary For The Account Determining During Posting Of A Sales Invoice - Where From Does The System Get The Information? Chart of a/c group, customer a/c group, material a/c group, sales org., and a/c keys. 428. Name The Necessary Steps To Setup A Route? Define the transportation connection points Define the modes of transport and shipping type 429. During Route Determination The System Also Needs To Know The Departure Zone Of The Goods To Be Shipped. How Does This Information Come Into The Sales Order? Customer Master. 430. What Do You Mean By Condition Index, How You Configured In Your Project? Condition index means keep the all condition records what Ever you maintained for particular condition type. If you want process this you should be active index in Condition type. 431. If I Want To Configure The Partner Determinations For Sales Manager And General Manager If The Sales Manager Is Bossiness Partner In Sales Order He Should Only Give 5% Discount And General Manager Should Can Give 10% Discount How Could I Configure This? By using ASAP Methodology we can implement according to There requirement. 432. Can You Specify When Output Should Be Created? If Yes, What Possibilities Do You Have? Yes. Print out, Mail, EDI, Fax. 433. What Does The Material Type Control? Finished goods. 434. What Is The Purpose Of The Request Number Which Is Generated When U Save A Customization? That is used to move your non-cross client customizations. 435. What Makes A Customer A Sold-to? How Can You Check? Customer is regarded as sold to party when he is acting as Person who is buying goods, products can be shipped, he is Billed, and he is Paying for the invoices generated. You can clarify your doubt while creating a Sold to party, Ship to party, Payer, by using respective account groups, Ex :Payer will not be having a Shipping Tab in Sales area Data. 436. What Is The Difference Between General Item Category Group And Item Category Group? Item category group--- is used for SD to configure the item Category and how this item behaves in sales order. General Item category group--- determines the category of the Item like, trading goods, service goods, finished goods Etc... 437. In Which Scenario Order And Billing Has Different Pricing Procedure? When we use rebate. 438. Is It Possible To Block A Material For Sales Order? Is It Possible For The Blocking Customers In The Same? Way...if So.how? Yes u have to go to the MM02 & there go to sales Org 1 tab .Page there u maintain cross distribution chain after that This material is block for sales. If block a material for Plant then u should maintain in MM02 basic data 1 Cross Distribution plant & also if u block a material for Procurement then u should maintain in cross distribution Purchasing data. 439. What Is The Use Of Update Groups In Credit Management? Update group check the how many orders are open &order Reference, how many orders are open in delivery and delivery Reference, how many orders are open in billing. 440. What Is Cr (change Request) In Support Project? The Change Request is that request when you do some thing New in customizing or configuration in the system. Example: When ever working with pricing condition record, the Current Support project has only 3 Key combinations, but user Wants to have one more key combination or need to change the Combination means, it is consider as a change request. 441. Explain How Diff Between Item And Schedule Line Sales Document? ITEM:-In this the system shows all the details of the Item, like material, pricing, or it may be free good, ship-to- Party, batch, etc. SCHEDULE LINE:-It is about delivery date and delivery Quantity. 442. How Many Shipping Points Can You Assign To A Sales Organization? None. 443. If You Generate Bill More Than Credit Limit Then What Will Happen? How can you go for billing? System will block at order level Or delivery level only. 444. Can We Rename Movement Types? We cannot rename movement types. 445. What Do You Assign Distribution Channels And Divisions? Sales Organizations. 446. How We Maintain One Material At A Time For Two Company Codes? We have to extend the material from one plant to another Plant. 447. What Are The Highest Organizational Units In Sd, Mm.pp, Fi, Co? A: SD: Sales Organizations. MM: Plant PP: Plant FI: Company Code CO: Controlling Area 448. Basic Elements Of Condition Technique? There are 5 basic elements of condition technique: Creating condition table(s), Access Sequence, Condition Type, Procedure, Placing the Condition type in the Procedure. 449. Is It Possible To Automate Output Processing? Yes, we can use output determination procedure to automate Output processing. This is based on Condition technique. We Have to assign the output determination procedure. 450. What Is A Credit Control Area? What Relationship Exists Between Credit Control Areas And Company Codes? Credit control area. Organizational unit in an organization checks credit limits for customers. A credit control area can include one or more company codes. 451. What Are The Steps In Consignment Processing? Company fills the goods at customer site, Still it is the property of company, is called as Consignment fill up, (CF) .When the customer consumes the material company issues the Invoice is called as consignment issue (CI) .If the customer finds that he got any material defective he Returns is called as consignment return (CR) .Which is not sold by the consumer, the company will pick This stock consignment Pick up (CP). 452. Name The Three Internal Organizational Elements Within A Sales Organization And Briefly Explain Their Function. Sales Office--- Geographical aspects of the organization in business development and sales are defined using the term sales office. A sales office can be considered as a subsidiary. Sales offices are assigned to sales areas. If you enter a sales order for a sales office within a certain sales area, the sales office must be assigned to that area. Sales Group--- The staff of a sales office may be subdivided into sales groups. For example, sales groups can be defined for individual divisions. Salespersons--- Individual personnel master records are used to manage data about salespersons. You can assign a sales person to a sales group in the personnel master record. 453. What Are The Techniques In Delivery Scheduling? Backward scheduling & forward Scheduling. Backward scdg-- System calculates Requested delivery date. Forward Scheduling--- If the material is not avl. On that date the system calculates the earliest possible delivery date based on the material avl. Date. 454. What Is The Difference Between Condition Type Ek01 And Ek02? EK01 is a calculated cost EK02 is estimated cost 455. Which Three Organizational Elements Make Up A Sales Area And Briefly Explain Their Function? Sales organization: --- An organizational unit that sells and distributes products, negotiates terms of sale, and is responsible for these transactions. Distribution channel: --- Channel through which salable materials or services reach customers. Typical distribution channels include wholesale, retail and direct sales. You can assign a distribution channel to one or more sales organizations. Division: --- Product groups can be defined for a wide-ranging spectrum of products. For every division you can make customer-specific agreements on, for example, partial deliveries, pricing and terms of payment. Within a division you can carry out statistical analyses or set up separate marketing. 456. Is It Possible To Create New Sales Order Types? Yes it’s possible to create a new sales order type but Generally it is advised to copy standard one and proceed as It is connected in so many places 457. Is It Possible To Change Existing Standard Item Categories? Yes, its is possible in SAP but u never do this method Because u have a lot of problems because suddenly u need for Standard functionality in this case u couldn't remember. 458. What Are The Delivery Possibilities, When There Is Not Enough Stock Available? When there not enough stock system will give the next Delivery date by checking the availability of that quantity of Material. 459. What Is Delivery Group And What Is Its Purpose? Delivery group is grouping of all sub items to be delivery at one time. Mostly used in bill of materials. It is more required in bom when u specify the delivery of diff material at the same time which comes under a header item. let’s say if u wants to deliver the monitor of pc today, cpu tomorrow etc how it would be? to avoid that we specify the delivery group so that all the sub items under header items are delivered togther. 460. How Can We Delete The Sales Orders? How Can Invoices Be Cancelled Or Deleted? You can very well delete sales order using transaction VA02, but with a constraint that no subsequent document is created against it. You cannot delete an Invoice. You can only cancel it with (VF11) if the relevant accounting document is not been generated. Ask your FI guy to reverse the accounting doc. Only after the accounting doc is reversed and/or deleted, you can cancel your invoice. You also need to check if any TAX documents are generated with your Invoice. You need to reverse/delete those documents also. 461. Relation Ship Between Sales Organization And Plants? Many too many. 462. What Is Partner Type? Example It? One type of Partner-- who supplies goods is called VENDOR. One type of Partner-- who Purchases from you is called CUSTOMER. One type of Partner-- who works for you is called Employee or Personnel. One type of Partner-- who helps in improving your business is Called CONTACT PERSON. 463. We Can Define Our Own Exchange Rate Types And Use Them Instead Of The Defaulted Types, 'm', 'b' And 'g'. How Can We Overwrite Default Types In Sd? Exchange rate gets copied from the customer master record. Exchange rate types are to be maintained for the customer in the sales screen. 464. Item Category Group? Where You Maintain It? For standard material item category group is Norm For Bom material item category group is Erla/lumf For Third party material item category group is BANS. 465. What Are The Influencing Factors For Account Determination For Invoice? Chart of a/c AAG of customer AAG of material A/c key 466. What Is Condition Type? Tell Me The Main Groups? A condition type is one which describes the what the purpose Of that condition types are used to define how the particular condition is going to perform. 467. What Is Pricing Procedure? Pricing procedure is a systematic and sequential use of Condition types to arrive at a right value of the product. 468. Explain The Steps To Setup A Route? A Route is part of shipping which is determined Departure Zone Shipping conditions Transportation Group Transportation zone 469. Diff. Between Inquiry And Quotation? Inquiry--- is just a simple document showing the interest Your customer on products and services. Quotation--- is a legal agreement you offer to you Customer. You agree to the customer that you will charge a Particular amount. 470. What Is Material Type Control? Material type control is similar to account group control For customer master. The material type and the industry Are working helps to control the data Material. 471. Can We Get Deleted Sales Order Numbers? Firstly u cannot delete the sales orders once they are saved You can only cancel the sale order or reject the sale Order, in that case you can get the rejected sales order Numbers. 472. What Is Difference Between The Header Level Condition And Item Level Condition? Header level conditions are for the whole document, while Item level condition is for the particular item only. 473. What Is Main Purpose Of Maintaining The Master Data? Coz master data is responsible for all the records like Sales order, delivery and billing and as well as in Customer payments. It is mandatory. 474. Tell Me Some Different Partner Functions? Sold to party --- The person who places the order. (SP). Ship to Party --- The person who receives the goods. (SH). Bill to party ---The person who receives the Bills (BP). Payer ---The person who pays the payment (PY). 475. On What Tax Is Calculated On Base Price Or Net Price? We can calculate tax on both (net price/gross price) as per Requirement because options are available. 476. Bill Of Material Means? Bills of material means combining a group of materials in Two products. In which included header level item and item level item. When header level item is relevant for pricing then item level item is not, when item level item is relevant for pricing then header level item is not. 477. What Is The Difference Between Vk11 And Vk31? Tcode vk11 used for individual Maintenance of condition record And Tcode vk31 used for mass Maintenance of condition record. 478. Bom Used In Which Modules? MM, PP, SD, CRM. 479. What Is Backorder Processing Or Partial Delivery? While doing sales order the material is not available some Times at that time we give the delivery date if the goods available earlier than delivery date can go back with sales order and deliver the goods before first delivery date. This process called as Backorder processing. 480. How Can We Assign One Credit Limit To Two Customers? Create a customer group and then assign it to CCA. 481. What Is The Access Sequence For Header Conditions? Access sequence is a search strategy which finds the right Condition record from the condition table. 482. What Is Difference Between The Item Proposal And Dynamic Proposal? Item proposal--- in which we will manual selects the items from the list of items for that particular customer, It contains material and quantity what the customer regularly purchase. Next time if the customer comes and places an order system copies material and quantity from item proposal. Dynamic proposal--- sale order is raised items are automatically determined in that order. 483. What Does U Mean By Accruals? All customer Rebate accounts are posted in accruals. 484. What Is Material Determination? Can You Do Two Materials For One Material? Material Determination is nothing but an alt. material to the original material. With 2 materials we cannot swap. 485. Where Do You Maintain Factory Calendar? Factory calendar is maintain in plant Factory calendar is used to fix up the working dates and Holidays. 486. How Is Credit Control Determined? Credit control is determined in the combination COMPANY CODE + CUSTOMER RISK CATEGORY + CREDIT GROUP = CREDIT CONTROL AREA. One Company code can be assigned too many credit control areas And multiple company codes are not assigned to one credit Control area. 487. What Does U Mean By Exclusive In Access Sequence? Exclusive is a track point for access sequence if the Exclusive indicator is set, if a valid condition is found by the system in a cond. table, it will stop Searching and will not go to next cond.table. 488. What Are The Parameters That U Can See In Fd32? you can see address of the customer, Central data, status and payment history of the customer. 489. Difference Between Discount And Rebate? Rebate--- is an agreement between Sales Org. rebates is a special discount which occasionally gives. Special discount paid to a customer once he achieves sales volume in a given period of time. Discount--- is a general disc. Normally applicapable in the business transactions in a regular base. Discount is the one which all the customers can get. 490. What Is The Difference Between General Item Category And Item Category Group In Mm01 Sales Org 2? Item category: It is an indicator that determines the characteristics of a Document item. Item category group: It define the characteristics of the material and what the role in sales order. 491. Relationship Between Company Code And Sales Organization? ONE to MANY. 492. How You Change Sold-to-party Into Ship-to-party? You can’t change sold to party to ship to party. But you can Change ship to party to sold to party because sold to party will be having all the partner Functions. 493. If One Company Can Maintain One Customer Number For Different Sales Areas Is It Possible With Out Any Changes? No it is not possible because one company can have only use one customer number. Customer Number is a unique feature in SAP. 494. How Is Pricing Procedure Determined? Sales Area, Customer pricing procedure & Document pricing Procedure. 495. How Is Item Category Determined? Sales doc type, Item category group, item usage, higher level item and item category all these purpose by default item category come. 496. What Is Condition Exclusion? Condition exclusion groups contain group of discount Condition types from this customer will not receive all Discounts but receives one best discount of all (ov32). 497. How To Configure Partial Deliveries? Check the box in customer master or in delivery type (LF) Check partial delivery indicator. 498. What Is Condition Supplement? Condition supplement: If company wants to give discount irrespective of any Combination till certain period condition supplement will Use. System by default proposes the discount along with Base price in the pricing procedure 499. What Is The Purpose To Differentiate The Sales Document Type? If there are different business process, if you want to In that case you can configure different document types (For ex. domestic sales you can create order type DOR & for export sales you can configure EOR). You can also assign different number range to different Document types for different business process. 500. Third Party Sale? A third-party sales process generally happens when you Can’t make delivery to the customer due to insufficient Stock or some other reasons. In that situation normally you Will go for third party sales process. 501. If We Have Three Plants & One Material No. Then How To Extend Single Material To All Three Plants? Use T_Code MM01 and enter the same material with Organization and plant as you require. The message will Appear "Material has been extended". 502. How Revenue Account Is Determined? Application Chart of accounts Sales Org Condition type Account assignment group from customer Account assignment group from material Account key 503. If We Have Three Sales Areas & Single Customer. How To Extend One Customer To Three Sales Areas? You will go to xd01 transaction code and you will use Reference data to copy another sales area. 504. What Is Transfer Order? Transfer order is an internal document to move goods from Storage to picking area. 505. What Is An Mrp Type? MRP is Material Resource planning which is based on Transfer of Requirements while processing the Sale Order. 506. Fields In Material Master? Basicdata1, basic data2, sales org1, sales org2, sales general plant data, sales text, mrp, purchasing data and accounting. 507. Types Of Billing? order related billing delivery related billing Performa invoice for order Performa invoice for delivery credit memo debit memo cash sale 508. What Is The Diff. Between Billing And Invoice? Invoice is whenever we can send to the goods send to the customer because to check the Goods. Billing document is a total goods bill. 509. How Is Access Seq. Controlled? Access Sequence is controlled by the accesses. It can also be Controlled by requirements, but requirements only determine. 510. How Is Step And Counter Differentiated? Step--- Number is used to specify the sequential order for Condition types. Counter--- is used when two or more Condition Types required The same Step Number. 511. What Is Line Item? Line item is a row where all the details of particular item whenever you get the all information of particular item then double click on the row. 512. What Is Use Of Customer Group? Customer group is represented the different-2 customer statically point and it define the customer pricing and discount. 513. Where Is Shipping Conditions Stored? In material master data, and shipping determination. 514. How Is Plant Determined? Plant is determined by material and shipping point determination. 515. How Can We Supers The Field I.e. Sales Office And Sales Group In Va01 Create Order Initial Screen? you goes for sales area data and in that you can Supers, optional, and also mandatory, you can done which Element u wants like sales office. Sales group and, etc. 516. Why Does U Maintain Sales Office? A Sales office establishes contact between the firm and the Regional market. It represents the business different areas. 517. How Is Storage Location Determined? It is determined by Plant + Storage condition + Shipping Point. 518. How Is Shipping Point Determined? Shipping point will be determined based on the shipping Conditions, loading group and delivery plant. 519. In Third Party How Sales Order Changes To Purchase Req. Automatically? In a third party in schedule category we have a field Called purchasing requisition. Scheduling category is cs purchase req is automatically generate and we want generate with transaction code me51 to create purchase requirements. 520. Which Data Is Updated When You Create A Billing Document? Financial document is going to generated . Billing due list up dates . Credit management up dates. 521. List The System Modules That Are Included In The Financial Application Component? The following SYSTEM modules are included in the financial application component: FI — Financial Accounting. CO— Controlling. EC— Enterprise Controlling. IM— Investment Management. PS— Project System. 522. List The System Modules That Are Included In The Human Resource Application (human Capital Management) Component? The following SYSTEM modules are included in the human resource application component: PA — Personnel Administration. PT— Personnel Time Management. PY— Payroll. 523. List The System Modules That Are Included In The Logistic Application Component? The following SYSTEM modules are included in the logistic application component: SO__ Sales and Distribution. MM__ Materials Management. PP__ Production Planning and Control. LE__Logistics Execution. QM__Quality Management. CS__Customer Service. 524. What Is The Purpose Of Transaction Code In System? The transaction code is the short path to reach to a specific screen in SYSTEM. Instead of going through the routine menu, you can enter the Transaction Code and then press "Enter", which would directly take you to the specific Transaction. For example, you can access the VA22 transaction code, to reach to the Change Quotation screen. However, the VA01 transaction code is used to create Sales document in SYSTEM. 525. What Is Meant By Match Code In System? The comparison key that helps you to find the key of a specific database record depending on the field value entered in the record is known as match code. On the basis of the match code, the System then displays a list of records from which you can select the appropriate one. 526. Explain The Three Main Areas Of Customer Master Data? Customer master is a part of the SD module and forms the basis for customer-related transactions. It is divided into three areas: General Data — It is used for the maintenance of general customer details such as name, address, phone/fax nos. and so on. Sales Area Data — It is used for Sales related data maintenance. Company Code data — It used for accounts related data maintenance. 527. What Is The Purpose Of Implementation Guide (img Menu) In The System? The Implementation Guide (IMG Menu) is used to collectively group the areas that must be configured & customized and form a basic structure of an organization in the System to run. 528. How Will You Maintain A Company Code In The System? To maintain a company code, navigate the following menu path: Customizing Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)-> Enterprise Structure->Definition -> Financial Accounting-> Edit, Copy, Delete, Check Company Code. 529. What Do You Mean By Enterprise Resource Planning (erp)? ERP is a way to integrate processes and data of an organization into a single system to provide Easy access and workflow in an organization. It refers to the way in which large organizations efficiently plan to use resources to their fullest. 530. List The Advantages Of Implementing An Erp System In An Organization? The advantages of implementing an ERP System in an organization are as follows: Various processes and workflow of an organization are integrated in a single System. Efficient utilization of resources in an organization. Ability to easily share organizational data across different departments. Improves efficiency and productivity levels. Lower costs. Better customer service. 531. Specify The Role Of The Sales And Distribution (sd) Module In An Erp System? The SD module is an application module for supply chain and operational performance management and provides support to customers. This module is integrated with the Material Management (MM) and Production Planning (PP) functional modules. It also allows organizations to input Sales price of products for customers and check for open orders. 532. What Are The Functions Of The R/3 System? The R/3 System provides the following functions: Integration — Provides a complete integration of the various data transfers, which, in turn, is helpful in making good-quality reports. Saving time with integration — Helps reduce the time needed to close the books of account. Automation of consolidation procedure — Saves time and cost as there is no need to manually enter all the documents. Customizing the software according to the needs — Provides the facility of creating new programs whenever the requirement arises. Cost effective audits — Provides the facility to the auditor for performing interactive analysis of special information. Easy to learn and use — Provides context-sensitive functions and extensive online documentation that is easy to understand and learn. Information System — Includes functions for creating reports. It provides information through exceptional and interactive reporting. International accounting — Allows parallel valuation approaches at all levels for external and internal accounting purposes by using different currencies. 533. What Is R/3 System Landscape? Landscape is an architecture of servers. The following are three different landscapes for SYSTEM: Development —In a development server, a technical/function person creates the programs or configures the System as per the company's requirement and sends it to the quality server. Quality— In this server, team members test the development/ configuration with various parameters. Then the final configuration is transported from Development Server to Production Server. Production — Through this server, the software is finally handed over to client for users. 534. What Are The Databases Supported By The System R/3 System? The SYSTEM R/3 System provides support for the following databases: ADABAS D. DB2/400. DB2/Common Server. DB2/MVS. Microsoft SQL Server. Oracle. Oracle Parallel Server. 535. What Is The Role Of An Abaper In The Sd Module? The ABAPer uses the data transfer tools, such as BDC/LSMW, to upload huge data, such as Customer master data. ABAPer writes the Z-Development and programmes as specified by the functional consultant as per the business requirements. 536. Who Can Be The Business Partner In The System? A business partner in the System can be: Customer. Vendor. Contact person. Employee recognized as Sales personnel. Customized as per the specific requirement of business. 537. Explain Badis And Its Relevance? In the R/3 System, System provides an enhancement technique called business add-ins (BADis). BADis are business transaction events helpful to bundle program, menu, and screen enhancements into a single business add-in. 538. What Is The Quick Viewer? The Quick Viewer is a very useful tool to create reports in System. It helps create reports without actually doing any programming. It is similar to an ABAP Query; however, it does not have all the capabilities that the ABAP query procedure has. 539. Which Kinds Of Servers Are Used To Define The Functioning Of A System? There are three servers in the SYSTEM application modules: Development server. Quality server. Production server. 540. What Is The Role Of Erp In A Business Environment? Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) is a software package, which is designed for the integrated management of the various business processes, such as inquiry, order placement, invoicing, and billing. It was initially designed for manufacturing industries to manage the core business areas, such as production and finance. With the popularity of the ERP package, its functionalities also extended to cover the complete business management. 541. Define Ides. IDES stands for International Demonstration and Education System and is an application used to quickly learn and implement ERP. 542. What Is R/3? R/3 means the three-tiered architecture used by the system. The three tiers are as follows: Database Server. Application Server. Presentation Server. 543. What Is A Division In The Sales And Distribution Module? A division refers to a product group that can be defined for a wide range of products or services. In Sales organization, there can be multiple divisions, which can also include customer-specific arrangements. 544. What Do You Mean By A Sales Office In The Sd Module? The geographically located unit of a Sales organization refers to a Sales office in the SD module. 545. What Do You Mean By A Shipping Point And Loading Point In The Sd Module? A shipping point refers to the point from where the deliveries of products are shipped and, one or more plants can have the same shipping point. However, the subdivision of a shipping point refers to a loading point, which is manually entered in the header data of a delivery as per customization. 546. What Do You Mean By The Terms Sales Office, Sales Groups, And Sales Employee In The Sd Module? The geographical groups created for an organization to structure a Sales team are known as Sales office. A Sales office is then assigned to one or more Sales Area. The staff of a Sales office is divided into Sales groups and then Sales employee is assigned to a Sales group. A Sales employee refers to the individual with personnel master records that are used to manage data of that Sales employee. 547. What Does The Prefixes Va, Vl, Vt, And Vf Of A Transaction Code Stand For? The definitions for the prefixes VA, VL, VT, and VF of a transaction code are as follows: VA —Sales Order. VL —Delivery. VT—Shipment. VF—Billing. 548. What Do The Suffixes 01, 02, And 03 Of A Transaction Code Represent? The suffixes 01, 02, and 03 of a transaction code represent the following: 01 —Create. 02—Change. 03—Display. 549. How Can You Configure The Sales Districts? Navigate the following menu path to configure the Sales district: Customizing Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)->Sales and Distribution->Master Data->Business Partners->Customers-> Sales->Define Sales Districts . 550. How Can You Assign A Shipping Point To A Plant? You can assign a shipping point to a plant by navigating the following menu path: Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)->Enterprise Structure-> Assignment->Logistics Execution->Assign Shipping Point to Plant. 551. Suppose That A New Info Structure Is Created And The Update Rules Are Activated For It. How Would You Then Transport It To Production Client? After the approval from the QA team the info structure can be transported in the time when no documents are created or posted. 552. How Is The Company Code Created? Perform the following steps to create the company code: Customization Implementation Guide(IMG Menu)->Enterprise Strurture->Definition->Financial Accounting->Define Company Code. 553. What Is The Relationship Between Sales Organizations And Company Codes? There exists many to one relationship between sales organizations and company codes. 554. Give The Name Of The Central Organizational Element Used In Purchasing? The central organizational element used in purchasing is called the Purchase Organization. 555. What Is The Relationship Between Sales Organizations Or Distribution Channel And Plants? There exists many to many relationship between sales organizations and plants. 556. What Is The Relationship Between Sales Organizations, Plants, And Company Codes? There exists many to many to one relationship between sales organizations, plants, and company codes. 557. Mention The Total Number Of The Shipping Points That Can Be Assigned To A Sales Organization? You do not assign shipping point to sales organization but assign it to plant only. 558. List The Transaction Codes Used To Create A Customer In The Sd Module. VD01 is the transaction code used to create a customer in the SD module. To create customer centrally, the T.Code is XD01 559. List The Basic Elements Of A Customer Master Record? The following are the basic elements of a customer master record: General Data. Company Code Data. Sales Area Data. 560. State Few Examples Of Common Material Types? The examples of common material types are as follows: DIEN— Service Item. HALS— Semi Finished Good. FERT—Finished Good. HAWA —Trading Item. NLAG—Non Inventoried. ROH— Raw Material. UNBW—Non-Valuated Item. 561. List Few Common Material Master Views? The following are few relevant material master views: Accounting 1, 2. Material Requirements Planning (MRP) 1, 2, 3. Purchasing. General Plant Data Storage 1, 2. Sales Org Data 1, 2. 562. How Can You Create Customer-material Info Records In The Sd Module? Navigate the following menu path to create Customer-Material Info Records: SYSTEM menu->Logistics->Sales and Distribution-> Master Data->Agreements->Customer Material Information | - Create. 563. Which Transaction Code And Movement Type Help In Adding Stock (from Legacy Stocks) For The Newly Created Material Type Into A Particular Plant After Creating A New Material Type In System? For such a situation, you can use transaction code MB1C and the movement type 561. 564. How Can You Define Your Own Hierarchy Types? Perform the following steps to define your own hierarchy type: Enter a one-character alphanumeric key and description. Enter a default partner function that is valid for the hierarchy type. Save the hierarchy type. 565. How Will You Create Material In Both Company Codes While Working On Inter Company Sales? While working on Inter Company Sales, the transaction code MM01 is used to create material related to the plant and Sales organization. For the other company code, this material can be extended if the server being used is common. 566. Which Factors Do You Need To Verify If The Tax Field In The Customer Master And Material Master Is Not Displayed? We need to make sure that for all the countries in the OVK1, we have defined a tax category. At the same time we also need to verify whether the tax classes are defined in OVK3 and OVK4. 567. List The Sequence Of Steps Performed By Underlying System To Determine Tax Number And Tax Classification? The underlying System uses the following sequence of steps to determine tax number and tax classification: If the payer has a VAT registration number and is identical to the sold-to party, the tax number and tax classification are copied from the payer. The tax number is copied on the basis of the "country of destination relevant for taxes." If step 1 does not apply and If the Ship-to Party has a VAT registration number and the Sold-to Party does not have the same, tax number and tax classification are copied from the Ship-to Party. If step 2 does not apply, then tax number and tax classification are copied from the Sold-to Party. 568. How Do You Define Tax Relevancy Of Master Records? The following menu path is navigated to define tax relevancy of the master record: Customizing Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)->Sales and Distribution->Basic Functions->Taxes->Define Tax Relevancy of Master Records->Material Taxes. 569. Imagine You Are Defining Tax Determination Rule For A Country Which Has Regional Tax Code Also. How Will You Define Regional Code? The following menu path is navigated to define regional tax codes: Customizing Implementation Guide (IMG Menu) -> Sales and Distribution -> Basic Functions -> Taxes -> Define Regional Codes -> Define County Code. 570. What Are The Transaction Codes That Are Used To Create And Change Customer Master? The following are certain T-codes used to create and manipulate Customer master: XD01 — Creates a customer. XD02— Changes a customer. XD03— Displays a customer. XD04— Changes customer changes centrally. XD05- Blocks a customer centrally. XD06— Marks a customer for deletion. XD07— Changes a customer Account Group. XD99— Maintains customer maintenance. XDN1 — Maintains number ranges for a customer. 571. Which Transaction Code Is Used To View Messages In System? The T.Code SE91 is used to view all messages in SYSTEM. 572. What Do You Understand By Transferring The Legacy Data To System? It means to transfer the legacy data to the newly installed & configured System. The data such as customer and material maintained by an organization before the installation of ERP System is known as the legacy data. You can use various tools to transfer the legacy data to the System, such as Batch Data Communication (BDC) and Legacy System Migration Workbench (LSMW) Programs. 573. Specify A Way To Block The Transaction For A Material Flagged For Deletion? You can block the transaction for a material flagged for deletion by customizing the Sales status feld in the Sales organization view of the material master. 574. List The Master Records From Which A Sales Order Receives The Organizational Data For A Specific Sales Area? The master records from which a Sales order receives the master data are as follows: Customer Master Record. Material Master Record. 575. Which Document Do You Use To Enter Shipping Conditions And How Are These Conditions Used In Determining The Shipping Point? The customer master record in the shipping screen and in the Sales document type is used to specify shipping conditions. The shipping conditions are used to decide the shipping point by copying them into the Sales document during order creation. 576. Suppose That You Have Blacklisted A Customer And Now Want To Block That Customer. How Can You Do That? A customer can be blocked by navigating the following menu path: SYSTEM Menu->Logistics->Sales and Distribution->Master Data->Business Partner->Customer-> Block . 577. Give The Menu Path To Define The Customer Hierarchy Types? The menu path to define the customer hierarchy types is: Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)->Sales and Distribution->Master Data ->Business Partners -> Customers -> Customer Hierarchy -> Define Hierarchy Types. 578. Give The Menu Path To Set The Partner Determination For Hierarchy Categories? The menu path to set the partner determination for hierarchy categories is: Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)->Sales and Distribution->Master Data->Business Partners-> Customers -> Customer Hierarchy->Set Partner Determination for Hierarchy Categories. 579. List The Items For Which You Can Define The Customer Hierarchy? The customer hierarchy can be defined for the following: Customer Master. Sales Document Header. Sales Document Item. Delivery. Shipment. Billing Header. Billing Item. Sales Activities (CAS). 580. Give The Menu Path To Assign A Sales Area To The Customer Hierarchy? The menu path to assign a Sales area to the Customer Hierarchy is: Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)->Customer Hierarchy-> Assign Sales Areas. 581. Give The Menu Path To Define The Product Hierarchies? The menu path to define the product hierarchies is: Implementation Guide (IMG Menu) -> Logistics-General -> Material Master -> Settings for Key Fields -> Data Relevant to Sales and Distribution -> Define Product Hierarchies . 582. Suppose That You Create A New Customer Account Group And The System Increments It By An Arbitrary Value. What Would You Do? The existing problem is called number range buffering. You need to perform the following step: Transaction code->SNUM->debitor-> change mode and change the numbers. 583. What Are The Customer Tables For Sd Module? The following are the Customer tables of the SYSTEM SD module: KNA1 — general data. KNB1 — customer master. KNB4— customer payment history. KNB5— customer master. KNBK— bank data. KNKA — credit management. KNKK— credit control area data. KNVI— sales area data. KNVP— Partner Function key. KNVD__output type. KNVS__customer master ship data. KLPA__customer vendor link. 584. List The Standard Output Types In The Sales And Distribution Module? The following are the standard output types in the SD module: Sales Order Confirmation —BAOO. Outbound Delivery Note —LDOO. Billing document —RDOO. Inquiry —AFOO. Quotation —ANOO. Contract —KO00. 585. What Do You Mean By User Exit? A user exit is implemented as a call to a function module. A customer's developer can access data objects and program components with the help of user exit. User Exits are used in case there are some specific needs which are not met by the Standard System. 586. What Is The Need Of User Exit? User Exits are used in case there are some specific needs which are not met by the Standard System. The purpose of user exit is to add a particular business-related functionality to standard SYSTEM. 587. What Do You Mean By Rebate Processing? Rebate refers to a specific discount given to a specific customer for Sales within a specific period of time. For example, a customer gets 2% discount on buying 500 kgs in a particular month and another customer gets 5% discount on buying 2000 kgs in the same month. 588. Imagine You Are Facing A Problem With Logistics Information System (lis) Due To Which After Client Copy, Your Test System Does Not Update Lis Info Structures. When You Save A Delivery, Sales Order, Or Billing Document, An Error Message "update Was Terminated" Is Displayed. How Can You Resolve Such A Problem? In such a problem, you should generate the Info structure and update group again for the client in which your Error Message is displayed. 589. What Do You Mean By Subtotals? Subtotals are generally used in pricing procedures. Subtotals are not tied to condition types. However, you can control the value entered in the fields by assigning subtotals within the pricing procedure. 590. How Can You Configure A Distribution Channel As A Default In The Transaction Field That Requires Distribution Channel Data? Perform the following steps to set a Distribution Channel as default for the transaction field that requires distribution channel data: Use the SU01 transaction code and enter the user ID. Go to the parameters tab page and add VTW parameter. Enter the default Distribution Channel in the parameter value. 591. Can You Perform An Availability Check On A Plant By Excluding A Storage Location? Yes, you can perform availability check in MM by excluding a storage location. 592. List The Transaction Codes With Respect To Rebate Agreement Processing? The following are the transaction codes in the context of rebate agreement processing: VBOl—Create. VB02 —Change. VB03 —Display. 593. What Do You Mean By Payment Terms? The terms of payment that a company offers to a customer based upon which a discount may be given for prompt payment or penalties can be charged in case of late payment made is known "Payment Terms". 594. What Is The Purpose Of Condition Indexes And How Can You Activate Them? The purpose of condition index is to search all records for a specific condition type. For example, you can search all the condition records for the condition type PR00 condition type. You can activate the condition index in the customizing screen for the condition Type PR00 by navigating the following menu path: SPRO->Sales & Distribution->Basic Functions->Pricing->Pricing Control->Deflne Condition Types-> Maintain Condition Types-> Enter PROO. 595. What Is The Role Of User Exit? The empty ABAP forms at particular points in the standard system, where the system allows customers to make enhancements to the way the code functions are called user exits. These are helpful tools to meet the specific business requirements. 596. Which Transaction Code Is Used To View Enhancements In The System? The transaction code SMOD can be used to view all the enhancements in the System. 597. Which Menu Path Should Be Followed To View All The Enhancements In The System? The following menu path can be navigated to view all the enhancements in the system: SYSTEM Menu ->Tools ->ABAP Workbench ->Utilities ->Enhancements -> Definition. 598. List User Exits For Partner Determination? The following are the user exits for partner determination: EXIT_SYSTEMLV09A_001. EXIT_SYSTEMLV09A_002. EXIT_SYSTEMLV09A_003. EXIT_SYSTEMLV09A_004. 599. Describe The Relevance Of Condition Technique In Sales And Distribution (sd)? The condition technique is the most important technique used for configuration in the Sales and Distribution module. It is used for different types of determinations in SD such as pricing, text determination, output determination, account Determination and material determination. It is called condition technique, because it provides a technique to select one from alternative choices, based on conditions, access sequence and condition tables. 600. Which Rounding Rules Are Available In The Course Of Maintaining Condition Types? The following three rounding rules are available while maintaining condition types: Commercial rounding — In case of commercial rounding, a value less than 5 is rounded down to nearest value while the values greater than 5 is rounded up to the nearest value. Always round up — In this case, regardless of the fact whether it is greater than or less than 5, the value is always rounded up to the nearest value. Always round down — In this case, regardless of the fact whether it is greater than or less than 5, the value us always rounded down to the nearest value. 601. How Do You Begin With Defining And Assigning Pricing Procedures? Navigate the following menu path to begin with defining and assigning pricing procedures: Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)->Sales and Distribution->Basic Functions->Pricing ->Pricing Control-> Define and Assign Pricing Procedures->Maintain Pricing Procedures. 602. List The Sequence Of Steps Used To Customize Pricing Procedure? Perform the following steps (in sequence) to customize Pricing Procedure: Put the required fields into the field catalog. Create the required condition tables. Create the required access sequence. Assign the condition tables to the access sequence. Create the condition types. Assign the access sequence to the condition types. Create the determination procedure, if necessary, and assign the condition types to it. Assign the determination procedure. Lastly, create the condition records. 603. Which Topics In Sd Have Impact On Pricing Procedure? The following topics in SD have impact on pricing procedure: Credit management. Payment terms. Cost of Sales. Rebate. 604. How Do You Activate Pricing For Item Category? We can activate pricing for item category by navigating the following menu path: Customizing Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)->Sales and Distribution->Basic Functions-> Pricing->Pricing Control-> Define Pricing by Item Category->Activate Pricing for Item Categories. 605. What Is The Relevance Of The Condition Exclusion Group? The condition exclusion group is a technique to ensure that the customer does not receive all types of discount; rather, the customer receives the best discount out of all given discount condition types. A best condition type is chosen from this "Condition Exclusion Group" based on your configuration. 606. How Do You Maintain Condition Exclusion Group? The following menu path is navigated to maintain condition exclusion group: Customizing Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)-> Sales and Distribution-> Basic Functions-> Pricing-> Condition Exclusions-> Condition Exclusion for Groups of Conditions->Define Condition Exclusion Groups. 607. What Do You Understand By Condition Supplement? The condition supplement is a group of conditions that is applied every time a condition is matched condition supplements will come for a condition if you have maintained pricing procedure under master data of the condition. 608. Explain The Tax Determination Process In Brief ? The tax determination is performed automatically by system. The tax determination is based on the structure of the organization, country, region or city of the plant delivering the products and the country of the receiving customer. It works in coordination with the tax relevancy indicators on the customer master record and material master record. Condition Technique is used for tax determination procedure. 609. How Do You Define Tax Determination Rules In Sd? The following menu path is navigated to define tax determination rules in SD: Customizing Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)->Sales and Distribution->Basic Functions->Taxes-> Define Tax Determination Rules. 610. How Do You Define Dependencies Of Revenue Account Determination? The following menu path is navigated to define dependencies of revenue account determination: Customizing Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)->Sales and Distribution->Basic Functions->Account Assignment/Costing-> Revenue Account Determination->Define Dependencies of Revenue Account Determination. 611. Where And When Are Requirements And Data Transfer Routines Available To Be Assigned Within The System? The general rule of availability of requirements and data transfer routines are as follows: Copying requirements are available to be assigned during transfer of data between documents and texts. Data transfer routines are available during copying between documents and texts. Requirements are available to be assigned to any access sequence as well prior to most functions. Formulae are available to be assigned during pricing determination. 612. List The Divisions Of Data Transfer Routines? The data transfer routines are categorized as: Orders. Deliveries. Billing documents. Sales activities. Shipping units. Texts. Text names. Shipments. 613. How Do You Define And Assign Account Keys In Sd? The following menu path is navigated to define and assign account keys: Customizing Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)->Sales and Distribution->Basic Functions->Account Assignment/Costing-> Revenue Account Determination->Define and Assign Account Keys. 614. How Do You Set Price Limits In Sd? Price limits can be set by navigating the following menu path: Customizing Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)->Sales and Distribution->Basic Functions-> Pricing->Pricing Control-> Define Condition Types-> Define Upper/Lower Limits for Conditions. 615. List The Transaction Codes Related To Condition Record Selection By Condition Type? The following are the transaction codes relating to condition record selection by condition type: —Creates a condition record. —Changes a condition record. —Displays a condition record. 616. What Is Access Sequence In Material Determination? The access sequence is a sequence of steps, which is used by the underlying system to obtain a condition record used for material determination. All the condition records have specific values assigned to it, which determine the order in which the system will read the access sequence. The system starts reading the access sequence with the lowest number step assigned to it and tries to process everything assigned to that particular access sequence through condition table & fields. The whole process is called 'condition technique'. 617. List The Steps For A Condition Technique? Perform the following steps to create a condition record: Place the required fields into the field catalog. Create condition table. Create access sequence. Assign condition table to the access sequence. Create the condition types. Assign the access sequence to the condition types. If needed, create the determination procedure and assign the condition types to it. Assign the determination procedure. Create the condition records. 618. How Do You Configure Transfer Of Requirements? Navigate the following menu path to configure transfer of requirement: Customizing Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)->Sales and Distribution->Basic Functions-> Availability Check and Transfer of Requirements->Transfer of Requirements. 619. Differentiate Individual And Collective Requirements? You can have a transfer of requirement either with an individual requirement or with collective requirements. In the individual transfer of requirements, a single transfer of demand occurs to the MRP for each schedule line. In case of individual transfer, the order quantity, the sales document number, the item number, and requirement class for each schedule line for which the demand has been created are shown by the requirement overview. The collective requirements are group of requirements created over a certain period of time such as on the daily basis, weekly or monthly and transferred to MRP. In this case, requirement overview does not show the single transaction wise descriptions of the requirements, rather it shows details of the group of requirements. The collective requirement is beneficial for the organizations that deal large volume of sales orders daily. 620. List The Key Transaction Codes Relating To Integration Between Logistics In Mm And Sd? The following are the key transactions related to integration between logistics in MM and SD: MMBE—Stock Overview. MD04— Stock / Requirement List. MB53— Plant Stock Availability. CO09—Availability Overview. MB52— Warehouse Stock. MB5M—Expiration Date List. MB5B— Stock for Positioning Date. MB5T—Stock in Transit. MBBS— Valuated Special Stock. MBLB— Stock with Subcontractor. 621. List A Menu Path To Access Stock Requirements Lists? The shortest and simplest menu path to access the stock requirement list is as follows: SYSTEM Menu->Logistics->Materials Management->Material Requirements Planning (MRP)-> MRP Evaluations-> Stock/ Requirements List . 622. What Are The Data On Which The Transfer Of Requirement Is Dependent? The transfer of requirement is dependent on following data: Requirements type. Requirements class. Checking group. Schedule line category. 623. How Do You Define Requirement Class? Customizing Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)->Sales and Distribution->Basic Functions-> Availabiiity Check and Transfer of Requirements->Transfer of Requirements->Define Requirements Classes. 624. What Is Requirement Type? After creation of the requirement classes we need to assign a requirement types to requirement class. A requirement class can be assigned with more than one requirement type, whereas a requirement type cannot be assigned to more than one requirement class. The requirement type can be changed during creation of sales order. 625. List The Search Strategy That The Underlying System Uses To Determine The Requirement Types? The following are the pre-defined search strategy that the underlying system uses to determine the requirement types: The system uses strategy group in the material master to find a requirement type. If the strategy group is not maintained, the system uses MRP group to determine a requirement type. If the MRP group is not defined the underlying system uses material type to determine a requirement type. If none of the above is found, the system follows a special rule and tries to determine a requirement type with the help of item category and MRP type. In case, when the MPR type is not defined the system uses only the item category to determine requirement type. 626. Define The Role Of Availability Check In Sd? Availability checks play an important role in the business sales process. It is a process to determine whether the delivery quantity requested by a customer can be made available for shipping on the delivery date. The availability check is performed at the plant level. 627. Define The Types Of Availability Checks? The following are the three types of availability checks: The availability check on the basis of Availability to Promise (ATP) quantities. The availability check against product allocation. The availability check based on the stand-alone Advanced Planner and Optimizer (APO). 628. What Are The Advantages Of Individual Requirements Over Summarized Requirement? The following are the advantages of individual requirement over summarized requirement: In case of individual requirement processing the back order processing, where as it is not possible in case of summarized requirement processing. In case of individual requirement processing you can access the order line items and schedule line in stock requirement list. 629. What Is The Disadvantage Of Individual Requirement Over Summarized Requirement? The disadvantage of individual requirement processing is in the terms of system performance. It affects the system performance as; each demand is placed immediately into the stock requirement list, which results in processing overhead and may affect the system performance. 630. How Do You Define/maintain Procedure For Each Schedule Line Category? Navigate the following menu path to define a procedure for each schedule line category: Customizing Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)->Sales and Distribution->Basic Functions-> Availability Check and Transfer of Requirements->Transfer of Requirements-> Define Procedure For Each Schedule Line Category. 631. Which Types Of Stock Are Available To Select From While Carrying Out The Availability Check? The following types of stocks are available to select from while carrying out availability check: Safety stock. Stock in transfer. Quality inspection stock. Restricted use stock. 632. What Is The Relevance Of The "product Allocation Found Changes To The Confirmation" Message? The "Product allocation found changes to the confirmation" is displayed during availability check on a line item. It means that the quantity allowed to a customer for a particular stock has exceeded its maximum limit. 633. What Is The Relevance Of The "no Feature Combination Exists..." Message? The "No feature combination exists.." message is related to the product allocation and availability check. This message indicates that no availability check will be carried out. This is because, the underlying system has attempted to do availability check according to product allocation, but errors are found in the setup of the process. 634. What Is Change Request? How Is It Done? The change request is the request which is intended to adopt a new change in the system. After the submission of the change request, the system pops up the change request and shows it in the pop up box. The request name is entered and the requested change is named accordingly. A new request number is generated automatically which consists of the client system name and system generated request number. 635. How Is A Request Released? To release a request, the transaction code associated with a request is entered in the system. The requests are stored under the modifiable or released heading. We need to select the modifiable option that contains the internal request number which needs to be released first and then the external request number. 636. What Is Automatic Posting In Fi? Automatic posting is the process of posting the accounts in the Finance module. The automatic posting configuration does the posting automatically in accounts as determined by the system. This process works as per your configuration as per your business requirements. 637. What Is Item Category And Item Group? The item category is the key field included in the sales cycle. It affects the sales data and schedule line category. Unlike the sales document type which is entered manually in the sales order, the item category is automatically determined by the system by using the determination rule. Whereas item category group examines how a material is processed in the sales document. When processing sales document, the system uses the item category group to examine the item category and suggests it in the respective document. Item category group is defined in the sales Org View 2 of Material Master Record. 638. What Are Outline Agreements? In a business process, the agreements are the type of relationship between the customers and the business. They are done upon the business entities such as material, price, and quantities. These contracts are represented in the system as outline agreements. 639. What Is Quantity Contract? The quantity contract is a contract that is prepared after the issue of quotation but before an order. Quantity contracts are used to limit the quantity of products which a customer can buy. It is a type of arrangement which is followed when the demand for a material is greater than the available supply and the business needs to ensure the product supply evenly among the branches. The standard sales document type for quantity contracts in the system is KM or CQ. 640. What Activities Are Exempted From The Quantity Contracts? The quantity contract does not create a requirement for stock within the plant. Therefore, there is not any assurance on the stock of product availability in the contract. There is not any binding from the organization to produce items or to purchase the items to satisfy the contract. It also have not any schedule lines or a validity date. Also the contract does not mention any specific delivery dates. 641. How A Quantity Contract Can Be Set Up? The quantity contract can be set up by performing the following step: Customizing Implementation Guide(IMG Menu)->Sales and Distribution-> Sales->Sales Documents->Sales Document Header -> Define Sales Document Types. 642. Which Are The Contracts That Appear In The Implementation Guide (img) Menu? The IMG (Customizing Implementation Guide ) contains the menus that are related to the following contracts: Master contracts. Value contracts and contract data related to contract profiles and cancellation. 643. Which Table Is Used To List The Partner Functions In A Delivery? The VPBA table is used to view the partner functions in a delivery. 644. How Is The Pricing Procedure Determined? How Can You Define The Right Pricing Procedure In The Sales Order? The pricing procedure is determined according to the various factors such as: sales area, customer master, and sales documents type. For determining the right pricing procedures in the sales order the transaction code OVKK is used. The rule for pricing procedure determination is as follows: Sales Area. Customer Pricing Procedure. Document Pricing Procedure. 645. How Would You Resolve The Problem "mswt Is Missing" Even When It Is Present In The Rvaa01 Procedure? In such case you need to maintain the condition record for this condition type by using the T.Code VKll.Here you maintain the condition record with a validity period. 646. How Is The Item Text Copied From Sales Order To Delivery? The item text is copied from sales order by performing the following step: IMG Menu -> Sales and Distribution->Basic Function->Text Control. 647. Why Text Determination Is Used In Sd? The text determination is used to transfer information from the material or the customer document to the order or to the Invoice document. 648. Why Is The Partner Determination Done In Sd? The partner determination is used to determine the partners, such as "Sold to Party" /Payer"/Ship to Party", "Bill to Party" and Sales Employee etc. for sales document. You maintain the Partners in the system as per your business requirements and configure a partner determination Procedure. This partner determination Procedure determines the partners in a sales document. The whole process goes as follows: Defining the Partner Functions Assigning the partner functions to the Account Group Defining the partner determination procedure Placing the required partner functions in the procedure Assigning the procedure to the Account Group 649. Why Is The Output Determination Used In Sd Module? The output determination is used to decide that which output mode is used to send an output notification to a partner (customer). Some of the output forms are- e-mail, electronic data exchange (EDI), and fax. 650. List The Five Important Fields That Need To Be Maintained During The Account Determination. The following fields need to be maintained during the account determination: Chart of Accounts. Sales Organization. Account Assignment Group for Customer. Account Assignment Group for Material. Account Keys. 651. What Do You Mean By The Copy Control? The copy control is meant to copy data from a preceding document to the succeeding document. The succeeding document is decided on the basis of the document type and the customer requirements. 652. Specify The Purpose Of Maintaining The Common Distribution Channels And The Common Divisions? The Common Distribution Channels and the Common Divisions are maintained to prevent the master record's multiple maintenance. For example, if you have created a customer 550 for Sales area 0105/30/01 then 550 can be used in the Sales area 0108/40/01, if you maintain 30 as the common distribution channel. 653. Why Is Availability Check Required? The availability check is used to determine that whether the requested order quantity would be delivered on Customer Requested Delivery Date or not. The availability check takes care about the time required to produce or obtain the material and picking or packing time, loading & Transit Time for the material. 654. Which Kind Of Requirements Does The Checking Group 01 And 02 Represent? The checking group 01 represents to the daily requirements while 02 represent the individual requirements. 655. Which User Exit Can Be Used To Copy Data Into The Planning Table? The user exit that you can use to copy data into the planning table is: User exit MCP20001 along with ZXSOPU01 656. List The Forms Of Number Ranges In Sd? There are two forms of number ranges in SD and those forms are as follows: Internal — In this form, the system automatically assigns a number range to a document. External— In this form, the system allows a user to assign a number range to a document. 657. What Is The Purpose Of Using Copy Control? The purpose of using copy control is to decide what document type, item category, and schedule line categories can be proposed to proceeding document. 658. What Is Contract Grouping? The contract grouping can be defined as the process to link lower level contracts to one master contract to maintain data consistency. 659. Is It Required To Create Condition Record For The Customer And Material Defining The Scale While Creating The Customer Rebate? No, it is not required to create condition record for every customer and material while creating the customer rebate. Rebate is customer or material specific in nature. 660. How Can You Create A Pricing Procedure That Calculates The Price For The Industrial Customers When They Also Purchase The Domestics Goods? You can create a pricing procedure that can calculate the price for the industrial customers by performing the following steps: Create a VOFM subroutine that is VOFM->Formulas->Condition value. Now set this subroutine in your procedure as V/2 transaction code in the AltCTy field. You can describe your requirements in the ABAP coding. 661. How Does System Show Storage Condition? How Can The Storage Condition Be Defined? System uses two-character alphanumeric key, storage condition to show the storage condition of a material. The storage condition is used in co-ordination of the plant and shipping point to decide the storage location. You can define the storage condition of a material by navigating the following menu path: Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)->Logistics Execution->Shipping->Picking->Determine Picking Locations-> Define Storage Conditions. 662. Suppose You Have Customized The Customer's Credit Limit In Your Company In Such A Way That When A Customer Exceed His/her Credit Limit, The System Responses You About That. What Is The Name Of This Management In System And What Data Do You Use For This Management? This management is known as the credit management. The data you use for the credit management is the credit management master data. The Finance module is used to assign credit limit to customers. 663. Give The Menu Path To Assign Credit Limit To Customers? The menu path to assign credit limit to customers is: SYSTEM Menu->Accounting->Financial Accounting->Customers -> Credit Management->Master Data-> Change . 664. In System There Is Functionality, Which Is Used To Manage The Customer Credit Limits. That Functionality Can Be Assigned With One Or More Company Codes. By Using The Company Code The System Decides That Organizational Unit When A Sale Occurs. What Is The Name Of That Functionality? Name of that functionality is credit control area. 665. What Is The Consignment Stock? The consignment stock consists of the items which are kept either at the customer or the business site for the consumption by the customer on the basis of a written agreement between them. The customer has the right to return the goods if not further sold or used. Till the time of sales or consumption of such stocks, it remains legally as company's property. Customer only pays to the company only when the stocks are sold/consumed, otherwise he returns the stocks to company. This scenario is used in some special sales related scenario such as pushing of stocks to meet an increased sales requirement or, is used for exhibition purpose as well. 666. Define The Risk Category? It is a grouping category, which is used to control the process to check the credit limit when the credit control takes place automatically. You use this category to segregate customers group on the basis of different credit rules. For example, you can put high-risk customers in one group and low-risk customers in another group. 667. List The Places Where A Credit Check Can Occur? The credit check can occur at the following three places: The Sales order. The delivery. The goods issue. 668. List The Credit Management Checks That The System Uses To Check The Credit? The various automatic credit management checks that the system uses are: Simple Credit Check. Automatic Credit Check-Static or Dynamic. 669. List The Items For Which You Can Create Incompletion Logs? The incompletion logs can be created for the following items: Sales document header data. Sales document item data. Sales document schedule line data. Sales activity data. Partner data in Sales documents, deliveries, and Sales activities. Delivery header data. Delivery item data. 670. What Is An Output? An output can be defined as a media that link various business partners. An output media can be one, such as e-mail, fax, Electronic Data Interchange (EDI), and printouts. An output media is generally created for invoices, delivery notes, and order confirmation. 671. List The Sales And Distribution Related Output Determination Activities? The output determination activities that are related to the Sales and Distribution are: Sales Activities. Sales Documents. Outbound Deliveries. Inbound Deliveries. Handling Units. Groups. Shipments. Billing Documents. 672. How Is The Transaction Code Ct04 Related With Characteristics? When the desired class of material is selected in the Material Master then the characteristics of that class needs to be chosen. The CT04 transaction code is used to define these characteristics. 673. What Is Excise Tax And How Is It Related To The System? The excise tax or excise duty is a type of tax which is charged on the goods that are produced for selling within a country. It is different from the customs duties which are charged on imported goods. As per the system guidelines, the procedure of excise tax calculation is country-specific. Therefore, the ERP software, which are implemented in India, have built-in Country India (CIN) version. You need to configure CIN for excise tax calculation. 674. What Are The Pricing Procedures Of Cin? The Country India (CIN) version comes with the following four pricing procedures: JINFAC (Sales from Manufacturing Plants). JINEXP (Export Sales). JINDEP (Sales from Depots). JINSTK (Stock Transfers). 675. What Are The Major Settings In The Contract Configuration Setting Screen? The following are major settings in the contract configuration screen: Price Procedure Condition Header. Contract Profile. Billing Request. Group Reference Procedure. Contract Data Allowed. Follow UP Activity Type. Update Lower Level Contract Fields. Check Partner Authorization Type. Subsequent Order Type. 676. What Is The Service And Maintenance Process? The Service and Maintenance process or service contract is a type of agreement between the supplier and receiver of the goods or service. This contract forms a basis on which the regular activities of the business, such as billing, cancellation, and other related items are done. A service contract contains validity dates, cancellation conditions, price agreements, and information. 677. Which Is The Standard Sales Document Type For The Service Contract? The WV is the standard sales document type for the service contract. 678. What Are Service Items? The service items are used by the service contract documents and can be one or all of the following: Service task. Material used in the service. Time charged by the technician as per hourly rate. 679. What Is Standard Service Item Category? The standard Service item category represents a service that is carried out and billed periodically. In Standard System, the standard item category for a service is WVN. 680. What Is The Standard Material Type For Service Items? There is a standard material type for service items. DIEN is the material type which is generally used for services in standard system. 681. What Is A Master Contract? A master contract is a contract which groups contracts that are at the lesser levels than master contract. It contains the information which are relevant to rest of the contracts. The main objective of the master contract is to ensure the consistency at all the levels. The documents included in the master contract are as follows: Quantity Contracts. Value Contracts. Service Contracts. 682. What Is Standard Application Logic? If any field in the new reference procedure screen is changed in the master contract, then only those fields of the master contract will be copied by the system which has the same value of master and lower level contracts. This is known as application logic. 683. What Is Workflow? Name The Person Who Can Assist You While Configuring A Workflow For A System. It is a sequence of steps either processed manually or automatically by the system for implementing a task, such as updating a contract. It is handled by a workflow resource. A workflow consultant is a person who looks after the problems associated with a workflow. 684. What Is Scheduling Agreement? The scheduling agreements are the type of agreements which are done between the customer and the business organization. It includes the details related to the delivery of the products such as delivery date and quantities which are to be delivered. The delivery dates are then passed to the schedule line for further activities. 685. What Is Planning Delivery Schedule? The planning delivery schedule is a type of delivery schedule which is used to manage the planning requirement of a project. The planning delivery schedule is conducted for limiting the planning period of schedule lines in forthcoming delivery schedules. 686. What Is The Correction Delivery? The correction delivery done when a product is wrongly delivered to the customer and returned. And the good receipt is not processed. As a result, the cumulative quantity in the scheduling argument is updated and the original delivery quantity is called off in the scheduling agreement. 687. What Is A Rebate Agreement? The rebate agreement is a type of agreement which is done between the customer and the buyer for the discount that is paid to the customer. It depends upon the conditions such as buying certain amount of the goods over a certain time period. This agreement specifies the rebate amount agreed on for each product. 688. List The Components Of Rebate Processing In System? Rebate processing in System is divided into the following three components: Configuring rebates. Setting up rebates. Managing rebate agreements and payments. 689. How Can You Define A Change Request? How Can You Release A Saved Change Request? A change request is defined as a request that is automatically generated by the SYSTEM when you do any new customizing or configuration task in the SYSTEM. Once you save the change request, the SYSTEM generates a request number, which you have to save for further processing. A change request can be released by using the SE10 transaction code. 690. What Do You Understand By Intercompany Customers And One-time Customer? The Sales customers who deal within the same client between different company codes are known as intercompany customers. One-time customers refer to those customers for whom you do not want to create a separate record, so that such type of customer account group can be reused. 691. Explain The Terms Minimum Order Quantity And Minimum Delivery Quantity. The Minimum Order Quantity refers to the minimum quantity that a customer needs to order. The concept of Minimum Delivery Quantity refers to the minimum quantity that you need to deliver to a customer. 692. What Is The Difference Between Confirmed Quantity And The Order Quantity? The quantity ordered by a customer is referred to as Order Quantity and the quantity allocated by Availability Check (ATP) is known as Confirmed Quantity. 693. How Can You Assign Movement Type? The movement type is assigned while defining the schedule line category. 694. Suppose, In A Particular Case, Customer Requirements For The Sales Order Do Not Appear In The Md04 Transaction. How Can You Resolve Such A Problem? To resolve the problem of non-appearance of customer requirements for the Sales order, you need to check whether the requirement class and schedule line category of your document are activated for requirement transfer. 695. What Do You Mean By Backorder Processing? Backorder processing is functionality in the System where you change the commitments and over-ride the blockage of stocks marked against sales documents/deliveries. For e.g. you receive an order from a very important customer for material "X" but the entire quantity of X is committed to another customer "Y" via earlier orders and this is where Backorder processing works to change the commitment and shift stock due for Y to X. 696. What Are Order And Target Quantities? The quantities mentioned as available in the quantity contract are called Target Quantities. Similarly, the quantities that are ordered are called the Order Quantities. 697. Can You Create More Than One Customer Hierarchy For The Same Payer? If Yes, Then How? Yes, it is possible to create more than one customer hierarchy for the same payer. We can do it by first creating the order and delivery and then performing the PGI for the first and second customer hierarchy. 698. A Sales Document Is Divided In To Three Levels. List Those Three Levels? The three levels in which a Sales document is divided are as follows: Header Level (Table VBAK) — All the master data, such as the customer material master, the Sales area, and the organization data of a Sales document is stored at Header level in the VBAK table. Item Level (Table VBAP) — All the material item data, such as the order quantity and the material master data of a Sales document is stored at Item level in the VBAP table. Schedule Line (Table VBEP) — Information about the material delivery dates and the delivery quantity of a Sales document is stated at Schedule line in the VBEP table. 699. What Is A Sales Order? A Sales order is defined as an order given by a customer to an organization for product or services. A Sales Order then is processed in the System to determine the basic organizational data and requirements for the entire Sales Process. 700. Define An Item Proposal? In case if a customer frequently orders the same combination of materials, or if you recommend a particular selection of products for an opening order, you can store the frequently used data as an item proposal in the system. If you want, the item proposal may also include proposed order quantities. During sales order creation, you can then copy all or some of the materials and quantity data from the item proposal directly into your document (sales order, quotation, and so on). You can assign a particular item proposal to a specific Customer Master Records. The system can then automatically propose the number of the assigned item proposal whenever you process sales orders for the relevant customers. 701. What Is A Quotation? The Quotation can be defined as a Sales document that you create before a Sales order and after an inquiry. Quotation is a legally binding document which informs the proposed prices and the terms and conditions of Sales to a customer. 702. When Is The Cash Sale Process Used? The Cash Sale Process is used when a customer places an order, picks goods, and pays for the goods at the same time. When the cash Sales process is used the System proposes the current data as the goods delivery and billing date. After you save the Sales order, the System creates a delivery and prints a cash sale receipt. Cash Sales concept is generally used for Sales to employees scenario where no customer specific master is maintained rather customer is billed as One Time Customer. 703. When Is The Rush Order Process Used? The Rush Order process is used when a customer places an order and picks the items immediately. Once you save the Sales order, the System creates a delivery; however, the invoice is generated later & sent to customer. 704. List The Various Business Functions That Are Performed To Meet The Delivery Date? The business functions that are performed to meet the delivery date are as follows: Scheduling the time required to procure the material. Scheduling the time required to pick or pack the material or transportation planning time. Scheduling the time required to load the material. Scheduling the time required to shift the material to the customer's site. 705. List The Activities For Which You Can Set Up The Partner Determination? The partner determination can be set up for the following activities: Customer Master. Sales Document Header. Sale Document Item. Delivery. Shipment. Billing Header. Billing Item. Sales Activities (CAS). 706. What Is The Consignment Issue? The consignment issue is the allotment of products for the customers. Its Standard document type is KE and the Standard order type using which it is recorded is the same. The standard item category used for the consignment issue is KEN.CO and CI are the standard schedule lines used for consignment issue. To create a consignment issue order, the Document Type KE is selected. 707. What Is Consignment Returns? It is the sales process flow which includes the material or the product which are defective and either returned by the customer or sold by the consignee. These types of products are returned back to the consignment stock and stored as a faulty item. The sales document type for the consignment return is KR. 708. Why Is The Consignment Not Returned Into Plant Stock? When a consignment is issued to the customer the business process is abstracted at the level of two parties; the customer and supplier. Therefore, customer maintains his own records related to the stock issue or return. If it is returned to the plant stock then it would be difficult for the customer to manipulate his transaction from the huge database of products at the plant level. 709. What Is Customer Pick-up? The customer pick-up is the last process of the consignment procedure. It includes picking of the faulty as well as the unused/unsold materials which are left by the customer. The specific return shipping point is determined for the products. There is no need of any invoice while consignment pick-up, because the ownership of goods is not changing. KAN is the standard item category for the consignment pick-up. 710. Name The Standard Overview For Consignment? SYSTEM contains a standard overview for the listing of all the consignments for all the materials issued to the customers in the plant. It is called Display Consignment and Returnable Packaging Stocks at Customer. 711. What Are Sales Document Lists? The sales document lists are similar to the lists that are usually prepared throughout the business process. They are many sales documents lists that are prepared during the selling process. For example, the sales order list is very common in sales and distribution module. 712. What Are The Common Sales Document And Work Lists? The common sales document and work lists are as follows: List of Sales Orders Outbound Delivery Monitor List Billing Documents Sales Documents Blocked for Billing Sales Documents by Objects or User Status Display Backorders Incomplete Sales Orders Incomplete Sales Documents Outbound Delivery Monitor Transportation Planning Lists Blocked Billing Docs 713. What Is The Sales Document Status? In the sales documents, there is status at header and item levels. It is used for knowing and controlling the stages in the sales documents. 714. What Are The Fields Of The Processing Status? The processing status indicates the stages of an item whether it is processed or not. It includes the following fields: Overall Status. Delivery Status. System Status. 715. List The Tables That Are Used To Display The Status Of Sales Documents? The following are certain tables used to display the status of sales documents: VBUK— Displays header status and administrative data. VBUP— Displays item status. VBAKUK— Displays sales document header and status data. 716. What Is General Table Display? The General Table Display screen displays the populated fields of a table. The transaction code used for this purpose is SE16. 717. What Is Document Flow? Right from the enquiry through quotation, ordering, shipping and finally billing of the products many documents are prepared. The chain of such type of documents created in a sales process is called a document flow. 718. What Are The Sales Document Types? The sales documents may have several types but the most commonly used are as follows: Standard Order. Returns. 719. What Is Sales Order Stock? The sales order stock is a stock with a stock type E. It is the stock of items which is reserved as per the sales order issued. 720. What Is Backorder Processing? The backorder processing is the process of changing of the previous commitment of the delivery of goods from one customer to another due to strategic reasons. 721. What Are The T Codes Used For Backorder Processing? The T codes used for backorder processing are as follows: OMIH. OPJL. OPJJ. V_RA. 722. What Is Trading Process? Let's consider three organizations such as A the service provider, B the service receiver and, C works as a vendor which provides the services to service providers. In this situation when A receives a purchase order from B it either manufactures it or purchases it. If the option of procurement is chosen, then after receiving the purchase order from B, A creates a sales order for it. Also it creates a purchase order for C to arrange the goods. C prepares the product and sends to A which delivers it to B, that is the ultimate buyer. This process is called the trading process. 723. What Is Third Party Order Process? Let's consider three organizations such as A the service provider, B the service receiver and, C works as a vendor which provides the services to service providers. In this situation when A receives a purchase order from B it either manufactures it or purchases it. If the option of procurement is chosen, then after receiving the purchase order from B, A creates a sales order for it. Instead of preparing the purchase order for C as in case of the trading process A authorizes C to deliver the product to B on behalf of A. This process is called third party order processing. 724. What Is Invoice Verification? Name The Transaction Code For It? Invoice Verification is the process used when a Purchase is made. For every purchase made, an Invoice is received from Vendor/supplier. In this process the data related to invoice is posted in the system which also creates payment liability for the supplying vendor. MIRO is the transaction code that is used for invoice verification. 725. What Is Product Group? The product group is the categorized as the group of the products which are allocated for specific customer order. The product group can be either multi-level or single-level. The single level product group contains only the materials whereas the multi-level group can contain more than one product group. 726. List The Various Types Of Special Stocks? The various types of special stocks are: Consignment stock related to vendor. Consignment stock related to customer. Components provided to vendor. Project stock. Pipeline material. Orders on hand. 727. How Can You Link The Automatic Packing Procedure With Delivery Type Or Item Category? The Automatic Packing Procedure is assigned in the OVHU2 transaction code; therefore, you need to assign the procedure to 0002 Outbound Delivery there. This would help control packing in the delivery item category to some extent. However, to have a better control, you can design the access sequence with the available fields. 728. What Is The Most Important Concern That Needs To Be Taken Care Of While Creating Delivery Notes In Different Languages? While creating delivery notes, the language of the notes are decided by the destination country for which the delivery notes are created. Therefore, the most important concern to be taken care of is to ensure that the country is identified accordingly in the program and the respective form is being used to create the delivery note. 729. Define Consumption Modes? The Consumption mode defines the direction of the consumption of the customer requirements on the time axis from the requirement date, with planned independent requirement should occur. Here the requirement date is the date on which the Sales order items were created. 730. What Is The Purpose Of Shipping Point Determination? The purpose of the shipping point determination is to determine dispatch related data and conditions for a particular delivery to be supplied to a particular customer. The Transaction code used is OVL2. 731. What Is The Purpose Of Using The Delivery Process? The delivery Process is used to send the items from the plant to the customer through Shipping Point. The delivery process is also used to receive the items back from a customer. 732. In What Reference Is A Delivery Document Created? You can create a Delivery document with reference to a Sales document or with reference to an inbound return Sales document. 733. Which Delivery Document Type Can Be Created Without The Reference Of The Sales Order Document? The delivery document type LO can be created without the reference of the Sales order document. 734. List The Transaction Codes To Execute The Delivery Due List? The transaction codes that can be used to execute the Delivery Due List are as follows: VL10A — Sales orders fast display. VL10B— Purchase orders fast display. VL10C— Sales orders items. VL10D— Purchase orders items. VL10E— Sales orders schedule lines. VL10F— Purchase orders items schedule line. VL10G— Sales and purchase orders fast display. VL10H— Sales and purchase orders items fast display. VL10I— Sales and purchase orders item schedule line. 735. How Will You Describe A Shipping Point? The Shipping Point can be described as a location linked to a plant from where items are delivered to/received from a customer. A plant may have more than one shipping point assigned to it. 736. Suppose That You Do Not Have Stock But You Can Successfully Press Pgi, Which Is Wrong. How Can You Configure The System That Cannot Press Pgi Without Stock? To configure the System in such a way that PGI cannot be pressed without stock, you must ensure that negative inventory is not allowed in MM. 737. What Is Special Stock? Which Transaction Code Is Used To View The Special Stock? The special stock is the stock, which is delivered along with the packaging material. The special stock is considered as the company's property even when it is placed at the customer's location. You can view the special stock by using the MMBE transaction code. 738. Why Are The Factory Calendars Used? The factory calendars are used for various purposes and few of them are: To decide the working days at a specific location. To decide the day to create delivery so that a customer can receive the delivery on a working day. 739. Compare The Milestone With Periodic Billing? The concept of billing a customer on completion of particular work milestone or activity is known as Milestone Billing. However, the concept of billing a customer on completion of a specified time period is known as Periodic Billing. 740. What Happens If There Is A Negative Posting In Billing Document? Negative posting on the debit side reduces the credit side of an account. However, when a negative posting is done on the credit side, then it reduces the debit side of an account. 741. Compare Billing And Invoice? When the goods are supplied to a customer, then an invoice is also sent. In other words, an invoice is a billing document. Apart from invoice, the other billing documents are Credit memo and Debit memo. 742. How Can You View The Due Date Of The Invoice After Making A Delivery And Invoice? You can view the due date of an invoice in the AR module. If you go to fbl5n and search for the customer, the due date appears in the overview screen. 743. List Few Commonly Used Sales Documents That Result In Order-related Billing? Few commonly used Sales documents that result in order-related billing are: CR —Credit memos. DR —Debit memos. 744. What Is The Role Of The Cancellation Invoice? The Cancellation Invoice is generated by the System when you cancel an Invoice because of any business related decision. The Cancellation Invoice reverses the related transactional effects made by the Invoice which is cancelled. 745. What Is The Role Of Inter-company Invoice? The Inter-company invoice refers to an internal invoice which is not passed to an external partner or Sold-to party rather it is passed between two company codes belonging to the same business. 746. Which Setting Is Used To Activate The Account Setting At The Header And Item Level? The VKOA transaction code is used to activate the accounts assignment settings at the item and header levels. 747. How Can One Send An Invoice By E-mail? You first need to define the output type and use the NACE transaction code. Then correct transmission medium needs to be defined in V3 application. If the dispatch is being sent as own transaction, then dispatch time is selected as 3. After the attachment of correct output type the VF31 Transaction Code is used to send the message. 748. Why Is The Account Determination Used By The System? The Account Determination is used to determine that which ledger should be used to contain the accounts related information & posting should be made to the relevant account only. 749. Describe Two Types Of Credit Processes. Two types of the credit process are as follows: First —The credit process in which a customer returns the previously purchased items and request for the credit. Second—In this credit process, a customer is credited without returning any item but against some additional offer or scheme. 750. When Is The Debit Process Used? The debit process is used when a customer is charged because of any specific reason such as late payment, excess scheme paid etc. This is nothing but to charge customer due to specific business related requirements. 751. What Is Invoice Correction Request? This is the document that helps you to correct the quantity and price of items on an incorrect invoice and to generate credit and debit memos. The procedure is called as Invoice Correction Request. For each item two entries are created, one is Credit Item & other is Debit item. You can only correct the Debit Item & that's how you correct the invoice. 752. Define Dunning? What Do You Need To Configure Before Dunning? The dunning is defined as a process, which is used to generate a bill or invoice against a customer when a customer does not pay amount according to the payment terms offered by a company. Before performing dunning, you must configure the following: Define the dunning area. Define the dunning keys. Define the dunning block reasons. Configure the dunning procedure. Assign the dunning procedure to customer accounts. Define the correspondence types. Configure the dunning run. 753. What Is Sales Return? Sales Return is the process of returning the purchased goods by the customer because of various reasons, such as Damaged during transportation, Inferior Quality, Over Stocking, Less or No Sales Uptake, or Winding up of business by the customer (e.g.-in case of trader or dealer). In these situations, a customer returns the goods purchased. As per the business agreement between the organization and customer, a Credit Note is issued in the name of the customer to settle the accounts. 754. What Do You Exactly Mean By Credit Note And Debit Note? Credit Note —It is a kind of billing which you generally raise when you need to credit a customer due to Sales Return or because of some extra incentive or bonus offered. Debit Note —It is a kind of billing when you need to charge customer for reasons, such as delayed payment made by the customer or Customer Payment cheque dishonor penalties. 755. What Is Return Invoice? Return Invoice is nothing but the Credit Memo issued to a customer for the Sales Return affected by him. 756. Which Concepts Of The Sd Module Are Crucial Implementing Pricing Requirement And Formulas? The following concepts of SD are crucial while implementing requirement and formulas: Requirements. Copying requirements. Data transfer routines. Formulas. 757. Define The Determination Procedure? The determination procedure is related to the Sales order preparation. During the Sales order creation, the determination procedure is accessed to validate the records in the condition table. The determination procedure accesses the condition table and calls the condition types according to the access sequence and checks to see if a valid condition record exists. 758. Is It Possible To Choose The Pricing Procedure In Customer Master Or Material Master On The Basis Of Material Used? No, it is not possible to change the pricing procedure once the main document is prepared at the material level. 759. What Kind Of Records Are Updated By The System When You Post Goods Issued In A Delivery? When the goods are transferred to the customer then the goods issue is posted in a delivery. Once the goods issue is posted, the System updates various records, such as reducing the stock in hand and increasing the amount of goods sold that is Debit COGS & Credit Inventory account. 760. Which Block Is Used To Prevent The System From Creating Deliveries By Using The Delivery Due List Function? The block used to prevent the System from creating deliveries by using the delivery due list function is called the delivery due list book. 761. Which Block Stops The System From Creating The Picking List? The block used to stop the System from creating the picking list is called the picking block. 762. Which Are The Sales Object Types? The most common sales object types are as follows: VBK Sales order header. VBP Sales order item. VBEP Sales Order Schedule Lines. 763. List The Erp Packages Available In The Market? The other ERP packages available in the market are: BAAN. JD Edwards. Oracle Financials. Siebel. PeopleSoft. 764. Define The Term Consignment Stock? The material available in the company premises but is not added in the stock is called the consignment stock. The consignment stock is added to the company stock when it is either sent to the production department or marked as the material to be sold. 765. What Do You Mean By Cross-company Stock Transfer? Instead of delivering the sales order from another company code, the material can also be delivered from a plant of one company code to the plant in another company code. This process can be accomplished by a cross company stock transfer order. 766. What Is A Credit Control Area And How Is It Related To Company Codes? An organizational unit is an organization that checks credit limits for customers. Although a credit control area can include one or more company codes, but you cannot assign a company code to more than one credit control area. 767. What Is The Difference Between An Inquiry And Quotation? The inquiry is the process to register the customer's probable requirements. The quotation is a legally abiding document given to customer conforming the terms & condition to deliver the product or service to customer. SAP SD Questions and Answers Pdf Download Read the full article

[siva3155]

800+ TOP SAP SD Interview Questions and Answers

SAP SD Interview Questions for freshers experienced :-

1. What Is The Further Subdivision Of A Plant? The further subdivision of a plant are the storage locations, which allows stocks of materials to be broken down according to predefined criteria such as the location and materials planning aspects. It can also be subdivided into locations and operational areas. They are further subdivided into locations takes geographical criteria into account, operational areas reflects responsibilities for production is also a subdivision. 2. In Sd, Mm, Pp, Fi/co Which Are The Highest Organizational Units? The highest organizational units in SD, MM, PP, FI/CO are: SD: Sales Organization. MM: Plant. PP: Plant. FI: Company Code CO: Controlling Area. 3. What Is The Definition Of A Plant According To Sap? According to SAP a plant is a place where either material is produced or goods and services provided. Plant is classified into Business Object. In Organizational unit within Logistics, serving to subdivide an enterprise according to production, procurement, maintenance, and materials plan aspects. Coming to the Structure a plant can assume a variety of roles. As a part of maintenance plant, it includes the maintenance objects that are spatially located within this plant. The maintenance tasks that are to be performed are specified within a maintenance planning plant. As a retail or wholesale site, it makes merchandise available for distribution and sale. The plant is the organizational unit for material valuation, according to a rule. For the placement of materials in storage (stock put-away), a storage location is assigned to a plant. The storage location depends on the storage condition and the stock placement situation. The preferred shipping point for a plant is defined as the default shipping point, which depends on the shipping condition and the loading condition. The business area that is responsible for a valuation area is determined as a function of the division. As a rule, a valuation area corresponds to a plant. 4. Is It Possible Sales Organization Sell From A Plant Belonging To A Different Company Code? It is possible for a sales organization sell from a plant belonging to a different company code 5. For Which The Distribution Channels And Divisions Are Assigned And How Many Shipping Points Can Be Assigned To A Plant, Sales Organization And If There Is A Warehouse Management System Active, Where Is Warehouse Number Is Assigned? The Distribution Channels and Divisions are assigned to Sales Organization. A plant can be assigned with many shipping points, coming to sales organization there will be shipping points that are assigned to that. When a ware house management system is active it would be assigned with a Plant and Storage Location in a ware house number. 6. Is It Possible To Assign Two Different Sales Organizations To The Same Company Code? Yes, it is possible to assign two different sales organizations to the same company code 7. Define To Which Organizational Element Is Central In Shipping? Organizational unit at a fixed location that carries out shipping activities is called Shipping Point. A shipping point could, for instance it can be a company's mail department or a plant's rail depot. Each delivery is processed by only one shipping point. 8. What Would Make The Immediate Delivery In Cash Sales? When immediate delivery in cash sales is made the Order type delivery switch on immediately. 9. Is It Possible To Create Sales Order For 40 Items If The Quotation Is Sent For 30 Items? Yes, it is possible to create sales order for 40 items if the quotation is sent for 30 items. 10. In Case Of Third Party Sales What Would Trigger For The Automatic Creation Of Pr Or Po? It has to be set an item category as “automatic PO” so that PO and PR will automatically generate after saving the order.

SAP SD Interview Questions 11. Briefly Explain Any Three Organizational Elements Make Up A Sales Area And Their Function? Product groups can be defined for a wide-ranging spectrum of products. For every division you can make customer-specific agreements on, for example, partial deliveries, pricing and terms of payment. Within a division you can carry out statistical analyses or set up separate marketing is known as Division. 12. In Access Sequence What Is The Importance Of Requirement Field? In access sequence, the system will not go to access condition type system will reply through formula. 13. What Is The Relation Between Credit Control Area And Company Codes And Explain The Credit Control Area? More than one credit control areas is not possible to assign to a company code, since a credit control area can include one or more company codes. Credit control area is an organizational unit in an organization that specifies and checks credit limits for customers. 14. What Are The Steps Included For The Sales Person As A Partner Function In The Partner Determination? The steps that are included for the sales person as a partner function in the partner determination, that a partner function sales representative or person responsible for these two we can add through partner function in partner procedure 15. What Is The Central Organization Element In Purchasing And The Relationship Between Sales Organization And Plants, Company Codes, Plants And Company Codes? The Central Organizational element in purchasing is Purchasing Organization and the relationship between sales organizations and plants is Many to Many, to Company codes its Many to One and for Plants and Company codes its Many to Many to One. 16. Which Sub Module Of Sap Could Make Business Areas Obsolete And Can One Business Area Be Assigned To Several Company Codes? And What Is Z Transaction? CO is the sub module of SAP that could make business area obsolete and it is possible that one business area can be assigned to several company codes. Z transaction is a copied standard transaction code or objects that rename it by Z which is basically standard name which will stat from Z as user defined. 17. What Is Business Area And How Is It Used? The costs and revenue according to the business area posted by the system is called as Business Area. It is used in Sales Area if the accounts are to be posted according to sales and Plant Division if the accounts are to be posted according to products. The business area is defined in Customizing for Sales. A unit in an enterprise, grouping product and market combinations as homogeneously as possible for the purpose of developing unified business policy. Business Area according to Financial Accounting (FI) defines that the business area is an organizational unit within financial accounting which represents a separate area of operations or responsibilities within an organization. Financial accounting transactions can be allocated to a specific business area. 18. What Is A Delivery Group? Basic grouping of all individual deliveries for Billing is called Delivery Group. It should have the same Ship to Party, Shipping Point, etc. 19. Briefly Explain The Internal Organizational Elements Within A Sales Organization And Their Function? The Geographical aspects of the organization in business development and sales are defined using the term sales office. A sales office can be considered as a subsidiary. Sales offices are assigned to sales areas. If a sales order is entered for a sales office within a certain sales area, the sales office must be assigned to that area. The staff of a sales office may be subdivided into sales groups. For example, sales groups can be defined for individual divisions. Individual personnel master records are used to manage data about salespersons. A sales person can be assigned to a sales group in the personnel master record. 20. What Is Cumulative Condition Record? Cumulative Condition Record is a field that Condition Update during configuration for a condition type that has anything to do with the cumulative condition records. 21. How Can A Company's Structure Represent By Defining And Assigning Corporate Structure Elements In R/3 System And What Is The Purpose Of Doing That? The Enterprise organization chart shows the organizational structure of an enterprise, its organization units and how they are related. A combined structure can be created from the point of view of accounting, MM, SD. This structure forms a framework in which all business transactions can be processed. 22. What Are The Views In A Material Master? The views in a material master are Basic data, Additional basic data, Accounting views, MRP views, Purchasing views, Storage views, forecasting views, sales views and in IS Retail there is also a Listing view and POS view. 23. What Is A Sales Organization? Sales organization is an organizational unit that sells, distributes products, negotiates terms of sales and is responsible for all the transactions involved with a sale. 24. What Is A Legacy System And What Is Cut Over Strategy? Migrating from the existing system on which currently working to the SAP system is called the legacy system. Cutover strategy that depends upon how the organizations design their data load strategies. Normally, it decide the sequence of Data loads for Configuration settings, Master data, Transaction data which follows whom and then it make a copy of the system as a Production system a day before and after checking the successful data loads, you go-live 100% or partial again depending upon organizational setup and policies. Cutover planning is highly site specific. There's no thumb rule. The stock data as on the date of going live should be correctly entered. But stock being a highly dynamic quantity, the strategy for loading should be crystal clear. Then you have to load all the back dated transaction on the stock. Some stock comes into your plant/storage location as return and some stock is actually delivered to your customer through sales orders of various kinds. 25. What Is The Transaction Code For Creating A Material In Sap And What Is The Transaction Code To Extend A Material? The transaction code for creating a material in SAP is MM41. MM01 is the transaction code to extend a material. 26. In A Material Master What Is The Base Unit? The base unit is a measure which is used as a basis for all the transactions, all movements of quantities will be converted to that base unit of measure which is specific to an article 27. What Happens When A Value Is Not Entered For A Manual And Mandatory Condition Type And Does A Header Condition Type Have An Access Sequence? When a value is not entered for a manual and mandatory condition type the pricing procedure will reject the conditions in the sales order. There would be no header condition type to have an access sequence. 28. What Are The Examples Of Global Settings? The examples of Global Settings are Currencies, Countries etc and this data is application independent 29. What Is A One Time Customer? A general customer that is created for those customers for which it do not want to create separate records is called a one time customer. This customer can be reused. 30. In A Customer Master Record Who Is A Payer? According to customer master record a Payer is the individual or company who will settle the invoices for products or services sold. 31. Who Defines The Account Groups And Give Some Tables In Sap Sd For Customer Master? Normally account groups are defined by the finance team and some of the tables in SAP SD for customer master are KNVV, RF02D, KNA1 etc. 32. What Is The Procedure To Know Whether The Customer Is One-time Or Regular? The procedure to know the customer is one-time or regular since one can maintain Account Group for One-time customers 33. Is It Possible To Have Specific Customer Material Information Entered In Sap? Yes, it is possible to have specific customer material information entered in SAP since VD51 is the transaction or inside VA02 also you can add customer material information records. 34. Give The Transaction Code For Creating A Customer In Sap Sd? The transaction codes for creating a customer in SAP SD are VD01, VA01 and XD01 35. What Are Inter-company Customers? This customer represents the sales customers within the same client but between different company codes. 36. What Happens When The Exclusive Field Was Ticked In The Access Sequence? When the exclusive field of all access sequences is ticked, it will try to get available data from the first. Only in case, data is not available, will it move on to the next one. 37. In Sap Sd What Is A Sales Office? According to SAP SD, a sales office is a geographically located unit of a sales organization. 38. What Is The Purpose Of Partner Determination? Partner determination is used to find out who is responsible for A/R process and where the products are going. 39. Describe The Components Of Sap Sd Module? Master data Basic functions Sales(foreign sales and sales support) Shipping and transportation Billing Sales support Information systems are the important components of SAP’s SD module 40. Explain The Concept Of Sales Organization? The topmost organizational unit in SD module is called the sales organization. All the transactions relating to selling and distribution of products or services are represented by the sales organization unit. One sales organization can be associated with more than one distribution channel. It is represented by a 4 character code in SAP and is assigned to more than one plant. These plants are in turn assigned to company code. So obviously n number of sales area can be brought under a single company code. 41. Explain The Concept Of A Distribution Channel? After a product or service is sold, it takes various channels before it reaches the intented audience (customers). A distribution channel depicts such channels(eg. Retail, wholesale, direct sale etc).In sap it is identified by a 2 char code. It is assigned to more than one sales areas. 42. Explain What Is A Distribution Chain ? A distribution chain is the possible combination of sales organization and distribution channels. 43. Explain In Detail What A Sales Order Is? Sales order is a contract between Sales organization and a customer, for supply of specified goods and/services over a specified time frame and in agreed quantity or unit. A sales order contains, Organizational Data Header data Item data Schedule line data 44. Name All The Special Sales Document Types? SO-Rush order G2-Credit RE-Return order KN-FoC(Free of charge) subsequent delivery order. RK-invoice correction request. 45. Explain What Is Consignment Stock Process? There can be business scenario where we allow our stock to be stored at the customer’s site. Or even if the stock or material is stored in our place, a particular amount is reserved for the customer. He may sell or redistribute this stock allocated for him at his wish. We bill him only the amount he has consumed. This business process is called ‘consignment stock process. The special stock(consignment) in our system both customer wise and material wise. The standard sales order document type used is KB and delivery type is LF. 46. We Create An Order For A Sales Bom With Three Sub Items. Since The Sub Item Components Must Not Be Delivered Without The Main Product We Declared The Main Item Category As Delivery Group. The Problem Arises When There Is Zero Availability For The Main Item And No Schedule Line Can Be Confirmed. The Main Item Is Defined As Delivery Group But The Delivery Is Created Without The Main And Only The Component Sub Items. The Delivery Group Becomes Broken Up. This Occurs Only In Vl01n And Vl10 Dialogue Mode. In Vl10 Background It Works Ok, So No Delivery Item Is Created At All For Those Unconfirmed Items. How Do We Fix This? The message is not configurable; at least in releases Formulas-> Condition value. There you divide quantity by 100, and multiply the integer part of result by 3. New condition-calculate type-G-formula. Input condition in your pricing procedure and input AltCTy (Condition formula for alternative calculation type) - new formula. 51. I Have Two Condition Types For Cost. One Is Customized And The Other Is Vprs. Their Values Are Determined Correctly In Sales Order. A Problem Arises When I Create The D/o And Billing Document. The Condition Type Vprs Is Incorrect With Value '0,' While The Customized One Is Correct. What Is The Cause Of This? The VPRS is a valuation condition, normally the cost of goods sold. If it comes from the material master record, it is a standard valuation price. However, if it comes from the information record, it is the very cost of goods sold. You may have a difference from the price you valued your material at and the real cost of purchase. Check if you have a standard value in your master record or if you have a relevant info record. Another possibility is your customized condition is undoing the VPRS. 52. Which Report Will Show The Serial Number Assigned In A Delivery Document? Take a look at function modules with SERIAL_*. For example, SERIAL_LS_PRINT. 53. I Received The Error Message, "condition Type Z928 Is Not In Procedure Zcs928 Av." How Do I Include The Condition Type Z928 In Pricing Procedure Zcs928? Follow pathway: SPRO ->Sales and Distribution ->Basic Functions ->Pricing ->Pricing Control -> Define and Assign Pricing Procedures From here select "Maintain pricing procedures." Next, select procedure ZCS928, then “Control Data.” Add Z928 to your procedure. 54. Is It Possible To Use Transaction Mass To Assign A Sales Representative As A Partner? Yes. Using the MASS transaction, select object KNA1. Then select table name KNVP. 55. Where In The Sale Order Would You Enter The Serial Numbers For Material? Serial numbers are entered on the delivery document and not a sale order, as this allows for multiple serial numbers to be entered for a single line. For example, you may have 10 serial numbers for a quantity of 10. 56. I Need To Have An Additive Price Based On A Variant Characteristic Selected And Then Provide A Discount For Each Of The Characteristics. I Must Discount The Correlating Characteristic, Not The Gross Value. Price ------ Char 1 = 1.00 Char 2 = 2.00 Char 3 = 3.00 Gross Price = 6.00 Discount ------ Char 1 = 10% Of 1.00 = .10 Char2 = 20% Of 2.00 = .40 Char3 = 15% Of 3.00 = .45 Total Discounts = .95 The Discount May Vary By Customer. How Do I Find Out How Configure This? You can find out how to configure this by taking a look at the documentation for $SET_PRICING _FACTOR,” in LO-VC. 57. I'm Working In Se43, Area Menu Maintenance. I Am Copying An Existing Area Menu Where The Name Of The Main Node Is Already Specified. I Took Standard Menu Cond_av And Made Its Copy As Zcond_av. I've Changed Its Description From "condition Maintenance" To Another Description. However, In The Area Menu Itself The Main Node Still Has Condition Maintenance.how Do I Change This? This can be solved through SE43 itself. Create a new menu area then the name of that area menu is automatically assigned to the main node. 58. We Have Two Types Of Customers Industrial And Domestic. The Domestic Customers Have A Price List. For The Industrial Customers, The Price Is Calculated On Basis Of Percentage Of The Cost. Since There Is A Possibility That Industrial Customers Might Also Buy Domestic Products At Any Given Point Of Time, We Are Forced To Make One Pricing Procedure. Is There Another Solution? You can create a VOFM subroutine (transaction code VOFM-Formulas ->Condition value) and set this subroutine in your procedure as transaction code V/2 in field AltCTy (Condition formula for alternative calculation type). In the ABAP coding you can describe all of your requirements. 59. How Can I Transfer The Payment Method From Customer Master To Sales Order Automatically? Use the user exit “userexit_move_field_to_vbkd” in report MV45AFZZ with this coding: DATA: via LIKE knb1-zwels. IF vbkd-zlsch IS INITIAL. IF NOT vbak-kunnr IS INITIAL. SELECT SINGLE zwels INTO via FROM knb1 WHERE bukrs = vbak-bukrs_vf AND kunnr = vbak-kunnr. vbkd-zlsch = via(1). ENDIF. ENDIF. 60. How Can You Send Output Through An Email Instead Of A Fax Or Printout? Check whether the transmission medium has been maintained for the processing routines for your output type. Make sure that this transmission medium is placed in the partner functions evenly. Follow this path: SPRO -> SD-> Basic Functions-> output control-->output determination->determination using condition technique->maintain O.deter.for sales documents-> Maintain output types. Use transaction code V30. 61. We Have A Problem With Bapi_salesorder_change. We Need To Change A Position In A Sales Order But When We Fill The Structures Bapi Does Not Change The Sales Order. What Should We Do? You must fill the update structures properly. The order header needs to read “order_header _ inxupdateflag = 'U',”. The item must read “order_item_inx = 'U'.” Each field touched in “order_item_ in” needs to have an 'X' in the corresponding field of “order_item_inx.” 62. We Have Two Company Codes And New Infostructure S004 For Filling. We Must Fill It With Data From First Cc Only. Is There Any Problem If The People Who Create Orders, Deliveries And Billing Of Second Cc Work At This Time? You can control the updating of infostructure at both header level and tem level using IMG. If you do not want the second company code data to be updated in the info structure, do not include the sales organizations assigned to the second company code in the updating of info structure. For your information, the codes are OVRO and OVRP 63. I Am Working In A System Where Someone Has Changed Standard Sap And The Sap Standard Pro Forma Invoice. Where Is This Set? (there Is No Account Determination Procedure Assigned To The Document In Sd But It Is Picking Up The Standard One And Posting To Accounts.) In VOFA check the SD Document category. It should be set to U and the transaction group should be set to 8. Likely these were changed to real invoices. The transaction group tells pro forma invoices not to be posted to accounts. If you have a posting block, wait until someone releases it to accounting in change mode. 64. I Need A Modification To Make The System Issue An Error Message When The User Enters Two Sales Orders With The Same Reference To The Customer's Purchase Order. What Should I Do? In the transaction VOV8 (sales document type definition) under general control put an "A" in the check PO number field. In the transaction OVAH (change system messages) change the message category of V4 -115 to "E" from "W". 65. I Want To Issue Goods Where The Storage Location Has A Negative Quantity. The System Is Not Allowing Me To Make A Goods Issue. How Do I Configure This? Follow these steps: OMJ1-Allow negative stocks-at plant level and at storage location level. MM02-Plant data/stor.2-check negative stock in plant. 66. What Transaction Do We Use To View All Messages Including Warning Messages In Sap? You can view these in transaction code SE91. 67. I Would Like To List The Partner Functions In A Delivery. In Which Table Can I Find That Information? This information is located in table VBPA. 68. We Have A Situation Where There Will Be Two Pricing Procedures And Depending Upon The Materials Used, Either One Of Them Will Get Picked Up. For Example We Have A Field In Customer Master That Helps Determine Pricing Procedure. Similarly, Is There Any Field In The Material Master That Can Determine The Pricing Procedure Determination? The pricing procedure applies to the whole document(header and items). You cannot change it at material (item) level. 69. There Is A Configuration Setting For Sd Where You Are Able To Activate The Account Assignment On Both Header And Item Level. The Activation Will Basically Open Up All The Respective Cost Objects. What Setting Is This? Use transaction code VKOA 70. How Do You Create Two Customer Hierarchies For The Same Payer? Create an order and delivery, and then perform a PGI for first customer hierarchy. Do the same for the second customer hierarchy. 71. I Have Created Two Pricing Procedures. One Is For Normal Pricing And The Other For Taxes. When I Am Trying To Do A Sales Order, Only The First Pricing Procedure Is Applying And It Is Not Accepting The Second One. Why? What Is The Exact Link Between These Two Pricing Procedures And The Condition Types? The pricing procedure is determined according to: sales area, customer pricing procedure field in the customer master (sold-to), document pricing procedure field in the sales document type. You may need to identify the criteria to determine the right pricing procedure when you enter a sales order. The transaction code to define pricing procedure determination is OVKK. Normally taxes are included in the actual pricing procedure, as part of the determination of the actual price (including taxes) the customer will pay. Taxes need to be calculated based on the given prices in the pricing procedure. 72. While Creating Quotation, I Am Getting The Error "mandatory Condition Mwst Is Missing" . Although Mwst Is Present In Procedure Rvaa01, What Are The Steps To Solve This? Use transaction code VK11 and enter condition type MWST. Next, enter the details in that document. 73. When We Create A Bom Through Cs01, What Effect Does Bom Usage Field Have On Subsequent Configuration? For Example, If We Take It As 1=production Or 5=sales What Effect Will It Have On Subsequent Processes? A sales usage means that production will not see it, and a production usage means that sales will not see it. The components each may or may not be saleable, but as a sales BOM is intended to explode onto a sales order, a non-saleable item on a sales BOM would generally not be recommended. The usage is precisely what it sounds like; which function will use the particular BOM. 74. How Do You Copy Item Text From Sales Order, To Delivery,to Invoice? Use text control function, SD-> basic function-> text control. 75. How Do You Delay Billing To The Next Month In A Delivery Note? You can postpone the invoice date in the sales order that belongs to that particular delivery under the billing tab. Otherwise by default, the invoice will pick up the GI date of the delivery. If it is acceptable to put the GI on hold until the day of invoicing you could also suggest this as a procedure. 76. How Should I Assign Gl Account To The Company Code? I Am Doing Sd/fi Interface. By Using Transaction Code Fsso I Am Able To Enter Gl Account And Company Code. But When I Try To Save It I Am Getting The Error "account Xyz Does Not Exist In Company Code Xyz." You must create the GL account for the company code, exactly like you create a customer master for a CC, or a material in a plant. 77. When We Create A Third Party Customer Order, It Generates A Po To The Vendor. When We Receive The Vendor Invoice, It Is Entered In Miro, Which Then Generates An Order-related Customer Invoice. If We Create For Example, Three Different Sales Orders And Three Separate Pos And Also Make Three Separate Invoice Receipts That Are Done On The Same Day, These Invoices Are Not Combining Into A Single Invoice For The Customer. We Need This To Only Be One Invoice Per Sales Order. Where Is The Logic That Controls This And How Do We Change It? You will have to take a look at copy control (from Sales document to Billing document), on item level. Most likely the routine will show 001. If you change that routine to 003, then you should get an invoice per sales order. 78. I Have A Requirement To Send The Invoice Copy To The Customer Or Agent That Will Be Specified At The Time Of Sending The Invoice (it Should Not Be Configured Before). How Do I Configure This And Where Do I Set The Indicators? Use transaction code NACE. Define the output type here. In application V3, define the correct transmission medium. If you want to send it at your convenience select the dispatch time as 3 (Send with applications own transaction). Attach the output type to the correct output determination procedure defined for the document type. Use T Code VF31 to send the message. You will need basis while configuring the email addresses because SCOT and SOST will be used by it. 79. I Have A Bom Item And Another Item, Which Is A Free Gift For Child Model. This Was Not Delivered To The Dealer, But Delivery Order Status Indicates "complete Delivery" And The Scheduled Line Appeared Fine As Well. After My Analysis, I Found Some Things. The Initial Quantity Of The Bom Item Is 5 And Free Good Is 0. How Do I Go About Fixing This? You cannot manipulate and make changes afterwards expecting the system to honor your requirements. You must add the child items as a separate order. 80. A Problem Occurs While Releasing Invoice To Accounting. Billing Is Created Successfully, But The Invoice Is Not Released To Accounting. The Error Message I Receive After Saving The Document States Error In Account Determination. How Should I Solve This Problem? The first thing you should do is check the account determination log in the invoice. Follow these steps: transaction code VF02-> Environment-> Acc.determ.analysis-> Revenue Accounts. 81. I Am Facing A Problem In The Internal Number Range Assignment Of Customer Data. I Have Created A New Account Group And With Each Customer I Create, The System Gives An Increment Of 5. For Example It Increases From 10005 To 10010 Instead Of 10005, 10006. How Do I Fix This? The problem is with the number range buffering. Go to transaction code SNUM, and then object type “debitor.” Click on the pencil (change mode) and change the number in buffer. 82. How Does The Term Characteristic Relate To Transaction Code Cto4? Material master leads to classification, and then you select the desired class. Based on class you can choose the characteristics. These characteristics are defined in CT04. 83. What Process Do You Use To Create A Consignment Stock? Follow pathway : SAP Library-> SAP R/3 Enterprise Application Components-> Logistics-> Sales and Distribution (SD) -> Sales-> Special Business Processes in Sales-> Consignment Stock Processing. 84. What Is The Business Process Of Excise Tax And How Do You Relate That In Sap? Excise tax is the duty charged on manufacture of goods listed in the chapter and section head of Central Excise Tariff Act. Process should amount to manufacture and separate identifiable finished goods should emerge having marketability and specified in Tariff Act. As far as SAP is concerned you, find CIN version integrated with standard SAP. There are two places where you need to configure CIN. The first is Financial Accounting-> Tax on Sale and Purchase and the other is Logistic General-> Tax on Goods Movement. 85. I Created A New Info Structure And Activated Update Rules For It. What Is The Best Way To Transport Them Into A Productive System? After rigorous testing in the QA environment and approval of the user community you should transport the info structure and related items into a production environment during “down time,” possibly when no billing documents are being created and posted. 86. Are There Any User Exits Or Any Other Way To Include New Fields In The Sales Order Va01? There are two ways to approach this. You can go to transaction code SE93 and give the Transaction as VA01. It will lead to a screen where you can click on a program that will take you to mod.pool. In this program click Find Icon and key in customer there. It will show you the user exits in that particular program. Another way is using SPRO. Follow path : IMG->SD->System Modifications->User Exits. There you can click on the help document and it will show all the user exits with program name. Select the suitable one. 87. For Sto When The Invoice Receipt (mm) And Invoice Issue (sd) Is Completed, How Do We Perform A Price Adjustment If We Find The Price Is Incorrect? If We Do A Subsequent Credit/debit In Mm, How Do We Create Subsequent Credit/debit In Sd? First cancel your invoices (SD and MM). Change the price in the STO PO. Then create new invoices SD and MM. The new values will be picked up if properly configured. The difference in the material value will be automatically posted to the appropriate stock account when you create the invoice in MIRO. 88. I Am Making An Inquiry In Which I Have A Configurable Material. When I Create A Quotation With Reference To The Inquiry, The System Is Not Allowing Me To Change The Configuration In The Quotation. I Checked The Copy Control And Found That At The Item Level Copy Control Between Inquiry And Quotation, We Have An Option For Configuration. I Have Tried These, Yet I Am Still Unable To Change The Configuration. What Should I Do? The document may already exist. Once fixed you cannot “unfix” the configuration by changing the customizing. You must create a new quote/order. Use setting “A.” 89. Is It Possible To Have To Have Two Delivery Notes In Two Different Languages? The destination country will decide which language the output should be printed. Make sure that you are identifying that in the program attached to the output and accordingly open the desired form. 90. Can I Copy Text From The Delivery Note To The Billing Document? How Can I Do This Through Text Determination? You can copy text from Delivery Note to invoice. Go to the IMG (SD>Basic Functions>Text Control) and click on the help icons next to text types. Define access sequences for determining texts and define and assign text determination procedures. You need to check the delivery text field in the relevant billing document type. If you do not check this field you will not be able to copy the delivery texts to the billing document. 91. I Am Working On Intercompany Sales. How Do I Create Material In Both Company Codes? Use transaction code MM01 to create material with organizational data pertaining to the plants and sales organizations. 92. I Do Not Know Why The Tax Field In The Customer Master And Material Master Is Hidden. This Field Is Not Suppressed In Customer Master. How Do I Make This Field Appear? Make sure you have a tax category defined for your countries in OVK1. Then check if the tax classes are defined in OVK3 and OVK4. 93. On The Sales Order Shipping Tab There Is A Field With The Text "shipping Point." I Would Like To Add New Shipping Points To Certain Plants. Where Is This Configured In Sap? New shipping points are defined in enterprise structure. Follow these steps: logistics execution -> define shipping points and assign the shipping point to plant in assign in enterprise structure under logistics execution. Next, click: shipping -> shipping point and good receipt determination. Configure for automatic determination of shipping point based on shipping condition, loading group, and plant. Maintain relevant shipping condition in customer master. Maintain relevant loading group in material master (normally the standard). For the combination that you derive from the sales order, you should have a configuration entry for automatic determination in sales order. 94. If Several Items With Different Vat Rates Are Included In One Invoice, These Different Rates Are Displayed In Theinvoice Header Including The Respective Amount. After Saving The Invoice, The System Determines One Vat Rate Including One Tax Code And Transfers This Tax Code To The Accounting Document. How Does This Determination Work? What Is The Rule Behind This Determination? In FS01/02/03 you will see that there is a tax category field where you enter the used tax code for this account. Normally tax conditions have specific account keys. Through transaction code VKOA or OV35 you assign which account (using key fields from sales) will be used for the account doc. Check V08 price procedure for the used account key as well. 95. When A User Releases An Invoice To Accounting It Creates An Accounting Document. The Status Of The Accounting Document Is Cleared If The User Cancels This Invoice. Is It Necessary To Delete The Previously Created Accounting Document? No, but you will have a credit note in your customer account. 96. I Have A Problem With Lis. After Client Copy, Our Test System Does Not Update Lis Info Structures. When I Save A Sales Order, Delivery Or Billing Document I Receive An Error Message That Says, "update Was Terminated". How Do I Fix This? Generate the infostructure and update group again in the client in which you are facing the problem. 97. How Do You Trace The Changes Made In The Sales Order In Regards To Changes To The Partner Function In The Sales Order? If you go into the change mode of the sales order click on environment, and then change. This menu will show you that partner functions like SH / BP / PY in the document are changed. It also shows old and new values. 98. I Am Working On Cross Company Sto. After I Create Sto, I Cannot Create Outbound Delivery By Using Vl10d. When I Check The Sto, I Find That The Delivery Creation Date Is Blank. It Seems The System Does Not Add The Sto To Delivery Due List Automatically. Is Some Setting In Sd Affecting This? The delivery creation date is blank because the STO is blocked by release strategy. 99. Typically You Receive A Standard Credit Check When You Save The Sales Order. What Is The Best Way To Trigger It At The Start Of The Sales Order Creation So That One Does Not Have To Enter A Lot Of Data In Case You Reach The Credit Limit? The ideal way is to check the credit limit of the customer much before the processing the sales order. Follow the path mentioned within the sales order. Also check: Sales Order-> Environment-> Partners-> Display Credit Account. 100. Is There A Way To Print An Invoice Five Times? (one Original And Four Copies) Use transaction code VF02. Once inside the document, click on Go to-> Header ->Output. Select the output type (normally RD00). Click on Communication method and in the field "Number of messages", enter the number of copies you want to print. 101. What Is The Difference Between Order Quantity And Confirmed Quantity? The confirmed quantity is the allocated quantity by the availability check (ATP). 102. How Do The Subtotals That Have Carry Over Value Kompkzwi1, Komp-kzwi2, Work With Respect To Condition Types? Subtotals are not tied to condition types per say.You control what goes into the field by assigning subtotals within you pricing procedure. If you assign a particular line in your pricing procedure to be subtotal 5, its value will be moved to KOMP-KZWI5. 103. When We Run The Transaction For Vf04 No Authorization Check Is Done For This Division. This Is Causing Some Problems Because Some Users Run The Transaction Vf04 And Create Billing Documents For A Division For Which They Are Not Responsible. Is There A User Exit Or Other Way That We Can Force Transaction Vf04 To Look At The Division As Part Of The Authorization Check? Make the modification to include a check within the copying requirements of the division in the source document instead of the user authorization. 104. I Have Created A New Material In Sap, And Now Wish To Add Stock For That Material Into A Particular Plant. What Is The Best Transaction Code As Well As Movement Type To Use? Use transaction code MB1C and movement type 561. 105. I Defined Manually A Condition Type Z004 (as A Copy Of The Condition Type K004). I Then Tried To Create Condition In Transaction Code Vk31 In The Section Discount/surcharges -> By Material. The System Reported, "table 304 Is Not Defined For Use With Condition Type Zec1." How Should I Resolve This? VK31 works with pricing reports. If you want to have a new condition type to be maintainable via VK31 or VK32., you need to do the following: Create pricing report via transaction code V/LA and include the tables you need. Extend the price area menu via SE43. Area menu = COND_AV. 106. How Do I Assign Movement Type? You assign movement type against the schedule line category. 107. A Certain Customer Has Credit Payment Terms Wherein If The Invoice Is Cut Between Dec 1-15 2005, Then The Invoice Due Date Should Be Jan 15, 2006. I Have Nfigured The Payment Terms In The Transaction Code Obb8. I Created The Sales Order With The Customer And Got The Specific Payment Terms In The Overview Screen, And Then I Made The Delivery And Then The Invoice. Can I View The Invoice Due Date In The Invoice? You should be able to see the due date in the AR Module. If you go into fbl5n and search for the customer, you can see the due date in the overview screen. 108. I Am In The Va02 Transaction For A Sales Order And Want To Reject The Line Items And Cancel The Entire Sales Order. What Is The Menu Path Needed To Achieve This Goal? Click the reject document button and then enter a reason for rejection. This will reject the line items and the sales order. You can enter a reason for rejection on the line item sales a tab. 109. Under Transaction Code Sdo1, I Try To Save A Display Variant With The Pathway:settings -> Display Variants. However The Save Option Is Grayed-out. How Should I Resolve This Issue? There is an unapplied SAP Note that will correct the error. Once the correct note is applied the save option will not be grayed-out. 110. A Sales Document Type Of A Sales Order Can Be Changed After Getting Saved. How Do You Do This? One way is through the configuration of document type in transaction code VOV8 (O Another way is in the "Transaction Flow" section. You can also perform “Alt sales doc type 1” and “Alt sales doc type 2.” 111. We Have Only One Distribution Channel In Our Company. Can We Default It In The Transaction Field That Needs Distribution Channel Data? How Can We Configure That? You can use the user master data to achieve this. Use transaction code SU01 and input the user ID. Go to the parameters tab page and add parameter VTW. Input your default distribution channel in the parameter value. The only drawback with this method is you will have to individually do this for all your users. 112. I Want To Use Automatic Packing And I Have To Create The Procedure For Packing Instructions. Where And How Can I Link The Procedure With My Delivery Type Or Item Category? The procedure is assigned in transaction OVHU2. You will have to assign the procedure to 0002 Outbound Delivery. Here you cannot specify the delivery type or item category. To some extent, you can control this with the packing indicator in the delivery item category, however, you can have better control by designing the access sequence with the available fields. 113. Is It Possible To Perform An Availability Check Based On The Plant Yet Exclude One Storage Location? You can make a storage location not available to the availability check in MM. 114. Is It Possible To Copy Texts From Sales Order Header To Billing Document Header? Use transaction VOTXN, and then create an access sequence with text object VBBK. Also make sure that the requirement of access sequence is given as '1'-Ref doc. Header. 115. I Must Create An Order. Whenever A Sales Order Is Created In The Schedule Line Items, The Check Box "fixed Date And Quantity" Is Checked. In The Md04 Transaction, Customer Requirements For The Sales Order Are Not Appearing. Why Is This? Regarding fix date and quantity check box check transaction OVZJ for your sales area. With the second problem regarding MD04, you must check two things; requirements class and scheduling category. Check your document to see whether they are activated for requirement transfer. 116. In Transaction Xd03 We Can Print Details For A Single Customer. Is There Any Transaction Code To Print All The Customers Address Or Details At One Time? For this requirement check TC: S_ALR_87012179 & S_ALR_87012180 117. What Table Do I Use In Creating Abap Program That Would Output The Sales Based On Sales Organization Of Customers? If you have SIS update turned on, you can use transaction code MTCE against infostructure 001 to display sales by sales ganization and so forth. Apart from SIS, you may create simple ABAP query with LDB VAV. If you want to create an ABAP report only, then use transaction code VBRK ->billing header table and VBRP -billing item table. 118. Name Two Ways To Start A Transaction? i.Dynamic Menu ii.Command Field 119. What Does The Material Type Control ? The material type determines a material's procurement type. It also controls screen sequence field selection number assignment type in material master maintenance inventory management type account determination 120. Can You Specify When Output Should Be Created? If Yes, What Possibilities Do You Have? Yes. Print out, Mail, EDI, Fax. 121. Give Examples For Standard Output Types In Sd? Order Confirmation, Delivery Note , Invoice. 122. Can You Make Texts Mandatory For A Customer Master Or A Sales Document? Yes. 123. Where Do You Assign Text Determination Procedures For Customer Master Records And For Documents? Account Group, Item Category. 124. What Is The Scope Of Check During Availability Check And What Do You Specify With It? i. Stocks ii. Safety stock, stock in transfer, stock in quality inspection, blocked stock. iii. Inward and outward movements iv. purchase orders, purchase requisitions, planned orders, production orders, reservations, dependent reservations, dependent requirements, sales requirements, delivery requirements. 125. What Is A Partner Type? Give Some Example? The partner type is an indicator which informs you of the type of partner, for example, partner type customer "KU". 126. What Does The Billing Type Control? i. The document number ii. The partner functions allowed at header level iii. The partner functions allowed at item level iv. The billing type that can be used to cancel the billing document v. The transfer status of the billing document: vi. Transferred to financial accounting vii. blocked from transfer viii. not transferred ix. The procedure for account assignment in Financial Accounting x. The allowed output for a business transaction and the procedure for output. 127. Do You Have Schedule Lines In The Delivery? No. 128. What Do You Control At Item Category Level In The Delivery? Relevance for Picking, Determination of Picking Location, Minimum Delivery Quantity. 129. At Which Levels In The Sales Document Can You Have Different Incompletion Procedures? Sales Document Type, Item Category, Schedule Line Category, Partner Functions, Sales Activities. 130. Once The System Determined The Item Level Schedule Line Category Automatically In The Sales Order, Can You Still Change It Manually? Yes. 131. Explain How The System Can Automatically Determine The Item Category In The Sales Order? Sales document type + Higher level Item category + Item category group + Item Usage. 132. Name At Least Five Features That You Can Control For The Schedule Line Category? Relevance for delivery, Availability check, Transfer of Requirements, Goods Movement, Purchasing and Incompletion log. 133. Name At Least Five Features That You Can Control For The Item Category? Pricing, Relevance for delivery, Relevance for billing, Incompletion log, Partner, Tax. 134. Name At Least Three Features Controlled By The Sales Document Type? Pricing, Taxes , Delivery. 135. Why Do You Have Different Sales Document Types In R/3? For business transactions. 136. Give An Example Of When You Would Specify That A Sales Document Can Only Be Created Referencing Another Sales Document? Returns can only be created referencing sales order. 137. Name At Least Five Features That You Can Control For The Sale Document Type? Text, Partner, Pricing, Taxes, Output, Delivery. 138. What Are The Two Influence Factors For Field Selection For Customer Master Record Maintenance? Account Group, Transactions. 139. What Does The Account Group Of The Customer Control? Number assignment, Screen Layout. 140. Can You Share Master Data Between Several Sales Areas? Yes. 141. What Two Ways Of Number Assignment For Documents Or Master Data Do You Know? Internal & External. 142. Explain Shortly What The Sap Business Navigator Is And How It Can Be Used In An Implementation? i. The Reference Model integrated into the R/3 System. ii. The various ways into Business Navigator (the views) help you call just the models and list displays you need in the R/3 Reference Model. iii. You can access other R/3 System components directly from the models. iv. for example: data models, transactions, documentation. 143. What Is The Procedure Model And How Can It Be Used In An Implementation? i. The R/3 Procedure Model is both the methodological framework for the implementation and upgrade processes and a powerful tool that supports you at every stage of the implementation process. ii. The R/3 Procedure Model provides iii. all the fundamental understanding you need at the cross-application level for implementing R/3 application components successfully, iv. a hierarchically-structured plan of the activities, v. a correct sequence of the activities vi. the link to the system setting activities 144. What Is The Procedure Model And How Can It Be Used In An Implementation? i. The R/3 Procedure Model is both the methodological framework for the implementation and upgrade processes and a powerful tool that supports you at every stage of the implementation process. ii. The R/3 Procedure Model provides. iii. all the fundamental understanding you need at the cross-application level for implementing R/3 application components successfully. iv. a hierarchically-structured plan of the activities. v. a correct sequence of the activities. vi. the link to the system setting activities. 145. Is It Possible To Link R/3 Projects To The Ms Project? Yes. 146. If You Deactivate The Module Co In The Company Img Could You Still Select The Co Module In A Project You Create? No. 147. Once You Have Activated The Company Img Can You Still Add Modules/areas? Yes. 148. Explain What The Img Is? Tool for configuring the SAP System to meet customer requirements. Also referred to as the 'Implementation Guide'. 149. Can You Partially Settle Rebate Accruals? Yes. 150. Can You Name The Two Types Of Billing Plans In The Standard R/3 System? Periodic billing, Milestone billing. 151. What Is A Product Hierarchy And For What Can It Be Used? i. Alphanumeric character string for grouping materials by combining various characteristics. The product hierarchy is used for evaluation and pricing purposes. ii. In Product Cost Controlling (CO-PC) : Structure consisting of the plant, product group, product, and order. Used for the interactive analysis of the product costs for each level of the hierarchy. 152. What Is Rebate Processing? A rebate is a special discount which is paid retroactively to a customer. This discount is based on the customer's sales volume over a specified time period. 153. There Is An Interface Between Sd And Fi In Invoicing . Can You Think Of Another Interface Between Sd And Fi? Credit check, Tax calculation, Cost estimate. 154. What Are The Two Possible Ways To Transfer Sales Data To Business Areas? Where Do You Specify Which Way You Want To Use? i. sales area (if the accounts are to be posted according to sales). ii. plant/division (if the accounts are to be posted according to products). 155. Can One Business Area Be Valid For Several Company Codes? Yes. 156. Can You Split Deliveries Into Several Invoices? When Would You Do That? Yes . If the data from the related reference documents differs in the header fields of the billing document. The system will automatically split the invoice. 157. Can You Combine Orders Into One Invoice? Yes. 158. Can You Combine Deliveries Into One Invoice? When Would You Do That? Yes. If the header data and header partners for specified delivery or sales order are identical and if requirements for splitting do not apply. 159. In R/3 How Can You Make Sure That Invoices For A Customer Are Always Created At A Specific Date? Billing Schedule. 160. When You Create A Credit Memo Request Do You Always Have To Refer To A Sales Order Or Any Other Previous Document? Only sales order. 161. From Which Documents Can You Create A Proforma Invoice? Based on sales order or delivery. 162. When You Create An Invoice Can You Carry Out Pricing Again? Yes. 163. Can You Delete An Invoice? No. You can cancel it and create cancellation document. 164. Do You Have To Create A Condition Record For Taxes In The Sd Application? Yes. 165. Where Can You Specify That A Condition Is Mandatory? In Pricing Procedure. 166. If You Create A New Condition Type-do You Also Have To Create A New Condition Table And A New Access Sequence? Yes. 167. Can You Copy Condition Records? If Yes, Are There Any Restrictions? Yes. Field specific. 168. Name The Influencing Factors For Pricing Procedure Determination During Sales Order Entry? Customer, Sales Document Type and Sales Area. 169. If You Want To Make Sure That Conditions Records Apply For A Certain Time Period Only What Would You Have To Do? Validity Period to be specified in condition record. 170. What Is A Group Condition? Condition which can be used to determine a scale value based on more than one item in a document. The system groups the items using either the condition key for the appropriate condition record or a separately defined condition key. 171. Can You Track Cumulative Values In R/3? If Yes, It Could Be Based On What? Yes. Maximum Value, Maximum Orders, Maximum Quantity. 172. For What Do You Use Customer Hierarchies? Pricing , Rebate. 173. Give An Example For A Statistical Condition? VPRS. 174. What Does The Condition Exclusion Indicator Do For You? The system can exclude conditions so that they are not taken into account during pricing in sales documents. 175. Which Data Do You Have To Maintain In Sd So That The System Can Determine The Sales Taxes In The Sales Order Automatically? Tax rate with or without Jurisdiction. 176. Does The Pricing Procedure Apply For The Pricing Data At Item Level Or For The Pricing Data At Header Level? Both. 177. You Want To List All Condition Records For A Certain Material Or A Certain Sales Organization. How Would You Do That? By creating Pricing Reports. 178. If Somebody Adds Price Elements Manually In The Sales Order Or If Somebody Changes A Discount The System Determined Automatically, Do You Have A Possibility To See That In The Sales Order? Yes. 179. Where Would You Specify That A Condition Type Is A Discount Or A Surcharge? In Condition Type Details Screen. 180. You Can Create Scales For Prices And Discounts. Name The Four Possible Scale Basis In R/3? Value, Quantity, Gross weight, Net weight, Volume. 181. Name At Least Three Different Condition Types In Pricing? Price, Discounts, Freight. PROO, K007, KF00. 182. Which Partner Function Is Relevant When It Comes To Tax Calculation In The Sales Order? Ship-to party. 183. Is Sd The Only Module That Uses Condition Technique? No. 184. Please Explain Graphically The Relationship Between The Four Basic Elements In Condition Techniques? Procedures à Condition Types à Access Sequence à Condition Tables à Condition Records. 185. What Are The Four Basic Elements Of Condition Technique? Condition Types, Condition Tables, Access Sequences, Pricing Procedures. 186. Name Three Areas/processes Which Use Condition Technique In Sd? Material determination, Output determination, Account determination. 187. Can The Delivery Quantity And The Picking Quantity In The Delivery Document Be -different? Yes. 188. Is It Possible To Work Without Specifying A Pick/pack Or Loading Time For A Shipping Point? Yes. 189. Define A Shipping Unit? Combination of materials which are packed together in a shipping material at a particular time. Shipping units contain items which in turn are made up of shipping units or delivery items. 190. What Is A Transfer Order And For What Would You Use It? i. Document used to support every stock movement in the warehouse. ii. It contains all the important movement data, such as the material to be transferred, the quantity to be transferred, the storage bins involved, and so on. 191. How Does The System Automatically Determine The Picking Storage Location In The Delivery? i. Storage Condition. ii. Shipping Point. iii. Plant. 192. Can You Change The Shipping Point Determined In The Sales Order Manually? Yes. 193. Explain The Relationship Between Sales Organizations And Plants? Many to Many. 194. Explain The Relationship Between Sales Organizations, Plants And Company Codes? Many to Many to One. 195. Which Organizational Element Is Central In Shipping? Give A Definition Of It? Shipping Point: Organizational unit at a fixed location that carries out shipping activities. A shipping point could, for example, be a company's mail department or a plant's rail depot. Each delivery is processed by only one shipping point. 196. Can A Sales Organization Sell From A Plant Belonging To A Different Company Code? Yes. 197. How Many Shipping Points Can You Assign To A Plant? Many. 198. Would You Have Different Customer Numbers If Your Customer Was Serviced By More Than One Company Code? No. 199. Would You Have Different Customer Numbers If Your Customer Was Serviced By More Than One Sales Organization? No. 200. A Material Is Produced In Plant Boston, Plant Dallas And In Plant Chicago. How Many Different Material Master Number Do You Need? Only one. 201. Is It Possible To Have Different Data For The Same Customer For Different Sales Areas? Yes. 202. Give Examples Of General Data In The Customer Master Record ? Address, Control data, Marketing, Payment transactions, Contact person, Unloading points. 203. Do You Find Any Sales Prices In The Material Master Record? Yes. 204. Can You Assign A Material To More Than One Division? No. 205. Which Are The Two Partner Functions In Sd That Have To Be Maintained In Fi Too ? sold-to party, payer. 206. If You Want To Create Language Specific Sales Texts For Your Material Master, Would You Have To Create A New Material Master Record? No. 207. What Is A Material Type And Which Material Types Do You Know? Raw materials, semi- finished products, finished products, trading goods, operating supplies. 208. Give Examples Of Objects You Can Classify In R/3? Variant Pricing of configurable products. Objects can be customers, products, condition types. 209. What Are The Two Possible Ways Of Control For The Cost Of A Material In The Material Master Record? Standard Price, Moving Average Price. 210. What Is The Difference Between An Inquiry And Quotation ? i. Inquiry: Request made to a vendor for a quotation for required materials or services. ii. No availability check is done for inquiry. iii. Quotation: Offer from a vendor to a purchasing organization regarding the supply of materials or performance of services subject to predefined terms and conditions. iv. A quotation consists of a number of items, in which the total quantity and delivery date of an offered material or service are specified. v. The total quantity can be subdivided into several partial quantities with different delivery dates in the lines of a delivery schedule. 211. Can You Have Alternative Items In A Sales Order? Yes. 212. If You Reference An Inquiry When Creating A Quotation, Would The Inquiry Be Updated? Yes. 213. Can You Copy One Inquiry To Many Quotations ? No. 214. Can You Copy Several Previous Documents Into One Sales Order? Yes. 215. Do You Always Have To Copy The Entire Quantities At Item Level When You Reference A Previous Document? No. 216. Can You Make Sure That Business Data In A Sales Order Is Only Possible To Maintain At Header Level? Yes. 217. From Where Is The Delivering Plant Transferred Into The Sales Order? Customer Master, Material Master. 218. Which Partner Function Is Relevant For The Delivering Plant? The Sold-to-party , Bill-to-party, Payer, Carrier Or The Ship- To- Party? Ship-to party. 219. Can You Manually Change The Delivering Plant In The Sales Order Once It Was Defaulted From The Master Data? Yes. 220. Can You Have Different Incompletion Logs For Different Item Categories? Schedule Line Categories? Yes. 221. If A Document Is Incomplete Can You Still Save The Document? Yes. 222. Can You Change Addresses Of Partners Manually In The Sales Document? Yes. 223. Name Several Input Tools That Make Order Entry Faster And Give A Definition Of Them? Customer Material Information, Product Proposal , Referencing Documents. 224. In Which Business Environment Would You Use Only The Single-line Entry Screen To Create And Save The Order? Telephone Sales, Simple Business. 225. If You Do Not Specify The Delivering Plant In The Sales Order, What Could The System Then Not Do? Delivery Scheduling. 226. For What Would You Use The Fast Change Function In Sales Entry? Alternate Plants, Delivery or Billing Blocks 227. Name Two Ways To Control That Customers Can Receive Only Certain Materials? Material Listing, Exclusion. 228. Name The Influencing Factors For Determining The Item Category In The Sales Document? Sales Document type, Item Category Group, Higher Level Item, Item Usage. 229. Name The Influencing Factors For Determining The Scehdule Line Category In The Sales Document? Item Category, MRP Type. 230. Can The Sales Document Type Be Determined By The System? No. 231. In R/3, Can You Automatically Substitute One Product For Another? What Would You Have To Create? Yes. Product Selection / Material Determination. 232. Give A Definition Of Replenishment Lead Time? Total time for the in-house production or for the external procurement of a product. In in-house production the replenishment lead time is determined to cover all BOM levels. 233. Name At Least Three Item Categories? i. Standard Items : AFN, AGN, TAN. ii. Free of charge Items: AFNN, AGNN, TANN. iii. Non-stock Items : AFX, AGX, TAX. iv. Text Items : AFTX, AGTX, TATX. 234. Can You Change Existing Standard Item Categories? Yes. 235. Can You Create New Sales Order Types? Yes. 236. If You Run Out Of Stock In A Specific Plant Can You Check If There Are Quantities Available In Other Plants? Yes. 237. Can You Maintain Texts For A Specific Customer And Store Them In The System? If Yes, Where? Yes. Customer Material Information. 238. When The System Checks Availability Which Scheduling Would It Use First? Backward Scheduling. 239. Name The Three Delivery Possibilities When There Is Not Enough Stock Available? One Time Delivery, Complete Delivery, Partial Deliveries. 240. On Sales Order, When The System Confirms 20 Pieces To Be Available At A Certain Date, Would These 20 Pieces Still Be Available For Other New Sales Order Coming In Later? No. 241. What Is A Delivery Group And Why Would You Use It? The complete delivery and delivery group functions enable you to combine some or all of the items in a sales order so that they are delivered to the customer together. The system determines automatically the latest delivery date possible for the delivery group and adjusts the schedule lines accordingly. Corresponding requirements for material requirements planning (MRP) are changed or re-determined. 242. What Is Backorder Processing? i. The backorder processing functions enable you to list relevant sales documents for specific materials and process them from the point of view of availability. You can assign available to promise (ATP) stock to outstanding order quantities. In addition, you can withdraw already confirmed quantities and reassign them to different items. ii. Backorder processing is only available for materials with individual requirements. 243. Can You Link Items In A Sales Order? If Yes, When Would You Do That? Yes. Promotional Items. 244. What Are The Two Techniques In Delivery Scheduling? Backward Scheduling & Forward Scheduling. 245. Credit Limit Checks Is An Example Of A Very Close Link Between Which Two Sap Modules? SD & FI. 246. Name The Several Steps In Consignment Processing? Consignment fill-up, Consignment issue, Consignment pick-up, Consignment return. 247. Can You Control That An End User Cannot Copy A Quote Of Customer A To A Sales Order For Customer B? If Yes, Where? Yes. By customizing Copying Control for header data. 248. How Many Documents Do You Create When You Release, Deliver And Invoice The First Order From A Contract? Three : Sales order, Delivery note, Invoice. 249. What Types Of Output Can You Have In Sales? Printer, Telex, Fax, Mail, EDI. 250. Where Would You Specify Which Data Should Be Copied (at Header, Item And Schedule Line Level)when You Copy From One Document To Another One? Customizing Copy Control. 251. What Is The Difference Between The Availability Check 01 (daily Requirement) And 02 (individual Requirement) In Material Master? 01 and 02 are the checking group. Availability check is carried out with the help of these checking group and checking rule. Checking group 01 and 02 are maintained on the material master. 01 - Individual requirement -For this system generates transfers the requirement for each order to the MRP .So that MM can either produce or procure. 02- Collective requirement.-In this all the requirements in a day or in a week are processed at a time. System stores all request and passes on to the MRP in MRP run. In this system performance is high however you can not do the backorder processing whereas in other you can do. 252. What Is Purpose Of Maintaining Common Distribution Channels And Common Divisions Common Distribution Channel and Common Division are maintained so that if any master data like customer or material maintained with respect to one distribution channel can be used in other DCh. It prevents the multiplication of master records. Eg: A customer is created for say sales area 1000/20/00 then the same customer can be used in sales area 1000/30/00 if we maintain 20 as common distribution channel. Hence no need for extending the customers...the same for materials also. 253. How To And Where To Maintain Copy Controls? Check for yourself in IMG (Sales Document types and Delivery Document Types) 254. What And Where Types Of Copy Controls We Change? Copy Control: is basically meant so that Data is copied from preceding Document to subsequent one. What subsequent Document is required is to some extent determined by Customer Requirements as well as Document Types. e.g. In general case of Standard Order, it will be Copy Control (Order to Delivery) from OR to LF . 255. What Is The Purpose Of Shipping Point Determination Not Menu Path? So that Shipping Point is determined automatically once the settings for the same are done. 256. What Type Of Reports Generally A Support Consultant Maintain And Report? Depends on Customer requirements. 257. What Do You Do Really In Pricing Determination, And What Are The Main Deifferences Between Pricing Procedures? Pricing is determined by combination of Sales Organization, Distribution Channel, Division, Customer Pricing Procedure and Document Pricing Procedure. 258. What Is Meant By Transfer Of Data From Legacy Code To Sap Legacy Code ? It should be legacy data to SAP. What it means is you want to transfer all the customer and materials and all other information from Older (legacy system) to new SAP system. You can do it using many tools, most noticeably MDMs. 259. What Are The Five Imp Fields To Be Maintained In Account Determination? Account Determination: Sales View, Sales Organization, Distribution Chanel, Chart of Accounts, Account Assignment Group for Customer and Material and Account Keys. 260. What Are Some Of The Material Master Data Tables? MARA - Material highest level data MBEW - Data referring to accounting MVKE - Data referring to sales MARC - Data at the plant level WLK1 - Listing information MARD - Data storage locations 261. How Would You Find All The Tables In Sap? SE16 (or) SE11. 262. How Would You Find Which Table Is Being Used In A Particular Field? Bring your cursor to the field in a transaction and press F1 and then technical info. 263. What Are Some Of The Tables In Sap Sd? VBAK - Order header VBAP - Order Item VBEP - Order schedule line LIKP - Delivery Header LIPS - Delivery Item VBPA - Partners VBFA - Document flow 264. What Is A Customer Group? Give Me Some Examples. Customer group is 2 digit numbers that is configured within IMG and allows logical grouping of customers. For example you may want to group International customers, Domestic customers or military customers separately. 265. What Do You Mean By Drop Shipment? A drop shipment is based on an order from a customer to a Distributor. The distributor initiates the shipment by Informing the wholesaler. 266. Can You Have Specific Customer Material Information Entered In Sap? Yes, VD51 is the transaction or inside VA02 also you can add customer material information records. 267. What Is A Base Unit Of Measure In Material Master? This is a unit of measure used as a basis for all the transactions, all movements of quantities will be converted to that base unit of measure which is specific to an article. 268. What Is The Use Of Sales Area? Sales area is the geographical aspect of that particular Company code, from there we can generate the reports. 269. What Are Some Of The Views In A Material Master? Basic data, additional basic data, Accounting views, MRP views, Purchasing views, Storage views, forecasting views, sales views and in IS Retail there is also a Listing view and POS view. 270. How Do You Extend A Material, Which Transaction? MM01 271. How Does The Rule Mala Decide The Picking Location? SHIPPING POINT PLANT STORAGE CONDITION STORAGE LOCATION 272. What Is The Transaction Code For Creating A Material/article In Sap? MM41 for creating article in SAP IS Retail and MM01 in SAP Industry solution for creating a material. 273. What Is The Purpose Of Material Master Data? Master data responsible for representing all information related to products or services that a company produces or sell. 274. Is It Possible To Do Delivery Without Shipping Point? No. Shipping point is the destination of the goods, how we can ship the goods. It is like mailing letter without TO address. 275. Explain About Smart Forms? Smart form - it is a form. Basically it is using in output. 276. How Sales Document Is Structured? Header responsible for all the documents Item for materials Schedule line for quantity and delivery. 277. In Sales Order How System Does Picks Up Plant? We assign particular material master to particular Plant it picks up from there. 278. Without Delivery Can You Do Billing? Without delivery invoice is not possible. 279. Could You Explain About Sales Deals? Company Has Launched a new product, for a that material you Want to have a promotion for this you will creating a sales deal and assign it to sales promotion and you maintain condition groups. 280. What Is The Use Of Pricing Date In Condition Type? It shows date of calculation of pricing procedure for that Particular document. So that in future you can see the date On which pricing calculated for that particular doc. 281. What Does A/c Group Control Customer? Account Group is like a control Parameter for the customer master. Most of the fields in the customer master are controlled Using Field Selection, which is internal function of Account Group. 282. Can You Explain About Higher-level Item Category And Item Usage? Sales Document Type (OR) + Item Category Group (NORM) + Item Usage (FREE) + Higher Level Item Category (TAN) + Item Category of Free Goods (TANN) 283. Why Do You Need Project Img? IMG is required for the purpose of customizing and Configuration. There is no role of functional consultant Without it. 284. How We Assigned Sales Organization To Delivering Plant? Path: SPRO-IMG-Enterprise Structure-Assignment-SD-Assign Plant to Sales Organization/Dist.Channel T.Code: OVX6 285. What Are Some Of The Examples Of Global Settings? Currencies, countries etc. This data is application independent. 286. How To Extend Material And Customer To Other Sales Areas? Sales area is a combination of s.org, dist channel & Division. Division is a logical grouping of products. So u Cannot extend material to other sales areas. But u can Extend customer to other sales areas through common Distribution channel & division. 287. How Can We Process Out Bound Deliveries Without Shipping Point? Shipping point is a mandatory Organizational unit for outbound delivery process. 288. Why Do I Use Condition Indexes? How Do You Activate Them? Condition Index is used to search all the conditions Records for a particular condition type (eg PR00). We Activate condition index in the customizing screen of the Condition type. 289. Is It Possible To Release Change Request, Without Releasing Task? Once we can release the task, then only we can release the Change/customizing request. 290. Product Attributes Means? Product attributes is nothing but the features of product. 291. Can One Have Multiple Packing For Delivery? Yes, we can have multiple packing for a single delivery. 292. Explain Edi And Its Usage? Edi - it helps for data transfer. That means from sap or non sap to sap. 293. To Extend Material One Plants To Another Plant What Are The Configuration You Done In Your Project? We have to create in new plant as we have followed for First plant, where as in first plant system will give Internal number but for second plant we have to mention Material number. 294. What Is The Client Specific Data? Give Two Examples Of Client Specific Data? master data transction data. 295. How To Stop Pgi? In credit management we stop the pgi by through credit limit or through customization. 296. How Sap Support To The Client To Know The Customer Requirements? Support to client: implementation method. Correction method. 297. Can We Assign Multi Distribution Channel To A Single Customer In Sap Sd Sales Process. If Yes Then How? While creating customer we need to assign the customer to The respective sales area, we should copy from previous Sales area in XD01 through reference. 298. What Is The Difference Among Sales Deal Promotion Price, Price Agreement? Sales deal promotion-- specific product for a period of time price will be less than MRP. Price agreement-- means an agreement between customer and Vendor for a specific product or with a specific price mentioned in their agreement. 299. Can You Give Me Some Tables In Sap Sd For Customer Master? Some of the tables are KNVV, RF02D, KNA1 etc. 300. Who Is A Payer In The Customer Master Record? Payer is the individual or company who will settle the invoices for products or services sold. 301. Who Defines The Account Groups? Normally these are defined by the finance team. 302. How Does The Sap System Knows Which Fields To Turn On And Off When You Create A Customer Master Record? Using the account group which is assigned to the customer. 303. What Is The Difference Between Inbound And Outbound Delivery? Out bound delivery--- is Post goods Issue (PGI) In bound delivery--- is Post Goods Received (PGR) PGI will come under Sales Area PGR will come under MM Module PGI decreases physical stock and PGR increases 304. From Which Tcode Can I View Customer Wise Back Order (open Order?) V_RA. 305. What Are Inter Company Customers? These customers represent the sales customers within the same client but between different company codes. 306. What Is Retro Active Billing? Who Is Will Create This? Retro active billing means rebate process. When ever the customer reaches the target quantity or volume in specified time Peried.we issues the credit memo for the customer. 307. What Are The Basic Elements Of A Customer Master Record? The sold to party, the ship to party, bill to party, and the payer record. 308. Where Do You Assign Movement Type? We assign movement type in schedule line category. 309. Can Anyone Explain About Purchase Order & Purchase Requisition? In third party if a customer places an order if the Material is not available in our company if the order Document is saved automatically purchase is raised.withthe help Of this purchase group is created Purchase requisition--- For production of material raw Materials are required, but materials are not available in Stocks, then the production dept. request send to the MM manage simply request him to arrange Materials for production of finished materials. 310. What Is The Transaction Code For Creating A Customer In Sap Sd? VD01, VA01, XD01. 311. What Is A Shipping Point And Loading Points In Sap Sd? Shipping points are the points from where deliveries are initiated. One shipping point can be assigned to more than one store or plant. A Loading point is just a subdivision of a shipping point and manually entered into the header data of the delivery. 312. In One Sales Order There Are Two Materials Can Maintain Two Different Pricing Procedures For These Materials? No, you cannot maintain 2 separate pricing procedure for same Material in single order. But u can change the price Manually by selecting the material and then the conditions Tab....u can also see the changed status as manually later. 313. What Is A Sales Office In Sap Sd? A sales office is a geographically located unit of a sales organization. 314. What Is A Division In Sap Sd? A division is a product group that can be defined for a wide range of products or services. Customer specific arrangements can also be made in a division. A sales organization can have many divisions. 315. List The Basic Steps For Sd Configuration. Enterprise structure Partner determination Master data Business process customization Pricing Output determination 316. How You Can Extent The Rebate? What Are The Procedures, What Is The Customisation For It? The transaction coed for extend rebate is "VB D" in that You should fill the field like recipient and rebate Agreement. 317. What Is Accounting Group? Accounting group is simply the classification of customers, Whether its sp, sh, bp, or py, and it also controls the Fields in cmr. 318. What Are The Differences Between Invoice And Billing Document? Billing Doc is the broad view Invoice (F2) is one of type of billing doc. 319. What Is Pricing? How Will It Affects The Billing Procedure? Pricing has the basic price of the item. It also has the Discounts, Taxes, Rebates, & also the Cost of the item. 320. What Is Act Key? And How It Works? Normally How Many Pricing Procedures Do In Implementation? Account key determine a correct G/L account to be posted the data corresponding G/L accounts. You need to assign a G/L account to account key that is assigned to a condition type in a pricing procedure. 321. Tell Me Account Key And Accruals? A/c keys determine a correct g/l a/c to be posted the data corresponding g/l a/c. All customer Rebate accounts are posted in accruals. 322. What Is The Docu.flow? Inquiry ----->Quotation----->Sales Order----->Delivery ----->Transfer Order----->Post Goods Issue ----->Billing ----->Accounting. 323. What Is The Transfer Order? Transfer order is basically picking order where u pick the Material from storage and loading area or picking area. 324. What Are The Five Imp Fields To Be Maintained In Account Determination? Sales org., A/c keys, condition type, a/c group for the customer, a/c group for the material. 325. What Is Meant By Transfer Of Data From Legacy Code To Sap? Before installation of SAP, Data maintained by Company is called Legacy Data. At the time of installation, it is required to transfer Data from Legacy to SAP like Masters (Material/Customer, etc). 326. What Do You Do Really In Pricing Determination, And What Are The Main Differences Between One Pricing Procedure Determination To The Others, Which Data Control These Differences? Pricing prosier determination-----Pricing is determined by combination of Sales Organization, Distribution Channel, Division, Customer Pricing Procedure and Document Pricing Procedure. Pricing prosier----Pricing prosier is the simple prosier of pricing .It identify different- 2 step, counter of condition. 327. What Is Meant By Transfer Of Data From Legacy Code To Sap Legacy Code? It should be legacy data to SAP. What it means is you want to transfer all customer and materials and all other information from Older (legacy system) to new SAP system. You can do it using many tools, most noticeably MDMs. 328. What And Where Types Of Copy Controls We Change? Copy Control--- is basically meant so that Data is copied from preceding Document to subsequent one. In general case of Standard Order, it will be Copy Control (Order to Delivery) from OR to LF 329. What Do You Do Really In Pricing Determination And What Are The Main Differences Between Pricing Procedures? Pricing is determined by combination of Sales Organisation, Distribution Channel, Division, Customer Pricing Procedure and Document Pricing Procedure. 330. How To And Where To Maintain Copy Controls? Sales Document types and Delivery Document Types. 331. What Is Purpose Of Maintaining Common Distribution Channels And Common Division? Common Distribution Channel and Common Division are maintained so that if any master data like customer or material maintained with respect to one distribution channel can be used in other DCh. It prevents the multiplication of master record. 332. Can You Deference Between Contract & Scheduling Agreement? Scheduling Agreement--- is the agreement between consumer and Company having fixed delivery dates and fixed quantity. Contract--- is the agreement between company and consumer for certain period of time. 333. What Is Pmin? PMIN is a Condition type to define minimum prices. It can be Control minimum prices below which a material should not be sold to the customer. 334. Explain About Dunning Procedure? Dunning procedure is used in credit management if Customer does pay back his amount, then using this dunning Procedure Company sends reminders to customer then after That company has to take legal action. 335. What Is Client Requirement In Schedule Line Category? Schedule line category is nothing but delivery date and Delivery quantity is must. 336. In How Many Places We Can Block The Sales Document? Sales document can be blocked at three places depending on The customer risk categories, they are: Sales order level (high risk customer). Delivery level (medium risk customer). Goods issue level (low risk customer). 337. What Is The Difference Between Reconciliation A/c And Normal Posting A/c? Manual entries can be posted in the normal G/L account and the same is not possible in the Reconciliation account, as these are automatically updated. 338. Can You Make Texts Mandatory For A Customer Master Or A Sales Document? Yes. 339. Where Do You Assign Text Determination Procedures For Customer Master Records And For Documents? Account Group, Item Category. 340. What Happens If We Check 'exclusive' Indication In Access Sequence, And What Happens If We Do Not Check? Basically access sequence finds the exact condition record in cond.table by search statuary with the help of exclusive indication. 341. What Is A Partner Type? Give Some Example? The partner type is an indicator which informs you of the type of partner, for example, partner type customer "KU". 342. Can Anyone Tell About Types Of Free Goods? In paste: 25% extra more -it’s inclusive When you buy paste you get a brush free, it’s exclusive. 343. What Are The 14 Steps In The Pricing Procedure? Step, Counter, Condition type, Description, Form, To, Manual, Mandatory Statistics, Print Subtotal, Requirement, Alt condition type, Alt condition base value, Act key and, Accruals. 344. Difference Between Plant And Storage Location? A plant is a manufacturing unit and it is a place where Materials have to be kept. Storage location is a place in plant, where in materials Has to be stored. 345. When I Creating The Sales Order The System Show Error "no Customer Master Record Exist For Sold To Party". How To Rectify It? Because that customer is not create that sales area. 346. When U Creating The Delivery, The System Shows Like "no Zero Ea Material Available". How To Rectify? The system is giving error because material is not available in plant so check the material mb1c. 347. Do U Have Any Link For Customer Master And Credit Management? We can maintain individual customer credit limit in customer Master. In t.code (fd32).we can define the total credit limit For sales area and credit limit for individual sales area. 348. What Should You Do If The Ship To Party & All Other Partner Functions Are Not Being Determined At The Time Of Sales Order Creation? The Net Price Is Zero. Can Any Body Tell What The Problem Would Be? Because we not maintain the base price of material. So that we use vk11 for base price. 349. Explain About Sales Order Cycle? INQUIRY ----->QUOATATION ---- >ORDER ----->DELIVERY BILLING. 350. What Is The Relation Between Sales Organization And Company Codes? Many to One. 351. I Have Created The Outbound Delivery And Have Done Pgi & Made Factory Invoice But When I Try To Make The Final Invoice , It Is Not Allowing To Make The Final Invoice's System Is Showing The Error "delivery Type Zinc Cannot Be Invoiced With Billing Type F2 ". Just go to sales Document Type (VOV8), Check for Sales Order - > Delivery Type -> Billing type assignment and correct accordingly. 352. Can One Create Delivery With Reference To The Project? Yes. 353. What Is The Difference Between Cash Sales And Rush Order? In rush order if a customer places an order delivery will Take place immediately billing will be letter. In cash sale if a customer places an order delivery and Billing will be on the same day. 354. How System Picks Up Pricing While Doing Billing? From Sales Order. 355. Diff Between Business Sale Cycle Nd Customer Sale Cycles? Contract is the business sale cycle and schedule line is the cust.sale cycle. 356. How Do We Control The Credit Checks With Specific To Distribution Channel And Division? By assigning credit control area to specific sales area. 357. What Is Erp And Sap? And Why Implementing Sap In An Organization? Explain The Special Features Of Sap Over Other Erps? ERP---- ERP is a package with the techniques and concept for the integrated management of business as a whole enterprise. ERP is software designed for basic process of company software. SAP----sap is an enterprise information and management package in word wide use of this package it makes possible to track and manage. Is an ERP package. SAP can be fit it any language. Using of sap means there is no need to maintain SAP is able to integrate all functional organizational units. SAP are usually use because SAP there are no. of technical reasons no. of company are planning to implementation Sap highly configurable, secure data, minimum redundancy, maximum consistency. 358. Can U Give Some Master Data In Mm And Sd.? Master Data MM: Material Master, Info Records, Source List, Vendor Master. Master Data SD: Customer Master, Condition Records, Metrical Determination, Item Proposal. 359. Assigning Sales Organization- Distribution Channel- Plant (tvkwz) ? Plant is created by MM Consultant. IMG -> Enterprise Structure -> Assignment -> Sales and Distribution -> Assign sales organization - distribution channel - plant. 360. Can You Configure Two Diff Free Goods Items For One Single Item? Example- On Purchasing Of Item A U Wants To Give Item B & C Free .is It Possible? How? Yes , it is possible by the exclusive free goods. 361. Assigning Shipping Point To Plant (tvswz)? This assignment ensures that goods from different Plant can be dispatched from different Shipping Points. IMG -> Enterprise Structure -> Assignment -> Logistics Execution -> Assign shipping point to plant. 362. Define, Copy, Delete, Check Plant (t001w)? Plant is created by MM Consultant. IMG -> Enterprise Structure -> Definition -> Logistics - General -> Define, copy, delete, check plant. 363. Can You Delete Order? You can delete the order but there should not be any transcations on the particular order. 364. Define Shipping Points (tvst)? Shipping Point is the Organizational element, which is responsible for shipping the Materials to the Customers. IMG -> Enterprise Structure -> Definition -> Logistics Execution -> Define, copy, delete, check shipping point. 365. Mwst? Pl Explains In Detail? MWST is Tax Condition Category which will be Assigned to Country IN. 366. Assign Sales Group To Sales Office (tvbvk)? you can assign as many sales groups as desired to the sales offices. Any one sales group can belong to several sales offices. IMG -> Enterprise Structure -> Assignment -> Sales and Distribution -> Assign sales group to sales office 367. What Makes Listing & Exclusion Work Differently Than Each Other? Listing--- only the materials which is applicable to the Customers. Exclusion--- The materials which is not applicable to the Customers. 368. Assign Sales Office To Sales Area (tvkbz)? IMG -> Enterprise Structure -> Assignment -> Sales and Distribution -> Assign sales Office to Sales Area. 369. Maintain Sales Office (tvbur)? you define the sales offices in your company. The definition of sales offices is optional. For each sales office, you can determine the printer for output based on the sales documents in different ways. IMG -> Enterprise Structure -> Definition -> Sales and Distribution -> Maintain Sales Office. 370. How To Do Customization Of Rebate Processing In Sap Sd? activate rebate in customer master data selling material should be activated in MM data sales org. should be activated billing doc should be activated 371. Setting Up Sales Area (tvta)? All the sales are made from a particular sales Area. For creating a Sales Order Sales Area is compulsory. IMG ->Enterprise Structure -> Assignment -> Sales and Distribution -> Set up sales area. 372. Assigning Division To Sales Organization (tvkos)? IMG -> Enterprise Structure -> Assignment -> Sales and Distribution -> Assign division to sales organization. 373. Which Partner Function Realent For Credit Limit? Sold to party is relevant for credit limit. 374. Maintaining Division (tspa)? Division is a way of grouping materials, products, or services. IMG -> Enterprise Structure -> Definition -> Logistics - General -> Define, copy, delete, check division. 375. Name Three Areas/processes Which Use Condition Technique In Sd? Material determination, pricing determination, Output determination, Account determination. 376. Assigning Distribution Channel To Sales Organization (tvkov)? This assignment ensures, a Sales Organization can supply Materials to Customers through this Distribution Channel. IMG -> Enterprise Structure -> Assignment -> Sales and Distribution > Assign distribution channel to sales organization. 377. Explain What A Condition Table And An Access Sequence Are And The Relationship Between Them? Condition table defines the combination of fields (the key) that identifies an individual condition record. Access sequence is a search strategy that the system uses to find valid data for a particular condition type. 378. Maintaining Distribution Channel (tvtw)? Distribution Channel is the way, in which Products or Services reach Customers. IMG -> Enterprise Structure -> Definition -> Sales and Distribution -> Define, copy, delete, check distribution channel. 379. What Is A Condition Type? What Are The Two Main Groups Of Condition Types? Condition type is a representation in the system of your daily pricing activities. Fixed Amount & Percentage. 380. Assigning Sales Organization To Company Code (tvko~bukrs)? This assignment ensures all the sales made through this Sales Organization are accounted for in the assigned Company Code (Company Code is created by FI Consultant). IMG -> Enterprise Structure -> Assignment -> Sales and Distribution -> Assign Sales Organization to Company Code. 381. Which Partner Function Is Relevant When It Comes To Tax Calculation In The Sales Order? Ship*to party. 382. Maintaining Sales Organization (tvko)? Sales Organization is an organizational unit responsible for the sale of certain products or services. IMG -> Enterprise Structure -> Definition -> Sales and Distribution -> Define, copy, delete, check Sales organization. 383. Where Would You Specify That A Condition Type Is A Discount Or A Surcharge? In Condition Type Details Screen. 384. Define Credit Control Area (t014)? Company is created by FI Consultant. The credit control area is an organizational unit that specifies and checks a credit limit for customers. A credit control area can include one or more company codes. It is not possible to assign a company code to more than one control area. Within a credit control area, the credit limits must be specified in the same currency. IMG -> Enterprise Structure -> Definition -> Financial Accounting-> Define Credit Control Area. 385. You Want To List All Condition Records For A Certain Material Or A Certain Sales Organization. How Would You Do That? By creating pricing Reports. 386. Edit, Copy, Delete, Check Company Code (t001)? Company is created by FI Consultant. The company code is an organizational unit used in accounting. It is used to structure the business organization from a financial accounting perspective. IMG -> Enterprise Structure -> Definition -> Financial Accounting -> Define, copy, delete, check Company Code. 387. Can You Explain What A Statistical Condition Is? Give An Example For A Statistical Condition? VPRS. 388. For What Do You Use Customer Hierarchies? Pricing, Rebate. 389. Name The Influencing Factors For Pricing Procedure Determination During Sales Order Entry? Customer, Sales Document Type and Sales Area. 390. Can You Copy Condition Records? If Yes, Are There Any Restrictions? Yes. Field specific. 391. Tax Jurisdiction Processing Is A Close Link Between Which Two Modules? FI & SD. 392. What Is The Difference Between Erb And Eru Account Keys? Erb--- is the sales deduction account key used for rebate processing. Eru--- is the accruals key used in pricing For rebate processing it is used for difference in sales Revenues. 393. From Which Documents Can You Create A Performa Invoice? Sales order or delivery. 394. What Is The Difference Between Pgi Cancellation And Returns Order? PGI cancellation--- is done before the transportation of goods. Return order--- means it’s already transported reached customer in requested date. 395. When You Create A Credit Memo Request Do You Always Have To Refer To A Sales Order Or Any Other Previous Document? Only sales order. 396. What Are Incoterms? Where Do We Fix Them? Where Do You Find In Regular Process? Incomers or international comm. terms and u find in CMR - Sales area Data - billing Tab. 397. Can One Business Area Be Valid For Several Company Codes? Yes. 398. Explain The Business Flow Of An Implementation Project? Project preparation -------->Business blue prints, Realization-------->Support. 399. There Is An Interface Between Sd And Fi In Invoicing. Can You Think Of Another Interface Between Sd And Fi? Credit check, Tax calculation, and Cost estimate. 400. An Order Item With Different Shipping Point Copied Into The Sales Deliveries? Yes,but delivery split will be resulted. 401. How To Close The Backorders? Through availability check and TOR you can close the back Order process. 402. Tell Process Of Ticket Flow From Client Side To You? Normally tickets will come to the helpdesk which were sent By End-users thru client specific internal mail id, then we will take up the tickets ans then access the production Server according to the ticket. 403. What Is The Team Size? Duration Of The Project.? Hardly the team of the SD will be 4 to 5 and entire team of the project will be around 20-24 (all modules like fi/co, SD, mm, pp, hr, QM, pm). If its big project, it will be around 40. Team size means the employees who you are working on sap r/3 implementation. For the project completion it will take around 8-10 months to get into golive. After that, post implementation for 3 months. After that supporting it depends as project time line for every company is different. 404. What Is Sap R/3? A third generation set of highly integrated software modules that performs common business function based on multinational leading practice. Takes care of any enterprise In R/3 system all the three servers like presentation; application server and database server are located at different system. 405. What Are Wf And Its Importance? Business Work Flow: Tool for automatic control and execution of cross-application processes. This involves coordinating the persons involved, the work steps required, and the data, which needs to be processed (business objects). The main advantage is reduction in throughput times and the costs involved in managing business processes. Transparency and quality are enhanced by its use. 406. What Two Ways Of Number Assignment For Documents Or Master Data Do You Know? Explain The Difference Between Them? Internal & External. 407. What Is Ides? International Demonstration and Education System. A sample application provided for faster learning and implementation. 408. Can You Share Master Data Between Several Sales Areas? Yes. 409. Why Do You Usually Choose To Implement Sap? There are number of technical reasons numbers of companies are planning to implement SAP. It’s highly configurable, highly secure data handling, min data redundancy, max data consistency; you can capitalize on economics of sales like purchasing, tight integration-cross function. 410. What Does The Account Group Of The Customer Control? Number assignment, Screen Layout. 411. What Is Sap? SAP is the name of the company founded in 1972 under the German name (Systems, Applications, and Products in Data Processing) is the leading ERP (Enterprise Resource Planning) software package. 412. Different Types Of Erp? SAP, BAAN, JD Edwards, Oracle Financials, Siebel, PeopleSoft. Among all the ERP’s most of the companies implemented or trying to implement SAP because of number of advantages aver other ERP packages. 413. What Are The Two Influence Factors For Field Selection For Customer Master Record Maintenance? Account Group, Transactions. 414. Can Bw Run Without A Sap R/3 Implementation? Certainly. You can run BW without R/3 implementation. You can use pre-defined business content in BW using your non-SAP data. Here you simply need to map the transfer structures associated with BW data sources (Info Cubes, ODS tables) to the inbound data files or use 3rd part tool to connect your flat files and other data sources and load data in BW. Several third party ETL products such as Acta, Informatics, Data Stage and others will have been certified to load data in BW. 415. Name At Least Five Features That You Can Control For The Sale Document Type? Text, Partner, Pricing, Taxes, Output, Delivery. 416. Why Do You Want To Leave Your Current Employer? State how you are looking for a new challenge, more responsibility, experience and a change of environment. 417. What Are Datasets? The sequential file is called datasets. They are used for file handling in SAP. 418. What Are The Different Types Of Source System? SAP R/3 Source Systems, SAP BW, Flat Files and External Systems. 419. Name At Least Five Features That You Can Control For The Schedule Line Category? Relevance for delivery, Availability check, Transfer of Requirements, Goods Movement, Purchasing and Incompletion log. 420. Can One Specify User Specific Dates In Delivery Documents? we can sepcify the dates but with respect to avilability,check and schdule line combination. 421. Explain How The System Can Automatically Determine The Item Category In The Sales Order? Sales document type + Higher level Item category + Item category group + Item Usage. 422. Explain How The System Can Automatically Determine The Schedule Line Category In The Sales Order? Item category + MRP type. 423. Once The System Determined The Item Level Schedule Line Category Automatically In The Sales Order, Can You Still Change It Manually? Yes. 424. At Which Levels In The Sales Document Can You Have Different Incompletion Procedures? Sales Document Type, Item Category, Schedule Line Category, Partner Functions, Sales Activities. 425. What Is The Item Category Group? Where Do You Maintain It? Item category group is define the features of item and it represent the’s the function and it how will work in sales process. 426. You Want To Set Up A New Condition Type. Name The Necessary Steps You Have To Do If You Want The System To Determine The New Condition Type Automatically During Sales Order Entry? Use this vk11 transaction code. 427. When You Think Of The Five Possible Elements Necessary For The Account Determining During Posting Of A Sales Invoice - Where From Does The System Get The Information? Chart of a/c group, customer a/c group, material a/c group, sales org., and a/c keys. 428. Name The Necessary Steps To Setup A Route? Define the transportation connection points Define the modes of transport and shipping type 429. During Route Determination The System Also Needs To Know The Departure Zone Of The Goods To Be Shipped. How Does This Information Come Into The Sales Order? Customer Master. 430. What Do You Mean By Condition Index, How You Configured In Your Project? Condition index means keep the all condition records what Ever you maintained for particular condition type. If you want process this you should be active index in Condition type. 431. If I Want To Configure The Partner Determinations For Sales Manager And General Manager If The Sales Manager Is Bossiness Partner In Sales Order He Should Only Give 5% Discount And General Manager Should Can Give 10% Discount How Could I Configure This? By using ASAP Methodology we can implement according to There requirement. 432. Can You Specify When Output Should Be Created? If Yes, What Possibilities Do You Have? Yes. Print out, Mail, EDI, Fax. 433. What Does The Material Type Control? Finished goods. 434. What Is The Purpose Of The Request Number Which Is Generated When U Save A Customization? That is used to move your non-cross client customizations. 435. What Makes A Customer A Sold-to? How Can You Check? Customer is regarded as sold to party when he is acting as Person who is buying goods, products can be shipped, he is Billed, and he is Paying for the invoices generated. You can clarify your doubt while creating a Sold to party, Ship to party, Payer, by using respective account groups, Ex :Payer will not be having a Shipping Tab in Sales area Data. 436. What Is The Difference Between General Item Category Group And Item Category Group? Item category group--- is used for SD to configure the item Category and how this item behaves in sales order. General Item category group--- determines the category of the Item like, trading goods, service goods, finished goods Etc... 437. In Which Scenario Order And Billing Has Different Pricing Procedure? When we use rebate. 438. Is It Possible To Block A Material For Sales Order? Is It Possible For The Blocking Customers In The Same? Way...if So.how? Yes u have to go to the MM02 & there go to sales Org 1 tab .Page there u maintain cross distribution chain after that This material is block for sales. If block a material for Plant then u should maintain in MM02 basic data 1 Cross Distribution plant & also if u block a material for Procurement then u should maintain in cross distribution Purchasing data. 439. What Is The Use Of Update Groups In Credit Management? Update group check the how many orders are open &order Reference, how many orders are open in delivery and delivery Reference, how many orders are open in billing. 440. What Is Cr (change Request) In Support Project? The Change Request is that request when you do some thing New in customizing or configuration in the system. Example: When ever working with pricing condition record, the Current Support project has only 3 Key combinations, but user Wants to have one more key combination or need to change the Combination means, it is consider as a change request. 441. Explain How Diff Between Item And Schedule Line Sales Document? ITEM:-In this the system shows all the details of the Item, like material, pricing, or it may be free good, ship-to- Party, batch, etc. SCHEDULE LINE:-It is about delivery date and delivery Quantity. 442. How Many Shipping Points Can You Assign To A Sales Organization? None. 443. If You Generate Bill More Than Credit Limit Then What Will Happen? How can you go for billing? System will block at order level Or delivery level only. 444. Can We Rename Movement Types? We cannot rename movement types. 445. What Do You Assign Distribution Channels And Divisions? Sales Organizations. 446. How We Maintain One Material At A Time For Two Company Codes? We have to extend the material from one plant to another Plant. 447. What Are The Highest Organizational Units In Sd, Mm.pp, Fi, Co? A: SD: Sales Organizations. MM: Plant PP: Plant FI: Company Code CO: Controlling Area 448. Basic Elements Of Condition Technique? There are 5 basic elements of condition technique: Creating condition table(s), Access Sequence, Condition Type, Procedure, Placing the Condition type in the Procedure. 449. Is It Possible To Automate Output Processing? Yes, we can use output determination procedure to automate Output processing. This is based on Condition technique. We Have to assign the output determination procedure. 450. What Is A Credit Control Area? What Relationship Exists Between Credit Control Areas And Company Codes? Credit control area. Organizational unit in an organization checks credit limits for customers. A credit control area can include one or more company codes. 451. What Are The Steps In Consignment Processing? Company fills the goods at customer site, Still it is the property of company, is called as Consignment fill up, (CF) .When the customer consumes the material company issues the Invoice is called as consignment issue (CI) .If the customer finds that he got any material defective he Returns is called as consignment return (CR) .Which is not sold by the consumer, the company will pick This stock consignment Pick up (CP). 452. Name The Three Internal Organizational Elements Within A Sales Organization And Briefly Explain Their Function. Sales Office--- Geographical aspects of the organization in business development and sales are defined using the term sales office. A sales office can be considered as a subsidiary. Sales offices are assigned to sales areas. If you enter a sales order for a sales office within a certain sales area, the sales office must be assigned to that area. Sales Group--- The staff of a sales office may be subdivided into sales groups. For example, sales groups can be defined for individual divisions. Salespersons--- Individual personnel master records are used to manage data about salespersons. You can assign a sales person to a sales group in the personnel master record. 453. What Are The Techniques In Delivery Scheduling? Backward scheduling & forward Scheduling. Backward scdg-- System calculates Requested delivery date. Forward Scheduling--- If the material is not avl. On that date the system calculates the earliest possible delivery date based on the material avl. Date. 454. What Is The Difference Between Condition Type Ek01 And Ek02? EK01 is a calculated cost EK02 is estimated cost 455. Which Three Organizational Elements Make Up A Sales Area And Briefly Explain Their Function? Sales organization: --- An organizational unit that sells and distributes products, negotiates terms of sale, and is responsible for these transactions. Distribution channel: --- Channel through which salable materials or services reach customers. Typical distribution channels include wholesale, retail and direct sales. You can assign a distribution channel to one or more sales organizations. Division: --- Product groups can be defined for a wide-ranging spectrum of products. For every division you can make customer-specific agreements on, for example, partial deliveries, pricing and terms of payment. Within a division you can carry out statistical analyses or set up separate marketing. 456. Is It Possible To Create New Sales Order Types? Yes it’s possible to create a new sales order type but Generally it is advised to copy standard one and proceed as It is connected in so many places 457. Is It Possible To Change Existing Standard Item Categories? Yes, its is possible in SAP but u never do this method Because u have a lot of problems because suddenly u need for Standard functionality in this case u couldn't remember. 458. What Are The Delivery Possibilities, When There Is Not Enough Stock Available? When there not enough stock system will give the next Delivery date by checking the availability of that quantity of Material. 459. What Is Delivery Group And What Is Its Purpose? Delivery group is grouping of all sub items to be delivery at one time. Mostly used in bill of materials. It is more required in bom when u specify the delivery of diff material at the same time which comes under a header item. let’s say if u wants to deliver the monitor of pc today, cpu tomorrow etc how it would be? to avoid that we specify the delivery group so that all the sub items under header items are delivered togther. 460. How Can We Delete The Sales Orders? How Can Invoices Be Cancelled Or Deleted? You can very well delete sales order using transaction VA02, but with a constraint that no subsequent document is created against it. You cannot delete an Invoice. You can only cancel it with (VF11) if the relevant accounting document is not been generated. Ask your FI guy to reverse the accounting doc. Only after the accounting doc is reversed and/or deleted, you can cancel your invoice. You also need to check if any TAX documents are generated with your Invoice. You need to reverse/delete those documents also. 461. Relation Ship Between Sales Organization And Plants? Many too many. 462. What Is Partner Type? Example It? One type of Partner-- who supplies goods is called VENDOR. One type of Partner-- who Purchases from you is called CUSTOMER. One type of Partner-- who works for you is called Employee or Personnel. One type of Partner-- who helps in improving your business is Called CONTACT PERSON. 463. We Can Define Our Own Exchange Rate Types And Use Them Instead Of The Defaulted Types, 'm', 'b' And 'g'. How Can We Overwrite Default Types In Sd? Exchange rate gets copied from the customer master record. Exchange rate types are to be maintained for the customer in the sales screen. 464. Item Category Group? Where You Maintain It? For standard material item category group is Norm For Bom material item category group is Erla/lumf For Third party material item category group is BANS. 465. What Are The Influencing Factors For Account Determination For Invoice? Chart of a/c AAG of customer AAG of material A/c key 466. What Is Condition Type? Tell Me The Main Groups? A condition type is one which describes the what the purpose Of that condition types are used to define how the particular condition is going to perform. 467. What Is Pricing Procedure? Pricing procedure is a systematic and sequential use of Condition types to arrive at a right value of the product. 468. Explain The Steps To Setup A Route? A Route is part of shipping which is determined Departure Zone Shipping conditions Transportation Group Transportation zone 469. Diff. Between Inquiry And Quotation? Inquiry--- is just a simple document showing the interest Your customer on products and services. Quotation--- is a legal agreement you offer to you Customer. You agree to the customer that you will charge a Particular amount. 470. What Is Material Type Control? Material type control is similar to account group control For customer master. The material type and the industry Are working helps to control the data Material. 471. Can We Get Deleted Sales Order Numbers? Firstly u cannot delete the sales orders once they are saved You can only cancel the sale order or reject the sale Order, in that case you can get the rejected sales order Numbers. 472. What Is Difference Between The Header Level Condition And Item Level Condition? Header level conditions are for the whole document, while Item level condition is for the particular item only. 473. What Is Main Purpose Of Maintaining The Master Data? Coz master data is responsible for all the records like Sales order, delivery and billing and as well as in Customer payments. It is mandatory. 474. Tell Me Some Different Partner Functions? Sold to party --- The person who places the order. (SP). Ship to Party --- The person who receives the goods. (SH). Bill to party ---The person who receives the Bills (BP). Payer ---The person who pays the payment (PY). 475. On What Tax Is Calculated On Base Price Or Net Price? We can calculate tax on both (net price/gross price) as per Requirement because options are available. 476. Bill Of Material Means? Bills of material means combining a group of materials in Two products. In which included header level item and item level item. When header level item is relevant for pricing then item level item is not, when item level item is relevant for pricing then header level item is not. 477. What Is The Difference Between Vk11 And Vk31? Tcode vk11 used for individual Maintenance of condition record And Tcode vk31 used for mass Maintenance of condition record. 478. Bom Used In Which Modules? MM, PP, SD, CRM. 479. What Is Backorder Processing Or Partial Delivery? While doing sales order the material is not available some Times at that time we give the delivery date if the goods available earlier than delivery date can go back with sales order and deliver the goods before first delivery date. This process called as Backorder processing. 480. How Can We Assign One Credit Limit To Two Customers? Create a customer group and then assign it to CCA. 481. What Is The Access Sequence For Header Conditions? Access sequence is a search strategy which finds the right Condition record from the condition table. 482. What Is Difference Between The Item Proposal And Dynamic Proposal? Item proposal--- in which we will manual selects the items from the list of items for that particular customer, It contains material and quantity what the customer regularly purchase. Next time if the customer comes and places an order system copies material and quantity from item proposal. Dynamic proposal--- sale order is raised items are automatically determined in that order. 483. What Does U Mean By Accruals? All customer Rebate accounts are posted in accruals. 484. What Is Material Determination? Can You Do Two Materials For One Material? Material Determination is nothing but an alt. material to the original material. With 2 materials we cannot swap. 485. Where Do You Maintain Factory Calendar? Factory calendar is maintain in plant Factory calendar is used to fix up the working dates and Holidays. 486. How Is Credit Control Determined? Credit control is determined in the combination COMPANY CODE + CUSTOMER RISK CATEGORY + CREDIT GROUP = CREDIT CONTROL AREA. One Company code can be assigned too many credit control areas And multiple company codes are not assigned to one credit Control area. 487. What Does U Mean By Exclusive In Access Sequence? Exclusive is a track point for access sequence if the Exclusive indicator is set, if a valid condition is found by the system in a cond. table, it will stop Searching and will not go to next cond.table. 488. What Are The Parameters That U Can See In Fd32? you can see address of the customer, Central data, status and payment history of the customer. 489. Difference Between Discount And Rebate? Rebate--- is an agreement between Sales Org. rebates is a special discount which occasionally gives. Special discount paid to a customer once he achieves sales volume in a given period of time. Discount--- is a general disc. Normally applicapable in the business transactions in a regular base. Discount is the one which all the customers can get. 490. What Is The Difference Between General Item Category And Item Category Group In Mm01 Sales Org 2? Item category: It is an indicator that determines the characteristics of a Document item. Item category group: It define the characteristics of the material and what the role in sales order. 491. Relationship Between Company Code And Sales Organization? ONE to MANY. 492. How You Change Sold-to-party Into Ship-to-party? You can’t change sold to party to ship to party. But you can Change ship to party to sold to party because sold to party will be having all the partner Functions. 493. If One Company Can Maintain One Customer Number For Different Sales Areas Is It Possible With Out Any Changes? No it is not possible because one company can have only use one customer number. Customer Number is a unique feature in SAP. 494. How Is Pricing Procedure Determined? Sales Area, Customer pricing procedure & Document pricing Procedure. 495. How Is Item Category Determined? Sales doc type, Item category group, item usage, higher level item and item category all these purpose by default item category come. 496. What Is Condition Exclusion? Condition exclusion groups contain group of discount Condition types from this customer will not receive all Discounts but receives one best discount of all (ov32). 497. How To Configure Partial Deliveries? Check the box in customer master or in delivery type (LF) Check partial delivery indicator. 498. What Is Condition Supplement? Condition supplement: If company wants to give discount irrespective of any Combination till certain period condition supplement will Use. System by default proposes the discount along with Base price in the pricing procedure 499. What Is The Purpose To Differentiate The Sales Document Type? If there are different business process, if you want to In that case you can configure different document types (For ex. domestic sales you can create order type DOR & for export sales you can configure EOR). You can also assign different number range to different Document types for different business process. 500. Third Party Sale? A third-party sales process generally happens when you Can’t make delivery to the customer due to insufficient Stock or some other reasons. In that situation normally you Will go for third party sales process. 501. If We Have Three Plants & One Material No. Then How To Extend Single Material To All Three Plants? Use T_Code MM01 and enter the same material with Organization and plant as you require. The message will Appear "Material has been extended". 502. How Revenue Account Is Determined? Application Chart of accounts Sales Org Condition type Account assignment group from customer Account assignment group from material Account key 503. If We Have Three Sales Areas & Single Customer. How To Extend One Customer To Three Sales Areas? You will go to xd01 transaction code and you will use Reference data to copy another sales area. 504. What Is Transfer Order? Transfer order is an internal document to move goods from Storage to picking area. 505. What Is An Mrp Type? MRP is Material Resource planning which is based on Transfer of Requirements while processing the Sale Order. 506. Fields In Material Master? Basicdata1, basic data2, sales org1, sales org2, sales general plant data, sales text, mrp, purchasing data and accounting. 507. Types Of Billing? order related billing delivery related billing Performa invoice for order Performa invoice for delivery credit memo debit memo cash sale 508. What Is The Diff. Between Billing And Invoice? Invoice is whenever we can send to the goods send to the customer because to check the Goods. Billing document is a total goods bill. 509. How Is Access Seq. Controlled? Access Sequence is controlled by the accesses. It can also be Controlled by requirements, but requirements only determine. 510. How Is Step And Counter Differentiated? Step--- Number is used to specify the sequential order for Condition types. Counter--- is used when two or more Condition Types required The same Step Number. 511. What Is Line Item? Line item is a row where all the details of particular item whenever you get the all information of particular item then double click on the row. 512. What Is Use Of Customer Group? Customer group is represented the different-2 customer statically point and it define the customer pricing and discount. 513. Where Is Shipping Conditions Stored? In material master data, and shipping determination. 514. How Is Plant Determined? Plant is determined by material and shipping point determination. 515. How Can We Supers The Field I.e. Sales Office And Sales Group In Va01 Create Order Initial Screen? you goes for sales area data and in that you can Supers, optional, and also mandatory, you can done which Element u wants like sales office. Sales group and, etc. 516. Why Does U Maintain Sales Office? A Sales office establishes contact between the firm and the Regional market. It represents the business different areas. 517. How Is Storage Location Determined? It is determined by Plant + Storage condition + Shipping Point. 518. How Is Shipping Point Determined? Shipping point will be determined based on the shipping Conditions, loading group and delivery plant. 519. In Third Party How Sales Order Changes To Purchase Req. Automatically? In a third party in schedule category we have a field Called purchasing requisition. Scheduling category is cs purchase req is automatically generate and we want generate with transaction code me51 to create purchase requirements. 520. Which Data Is Updated When You Create A Billing Document? Financial document is going to generated . Billing due list up dates . Credit management up dates. 521. List The System Modules That Are Included In The Financial Application Component? The following SYSTEM modules are included in the financial application component: FI — Financial Accounting. CO— Controlling. EC— Enterprise Controlling. IM— Investment Management. PS— Project System. 522. List The System Modules That Are Included In The Human Resource Application (human Capital Management) Component? The following SYSTEM modules are included in the human resource application component: PA — Personnel Administration. PT— Personnel Time Management. PY— Payroll. 523. List The System Modules That Are Included In The Logistic Application Component? The following SYSTEM modules are included in the logistic application component: SO__ Sales and Distribution. MM__ Materials Management. PP__ Production Planning and Control. LE__Logistics Execution. QM__Quality Management. CS__Customer Service. 524. What Is The Purpose Of Transaction Code In System? The transaction code is the short path to reach to a specific screen in SYSTEM. Instead of going through the routine menu, you can enter the Transaction Code and then press "Enter", which would directly take you to the specific Transaction. For example, you can access the VA22 transaction code, to reach to the Change Quotation screen. However, the VA01 transaction code is used to create Sales document in SYSTEM. 525. What Is Meant By Match Code In System? The comparison key that helps you to find the key of a specific database record depending on the field value entered in the record is known as match code. On the basis of the match code, the System then displays a list of records from which you can select the appropriate one. 526. Explain The Three Main Areas Of Customer Master Data? Customer master is a part of the SD module and forms the basis for customer-related transactions. It is divided into three areas: General Data — It is used for the maintenance of general customer details such as name, address, phone/fax nos. and so on. Sales Area Data — It is used for Sales related data maintenance. Company Code data — It used for accounts related data maintenance. 527. What Is The Purpose Of Implementation Guide (img Menu) In The System? The Implementation Guide (IMG Menu) is used to collectively group the areas that must be configured & customized and form a basic structure of an organization in the System to run. 528. How Will You Maintain A Company Code In The System? To maintain a company code, navigate the following menu path: Customizing Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)-> Enterprise Structure->Definition -> Financial Accounting-> Edit, Copy, Delete, Check Company Code. 529. What Do You Mean By Enterprise Resource Planning (erp)? ERP is a way to integrate processes and data of an organization into a single system to provide Easy access and workflow in an organization. It refers to the way in which large organizations efficiently plan to use resources to their fullest. 530. List The Advantages Of Implementing An Erp System In An Organization? The advantages of implementing an ERP System in an organization are as follows: Various processes and workflow of an organization are integrated in a single System. Efficient utilization of resources in an organization. Ability to easily share organizational data across different departments. Improves efficiency and productivity levels. Lower costs. Better customer service. 531. Specify The Role Of The Sales And Distribution (sd) Module In An Erp System? The SD module is an application module for supply chain and operational performance management and provides support to customers. This module is integrated with the Material Management (MM) and Production Planning (PP) functional modules. It also allows organizations to input Sales price of products for customers and check for open orders. 532. What Are The Functions Of The R/3 System? The R/3 System provides the following functions: Integration — Provides a complete integration of the various data transfers, which, in turn, is helpful in making good-quality reports. Saving time with integration — Helps reduce the time needed to close the books of account. Automation of consolidation procedure — Saves time and cost as there is no need to manually enter all the documents. Customizing the software according to the needs — Provides the facility of creating new programs whenever the requirement arises. Cost effective audits — Provides the facility to the auditor for performing interactive analysis of special information. Easy to learn and use — Provides context-sensitive functions and extensive online documentation that is easy to understand and learn. Information System — Includes functions for creating reports. It provides information through exceptional and interactive reporting. International accounting — Allows parallel valuation approaches at all levels for external and internal accounting purposes by using different currencies. 533. What Is R/3 System Landscape? Landscape is an architecture of servers. The following are three different landscapes for SYSTEM: Development —In a development server, a technical/function person creates the programs or configures the System as per the company's requirement and sends it to the quality server. Quality— In this server, team members test the development/ configuration with various parameters. Then the final configuration is transported from Development Server to Production Server. Production — Through this server, the software is finally handed over to client for users. 534. What Are The Databases Supported By The System R/3 System? The SYSTEM R/3 System provides support for the following databases: ADABAS D. DB2/400. DB2/Common Server. DB2/MVS. Microsoft SQL Server. Oracle. Oracle Parallel Server. 535. What Is The Role Of An Abaper In The Sd Module? The ABAPer uses the data transfer tools, such as BDC/LSMW, to upload huge data, such as Customer master data. ABAPer writes the Z-Development and programmes as specified by the functional consultant as per the business requirements. 536. Who Can Be The Business Partner In The System? A business partner in the System can be: Customer. Vendor. Contact person. Employee recognized as Sales personnel. Customized as per the specific requirement of business. 537. Explain Badis And Its Relevance? In the R/3 System, System provides an enhancement technique called business add-ins (BADis). BADis are business transaction events helpful to bundle program, menu, and screen enhancements into a single business add-in. 538. What Is The Quick Viewer? The Quick Viewer is a very useful tool to create reports in System. It helps create reports without actually doing any programming. It is similar to an ABAP Query; however, it does not have all the capabilities that the ABAP query procedure has. 539. Which Kinds Of Servers Are Used To Define The Functioning Of A System? There are three servers in the SYSTEM application modules: Development server. Quality server. Production server. 540. What Is The Role Of Erp In A Business Environment? Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) is a software package, which is designed for the integrated management of the various business processes, such as inquiry, order placement, invoicing, and billing. It was initially designed for manufacturing industries to manage the core business areas, such as production and finance. With the popularity of the ERP package, its functionalities also extended to cover the complete business management. 541. Define Ides. IDES stands for International Demonstration and Education System and is an application used to quickly learn and implement ERP. 542. What Is R/3? R/3 means the three-tiered architecture used by the system. The three tiers are as follows: Database Server. Application Server. Presentation Server. 543. What Is A Division In The Sales And Distribution Module? A division refers to a product group that can be defined for a wide range of products or services. In Sales organization, there can be multiple divisions, which can also include customer-specific arrangements. 544. What Do You Mean By A Sales Office In The Sd Module? The geographically located unit of a Sales organization refers to a Sales office in the SD module. 545. What Do You Mean By A Shipping Point And Loading Point In The Sd Module? A shipping point refers to the point from where the deliveries of products are shipped and, one or more plants can have the same shipping point. However, the subdivision of a shipping point refers to a loading point, which is manually entered in the header data of a delivery as per customization. 546. What Do You Mean By The Terms Sales Office, Sales Groups, And Sales Employee In The Sd Module? The geographical groups created for an organization to structure a Sales team are known as Sales office. A Sales office is then assigned to one or more Sales Area. The staff of a Sales office is divided into Sales groups and then Sales employee is assigned to a Sales group. A Sales employee refers to the individual with personnel master records that are used to manage data of that Sales employee. 547. What Does The Prefixes Va, Vl, Vt, And Vf Of A Transaction Code Stand For? The definitions for the prefixes VA, VL, VT, and VF of a transaction code are as follows: VA —Sales Order. VL —Delivery. VT—Shipment. VF—Billing. 548. What Do The Suffixes 01, 02, And 03 Of A Transaction Code Represent? The suffixes 01, 02, and 03 of a transaction code represent the following: 01 —Create. 02—Change. 03—Display. 549. How Can You Configure The Sales Districts? Navigate the following menu path to configure the Sales district: Customizing Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)->Sales and Distribution->Master Data->Business Partners->Customers-> Sales->Define Sales Districts . 550. How Can You Assign A Shipping Point To A Plant? You can assign a shipping point to a plant by navigating the following menu path: Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)->Enterprise Structure-> Assignment->Logistics Execution->Assign Shipping Point to Plant. 551. Suppose That A New Info Structure Is Created And The Update Rules Are Activated For It. How Would You Then Transport It To Production Client? After the approval from the QA team the info structure can be transported in the time when no documents are created or posted. 552. How Is The Company Code Created? Perform the following steps to create the company code: Customization Implementation Guide(IMG Menu)->Enterprise Strurture->Definition->Financial Accounting->Define Company Code. 553. What Is The Relationship Between Sales Organizations And Company Codes? There exists many to one relationship between sales organizations and company codes. 554. Give The Name Of The Central Organizational Element Used In Purchasing? The central organizational element used in purchasing is called the Purchase Organization. 555. What Is The Relationship Between Sales Organizations Or Distribution Channel And Plants? There exists many to many relationship between sales organizations and plants. 556. What Is The Relationship Between Sales Organizations, Plants, And Company Codes? There exists many to many to one relationship between sales organizations, plants, and company codes. 557. Mention The Total Number Of The Shipping Points That Can Be Assigned To A Sales Organization? You do not assign shipping point to sales organization but assign it to plant only. 558. List The Transaction Codes Used To Create A Customer In The Sd Module. VD01 is the transaction code used to create a customer in the SD module. To create customer centrally, the T.Code is XD01 559. List The Basic Elements Of A Customer Master Record? The following are the basic elements of a customer master record: General Data. Company Code Data. Sales Area Data. 560. State Few Examples Of Common Material Types? The examples of common material types are as follows: DIEN— Service Item. HALS— Semi Finished Good. FERT—Finished Good. HAWA —Trading Item. NLAG—Non Inventoried. ROH— Raw Material. UNBW—Non-Valuated Item. 561. List Few Common Material Master Views? The following are few relevant material master views: Accounting 1, 2. Material Requirements Planning (MRP) 1, 2, 3. Purchasing. General Plant Data Storage 1, 2. Sales Org Data 1, 2. 562. How Can You Create Customer-material Info Records In The Sd Module? Navigate the following menu path to create Customer-Material Info Records: SYSTEM menu->Logistics->Sales and Distribution-> Master Data->Agreements->Customer Material Information | - Create. 563. Which Transaction Code And Movement Type Help In Adding Stock (from Legacy Stocks) For The Newly Created Material Type Into A Particular Plant After Creating A New Material Type In System? For such a situation, you can use transaction code MB1C and the movement type 561. 564. How Can You Define Your Own Hierarchy Types? Perform the following steps to define your own hierarchy type: Enter a one-character alphanumeric key and description. Enter a default partner function that is valid for the hierarchy type. Save the hierarchy type. 565. How Will You Create Material In Both Company Codes While Working On Inter Company Sales? While working on Inter Company Sales, the transaction code MM01 is used to create material related to the plant and Sales organization. For the other company code, this material can be extended if the server being used is common. 566. Which Factors Do You Need To Verify If The Tax Field In The Customer Master And Material Master Is Not Displayed? We need to make sure that for all the countries in the OVK1, we have defined a tax category. At the same time we also need to verify whether the tax classes are defined in OVK3 and OVK4. 567. List The Sequence Of Steps Performed By Underlying System To Determine Tax Number And Tax Classification? The underlying System uses the following sequence of steps to determine tax number and tax classification: If the payer has a VAT registration number and is identical to the sold-to party, the tax number and tax classification are copied from the payer. The tax number is copied on the basis of the "country of destination relevant for taxes." If step 1 does not apply and If the Ship-to Party has a VAT registration number and the Sold-to Party does not have the same, tax number and tax classification are copied from the Ship-to Party. If step 2 does not apply, then tax number and tax classification are copied from the Sold-to Party. 568. How Do You Define Tax Relevancy Of Master Records? The following menu path is navigated to define tax relevancy of the master record: Customizing Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)->Sales and Distribution->Basic Functions->Taxes->Define Tax Relevancy of Master Records->Material Taxes. 569. Imagine You Are Defining Tax Determination Rule For A Country Which Has Regional Tax Code Also. How Will You Define Regional Code? The following menu path is navigated to define regional tax codes: Customizing Implementation Guide (IMG Menu) -> Sales and Distribution -> Basic Functions -> Taxes -> Define Regional Codes -> Define County Code. 570. What Are The Transaction Codes That Are Used To Create And Change Customer Master? The following are certain T-codes used to create and manipulate Customer master: XD01 — Creates a customer. XD02— Changes a customer. XD03— Displays a customer. XD04— Changes customer changes centrally. XD05- Blocks a customer centrally. XD06— Marks a customer for deletion. XD07— Changes a customer Account Group. XD99— Maintains customer maintenance. XDN1 — Maintains number ranges for a customer. 571. Which Transaction Code Is Used To View Messages In System? The T.Code SE91 is used to view all messages in SYSTEM. 572. What Do You Understand By Transferring The Legacy Data To System? It means to transfer the legacy data to the newly installed & configured System. The data such as customer and material maintained by an organization before the installation of ERP System is known as the legacy data. You can use various tools to transfer the legacy data to the System, such as Batch Data Communication (BDC) and Legacy System Migration Workbench (LSMW) Programs. 573. Specify A Way To Block The Transaction For A Material Flagged For Deletion? You can block the transaction for a material flagged for deletion by customizing the Sales status feld in the Sales organization view of the material master. 574. List The Master Records From Which A Sales Order Receives The Organizational Data For A Specific Sales Area? The master records from which a Sales order receives the master data are as follows: Customer Master Record. Material Master Record. 575. Which Document Do You Use To Enter Shipping Conditions And How Are These Conditions Used In Determining The Shipping Point? The customer master record in the shipping screen and in the Sales document type is used to specify shipping conditions. The shipping conditions are used to decide the shipping point by copying them into the Sales document during order creation. 576. Suppose That You Have Blacklisted A Customer And Now Want To Block That Customer. How Can You Do That? A customer can be blocked by navigating the following menu path: SYSTEM Menu->Logistics->Sales and Distribution->Master Data->Business Partner->Customer-> Block . 577. Give The Menu Path To Define The Customer Hierarchy Types? The menu path to define the customer hierarchy types is: Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)->Sales and Distribution->Master Data ->Business Partners -> Customers -> Customer Hierarchy -> Define Hierarchy Types. 578. Give The Menu Path To Set The Partner Determination For Hierarchy Categories? The menu path to set the partner determination for hierarchy categories is: Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)->Sales and Distribution->Master Data->Business Partners-> Customers -> Customer Hierarchy->Set Partner Determination for Hierarchy Categories. 579. List The Items For Which You Can Define The Customer Hierarchy? The customer hierarchy can be defined for the following: Customer Master. Sales Document Header. Sales Document Item. Delivery. Shipment. Billing Header. Billing Item. Sales Activities (CAS). 580. Give The Menu Path To Assign A Sales Area To The Customer Hierarchy? The menu path to assign a Sales area to the Customer Hierarchy is: Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)->Customer Hierarchy-> Assign Sales Areas. 581. Give The Menu Path To Define The Product Hierarchies? The menu path to define the product hierarchies is: Implementation Guide (IMG Menu) -> Logistics-General -> Material Master -> Settings for Key Fields -> Data Relevant to Sales and Distribution -> Define Product Hierarchies . 582. Suppose That You Create A New Customer Account Group And The System Increments It By An Arbitrary Value. What Would You Do? The existing problem is called number range buffering. You need to perform the following step: Transaction code->SNUM->debitor-> change mode and change the numbers. 583. What Are The Customer Tables For Sd Module? The following are the Customer tables of the SYSTEM SD module: KNA1 — general data. KNB1 — customer master. KNB4— customer payment history. KNB5— customer master. KNBK— bank data. KNKA — credit management. KNKK— credit control area data. KNVI— sales area data. KNVP— Partner Function key. KNVD__output type. KNVS__customer master ship data. KLPA__customer vendor link. 584. List The Standard Output Types In The Sales And Distribution Module? The following are the standard output types in the SD module: Sales Order Confirmation —BAOO. Outbound Delivery Note —LDOO. Billing document —RDOO. Inquiry —AFOO. Quotation —ANOO. Contract —KO00. 585. What Do You Mean By User Exit? A user exit is implemented as a call to a function module. A customer's developer can access data objects and program components with the help of user exit. User Exits are used in case there are some specific needs which are not met by the Standard System. 586. What Is The Need Of User Exit? User Exits are used in case there are some specific needs which are not met by the Standard System. The purpose of user exit is to add a particular business-related functionality to standard SYSTEM. 587. What Do You Mean By Rebate Processing? Rebate refers to a specific discount given to a specific customer for Sales within a specific period of time. For example, a customer gets 2% discount on buying 500 kgs in a particular month and another customer gets 5% discount on buying 2000 kgs in the same month. 588. Imagine You Are Facing A Problem With Logistics Information System (lis) Due To Which After Client Copy, Your Test System Does Not Update Lis Info Structures. When You Save A Delivery, Sales Order, Or Billing Document, An Error Message "update Was Terminated" Is Displayed. How Can You Resolve Such A Problem? In such a problem, you should generate the Info structure and update group again for the client in which your Error Message is displayed. 589. What Do You Mean By Subtotals? Subtotals are generally used in pricing procedures. Subtotals are not tied to condition types. However, you can control the value entered in the fields by assigning subtotals within the pricing procedure. 590. How Can You Configure A Distribution Channel As A Default In The Transaction Field That Requires Distribution Channel Data? Perform the following steps to set a Distribution Channel as default for the transaction field that requires distribution channel data: Use the SU01 transaction code and enter the user ID. Go to the parameters tab page and add VTW parameter. Enter the default Distribution Channel in the parameter value. 591. Can You Perform An Availability Check On A Plant By Excluding A Storage Location? Yes, you can perform availability check in MM by excluding a storage location. 592. List The Transaction Codes With Respect To Rebate Agreement Processing? The following are the transaction codes in the context of rebate agreement processing: VBOl—Create. VB02 —Change. VB03 —Display. 593. What Do You Mean By Payment Terms? The terms of payment that a company offers to a customer based upon which a discount may be given for prompt payment or penalties can be charged in case of late payment made is known "Payment Terms". 594. What Is The Purpose Of Condition Indexes And How Can You Activate Them? The purpose of condition index is to search all records for a specific condition type. For example, you can search all the condition records for the condition type PR00 condition type. You can activate the condition index in the customizing screen for the condition Type PR00 by navigating the following menu path: SPRO->Sales & Distribution->Basic Functions->Pricing->Pricing Control->Deflne Condition Types-> Maintain Condition Types-> Enter PROO. 595. What Is The Role Of User Exit? The empty ABAP forms at particular points in the standard system, where the system allows customers to make enhancements to the way the code functions are called user exits. These are helpful tools to meet the specific business requirements. 596. Which Transaction Code Is Used To View Enhancements In The System? The transaction code SMOD can be used to view all the enhancements in the System. 597. Which Menu Path Should Be Followed To View All The Enhancements In The System? The following menu path can be navigated to view all the enhancements in the system: SYSTEM Menu ->Tools ->ABAP Workbench ->Utilities ->Enhancements -> Definition. 598. List User Exits For Partner Determination? The following are the user exits for partner determination: EXIT_SYSTEMLV09A_001. EXIT_SYSTEMLV09A_002. EXIT_SYSTEMLV09A_003. EXIT_SYSTEMLV09A_004. 599. Describe The Relevance Of Condition Technique In Sales And Distribution (sd)? The condition technique is the most important technique used for configuration in the Sales and Distribution module. It is used for different types of determinations in SD such as pricing, text determination, output determination, account Determination and material determination. It is called condition technique, because it provides a technique to select one from alternative choices, based on conditions, access sequence and condition tables. 600. Which Rounding Rules Are Available In The Course Of Maintaining Condition Types? The following three rounding rules are available while maintaining condition types: Commercial rounding — In case of commercial rounding, a value less than 5 is rounded down to nearest value while the values greater than 5 is rounded up to the nearest value. Always round up — In this case, regardless of the fact whether it is greater than or less than 5, the value is always rounded up to the nearest value. Always round down — In this case, regardless of the fact whether it is greater than or less than 5, the value us always rounded down to the nearest value. 601. How Do You Begin With Defining And Assigning Pricing Procedures? Navigate the following menu path to begin with defining and assigning pricing procedures: Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)->Sales and Distribution->Basic Functions->Pricing ->Pricing Control-> Define and Assign Pricing Procedures->Maintain Pricing Procedures. 602. List The Sequence Of Steps Used To Customize Pricing Procedure? Perform the following steps (in sequence) to customize Pricing Procedure: Put the required fields into the field catalog. Create the required condition tables. Create the required access sequence. Assign the condition tables to the access sequence. Create the condition types. Assign the access sequence to the condition types. Create the determination procedure, if necessary, and assign the condition types to it. Assign the determination procedure. Lastly, create the condition records. 603. Which Topics In Sd Have Impact On Pricing Procedure? The following topics in SD have impact on pricing procedure: Credit management. Payment terms. Cost of Sales. Rebate. 604. How Do You Activate Pricing For Item Category? We can activate pricing for item category by navigating the following menu path: Customizing Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)->Sales and Distribution->Basic Functions-> Pricing->Pricing Control-> Define Pricing by Item Category->Activate Pricing for Item Categories. 605. What Is The Relevance Of The Condition Exclusion Group? The condition exclusion group is a technique to ensure that the customer does not receive all types of discount; rather, the customer receives the best discount out of all given discount condition types. A best condition type is chosen from this "Condition Exclusion Group" based on your configuration. 606. How Do You Maintain Condition Exclusion Group? The following menu path is navigated to maintain condition exclusion group: Customizing Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)-> Sales and Distribution-> Basic Functions-> Pricing-> Condition Exclusions-> Condition Exclusion for Groups of Conditions->Define Condition Exclusion Groups. 607. What Do You Understand By Condition Supplement? The condition supplement is a group of conditions that is applied every time a condition is matched condition supplements will come for a condition if you have maintained pricing procedure under master data of the condition. 608. Explain The Tax Determination Process In Brief ? The tax determination is performed automatically by system. The tax determination is based on the structure of the organization, country, region or city of the plant delivering the products and the country of the receiving customer. It works in coordination with the tax relevancy indicators on the customer master record and material master record. Condition Technique is used for tax determination procedure. 609. How Do You Define Tax Determination Rules In Sd? The following menu path is navigated to define tax determination rules in SD: Customizing Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)->Sales and Distribution->Basic Functions->Taxes-> Define Tax Determination Rules. 610. How Do You Define Dependencies Of Revenue Account Determination? The following menu path is navigated to define dependencies of revenue account determination: Customizing Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)->Sales and Distribution->Basic Functions->Account Assignment/Costing-> Revenue Account Determination->Define Dependencies of Revenue Account Determination. 611. Where And When Are Requirements And Data Transfer Routines Available To Be Assigned Within The System? The general rule of availability of requirements and data transfer routines are as follows: Copying requirements are available to be assigned during transfer of data between documents and texts. Data transfer routines are available during copying between documents and texts. Requirements are available to be assigned to any access sequence as well prior to most functions. Formulae are available to be assigned during pricing determination. 612. List The Divisions Of Data Transfer Routines? The data transfer routines are categorized as: Orders. Deliveries. Billing documents. Sales activities. Shipping units. Texts. Text names. Shipments. 613. How Do You Define And Assign Account Keys In Sd? The following menu path is navigated to define and assign account keys: Customizing Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)->Sales and Distribution->Basic Functions->Account Assignment/Costing-> Revenue Account Determination->Define and Assign Account Keys. 614. How Do You Set Price Limits In Sd? Price limits can be set by navigating the following menu path: Customizing Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)->Sales and Distribution->Basic Functions-> Pricing->Pricing Control-> Define Condition Types-> Define Upper/Lower Limits for Conditions. 615. List The Transaction Codes Related To Condition Record Selection By Condition Type? The following are the transaction codes relating to condition record selection by condition type: —Creates a condition record. —Changes a condition record. —Displays a condition record. 616. What Is Access Sequence In Material Determination? The access sequence is a sequence of steps, which is used by the underlying system to obtain a condition record used for material determination. All the condition records have specific values assigned to it, which determine the order in which the system will read the access sequence. The system starts reading the access sequence with the lowest number step assigned to it and tries to process everything assigned to that particular access sequence through condition table & fields. The whole process is called 'condition technique'. 617. List The Steps For A Condition Technique? Perform the following steps to create a condition record: Place the required fields into the field catalog. Create condition table. Create access sequence. Assign condition table to the access sequence. Create the condition types. Assign the access sequence to the condition types. If needed, create the determination procedure and assign the condition types to it. Assign the determination procedure. Create the condition records. 618. How Do You Configure Transfer Of Requirements? Navigate the following menu path to configure transfer of requirement: Customizing Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)->Sales and Distribution->Basic Functions-> Availability Check and Transfer of Requirements->Transfer of Requirements. 619. Differentiate Individual And Collective Requirements? You can have a transfer of requirement either with an individual requirement or with collective requirements. In the individual transfer of requirements, a single transfer of demand occurs to the MRP for each schedule line. In case of individual transfer, the order quantity, the sales document number, the item number, and requirement class for each schedule line for which the demand has been created are shown by the requirement overview. The collective requirements are group of requirements created over a certain period of time such as on the daily basis, weekly or monthly and transferred to MRP. In this case, requirement overview does not show the single transaction wise descriptions of the requirements, rather it shows details of the group of requirements. The collective requirement is beneficial for the organizations that deal large volume of sales orders daily. 620. List The Key Transaction Codes Relating To Integration Between Logistics In Mm And Sd? The following are the key transactions related to integration between logistics in MM and SD: MMBE—Stock Overview. MD04— Stock / Requirement List. MB53— Plant Stock Availability. CO09—Availability Overview. MB52— Warehouse Stock. MB5M—Expiration Date List. MB5B— Stock for Positioning Date. MB5T—Stock in Transit. MBBS— Valuated Special Stock. MBLB— Stock with Subcontractor. 621. List A Menu Path To Access Stock Requirements Lists? The shortest and simplest menu path to access the stock requirement list is as follows: SYSTEM Menu->Logistics->Materials Management->Material Requirements Planning (MRP)-> MRP Evaluations-> Stock/ Requirements List . 622. What Are The Data On Which The Transfer Of Requirement Is Dependent? The transfer of requirement is dependent on following data: Requirements type. Requirements class. Checking group. Schedule line category. 623. How Do You Define Requirement Class? Customizing Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)->Sales and Distribution->Basic Functions-> Availabiiity Check and Transfer of Requirements->Transfer of Requirements->Define Requirements Classes. 624. What Is Requirement Type? After creation of the requirement classes we need to assign a requirement types to requirement class. A requirement class can be assigned with more than one requirement type, whereas a requirement type cannot be assigned to more than one requirement class. The requirement type can be changed during creation of sales order. 625. List The Search Strategy That The Underlying System Uses To Determine The Requirement Types? The following are the pre-defined search strategy that the underlying system uses to determine the requirement types: The system uses strategy group in the material master to find a requirement type. If the strategy group is not maintained, the system uses MRP group to determine a requirement type. If the MRP group is not defined the underlying system uses material type to determine a requirement type. If none of the above is found, the system follows a special rule and tries to determine a requirement type with the help of item category and MRP type. In case, when the MPR type is not defined the system uses only the item category to determine requirement type. 626. Define The Role Of Availability Check In Sd? Availability checks play an important role in the business sales process. It is a process to determine whether the delivery quantity requested by a customer can be made available for shipping on the delivery date. The availability check is performed at the plant level. 627. Define The Types Of Availability Checks? The following are the three types of availability checks: The availability check on the basis of Availability to Promise (ATP) quantities. The availability check against product allocation. The availability check based on the stand-alone Advanced Planner and Optimizer (APO). 628. What Are The Advantages Of Individual Requirements Over Summarized Requirement? The following are the advantages of individual requirement over summarized requirement: In case of individual requirement processing the back order processing, where as it is not possible in case of summarized requirement processing. In case of individual requirement processing you can access the order line items and schedule line in stock requirement list. 629. What Is The Disadvantage Of Individual Requirement Over Summarized Requirement? The disadvantage of individual requirement processing is in the terms of system performance. It affects the system performance as; each demand is placed immediately into the stock requirement list, which results in processing overhead and may affect the system performance. 630. How Do You Define/maintain Procedure For Each Schedule Line Category? Navigate the following menu path to define a procedure for each schedule line category: Customizing Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)->Sales and Distribution->Basic Functions-> Availability Check and Transfer of Requirements->Transfer of Requirements-> Define Procedure For Each Schedule Line Category. 631. Which Types Of Stock Are Available To Select From While Carrying Out The Availability Check? The following types of stocks are available to select from while carrying out availability check: Safety stock. Stock in transfer. Quality inspection stock. Restricted use stock. 632. What Is The Relevance Of The "product Allocation Found Changes To The Confirmation" Message? The "Product allocation found changes to the confirmation" is displayed during availability check on a line item. It means that the quantity allowed to a customer for a particular stock has exceeded its maximum limit. 633. What Is The Relevance Of The "no Feature Combination Exists..." Message? The "No feature combination exists.." message is related to the product allocation and availability check. This message indicates that no availability check will be carried out. This is because, the underlying system has attempted to do availability check according to product allocation, but errors are found in the setup of the process. 634. What Is Change Request? How Is It Done? The change request is the request which is intended to adopt a new change in the system. After the submission of the change request, the system pops up the change request and shows it in the pop up box. The request name is entered and the requested change is named accordingly. A new request number is generated automatically which consists of the client system name and system generated request number. 635. How Is A Request Released? To release a request, the transaction code associated with a request is entered in the system. The requests are stored under the modifiable or released heading. We need to select the modifiable option that contains the internal request number which needs to be released first and then the external request number. 636. What Is Automatic Posting In Fi? Automatic posting is the process of posting the accounts in the Finance module. The automatic posting configuration does the posting automatically in accounts as determined by the system. This process works as per your configuration as per your business requirements. 637. What Is Item Category And Item Group? The item category is the key field included in the sales cycle. It affects the sales data and schedule line category. Unlike the sales document type which is entered manually in the sales order, the item category is automatically determined by the system by using the determination rule. Whereas item category group examines how a material is processed in the sales document. When processing sales document, the system uses the item category group to examine the item category and suggests it in the respective document. Item category group is defined in the sales Org View 2 of Material Master Record. 638. What Are Outline Agreements? In a business process, the agreements are the type of relationship between the customers and the business. They are done upon the business entities such as material, price, and quantities. These contracts are represented in the system as outline agreements. 639. What Is Quantity Contract? The quantity contract is a contract that is prepared after the issue of quotation but before an order. Quantity contracts are used to limit the quantity of products which a customer can buy. It is a type of arrangement which is followed when the demand for a material is greater than the available supply and the business needs to ensure the product supply evenly among the branches. The standard sales document type for quantity contracts in the system is KM or CQ. 640. What Activities Are Exempted From The Quantity Contracts? The quantity contract does not create a requirement for stock within the plant. Therefore, there is not any assurance on the stock of product availability in the contract. There is not any binding from the organization to produce items or to purchase the items to satisfy the contract. It also have not any schedule lines or a validity date. Also the contract does not mention any specific delivery dates. 641. How A Quantity Contract Can Be Set Up? The quantity contract can be set up by performing the following step: Customizing Implementation Guide(IMG Menu)->Sales and Distribution-> Sales->Sales Documents->Sales Document Header -> Define Sales Document Types. 642. Which Are The Contracts That Appear In The Implementation Guide (img) Menu? The IMG (Customizing Implementation Guide ) contains the menus that are related to the following contracts: Master contracts. Value contracts and contract data related to contract profiles and cancellation. 643. Which Table Is Used To List The Partner Functions In A Delivery? The VPBA table is used to view the partner functions in a delivery. 644. How Is The Pricing Procedure Determined? How Can You Define The Right Pricing Procedure In The Sales Order? The pricing procedure is determined according to the various factors such as: sales area, customer master, and sales documents type. For determining the right pricing procedures in the sales order the transaction code OVKK is used. The rule for pricing procedure determination is as follows: Sales Area. Customer Pricing Procedure. Document Pricing Procedure. 645. How Would You Resolve The Problem "mswt Is Missing" Even When It Is Present In The Rvaa01 Procedure? In such case you need to maintain the condition record for this condition type by using the T.Code VKll.Here you maintain the condition record with a validity period. 646. How Is The Item Text Copied From Sales Order To Delivery? The item text is copied from sales order by performing the following step: IMG Menu -> Sales and Distribution->Basic Function->Text Control. 647. Why Text Determination Is Used In Sd? The text determination is used to transfer information from the material or the customer document to the order or to the Invoice document. 648. Why Is The Partner Determination Done In Sd? The partner determination is used to determine the partners, such as "Sold to Party" /Payer"/Ship to Party", "Bill to Party" and Sales Employee etc. for sales document. You maintain the Partners in the system as per your business requirements and configure a partner determination Procedure. This partner determination Procedure determines the partners in a sales document. The whole process goes as follows: Defining the Partner Functions Assigning the partner functions to the Account Group Defining the partner determination procedure Placing the required partner functions in the procedure Assigning the procedure to the Account Group 649. Why Is The Output Determination Used In Sd Module? The output determination is used to decide that which output mode is used to send an output notification to a partner (customer). Some of the output forms are- e-mail, electronic data exchange (EDI), and fax. 650. List The Five Important Fields That Need To Be Maintained During The Account Determination. The following fields need to be maintained during the account determination: Chart of Accounts. Sales Organization. Account Assignment Group for Customer. Account Assignment Group for Material. Account Keys. 651. What Do You Mean By The Copy Control? The copy control is meant to copy data from a preceding document to the succeeding document. The succeeding document is decided on the basis of the document type and the customer requirements. 652. Specify The Purpose Of Maintaining The Common Distribution Channels And The Common Divisions? The Common Distribution Channels and the Common Divisions are maintained to prevent the master record's multiple maintenance. For example, if you have created a customer 550 for Sales area 0105/30/01 then 550 can be used in the Sales area 0108/40/01, if you maintain 30 as the common distribution channel. 653. Why Is Availability Check Required? The availability check is used to determine that whether the requested order quantity would be delivered on Customer Requested Delivery Date or not. The availability check takes care about the time required to produce or obtain the material and picking or packing time, loading & Transit Time for the material. 654. Which Kind Of Requirements Does The Checking Group 01 And 02 Represent? The checking group 01 represents to the daily requirements while 02 represent the individual requirements. 655. Which User Exit Can Be Used To Copy Data Into The Planning Table? The user exit that you can use to copy data into the planning table is: User exit MCP20001 along with ZXSOPU01 656. List The Forms Of Number Ranges In Sd? There are two forms of number ranges in SD and those forms are as follows: Internal — In this form, the system automatically assigns a number range to a document. External— In this form, the system allows a user to assign a number range to a document. 657. What Is The Purpose Of Using Copy Control? The purpose of using copy control is to decide what document type, item category, and schedule line categories can be proposed to proceeding document. 658. What Is Contract Grouping? The contract grouping can be defined as the process to link lower level contracts to one master contract to maintain data consistency. 659. Is It Required To Create Condition Record For The Customer And Material Defining The Scale While Creating The Customer Rebate? No, it is not required to create condition record for every customer and material while creating the customer rebate. Rebate is customer or material specific in nature. 660. How Can You Create A Pricing Procedure That Calculates The Price For The Industrial Customers When They Also Purchase The Domestics Goods? You can create a pricing procedure that can calculate the price for the industrial customers by performing the following steps: Create a VOFM subroutine that is VOFM->Formulas->Condition value. Now set this subroutine in your procedure as V/2 transaction code in the AltCTy field. You can describe your requirements in the ABAP coding. 661. How Does System Show Storage Condition? How Can The Storage Condition Be Defined? System uses two-character alphanumeric key, storage condition to show the storage condition of a material. The storage condition is used in co-ordination of the plant and shipping point to decide the storage location. You can define the storage condition of a material by navigating the following menu path: Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)->Logistics Execution->Shipping->Picking->Determine Picking Locations-> Define Storage Conditions. 662. Suppose You Have Customized The Customer's Credit Limit In Your Company In Such A Way That When A Customer Exceed His/her Credit Limit, The System Responses You About That. What Is The Name Of This Management In System And What Data Do You Use For This Management? This management is known as the credit management. The data you use for the credit management is the credit management master data. The Finance module is used to assign credit limit to customers. 663. Give The Menu Path To Assign Credit Limit To Customers? The menu path to assign credit limit to customers is: SYSTEM Menu->Accounting->Financial Accounting->Customers -> Credit Management->Master Data-> Change . 664. In System There Is Functionality, Which Is Used To Manage The Customer Credit Limits. That Functionality Can Be Assigned With One Or More Company Codes. By Using The Company Code The System Decides That Organizational Unit When A Sale Occurs. What Is The Name Of That Functionality? Name of that functionality is credit control area. 665. What Is The Consignment Stock? The consignment stock consists of the items which are kept either at the customer or the business site for the consumption by the customer on the basis of a written agreement between them. The customer has the right to return the goods if not further sold or used. Till the time of sales or consumption of such stocks, it remains legally as company's property. Customer only pays to the company only when the stocks are sold/consumed, otherwise he returns the stocks to company. This scenario is used in some special sales related scenario such as pushing of stocks to meet an increased sales requirement or, is used for exhibition purpose as well. 666. Define The Risk Category? It is a grouping category, which is used to control the process to check the credit limit when the credit control takes place automatically. You use this category to segregate customers group on the basis of different credit rules. For example, you can put high-risk customers in one group and low-risk customers in another group. 667. List The Places Where A Credit Check Can Occur? The credit check can occur at the following three places: The Sales order. The delivery. The goods issue. 668. List The Credit Management Checks That The System Uses To Check The Credit? The various automatic credit management checks that the system uses are: Simple Credit Check. Automatic Credit Check-Static or Dynamic. 669. List The Items For Which You Can Create Incompletion Logs? The incompletion logs can be created for the following items: Sales document header data. Sales document item data. Sales document schedule line data. Sales activity data. Partner data in Sales documents, deliveries, and Sales activities. Delivery header data. Delivery item data. 670. What Is An Output? An output can be defined as a media that link various business partners. An output media can be one, such as e-mail, fax, Electronic Data Interchange (EDI), and printouts. An output media is generally created for invoices, delivery notes, and order confirmation. 671. List The Sales And Distribution Related Output Determination Activities? The output determination activities that are related to the Sales and Distribution are: Sales Activities. Sales Documents. Outbound Deliveries. Inbound Deliveries. Handling Units. Groups. Shipments. Billing Documents. 672. How Is The Transaction Code Ct04 Related With Characteristics? When the desired class of material is selected in the Material Master then the characteristics of that class needs to be chosen. The CT04 transaction code is used to define these characteristics. 673. What Is Excise Tax And How Is It Related To The System? The excise tax or excise duty is a type of tax which is charged on the goods that are produced for selling within a country. It is different from the customs duties which are charged on imported goods. As per the system guidelines, the procedure of excise tax calculation is country-specific. Therefore, the ERP software, which are implemented in India, have built-in Country India (CIN) version. You need to configure CIN for excise tax calculation. 674. What Are The Pricing Procedures Of Cin? The Country India (CIN) version comes with the following four pricing procedures: JINFAC (Sales from Manufacturing Plants). JINEXP (Export Sales). JINDEP (Sales from Depots). JINSTK (Stock Transfers). 675. What Are The Major Settings In The Contract Configuration Setting Screen? The following are major settings in the contract configuration screen: Price Procedure Condition Header. Contract Profile. Billing Request. Group Reference Procedure. Contract Data Allowed. Follow UP Activity Type. Update Lower Level Contract Fields. Check Partner Authorization Type. Subsequent Order Type. 676. What Is The Service And Maintenance Process? The Service and Maintenance process or service contract is a type of agreement between the supplier and receiver of the goods or service. This contract forms a basis on which the regular activities of the business, such as billing, cancellation, and other related items are done. A service contract contains validity dates, cancellation conditions, price agreements, and information. 677. Which Is The Standard Sales Document Type For The Service Contract? The WV is the standard sales document type for the service contract. 678. What Are Service Items? The service items are used by the service contract documents and can be one or all of the following: Service task. Material used in the service. Time charged by the technician as per hourly rate. 679. What Is Standard Service Item Category? The standard Service item category represents a service that is carried out and billed periodically. In Standard System, the standard item category for a service is WVN. 680. What Is The Standard Material Type For Service Items? There is a standard material type for service items. DIEN is the material type which is generally used for services in standard system. 681. What Is A Master Contract? A master contract is a contract which groups contracts that are at the lesser levels than master contract. It contains the information which are relevant to rest of the contracts. The main objective of the master contract is to ensure the consistency at all the levels. The documents included in the master contract are as follows: Quantity Contracts. Value Contracts. Service Contracts. 682. What Is Standard Application Logic? If any field in the new reference procedure screen is changed in the master contract, then only those fields of the master contract will be copied by the system which has the same value of master and lower level contracts. This is known as application logic. 683. What Is Workflow? Name The Person Who Can Assist You While Configuring A Workflow For A System. It is a sequence of steps either processed manually or automatically by the system for implementing a task, such as updating a contract. It is handled by a workflow resource. A workflow consultant is a person who looks after the problems associated with a workflow. 684. What Is Scheduling Agreement? The scheduling agreements are the type of agreements which are done between the customer and the business organization. It includes the details related to the delivery of the products such as delivery date and quantities which are to be delivered. The delivery dates are then passed to the schedule line for further activities. 685. What Is Planning Delivery Schedule? The planning delivery schedule is a type of delivery schedule which is used to manage the planning requirement of a project. The planning delivery schedule is conducted for limiting the planning period of schedule lines in forthcoming delivery schedules. 686. What Is The Correction Delivery? The correction delivery done when a product is wrongly delivered to the customer and returned. And the good receipt is not processed. As a result, the cumulative quantity in the scheduling argument is updated and the original delivery quantity is called off in the scheduling agreement. 687. What Is A Rebate Agreement? The rebate agreement is a type of agreement which is done between the customer and the buyer for the discount that is paid to the customer. It depends upon the conditions such as buying certain amount of the goods over a certain time period. This agreement specifies the rebate amount agreed on for each product. 688. List The Components Of Rebate Processing In System? Rebate processing in System is divided into the following three components: Configuring rebates. Setting up rebates. Managing rebate agreements and payments. 689. How Can You Define A Change Request? How Can You Release A Saved Change Request? A change request is defined as a request that is automatically generated by the SYSTEM when you do any new customizing or configuration task in the SYSTEM. Once you save the change request, the SYSTEM generates a request number, which you have to save for further processing. A change request can be released by using the SE10 transaction code. 690. What Do You Understand By Intercompany Customers And One-time Customer? The Sales customers who deal within the same client between different company codes are known as intercompany customers. One-time customers refer to those customers for whom you do not want to create a separate record, so that such type of customer account group can be reused. 691. Explain The Terms Minimum Order Quantity And Minimum Delivery Quantity. The Minimum Order Quantity refers to the minimum quantity that a customer needs to order. The concept of Minimum Delivery Quantity refers to the minimum quantity that you need to deliver to a customer. 692. What Is The Difference Between Confirmed Quantity And The Order Quantity? The quantity ordered by a customer is referred to as Order Quantity and the quantity allocated by Availability Check (ATP) is known as Confirmed Quantity. 693. How Can You Assign Movement Type? The movement type is assigned while defining the schedule line category. 694. Suppose, In A Particular Case, Customer Requirements For The Sales Order Do Not Appear In The Md04 Transaction. How Can You Resolve Such A Problem? To resolve the problem of non-appearance of customer requirements for the Sales order, you need to check whether the requirement class and schedule line category of your document are activated for requirement transfer. 695. What Do You Mean By Backorder Processing? Backorder processing is functionality in the System where you change the commitments and over-ride the blockage of stocks marked against sales documents/deliveries. For e.g. you receive an order from a very important customer for material "X" but the entire quantity of X is committed to another customer "Y" via earlier orders and this is where Backorder processing works to change the commitment and shift stock due for Y to X. 696. What Are Order And Target Quantities? The quantities mentioned as available in the quantity contract are called Target Quantities. Similarly, the quantities that are ordered are called the Order Quantities. 697. Can You Create More Than One Customer Hierarchy For The Same Payer? If Yes, Then How? Yes, it is possible to create more than one customer hierarchy for the same payer. We can do it by first creating the order and delivery and then performing the PGI for the first and second customer hierarchy. 698. A Sales Document Is Divided In To Three Levels. List Those Three Levels? The three levels in which a Sales document is divided are as follows: Header Level (Table VBAK) — All the master data, such as the customer material master, the Sales area, and the organization data of a Sales document is stored at Header level in the VBAK table. Item Level (Table VBAP) — All the material item data, such as the order quantity and the material master data of a Sales document is stored at Item level in the VBAP table. Schedule Line (Table VBEP) — Information about the material delivery dates and the delivery quantity of a Sales document is stated at Schedule line in the VBEP table. 699. What Is A Sales Order? A Sales order is defined as an order given by a customer to an organization for product or services. A Sales Order then is processed in the System to determine the basic organizational data and requirements for the entire Sales Process. 700. Define An Item Proposal? In case if a customer frequently orders the same combination of materials, or if you recommend a particular selection of products for an opening order, you can store the frequently used data as an item proposal in the system. If you want, the item proposal may also include proposed order quantities. During sales order creation, you can then copy all or some of the materials and quantity data from the item proposal directly into your document (sales order, quotation, and so on). You can assign a particular item proposal to a specific Customer Master Records. The system can then automatically propose the number of the assigned item proposal whenever you process sales orders for the relevant customers. 701. What Is A Quotation? The Quotation can be defined as a Sales document that you create before a Sales order and after an inquiry. Quotation is a legally binding document which informs the proposed prices and the terms and conditions of Sales to a customer. 702. When Is The Cash Sale Process Used? The Cash Sale Process is used when a customer places an order, picks goods, and pays for the goods at the same time. When the cash Sales process is used the System proposes the current data as the goods delivery and billing date. After you save the Sales order, the System creates a delivery and prints a cash sale receipt. Cash Sales concept is generally used for Sales to employees scenario where no customer specific master is maintained rather customer is billed as One Time Customer. 703. When Is The Rush Order Process Used? The Rush Order process is used when a customer places an order and picks the items immediately. Once you save the Sales order, the System creates a delivery; however, the invoice is generated later & sent to customer. 704. List The Various Business Functions That Are Performed To Meet The Delivery Date? The business functions that are performed to meet the delivery date are as follows: Scheduling the time required to procure the material. Scheduling the time required to pick or pack the material or transportation planning time. Scheduling the time required to load the material. Scheduling the time required to shift the material to the customer's site. 705. List The Activities For Which You Can Set Up The Partner Determination? The partner determination can be set up for the following activities: Customer Master. Sales Document Header. Sale Document Item. Delivery. Shipment. Billing Header. Billing Item. Sales Activities (CAS). 706. What Is The Consignment Issue? The consignment issue is the allotment of products for the customers. Its Standard document type is KE and the Standard order type using which it is recorded is the same. The standard item category used for the consignment issue is KEN.CO and CI are the standard schedule lines used for consignment issue. To create a consignment issue order, the Document Type KE is selected. 707. What Is Consignment Returns? It is the sales process flow which includes the material or the product which are defective and either returned by the customer or sold by the consignee. These types of products are returned back to the consignment stock and stored as a faulty item. The sales document type for the consignment return is KR. 708. Why Is The Consignment Not Returned Into Plant Stock? When a consignment is issued to the customer the business process is abstracted at the level of two parties; the customer and supplier. Therefore, customer maintains his own records related to the stock issue or return. If it is returned to the plant stock then it would be difficult for the customer to manipulate his transaction from the huge database of products at the plant level. 709. What Is Customer Pick-up? The customer pick-up is the last process of the consignment procedure. It includes picking of the faulty as well as the unused/unsold materials which are left by the customer. The specific return shipping point is determined for the products. There is no need of any invoice while consignment pick-up, because the ownership of goods is not changing. KAN is the standard item category for the consignment pick-up. 710. Name The Standard Overview For Consignment? SYSTEM contains a standard overview for the listing of all the consignments for all the materials issued to the customers in the plant. It is called Display Consignment and Returnable Packaging Stocks at Customer. 711. What Are Sales Document Lists? The sales document lists are similar to the lists that are usually prepared throughout the business process. They are many sales documents lists that are prepared during the selling process. For example, the sales order list is very common in sales and distribution module. 712. What Are The Common Sales Document And Work Lists? The common sales document and work lists are as follows: List of Sales Orders Outbound Delivery Monitor List Billing Documents Sales Documents Blocked for Billing Sales Documents by Objects or User Status Display Backorders Incomplete Sales Orders Incomplete Sales Documents Outbound Delivery Monitor Transportation Planning Lists Blocked Billing Docs 713. What Is The Sales Document Status? In the sales documents, there is status at header and item levels. It is used for knowing and controlling the stages in the sales documents. 714. What Are The Fields Of The Processing Status? The processing status indicates the stages of an item whether it is processed or not. It includes the following fields: Overall Status. Delivery Status. System Status. 715. List The Tables That Are Used To Display The Status Of Sales Documents? The following are certain tables used to display the status of sales documents: VBUK— Displays header status and administrative data. VBUP— Displays item status. VBAKUK— Displays sales document header and status data. 716. What Is General Table Display? The General Table Display screen displays the populated fields of a table. The transaction code used for this purpose is SE16. 717. What Is Document Flow? Right from the enquiry through quotation, ordering, shipping and finally billing of the products many documents are prepared. The chain of such type of documents created in a sales process is called a document flow. 718. What Are The Sales Document Types? The sales documents may have several types but the most commonly used are as follows: Standard Order. Returns. 719. What Is Sales Order Stock? The sales order stock is a stock with a stock type E. It is the stock of items which is reserved as per the sales order issued. 720. What Is Backorder Processing? The backorder processing is the process of changing of the previous commitment of the delivery of goods from one customer to another due to strategic reasons. 721. What Are The T Codes Used For Backorder Processing? The T codes used for backorder processing are as follows: OMIH. OPJL. OPJJ. V_RA. 722. What Is Trading Process? Let's consider three organizations such as A the service provider, B the service receiver and, C works as a vendor which provides the services to service providers. In this situation when A receives a purchase order from B it either manufactures it or purchases it. If the option of procurement is chosen, then after receiving the purchase order from B, A creates a sales order for it. Also it creates a purchase order for C to arrange the goods. C prepares the product and sends to A which delivers it to B, that is the ultimate buyer. This process is called the trading process. 723. What Is Third Party Order Process? Let's consider three organizations such as A the service provider, B the service receiver and, C works as a vendor which provides the services to service providers. In this situation when A receives a purchase order from B it either manufactures it or purchases it. If the option of procurement is chosen, then after receiving the purchase order from B, A creates a sales order for it. Instead of preparing the purchase order for C as in case of the trading process A authorizes C to deliver the product to B on behalf of A. This process is called third party order processing. 724. What Is Invoice Verification? Name The Transaction Code For It? Invoice Verification is the process used when a Purchase is made. For every purchase made, an Invoice is received from Vendor/supplier. In this process the data related to invoice is posted in the system which also creates payment liability for the supplying vendor. MIRO is the transaction code that is used for invoice verification. 725. What Is Product Group? The product group is the categorized as the group of the products which are allocated for specific customer order. The product group can be either multi-level or single-level. The single level product group contains only the materials whereas the multi-level group can contain more than one product group. 726. List The Various Types Of Special Stocks? The various types of special stocks are: Consignment stock related to vendor. Consignment stock related to customer. Components provided to vendor. Project stock. Pipeline material. Orders on hand. 727. How Can You Link The Automatic Packing Procedure With Delivery Type Or Item Category? The Automatic Packing Procedure is assigned in the OVHU2 transaction code; therefore, you need to assign the procedure to 0002 Outbound Delivery there. This would help control packing in the delivery item category to some extent. However, to have a better control, you can design the access sequence with the available fields. 728. What Is The Most Important Concern That Needs To Be Taken Care Of While Creating Delivery Notes In Different Languages? While creating delivery notes, the language of the notes are decided by the destination country for which the delivery notes are created. Therefore, the most important concern to be taken care of is to ensure that the country is identified accordingly in the program and the respective form is being used to create the delivery note. 729. Define Consumption Modes? The Consumption mode defines the direction of the consumption of the customer requirements on the time axis from the requirement date, with planned independent requirement should occur. Here the requirement date is the date on which the Sales order items were created. 730. What Is The Purpose Of Shipping Point Determination? The purpose of the shipping point determination is to determine dispatch related data and conditions for a particular delivery to be supplied to a particular customer. The Transaction code used is OVL2. 731. What Is The Purpose Of Using The Delivery Process? The delivery Process is used to send the items from the plant to the customer through Shipping Point. The delivery process is also used to receive the items back from a customer. 732. In What Reference Is A Delivery Document Created? You can create a Delivery document with reference to a Sales document or with reference to an inbound return Sales document. 733. Which Delivery Document Type Can Be Created Without The Reference Of The Sales Order Document? The delivery document type LO can be created without the reference of the Sales order document. 734. List The Transaction Codes To Execute The Delivery Due List? The transaction codes that can be used to execute the Delivery Due List are as follows: VL10A — Sales orders fast display. VL10B— Purchase orders fast display. VL10C— Sales orders items. VL10D— Purchase orders items. VL10E— Sales orders schedule lines. VL10F— Purchase orders items schedule line. VL10G— Sales and purchase orders fast display. VL10H— Sales and purchase orders items fast display. VL10I— Sales and purchase orders item schedule line. 735. How Will You Describe A Shipping Point? The Shipping Point can be described as a location linked to a plant from where items are delivered to/received from a customer. A plant may have more than one shipping point assigned to it. 736. Suppose That You Do Not Have Stock But You Can Successfully Press Pgi, Which Is Wrong. How Can You Configure The System That Cannot Press Pgi Without Stock? To configure the System in such a way that PGI cannot be pressed without stock, you must ensure that negative inventory is not allowed in MM. 737. What Is Special Stock? Which Transaction Code Is Used To View The Special Stock? The special stock is the stock, which is delivered along with the packaging material. The special stock is considered as the company's property even when it is placed at the customer's location. You can view the special stock by using the MMBE transaction code. 738. Why Are The Factory Calendars Used? The factory calendars are used for various purposes and few of them are: To decide the working days at a specific location. To decide the day to create delivery so that a customer can receive the delivery on a working day. 739. Compare The Milestone With Periodic Billing? The concept of billing a customer on completion of particular work milestone or activity is known as Milestone Billing. However, the concept of billing a customer on completion of a specified time period is known as Periodic Billing. 740. What Happens If There Is A Negative Posting In Billing Document? Negative posting on the debit side reduces the credit side of an account. However, when a negative posting is done on the credit side, then it reduces the debit side of an account. 741. Compare Billing And Invoice? When the goods are supplied to a customer, then an invoice is also sent. In other words, an invoice is a billing document. Apart from invoice, the other billing documents are Credit memo and Debit memo. 742. How Can You View The Due Date Of The Invoice After Making A Delivery And Invoice? You can view the due date of an invoice in the AR module. If you go to fbl5n and search for the customer, the due date appears in the overview screen. 743. List Few Commonly Used Sales Documents That Result In Order-related Billing? Few commonly used Sales documents that result in order-related billing are: CR —Credit memos. DR —Debit memos. 744. What Is The Role Of The Cancellation Invoice? The Cancellation Invoice is generated by the System when you cancel an Invoice because of any business related decision. The Cancellation Invoice reverses the related transactional effects made by the Invoice which is cancelled. 745. What Is The Role Of Inter-company Invoice? The Inter-company invoice refers to an internal invoice which is not passed to an external partner or Sold-to party rather it is passed between two company codes belonging to the same business. 746. Which Setting Is Used To Activate The Account Setting At The Header And Item Level? The VKOA transaction code is used to activate the accounts assignment settings at the item and header levels. 747. How Can One Send An Invoice By E-mail? You first need to define the output type and use the NACE transaction code. Then correct transmission medium needs to be defined in V3 application. If the dispatch is being sent as own transaction, then dispatch time is selected as 3. After the attachment of correct output type the VF31 Transaction Code is used to send the message. 748. Why Is The Account Determination Used By The System? The Account Determination is used to determine that which ledger should be used to contain the accounts related information & posting should be made to the relevant account only. 749. Describe Two Types Of Credit Processes. Two types of the credit process are as follows: First —The credit process in which a customer returns the previously purchased items and request for the credit. Second—In this credit process, a customer is credited without returning any item but against some additional offer or scheme. 750. When Is The Debit Process Used? The debit process is used when a customer is charged because of any specific reason such as late payment, excess scheme paid etc. This is nothing but to charge customer due to specific business related requirements. 751. What Is Invoice Correction Request? This is the document that helps you to correct the quantity and price of items on an incorrect invoice and to generate credit and debit memos. The procedure is called as Invoice Correction Request. For each item two entries are created, one is Credit Item & other is Debit item. You can only correct the Debit Item & that's how you correct the invoice. 752. Define Dunning? What Do You Need To Configure Before Dunning? The dunning is defined as a process, which is used to generate a bill or invoice against a customer when a customer does not pay amount according to the payment terms offered by a company. Before performing dunning, you must configure the following: Define the dunning area. Define the dunning keys. Define the dunning block reasons. Configure the dunning procedure. Assign the dunning procedure to customer accounts. Define the correspondence types. Configure the dunning run. 753. What Is Sales Return? Sales Return is the process of returning the purchased goods by the customer because of various reasons, such as Damaged during transportation, Inferior Quality, Over Stocking, Less or No Sales Uptake, or Winding up of business by the customer (e.g.-in case of trader or dealer). In these situations, a customer returns the goods purchased. As per the business agreement between the organization and customer, a Credit Note is issued in the name of the customer to settle the accounts. 754. What Do You Exactly Mean By Credit Note And Debit Note? Credit Note —It is a kind of billing which you generally raise when you need to credit a customer due to Sales Return or because of some extra incentive or bonus offered. Debit Note —It is a kind of billing when you need to charge customer for reasons, such as delayed payment made by the customer or Customer Payment cheque dishonor penalties. 755. What Is Return Invoice? Return Invoice is nothing but the Credit Memo issued to a customer for the Sales Return affected by him. 756. Which Concepts Of The Sd Module Are Crucial Implementing Pricing Requirement And Formulas? The following concepts of SD are crucial while implementing requirement and formulas: Requirements. Copying requirements. Data transfer routines. Formulas. 757. Define The Determination Procedure? The determination procedure is related to the Sales order preparation. During the Sales order creation, the determination procedure is accessed to validate the records in the condition table. The determination procedure accesses the condition table and calls the condition types according to the access sequence and checks to see if a valid condition record exists. 758. Is It Possible To Choose The Pricing Procedure In Customer Master Or Material Master On The Basis Of Material Used? No, it is not possible to change the pricing procedure once the main document is prepared at the material level. 759. What Kind Of Records Are Updated By The System When You Post Goods Issued In A Delivery? When the goods are transferred to the customer then the goods issue is posted in a delivery. Once the goods issue is posted, the System updates various records, such as reducing the stock in hand and increasing the amount of goods sold that is Debit COGS & Credit Inventory account. 760. Which Block Is Used To Prevent The System From Creating Deliveries By Using The Delivery Due List Function? The block used to prevent the System from creating deliveries by using the delivery due list function is called the delivery due list book. 761. Which Block Stops The System From Creating The Picking List? The block used to stop the System from creating the picking list is called the picking block. 762. Which Are The Sales Object Types? The most common sales object types are as follows: VBK Sales order header. VBP Sales order item. VBEP Sales Order Schedule Lines. 763. List The Erp Packages Available In The Market? The other ERP packages available in the market are: BAAN. JD Edwards. Oracle Financials. Siebel. PeopleSoft. 764. Define The Term Consignment Stock? The material available in the company premises but is not added in the stock is called the consignment stock. The consignment stock is added to the company stock when it is either sent to the production department or marked as the material to be sold. 765. What Do You Mean By Cross-company Stock Transfer? Instead of delivering the sales order from another company code, the material can also be delivered from a plant of one company code to the plant in another company code. This process can be accomplished by a cross company stock transfer order. 766. What Is A Credit Control Area And How Is It Related To Company Codes? An organizational unit is an organization that checks credit limits for customers. Although a credit control area can include one or more company codes, but you cannot assign a company code to more than one credit control area. 767. What Is The Difference Between An Inquiry And Quotation? The inquiry is the process to register the customer's probable requirements. The quotation is a legally abiding document given to customer conforming the terms & condition to deliver the product or service to customer. SAP SD Questions and Answers Pdf Download Read the full article

[siva3155]

300+ TOP SAP PP Interview Questions and Answers

SAP PP Interview Questions for freshers experienced :-

1. what is SAP PP? SAP PP process is related to production planning of a company and it encompasses all activities like MRP (Material Requirement Planning), BOM (Bills Of Material), Routing, Capacity planning, etc. but mainly it contains two segments Material Planning: Material requirements planning, long term planning, Execution Planning: Creation of production order, workflow, conformations, technical completion and good movement 2. what are the production process in SAP? There are three types of production process in SAP Discrete Manufacturing Repetitive Manufacturing Production- Process Industries 3. List out the activities carried out in Production Planning? Activities involved in Production Planning includes Processing material master Creation of Bill of Material Displaying work center and routing Maintaining planning calendar Maintaining production lot Maintaining quota file Defining range of coverage profile and profile for safety time Defining MRP views 4. what is Routing in SAP PP? Routing in SAP PP is referred to a list of activities which are required to produce any material. For example, when you do cost estimation for the material, the system triggers the relevant routing and activity rates for all those described in routing. Which will helpful to calculate the processing cost in product costing. 5. What are the steps of Production Execution Process? Production Execution steps include Converting planned order to production order Releasing the production order Goods issue for production order Confirmation of production order Goods receipt against production order 6. What are the reports generated in product cost controlling information system? Product Cost Controlling information system generates information for following areas Product cost planning Cost object controlling with the subcomponents Product cost by period Product cost by order Product cost by sales order Costs for intangible goods and services Actual costing / Material Ledger 7. what is “work center” in SAP PP and what is the use of Data in Work Centers? “Work Centers” are business objects in SAP-PP that is used in task list operations ( routings, maintenance task lists, inspection plans) and work orders. Data in work center is used for Scheduling: Formulas and operating time are entered, so that the duration of an operation can be calculated Costing: Formulas are entered so that the costs of an operation can be calculated Capacity Planning: The available capacity and formulas for capacity requirements is entered Simplifying operation maintenance: Various default values can be included in the work center 8. What is the use of MRP PP evaluations? This role contains a function for evaluating the MRP result. This function can be used to find information about the availability of material and to identify any material shortage situation. 9. what is the purpose of using Capacity Planning? Capacity Planning supports planning in all phases Long term rough cut planning Medium term planning Short term planning It can be integrated with various SAP applications like SAP-SD, PP, PP-SOP, PP-LTP, PP-SFC, etc. 10. Explain how can you create production order without routing and BOM? Without BOM and routing you can create a production order by changing the config in OPL8 ( order type dependent parameters) as routing optional. When we try to create an order using C001 it may ask for a sales order. 11. what happens to planned after it has been converted into production order? When planned order is converted to the production order, the planned order are offset by production order. The planned order reference can be seen in the production order.

SAP PP Interview Questions 12. what is the difference between stock transport order and stock transfer order? Stock transfer order: It is referred to the transfer of stock for the usage in the same company Stock transport order: It is referred to the change of title of stock in the name of the buyer 13. what is PRT (Production Resource Tools) in SAP PP? PRT (Production Resource Tools) are moveable operating objects used to perform repeated activities in plant or production maintenance, for example, documents such as drawings or programs for which document management functions are used. Various other PRT components include Engineering drawings Jigs Fixtures Measurement Instruments 14. Explain how to create PRT master records? To create PRT master records you have to follow the following steps Choose logistics/Accounting -> Project System -> Basic data -> Master data -> Production resources and tools -> Create The initial screen for creating a PRT appears Enter a number for the PRT and choose continue The basic data screen appears Maintain the basic data Choose Goto -> Defaults and enter the default values Save the PRT 15. what is the t-code for changing production order and to display production order? T-code to change the production order = C002 T-code to display the production order = C003 16. what is PLM (Product Lifecycle Management) in SAP PP and what is the use? It is a collection of solutions with which you digitally create, maintain and make product information, available in the whole company and for the entire life cycle of the product. PLM provides you the function with which you do following things The workplace is an open portal in the world wide web and allows you to access all application and information that you need to work with all external and internal business partners It can link with other internet applications like program management, change and configuration management and engineering collaboration. 17. In SAP-PP what are the costing parameters? In SAP-PP, the costing parameters are as below Work Center: Activity types and the formulas, cost center Routing: The time, activity types 18. In cost controlling information system mention the fields that are listed in the list screen of the report? Following fields are listed in the list screen of the report Key Figures Costing/MM %Costing/MM Revaluation VarCstRuns %VarCstRuns Basic data Valuation Cost component group 1/ Cost component group 2 CostCompGr(fix)1 / CostCompGr( fix)2 19. what is the use of SAP Material View and list out other parameters where SAP Material View is applicable? SAP Material View is an SAP object that not only hold name of the material, but various other information related to material like Material production related information Material planning related information Material sales related information Material purchase related information Material storage and warehousing related information Material costing and accounting related information Material batch specification information 20. what are the types of Master Views for Production and Planning? For production and planning types of Master Views are SAP MRP1 View SAP MRP2 View SAP MRP3 View SAP MRP4 View SAP Work Scheduling View 21. Mention how MRP (Material Requirement Planning) types are classified? MRP types are classified in two leagues Materials for consumption based planning Planning based on demand 22. what are the keyfields found in MRP View 1? MRP views 1 are mostly maintained for production purposes. General Data MRP Procedure Lot size data 23. List out the basic procedure for dispatching operations in capacity leveling? For dispatch operations basic procedure includes Either the user determines the date of dispatch or else it is specified by scheduling A dispatching sequence needs to be determined if several operations need to be dispatched The systems checks for The dates to which operations are to be dispatched The work center to which operations are to be dispatched Finite scheduling is performed Operation check is performed Status for the operation is set as “dispatched.” System carries out midpoint scheduling 24. what is the need of MRP list if the stock requirement list is already given? MRP list displays the result of the last planning run, changes that occurred between planning runs are ignored in the MRP list. While contrary to this, in the stock or requirement list all changes that occurred in the stock, issues and receipts are displayed by the system. 25. what are the t-codes for creating, changing and summarizing BOM? BOM transaction codes for Creating BOM= CS01 Changing BOM= CS02 Summarized BOM=CS13 26. what is the use of t-code CS20 in BOM? With t-code CS20 you can do Mass changes to BOM like Change the item data Creating new material Replacing it with another material 27. Can’t one material be assigned to more than one operation in a routing? One material from a BOM CANNOT be assigned to different Operations. It can be done by defining the material for so many times as required in the BOM 28. How to insert an inspection checkpoint at the end of an operation? If in process sample is to be defined, assign inspection type 03 in the Material Master. Then create MICs and assign them in the Routings. System automatically generates the Inspection Lots 29. Where we have to specify the teardown time in one operation? Teardown time can be defined as one of the Standard Parameters… 30. How the process time is calculated in a WC when both labour, Machine categories exist? Scheduling is done based on the Capacity Category we define in the Workcenter 31. How to create opbject dependencies in a BOM FOR A CONFIGURABLE MATERIAL? Go to Extras -> Object Dependency -> Assign For this U need to create Characteristics and Class (of Class Type 300) earlier SAP PP Questions and Answers pdf Download Read the full article

[iexcelerp-blog]

SAP Training Online | SAP Online Courses

SAP Training Online | SAP online courses

Welcome to iEXCELERP, We provide SAP Training Online and also SAP online courses. We suggest every candidate Join our Sap Online Training to comprehend all topics. Sap Online Course and SAP Online Training for all Sap Modules will be offered by 35+ years experienced consultants working on live projects with big MNC's. Examine our SAP FICO course online module, SAP Online Training as well as materials for ABAP module, Sap Training online for SAP MM, SAP online classes for SAP SD, SAP Program Online for SAP HCM, Ideal Sap online training institute for SAP PS, Sap online training SAP Basis, SAP online training course for HCM component, SAP PP and also meeting questions. SAP Online Training Fico In our SAP FICO Online Training for SAP Financial Accounting and also Controlling, training product educates you in a very easy technique detailed with live circumstances. We are most likely to cover all the ideas of FICO. Read more for SAP FICO online internet training. SAP MM online training SAP MM online training by SAP MM specialists and it is designed to set up SAP MM component in an easy way step-by-step. Find out more for SAP MM Training online. SAP SD online courses SAP SD online courses are just one of the essential modules of SAP systems and also deals with the processes of order to shipment activities. Our SAP SD online training classes cover all the principles of sales activities. Learn More SAP SD Online Training. SAP HCM training online SAP HCM training online SAP HR is among the essential practical component of SAP systems and also handles all functions from hiring a staff member and also to its last discontinuation of the staff members in an organization. Find Out More SAP Human Resources Online Training Course. SAP PS Online Training SAP PS Online Training module is an incorporated job management tool used for planning as well as managing jobs and aids to take care of as well as sustain all the SAP tasks in firm. Read more SAP training PS on the internet classes. SAP ABAP online training SAP ABAP online training is just one of the brat technical program components in SAP. It is utilized to develop the SAP where application programs are written in the kind ABAP language. Learn More SAP ABAP Online Training. Check list of all our SAP Online Training Courses

SAP Online Training - What We Offer

Students can download video recording tutorials of the SAP training sessions, so in case if the prospect missed any type of class he/she can use those video clip tutorials. All our online SAP training programs are based on live projects. All our training modules are up to date as per market standards. Training will certainly be performed on a daily regular basis and additionally, we can tailor the training timetable based on the prospect demands. Online SAP trainer have more than 15 to 25 years of experience. Our Labs are very well updated with the most up to date version of hardware and software. Our classrooms are equipped with projectors &  Wi-Fi access. 100 % job assistance which includes handling mock interviews. SAP Training Course Conclusion Certification, as soon as you've completed the training course.

Why SAP Online Course from iEXCELERP

Instructors with collectively +35 years of experience in their respective domain in addition to they are presently working with Top MNCs As all Instructors are working professionals so they are having numerous real-time jobs, instructors will use these jobs experience during training sessions. Read the full article

[siva3155]

800+ TOP SAP SD Interview Questions and Answers

SAP SD Interview Questions for freshers experienced :-

1. What Is The Further Subdivision Of A Plant? The further subdivision of a plant are the storage locations, which allows stocks of materials to be broken down according to predefined criteria such as the location and materials planning aspects. It can also be subdivided into locations and operational areas. They are further subdivided into locations takes geographical criteria into account, operational areas reflects responsibilities for production is also a subdivision. 2. In Sd, Mm, Pp, Fi/co Which Are The Highest Organizational Units? The highest organizational units in SD, MM, PP, FI/CO are: SD: Sales Organization. MM: Plant. PP: Plant. FI: Company Code CO: Controlling Area. 3. What Is The Definition Of A Plant According To Sap? According to SAP a plant is a place where either material is produced or goods and services provided. Plant is classified into Business Object. In Organizational unit within Logistics, serving to subdivide an enterprise according to production, procurement, maintenance, and materials plan aspects. Coming to the Structure a plant can assume a variety of roles. As a part of maintenance plant, it includes the maintenance objects that are spatially located within this plant. The maintenance tasks that are to be performed are specified within a maintenance planning plant. As a retail or wholesale site, it makes merchandise available for distribution and sale. The plant is the organizational unit for material valuation, according to a rule. For the placement of materials in storage (stock put-away), a storage location is assigned to a plant. The storage location depends on the storage condition and the stock placement situation. The preferred shipping point for a plant is defined as the default shipping point, which depends on the shipping condition and the loading condition. The business area that is responsible for a valuation area is determined as a function of the division. As a rule, a valuation area corresponds to a plant. 4. Is It Possible Sales Organization Sell From A Plant Belonging To A Different Company Code? It is possible for a sales organization sell from a plant belonging to a different company code 5. For Which The Distribution Channels And Divisions Are Assigned And How Many Shipping Points Can Be Assigned To A Plant, Sales Organization And If There Is A Warehouse Management System Active, Where Is Warehouse Number Is Assigned? The Distribution Channels and Divisions are assigned to Sales Organization. A plant can be assigned with many shipping points, coming to sales organization there will be shipping points that are assigned to that. When a ware house management system is active it would be assigned with a Plant and Storage Location in a ware house number. 6. Is It Possible To Assign Two Different Sales Organizations To The Same Company Code? Yes, it is possible to assign two different sales organizations to the same company code 7. Define To Which Organizational Element Is Central In Shipping? Organizational unit at a fixed location that carries out shipping activities is called Shipping Point. A shipping point could, for instance it can be a company's mail department or a plant's rail depot. Each delivery is processed by only one shipping point. 8. What Would Make The Immediate Delivery In Cash Sales? When immediate delivery in cash sales is made the Order type delivery switch on immediately. 9. Is It Possible To Create Sales Order For 40 Items If The Quotation Is Sent For 30 Items? Yes, it is possible to create sales order for 40 items if the quotation is sent for 30 items. 10. In Case Of Third Party Sales What Would Trigger For The Automatic Creation Of Pr Or Po? It has to be set an item category as “automatic PO” so that PO and PR will automatically generate after saving the order.

SAP SD Interview Questions 11. Briefly Explain Any Three Organizational Elements Make Up A Sales Area And Their Function? Product groups can be defined for a wide-ranging spectrum of products. For every division you can make customer-specific agreements on, for example, partial deliveries, pricing and terms of payment. Within a division you can carry out statistical analyses or set up separate marketing is known as Division. 12. In Access Sequence What Is The Importance Of Requirement Field? In access sequence, the system will not go to access condition type system will reply through formula. 13. What Is The Relation Between Credit Control Area And Company Codes And Explain The Credit Control Area? More than one credit control areas is not possible to assign to a company code, since a credit control area can include one or more company codes. Credit control area is an organizational unit in an organization that specifies and checks credit limits for customers. 14. What Are The Steps Included For The Sales Person As A Partner Function In The Partner Determination? The steps that are included for the sales person as a partner function in the partner determination, that a partner function sales representative or person responsible for these two we can add through partner function in partner procedure 15. What Is The Central Organization Element In Purchasing And The Relationship Between Sales Organization And Plants, Company Codes, Plants And Company Codes? The Central Organizational element in purchasing is Purchasing Organization and the relationship between sales organizations and plants is Many to Many, to Company codes its Many to One and for Plants and Company codes its Many to Many to One. 16. Which Sub Module Of Sap Could Make Business Areas Obsolete And Can One Business Area Be Assigned To Several Company Codes? And What Is Z Transaction? CO is the sub module of SAP that could make business area obsolete and it is possible that one business area can be assigned to several company codes. Z transaction is a copied standard transaction code or objects that rename it by Z which is basically standard name which will stat from Z as user defined. 17. What Is Business Area And How Is It Used? The costs and revenue according to the business area posted by the system is called as Business Area. It is used in Sales Area if the accounts are to be posted according to sales and Plant Division if the accounts are to be posted according to products. The business area is defined in Customizing for Sales. A unit in an enterprise, grouping product and market combinations as homogeneously as possible for the purpose of developing unified business policy. Business Area according to Financial Accounting (FI) defines that the business area is an organizational unit within financial accounting which represents a separate area of operations or responsibilities within an organization. Financial accounting transactions can be allocated to a specific business area. 18. What Is A Delivery Group? Basic grouping of all individual deliveries for Billing is called Delivery Group. It should have the same Ship to Party, Shipping Point, etc. 19. Briefly Explain The Internal Organizational Elements Within A Sales Organization And Their Function? The Geographical aspects of the organization in business development and sales are defined using the term sales office. A sales office can be considered as a subsidiary. Sales offices are assigned to sales areas. If a sales order is entered for a sales office within a certain sales area, the sales office must be assigned to that area. The staff of a sales office may be subdivided into sales groups. For example, sales groups can be defined for individual divisions. Individual personnel master records are used to manage data about salespersons. A sales person can be assigned to a sales group in the personnel master record. 20. What Is Cumulative Condition Record? Cumulative Condition Record is a field that Condition Update during configuration for a condition type that has anything to do with the cumulative condition records. 21. How Can A Company's Structure Represent By Defining And Assigning Corporate Structure Elements In R/3 System And What Is The Purpose Of Doing That? The Enterprise organization chart shows the organizational structure of an enterprise, its organization units and how they are related. A combined structure can be created from the point of view of accounting, MM, SD. This structure forms a framework in which all business transactions can be processed. 22. What Are The Views In A Material Master? The views in a material master are Basic data, Additional basic data, Accounting views, MRP views, Purchasing views, Storage views, forecasting views, sales views and in IS Retail there is also a Listing view and POS view. 23. What Is A Sales Organization? Sales organization is an organizational unit that sells, distributes products, negotiates terms of sales and is responsible for all the transactions involved with a sale. 24. What Is A Legacy System And What Is Cut Over Strategy? Migrating from the existing system on which currently working to the SAP system is called the legacy system. Cutover strategy that depends upon how the organizations design their data load strategies. Normally, it decide the sequence of Data loads for Configuration settings, Master data, Transaction data which follows whom and then it make a copy of the system as a Production system a day before and after checking the successful data loads, you go-live 100% or partial again depending upon organizational setup and policies. Cutover planning is highly site specific. There's no thumb rule. The stock data as on the date of going live should be correctly entered. But stock being a highly dynamic quantity, the strategy for loading should be crystal clear. Then you have to load all the back dated transaction on the stock. Some stock comes into your plant/storage location as return and some stock is actually delivered to your customer through sales orders of various kinds. 25. What Is The Transaction Code For Creating A Material In Sap And What Is The Transaction Code To Extend A Material? The transaction code for creating a material in SAP is MM41. MM01 is the transaction code to extend a material. 26. In A Material Master What Is The Base Unit? The base unit is a measure which is used as a basis for all the transactions, all movements of quantities will be converted to that base unit of measure which is specific to an article 27. What Happens When A Value Is Not Entered For A Manual And Mandatory Condition Type And Does A Header Condition Type Have An Access Sequence? When a value is not entered for a manual and mandatory condition type the pricing procedure will reject the conditions in the sales order. There would be no header condition type to have an access sequence. 28. What Are The Examples Of Global Settings? The examples of Global Settings are Currencies, Countries etc and this data is application independent 29. What Is A One Time Customer? A general customer that is created for those customers for which it do not want to create separate records is called a one time customer. This customer can be reused. 30. In A Customer Master Record Who Is A Payer? According to customer master record a Payer is the individual or company who will settle the invoices for products or services sold. 31. Who Defines The Account Groups And Give Some Tables In Sap Sd For Customer Master? Normally account groups are defined by the finance team and some of the tables in SAP SD for customer master are KNVV, RF02D, KNA1 etc. 32. What Is The Procedure To Know Whether The Customer Is One-time Or Regular? The procedure to know the customer is one-time or regular since one can maintain Account Group for One-time customers 33. Is It Possible To Have Specific Customer Material Information Entered In Sap? Yes, it is possible to have specific customer material information entered in SAP since VD51 is the transaction or inside VA02 also you can add customer material information records. 34. Give The Transaction Code For Creating A Customer In Sap Sd? The transaction codes for creating a customer in SAP SD are VD01, VA01 and XD01 35. What Are Inter-company Customers? This customer represents the sales customers within the same client but between different company codes. 36. What Happens When The Exclusive Field Was Ticked In The Access Sequence? When the exclusive field of all access sequences is ticked, it will try to get available data from the first. Only in case, data is not available, will it move on to the next one. 37. In Sap Sd What Is A Sales Office? According to SAP SD, a sales office is a geographically located unit of a sales organization. 38. What Is The Purpose Of Partner Determination? Partner determination is used to find out who is responsible for A/R process and where the products are going. 39. Describe The Components Of Sap Sd Module? Master data Basic functions Sales(foreign sales and sales support) Shipping and transportation Billing Sales support Information systems are the important components of SAP’s SD module 40. Explain The Concept Of Sales Organization? The topmost organizational unit in SD module is called the sales organization. All the transactions relating to selling and distribution of products or services are represented by the sales organization unit. One sales organization can be associated with more than one distribution channel. It is represented by a 4 character code in SAP and is assigned to more than one plant. These plants are in turn assigned to company code. So obviously n number of sales area can be brought under a single company code. 41. Explain The Concept Of A Distribution Channel? After a product or service is sold, it takes various channels before it reaches the intented audience (customers). A distribution channel depicts such channels(eg. Retail, wholesale, direct sale etc).In sap it is identified by a 2 char code. It is assigned to more than one sales areas. 42. Explain What Is A Distribution Chain ? A distribution chain is the possible combination of sales organization and distribution channels. 43. Explain In Detail What A Sales Order Is? Sales order is a contract between Sales organization and a customer, for supply of specified goods and/services over a specified time frame and in agreed quantity or unit. A sales order contains, Organizational Data Header data Item data Schedule line data 44. Name All The Special Sales Document Types? SO-Rush order G2-Credit RE-Return order KN-FoC(Free of charge) subsequent delivery order. RK-invoice correction request. 45. Explain What Is Consignment Stock Process? There can be business scenario where we allow our stock to be stored at the customer’s site. Or even if the stock or material is stored in our place, a particular amount is reserved for the customer. He may sell or redistribute this stock allocated for him at his wish. We bill him only the amount he has consumed. This business process is called ‘consignment stock process. The special stock(consignment) in our system both customer wise and material wise. The standard sales order document type used is KB and delivery type is LF. 46. We Create An Order For A Sales Bom With Three Sub Items. Since The Sub Item Components Must Not Be Delivered Without The Main Product We Declared The Main Item Category As Delivery Group. The Problem Arises When There Is Zero Availability For The Main Item And No Schedule Line Can Be Confirmed. The Main Item Is Defined As Delivery Group But The Delivery Is Created Without The Main And Only The Component Sub Items. The Delivery Group Becomes Broken Up. This Occurs Only In Vl01n And Vl10 Dialogue Mode. In Vl10 Background It Works Ok, So No Delivery Item Is Created At All For Those Unconfirmed Items. How Do We Fix This? The message is not configurable; at least in releases Formulas-> Condition value. There you divide quantity by 100, and multiply the integer part of result by 3. New condition-calculate type-G-formula. Input condition in your pricing procedure and input AltCTy (Condition formula for alternative calculation type) - new formula. 51. I Have Two Condition Types For Cost. One Is Customized And The Other Is Vprs. Their Values Are Determined Correctly In Sales Order. A Problem Arises When I Create The D/o And Billing Document. The Condition Type Vprs Is Incorrect With Value '0,' While The Customized One Is Correct. What Is The Cause Of This? The VPRS is a valuation condition, normally the cost of goods sold. If it comes from the material master record, it is a standard valuation price. However, if it comes from the information record, it is the very cost of goods sold. You may have a difference from the price you valued your material at and the real cost of purchase. Check if you have a standard value in your master record or if you have a relevant info record. Another possibility is your customized condition is undoing the VPRS. 52. Which Report Will Show The Serial Number Assigned In A Delivery Document? Take a look at function modules with SERIAL_*. For example, SERIAL_LS_PRINT. 53. I Received The Error Message, "condition Type Z928 Is Not In Procedure Zcs928 Av." How Do I Include The Condition Type Z928 In Pricing Procedure Zcs928? Follow pathway: SPRO ->Sales and Distribution ->Basic Functions ->Pricing ->Pricing Control -> Define and Assign Pricing Procedures From here select "Maintain pricing procedures." Next, select procedure ZCS928, then “Control Data.” Add Z928 to your procedure. 54. Is It Possible To Use Transaction Mass To Assign A Sales Representative As A Partner? Yes. Using the MASS transaction, select object KNA1. Then select table name KNVP. 55. Where In The Sale Order Would You Enter The Serial Numbers For Material? Serial numbers are entered on the delivery document and not a sale order, as this allows for multiple serial numbers to be entered for a single line. For example, you may have 10 serial numbers for a quantity of 10. 56. I Need To Have An Additive Price Based On A Variant Characteristic Selected And Then Provide A Discount For Each Of The Characteristics. I Must Discount The Correlating Characteristic, Not The Gross Value. Price ------ Char 1 = 1.00 Char 2 = 2.00 Char 3 = 3.00 Gross Price = 6.00 Discount ------ Char 1 = 10% Of 1.00 = .10 Char2 = 20% Of 2.00 = .40 Char3 = 15% Of 3.00 = .45 Total Discounts = .95 The Discount May Vary By Customer. How Do I Find Out How Configure This? You can find out how to configure this by taking a look at the documentation for $SET_PRICING _FACTOR,” in LO-VC. 57. I'm Working In Se43, Area Menu Maintenance. I Am Copying An Existing Area Menu Where The Name Of The Main Node Is Already Specified. I Took Standard Menu Cond_av And Made Its Copy As Zcond_av. I've Changed Its Description From "condition Maintenance" To Another Description. However, In The Area Menu Itself The Main Node Still Has Condition Maintenance.how Do I Change This? This can be solved through SE43 itself. Create a new menu area then the name of that area menu is automatically assigned to the main node. 58. We Have Two Types Of Customers Industrial And Domestic. The Domestic Customers Have A Price List. For The Industrial Customers, The Price Is Calculated On Basis Of Percentage Of The Cost. Since There Is A Possibility That Industrial Customers Might Also Buy Domestic Products At Any Given Point Of Time, We Are Forced To Make One Pricing Procedure. Is There Another Solution? You can create a VOFM subroutine (transaction code VOFM-Formulas ->Condition value) and set this subroutine in your procedure as transaction code V/2 in field AltCTy (Condition formula for alternative calculation type). In the ABAP coding you can describe all of your requirements. 59. How Can I Transfer The Payment Method From Customer Master To Sales Order Automatically? Use the user exit “userexit_move_field_to_vbkd” in report MV45AFZZ with this coding: DATA: via LIKE knb1-zwels. IF vbkd-zlsch IS INITIAL. IF NOT vbak-kunnr IS INITIAL. SELECT SINGLE zwels INTO via FROM knb1 WHERE bukrs = vbak-bukrs_vf AND kunnr = vbak-kunnr. vbkd-zlsch = via(1). ENDIF. ENDIF. 60. How Can You Send Output Through An Email Instead Of A Fax Or Printout? Check whether the transmission medium has been maintained for the processing routines for your output type. Make sure that this transmission medium is placed in the partner functions evenly. Follow this path: SPRO -> SD-> Basic Functions-> output control-->output determination->determination using condition technique->maintain O.deter.for sales documents-> Maintain output types. Use transaction code V30. 61. We Have A Problem With Bapi_salesorder_change. We Need To Change A Position In A Sales Order But When We Fill The Structures Bapi Does Not Change The Sales Order. What Should We Do? You must fill the update structures properly. The order header needs to read “order_header _ inxupdateflag = 'U',”. The item must read “order_item_inx = 'U'.” Each field touched in “order_item_ in” needs to have an 'X' in the corresponding field of “order_item_inx.” 62. We Have Two Company Codes And New Infostructure S004 For Filling. We Must Fill It With Data From First Cc Only. Is There Any Problem If The People Who Create Orders, Deliveries And Billing Of Second Cc Work At This Time? You can control the updating of infostructure at both header level and tem level using IMG. If you do not want the second company code data to be updated in the info structure, do not include the sales organizations assigned to the second company code in the updating of info structure. For your information, the codes are OVRO and OVRP 63. I Am Working In A System Where Someone Has Changed Standard Sap And The Sap Standard Pro Forma Invoice. Where Is This Set? (there Is No Account Determination Procedure Assigned To The Document In Sd But It Is Picking Up The Standard One And Posting To Accounts.) In VOFA check the SD Document category. It should be set to U and the transaction group should be set to 8. Likely these were changed to real invoices. The transaction group tells pro forma invoices not to be posted to accounts. If you have a posting block, wait until someone releases it to accounting in change mode. 64. I Need A Modification To Make The System Issue An Error Message When The User Enters Two Sales Orders With The Same Reference To The Customer's Purchase Order. What Should I Do? In the transaction VOV8 (sales document type definition) under general control put an "A" in the check PO number field. In the transaction OVAH (change system messages) change the message category of V4 -115 to "E" from "W". 65. I Want To Issue Goods Where The Storage Location Has A Negative Quantity. The System Is Not Allowing Me To Make A Goods Issue. How Do I Configure This? Follow these steps: OMJ1-Allow negative stocks-at plant level and at storage location level. MM02-Plant data/stor.2-check negative stock in plant. 66. What Transaction Do We Use To View All Messages Including Warning Messages In Sap? You can view these in transaction code SE91. 67. I Would Like To List The Partner Functions In A Delivery. In Which Table Can I Find That Information? This information is located in table VBPA. 68. We Have A Situation Where There Will Be Two Pricing Procedures And Depending Upon The Materials Used, Either One Of Them Will Get Picked Up. For Example We Have A Field In Customer Master That Helps Determine Pricing Procedure. Similarly, Is There Any Field In The Material Master That Can Determine The Pricing Procedure Determination? The pricing procedure applies to the whole document(header and items). You cannot change it at material (item) level. 69. There Is A Configuration Setting For Sd Where You Are Able To Activate The Account Assignment On Both Header And Item Level. The Activation Will Basically Open Up All The Respective Cost Objects. What Setting Is This? Use transaction code VKOA 70. How Do You Create Two Customer Hierarchies For The Same Payer? Create an order and delivery, and then perform a PGI for first customer hierarchy. Do the same for the second customer hierarchy. 71. I Have Created Two Pricing Procedures. One Is For Normal Pricing And The Other For Taxes. When I Am Trying To Do A Sales Order, Only The First Pricing Procedure Is Applying And It Is Not Accepting The Second One. Why? What Is The Exact Link Between These Two Pricing Procedures And The Condition Types? The pricing procedure is determined according to: sales area, customer pricing procedure field in the customer master (sold-to), document pricing procedure field in the sales document type. You may need to identify the criteria to determine the right pricing procedure when you enter a sales order. The transaction code to define pricing procedure determination is OVKK. Normally taxes are included in the actual pricing procedure, as part of the determination of the actual price (including taxes) the customer will pay. Taxes need to be calculated based on the given prices in the pricing procedure. 72. While Creating Quotation, I Am Getting The Error "mandatory Condition Mwst Is Missing" . Although Mwst Is Present In Procedure Rvaa01, What Are The Steps To Solve This? Use transaction code VK11 and enter condition type MWST. Next, enter the details in that document. 73. When We Create A Bom Through Cs01, What Effect Does Bom Usage Field Have On Subsequent Configuration? For Example, If We Take It As 1=production Or 5=sales What Effect Will It Have On Subsequent Processes? A sales usage means that production will not see it, and a production usage means that sales will not see it. The components each may or may not be saleable, but as a sales BOM is intended to explode onto a sales order, a non-saleable item on a sales BOM would generally not be recommended. The usage is precisely what it sounds like; which function will use the particular BOM. 74. How Do You Copy Item Text From Sales Order, To Delivery,to Invoice? Use text control function, SD-> basic function-> text control. 75. How Do You Delay Billing To The Next Month In A Delivery Note? You can postpone the invoice date in the sales order that belongs to that particular delivery under the billing tab. Otherwise by default, the invoice will pick up the GI date of the delivery. If it is acceptable to put the GI on hold until the day of invoicing you could also suggest this as a procedure. 76. How Should I Assign Gl Account To The Company Code? I Am Doing Sd/fi Interface. By Using Transaction Code Fsso I Am Able To Enter Gl Account And Company Code. But When I Try To Save It I Am Getting The Error "account Xyz Does Not Exist In Company Code Xyz." You must create the GL account for the company code, exactly like you create a customer master for a CC, or a material in a plant. 77. When We Create A Third Party Customer Order, It Generates A Po To The Vendor. When We Receive The Vendor Invoice, It Is Entered In Miro, Which Then Generates An Order-related Customer Invoice. If We Create For Example, Three Different Sales Orders And Three Separate Pos And Also Make Three Separate Invoice Receipts That Are Done On The Same Day, These Invoices Are Not Combining Into A Single Invoice For The Customer. We Need This To Only Be One Invoice Per Sales Order. Where Is The Logic That Controls This And How Do We Change It? You will have to take a look at copy control (from Sales document to Billing document), on item level. Most likely the routine will show 001. If you change that routine to 003, then you should get an invoice per sales order. 78. I Have A Requirement To Send The Invoice Copy To The Customer Or Agent That Will Be Specified At The Time Of Sending The Invoice (it Should Not Be Configured Before). How Do I Configure This And Where Do I Set The Indicators? Use transaction code NACE. Define the output type here. In application V3, define the correct transmission medium. If you want to send it at your convenience select the dispatch time as 3 (Send with applications own transaction). Attach the output type to the correct output determination procedure defined for the document type. Use T Code VF31 to send the message. You will need basis while configuring the email addresses because SCOT and SOST will be used by it. 79. I Have A Bom Item And Another Item, Which Is A Free Gift For Child Model. This Was Not Delivered To The Dealer, But Delivery Order Status Indicates "complete Delivery" And The Scheduled Line Appeared Fine As Well. After My Analysis, I Found Some Things. The Initial Quantity Of The Bom Item Is 5 And Free Good Is 0. How Do I Go About Fixing This? You cannot manipulate and make changes afterwards expecting the system to honor your requirements. You must add the child items as a separate order. 80. A Problem Occurs While Releasing Invoice To Accounting. Billing Is Created Successfully, But The Invoice Is Not Released To Accounting. The Error Message I Receive After Saving The Document States Error In Account Determination. How Should I Solve This Problem? The first thing you should do is check the account determination log in the invoice. Follow these steps: transaction code VF02-> Environment-> Acc.determ.analysis-> Revenue Accounts. 81. I Am Facing A Problem In The Internal Number Range Assignment Of Customer Data. I Have Created A New Account Group And With Each Customer I Create, The System Gives An Increment Of 5. For Example It Increases From 10005 To 10010 Instead Of 10005, 10006. How Do I Fix This? The problem is with the number range buffering. Go to transaction code SNUM, and then object type “debitor.” Click on the pencil (change mode) and change the number in buffer. 82. How Does The Term Characteristic Relate To Transaction Code Cto4? Material master leads to classification, and then you select the desired class. Based on class you can choose the characteristics. These characteristics are defined in CT04. 83. What Process Do You Use To Create A Consignment Stock? Follow pathway : SAP Library-> SAP R/3 Enterprise Application Components-> Logistics-> Sales and Distribution (SD) -> Sales-> Special Business Processes in Sales-> Consignment Stock Processing. 84. What Is The Business Process Of Excise Tax And How Do You Relate That In Sap? Excise tax is the duty charged on manufacture of goods listed in the chapter and section head of Central Excise Tariff Act. Process should amount to manufacture and separate identifiable finished goods should emerge having marketability and specified in Tariff Act. As far as SAP is concerned you, find CIN version integrated with standard SAP. There are two places where you need to configure CIN. The first is Financial Accounting-> Tax on Sale and Purchase and the other is Logistic General-> Tax on Goods Movement. 85. I Created A New Info Structure And Activated Update Rules For It. What Is The Best Way To Transport Them Into A Productive System? After rigorous testing in the QA environment and approval of the user community you should transport the info structure and related items into a production environment during “down time,” possibly when no billing documents are being created and posted. 86. Are There Any User Exits Or Any Other Way To Include New Fields In The Sales Order Va01? There are two ways to approach this. You can go to transaction code SE93 and give the Transaction as VA01. It will lead to a screen where you can click on a program that will take you to mod.pool. In this program click Find Icon and key in customer there. It will show you the user exits in that particular program. Another way is using SPRO. Follow path : IMG->SD->System Modifications->User Exits. There you can click on the help document and it will show all the user exits with program name. Select the suitable one. 87. For Sto When The Invoice Receipt (mm) And Invoice Issue (sd) Is Completed, How Do We Perform A Price Adjustment If We Find The Price Is Incorrect? If We Do A Subsequent Credit/debit In Mm, How Do We Create Subsequent Credit/debit In Sd? First cancel your invoices (SD and MM). Change the price in the STO PO. Then create new invoices SD and MM. The new values will be picked up if properly configured. The difference in the material value will be automatically posted to the appropriate stock account when you create the invoice in MIRO. 88. I Am Making An Inquiry In Which I Have A Configurable Material. When I Create A Quotation With Reference To The Inquiry, The System Is Not Allowing Me To Change The Configuration In The Quotation. I Checked The Copy Control And Found That At The Item Level Copy Control Between Inquiry And Quotation, We Have An Option For Configuration. I Have Tried These, Yet I Am Still Unable To Change The Configuration. What Should I Do? The document may already exist. Once fixed you cannot “unfix” the configuration by changing the customizing. You must create a new quote/order. Use setting “A.” 89. Is It Possible To Have To Have Two Delivery Notes In Two Different Languages? The destination country will decide which language the output should be printed. Make sure that you are identifying that in the program attached to the output and accordingly open the desired form. 90. Can I Copy Text From The Delivery Note To The Billing Document? How Can I Do This Through Text Determination? You can copy text from Delivery Note to invoice. Go to the IMG (SD>Basic Functions>Text Control) and click on the help icons next to text types. Define access sequences for determining texts and define and assign text determination procedures. You need to check the delivery text field in the relevant billing document type. If you do not check this field you will not be able to copy the delivery texts to the billing document. 91. I Am Working On Intercompany Sales. How Do I Create Material In Both Company Codes? Use transaction code MM01 to create material with organizational data pertaining to the plants and sales organizations. 92. I Do Not Know Why The Tax Field In The Customer Master And Material Master Is Hidden. This Field Is Not Suppressed In Customer Master. How Do I Make This Field Appear? Make sure you have a tax category defined for your countries in OVK1. Then check if the tax classes are defined in OVK3 and OVK4. 93. On The Sales Order Shipping Tab There Is A Field With The Text "shipping Point." I Would Like To Add New Shipping Points To Certain Plants. Where Is This Configured In Sap? New shipping points are defined in enterprise structure. Follow these steps: logistics execution -> define shipping points and assign the shipping point to plant in assign in enterprise structure under logistics execution. Next, click: shipping -> shipping point and good receipt determination. Configure for automatic determination of shipping point based on shipping condition, loading group, and plant. Maintain relevant shipping condition in customer master. Maintain relevant loading group in material master (normally the standard). For the combination that you derive from the sales order, you should have a configuration entry for automatic determination in sales order. 94. If Several Items With Different Vat Rates Are Included In One Invoice, These Different Rates Are Displayed In Theinvoice Header Including The Respective Amount. After Saving The Invoice, The System Determines One Vat Rate Including One Tax Code And Transfers This Tax Code To The Accounting Document. How Does This Determination Work? What Is The Rule Behind This Determination? In FS01/02/03 you will see that there is a tax category field where you enter the used tax code for this account. Normally tax conditions have specific account keys. Through transaction code VKOA or OV35 you assign which account (using key fields from sales) will be used for the account doc. Check V08 price procedure for the used account key as well. 95. When A User Releases An Invoice To Accounting It Creates An Accounting Document. The Status Of The Accounting Document Is Cleared If The User Cancels This Invoice. Is It Necessary To Delete The Previously Created Accounting Document? No, but you will have a credit note in your customer account. 96. I Have A Problem With Lis. After Client Copy, Our Test System Does Not Update Lis Info Structures. When I Save A Sales Order, Delivery Or Billing Document I Receive An Error Message That Says, "update Was Terminated". How Do I Fix This? Generate the infostructure and update group again in the client in which you are facing the problem. 97. How Do You Trace The Changes Made In The Sales Order In Regards To Changes To The Partner Function In The Sales Order? If you go into the change mode of the sales order click on environment, and then change. This menu will show you that partner functions like SH / BP / PY in the document are changed. It also shows old and new values. 98. I Am Working On Cross Company Sto. After I Create Sto, I Cannot Create Outbound Delivery By Using Vl10d. When I Check The Sto, I Find That The Delivery Creation Date Is Blank. It Seems The System Does Not Add The Sto To Delivery Due List Automatically. Is Some Setting In Sd Affecting This? The delivery creation date is blank because the STO is blocked by release strategy. 99. Typically You Receive A Standard Credit Check When You Save The Sales Order. What Is The Best Way To Trigger It At The Start Of The Sales Order Creation So That One Does Not Have To Enter A Lot Of Data In Case You Reach The Credit Limit? The ideal way is to check the credit limit of the customer much before the processing the sales order. Follow the path mentioned within the sales order. Also check: Sales Order-> Environment-> Partners-> Display Credit Account. 100. Is There A Way To Print An Invoice Five Times? (one Original And Four Copies) Use transaction code VF02. Once inside the document, click on Go to-> Header ->Output. Select the output type (normally RD00). Click on Communication method and in the field "Number of messages", enter the number of copies you want to print. 101. What Is The Difference Between Order Quantity And Confirmed Quantity? The confirmed quantity is the allocated quantity by the availability check (ATP). 102. How Do The Subtotals That Have Carry Over Value Kompkzwi1, Komp-kzwi2, Work With Respect To Condition Types? Subtotals are not tied to condition types per say.You control what goes into the field by assigning subtotals within you pricing procedure. If you assign a particular line in your pricing procedure to be subtotal 5, its value will be moved to KOMP-KZWI5. 103. When We Run The Transaction For Vf04 No Authorization Check Is Done For This Division. This Is Causing Some Problems Because Some Users Run The Transaction Vf04 And Create Billing Documents For A Division For Which They Are Not Responsible. Is There A User Exit Or Other Way That We Can Force Transaction Vf04 To Look At The Division As Part Of The Authorization Check? Make the modification to include a check within the copying requirements of the division in the source document instead of the user authorization. 104. I Have Created A New Material In Sap, And Now Wish To Add Stock For That Material Into A Particular Plant. What Is The Best Transaction Code As Well As Movement Type To Use? Use transaction code MB1C and movement type 561. 105. I Defined Manually A Condition Type Z004 (as A Copy Of The Condition Type K004). I Then Tried To Create Condition In Transaction Code Vk31 In The Section Discount/surcharges -> By Material. The System Reported, "table 304 Is Not Defined For Use With Condition Type Zec1." How Should I Resolve This? VK31 works with pricing reports. If you want to have a new condition type to be maintainable via VK31 or VK32., you need to do the following: Create pricing report via transaction code V/LA and include the tables you need. Extend the price area menu via SE43. Area menu = COND_AV. 106. How Do I Assign Movement Type? You assign movement type against the schedule line category. 107. A Certain Customer Has Credit Payment Terms Wherein If The Invoice Is Cut Between Dec 1-15 2005, Then The Invoice Due Date Should Be Jan 15, 2006. I Have Nfigured The Payment Terms In The Transaction Code Obb8. I Created The Sales Order With The Customer And Got The Specific Payment Terms In The Overview Screen, And Then I Made The Delivery And Then The Invoice. Can I View The Invoice Due Date In The Invoice? You should be able to see the due date in the AR Module. If you go into fbl5n and search for the customer, you can see the due date in the overview screen. 108. I Am In The Va02 Transaction For A Sales Order And Want To Reject The Line Items And Cancel The Entire Sales Order. What Is The Menu Path Needed To Achieve This Goal? Click the reject document button and then enter a reason for rejection. This will reject the line items and the sales order. You can enter a reason for rejection on the line item sales a tab. 109. Under Transaction Code Sdo1, I Try To Save A Display Variant With The Pathway:settings -> Display Variants. However The Save Option Is Grayed-out. How Should I Resolve This Issue? There is an unapplied SAP Note that will correct the error. Once the correct note is applied the save option will not be grayed-out. 110. A Sales Document Type Of A Sales Order Can Be Changed After Getting Saved. How Do You Do This? One way is through the configuration of document type in transaction code VOV8 (O Another way is in the "Transaction Flow" section. You can also perform “Alt sales doc type 1” and “Alt sales doc type 2.” 111. We Have Only One Distribution Channel In Our Company. Can We Default It In The Transaction Field That Needs Distribution Channel Data? How Can We Configure That? You can use the user master data to achieve this. Use transaction code SU01 and input the user ID. Go to the parameters tab page and add parameter VTW. Input your default distribution channel in the parameter value. The only drawback with this method is you will have to individually do this for all your users. 112. I Want To Use Automatic Packing And I Have To Create The Procedure For Packing Instructions. Where And How Can I Link The Procedure With My Delivery Type Or Item Category? The procedure is assigned in transaction OVHU2. You will have to assign the procedure to 0002 Outbound Delivery. Here you cannot specify the delivery type or item category. To some extent, you can control this with the packing indicator in the delivery item category, however, you can have better control by designing the access sequence with the available fields. 113. Is It Possible To Perform An Availability Check Based On The Plant Yet Exclude One Storage Location? You can make a storage location not available to the availability check in MM. 114. Is It Possible To Copy Texts From Sales Order Header To Billing Document Header? Use transaction VOTXN, and then create an access sequence with text object VBBK. Also make sure that the requirement of access sequence is given as '1'-Ref doc. Header. 115. I Must Create An Order. Whenever A Sales Order Is Created In The Schedule Line Items, The Check Box "fixed Date And Quantity" Is Checked. In The Md04 Transaction, Customer Requirements For The Sales Order Are Not Appearing. Why Is This? Regarding fix date and quantity check box check transaction OVZJ for your sales area. With the second problem regarding MD04, you must check two things; requirements class and scheduling category. Check your document to see whether they are activated for requirement transfer. 116. In Transaction Xd03 We Can Print Details For A Single Customer. Is There Any Transaction Code To Print All The Customers Address Or Details At One Time? For this requirement check TC: S_ALR_87012179 & S_ALR_87012180 117. What Table Do I Use In Creating Abap Program That Would Output The Sales Based On Sales Organization Of Customers? If you have SIS update turned on, you can use transaction code MTCE against infostructure 001 to display sales by sales ganization and so forth. Apart from SIS, you may create simple ABAP query with LDB VAV. If you want to create an ABAP report only, then use transaction code VBRK ->billing header table and VBRP -billing item table. 118. Name Two Ways To Start A Transaction? i.Dynamic Menu ii.Command Field 119. What Does The Material Type Control ? The material type determines a material's procurement type. It also controls screen sequence field selection number assignment type in material master maintenance inventory management type account determination 120. Can You Specify When Output Should Be Created? If Yes, What Possibilities Do You Have? Yes. Print out, Mail, EDI, Fax. 121. Give Examples For Standard Output Types In Sd? Order Confirmation, Delivery Note , Invoice. 122. Can You Make Texts Mandatory For A Customer Master Or A Sales Document? Yes. 123. Where Do You Assign Text Determination Procedures For Customer Master Records And For Documents? Account Group, Item Category. 124. What Is The Scope Of Check During Availability Check And What Do You Specify With It? i. Stocks ii. Safety stock, stock in transfer, stock in quality inspection, blocked stock. iii. Inward and outward movements iv. purchase orders, purchase requisitions, planned orders, production orders, reservations, dependent reservations, dependent requirements, sales requirements, delivery requirements. 125. What Is A Partner Type? Give Some Example? The partner type is an indicator which informs you of the type of partner, for example, partner type customer "KU". 126. What Does The Billing Type Control? i. The document number ii. The partner functions allowed at header level iii. The partner functions allowed at item level iv. The billing type that can be used to cancel the billing document v. The transfer status of the billing document: vi. Transferred to financial accounting vii. blocked from transfer viii. not transferred ix. The procedure for account assignment in Financial Accounting x. The allowed output for a business transaction and the procedure for output. 127. Do You Have Schedule Lines In The Delivery? No. 128. What Do You Control At Item Category Level In The Delivery? Relevance for Picking, Determination of Picking Location, Minimum Delivery Quantity. 129. At Which Levels In The Sales Document Can You Have Different Incompletion Procedures? Sales Document Type, Item Category, Schedule Line Category, Partner Functions, Sales Activities. 130. Once The System Determined The Item Level Schedule Line Category Automatically In The Sales Order, Can You Still Change It Manually? Yes. 131. Explain How The System Can Automatically Determine The Item Category In The Sales Order? Sales document type + Higher level Item category + Item category group + Item Usage. 132. Name At Least Five Features That You Can Control For The Schedule Line Category? Relevance for delivery, Availability check, Transfer of Requirements, Goods Movement, Purchasing and Incompletion log. 133. Name At Least Five Features That You Can Control For The Item Category? Pricing, Relevance for delivery, Relevance for billing, Incompletion log, Partner, Tax. 134. Name At Least Three Features Controlled By The Sales Document Type? Pricing, Taxes , Delivery. 135. Why Do You Have Different Sales Document Types In R/3? For business transactions. 136. Give An Example Of When You Would Specify That A Sales Document Can Only Be Created Referencing Another Sales Document? Returns can only be created referencing sales order. 137. Name At Least Five Features That You Can Control For The Sale Document Type? Text, Partner, Pricing, Taxes, Output, Delivery. 138. What Are The Two Influence Factors For Field Selection For Customer Master Record Maintenance? Account Group, Transactions. 139. What Does The Account Group Of The Customer Control? Number assignment, Screen Layout. 140. Can You Share Master Data Between Several Sales Areas? Yes. 141. What Two Ways Of Number Assignment For Documents Or Master Data Do You Know? Internal & External. 142. Explain Shortly What The Sap Business Navigator Is And How It Can Be Used In An Implementation? i. The Reference Model integrated into the R/3 System. ii. The various ways into Business Navigator (the views) help you call just the models and list displays you need in the R/3 Reference Model. iii. You can access other R/3 System components directly from the models. iv. for example: data models, transactions, documentation. 143. What Is The Procedure Model And How Can It Be Used In An Implementation? i. The R/3 Procedure Model is both the methodological framework for the implementation and upgrade processes and a powerful tool that supports you at every stage of the implementation process. ii. The R/3 Procedure Model provides iii. all the fundamental understanding you need at the cross-application level for implementing R/3 application components successfully, iv. a hierarchically-structured plan of the activities, v. a correct sequence of the activities vi. the link to the system setting activities 144. What Is The Procedure Model And How Can It Be Used In An Implementation? i. The R/3 Procedure Model is both the methodological framework for the implementation and upgrade processes and a powerful tool that supports you at every stage of the implementation process. ii. The R/3 Procedure Model provides. iii. all the fundamental understanding you need at the cross-application level for implementing R/3 application components successfully. iv. a hierarchically-structured plan of the activities. v. a correct sequence of the activities. vi. the link to the system setting activities. 145. Is It Possible To Link R/3 Projects To The Ms Project? Yes. 146. If You Deactivate The Module Co In The Company Img Could You Still Select The Co Module In A Project You Create? No. 147. Once You Have Activated The Company Img Can You Still Add Modules/areas? Yes. 148. Explain What The Img Is? Tool for configuring the SAP System to meet customer requirements. Also referred to as the 'Implementation Guide'. 149. Can You Partially Settle Rebate Accruals? Yes. 150. Can You Name The Two Types Of Billing Plans In The Standard R/3 System? Periodic billing, Milestone billing. 151. What Is A Product Hierarchy And For What Can It Be Used? i. Alphanumeric character string for grouping materials by combining various characteristics. The product hierarchy is used for evaluation and pricing purposes. ii. In Product Cost Controlling (CO-PC) : Structure consisting of the plant, product group, product, and order. Used for the interactive analysis of the product costs for each level of the hierarchy. 152. What Is Rebate Processing? A rebate is a special discount which is paid retroactively to a customer. This discount is based on the customer's sales volume over a specified time period. 153. There Is An Interface Between Sd And Fi In Invoicing . Can You Think Of Another Interface Between Sd And Fi? Credit check, Tax calculation, Cost estimate. 154. What Are The Two Possible Ways To Transfer Sales Data To Business Areas? Where Do You Specify Which Way You Want To Use? i. sales area (if the accounts are to be posted according to sales). ii. plant/division (if the accounts are to be posted according to products). 155. Can One Business Area Be Valid For Several Company Codes? Yes. 156. Can You Split Deliveries Into Several Invoices? When Would You Do That? Yes . If the data from the related reference documents differs in the header fields of the billing document. The system will automatically split the invoice. 157. Can You Combine Orders Into One Invoice? Yes. 158. Can You Combine Deliveries Into One Invoice? When Would You Do That? Yes. If the header data and header partners for specified delivery or sales order are identical and if requirements for splitting do not apply. 159. In R/3 How Can You Make Sure That Invoices For A Customer Are Always Created At A Specific Date? Billing Schedule. 160. When You Create A Credit Memo Request Do You Always Have To Refer To A Sales Order Or Any Other Previous Document? Only sales order. 161. From Which Documents Can You Create A Proforma Invoice? Based on sales order or delivery. 162. When You Create An Invoice Can You Carry Out Pricing Again? Yes. 163. Can You Delete An Invoice? No. You can cancel it and create cancellation document. 164. Do You Have To Create A Condition Record For Taxes In The Sd Application? Yes. 165. Where Can You Specify That A Condition Is Mandatory? In Pricing Procedure. 166. If You Create A New Condition Type-do You Also Have To Create A New Condition Table And A New Access Sequence? Yes. 167. Can You Copy Condition Records? If Yes, Are There Any Restrictions? Yes. Field specific. 168. Name The Influencing Factors For Pricing Procedure Determination During Sales Order Entry? Customer, Sales Document Type and Sales Area. 169. If You Want To Make Sure That Conditions Records Apply For A Certain Time Period Only What Would You Have To Do? Validity Period to be specified in condition record. 170. What Is A Group Condition? Condition which can be used to determine a scale value based on more than one item in a document. The system groups the items using either the condition key for the appropriate condition record or a separately defined condition key. 171. Can You Track Cumulative Values In R/3? If Yes, It Could Be Based On What? Yes. Maximum Value, Maximum Orders, Maximum Quantity. 172. For What Do You Use Customer Hierarchies? Pricing , Rebate. 173. Give An Example For A Statistical Condition? VPRS. 174. What Does The Condition Exclusion Indicator Do For You? The system can exclude conditions so that they are not taken into account during pricing in sales documents. 175. Which Data Do You Have To Maintain In Sd So That The System Can Determine The Sales Taxes In The Sales Order Automatically? Tax rate with or without Jurisdiction. 176. Does The Pricing Procedure Apply For The Pricing Data At Item Level Or For The Pricing Data At Header Level? Both. 177. You Want To List All Condition Records For A Certain Material Or A Certain Sales Organization. How Would You Do That? By creating Pricing Reports. 178. If Somebody Adds Price Elements Manually In The Sales Order Or If Somebody Changes A Discount The System Determined Automatically, Do You Have A Possibility To See That In The Sales Order? Yes. 179. Where Would You Specify That A Condition Type Is A Discount Or A Surcharge? In Condition Type Details Screen. 180. You Can Create Scales For Prices And Discounts. Name The Four Possible Scale Basis In R/3? Value, Quantity, Gross weight, Net weight, Volume. 181. Name At Least Three Different Condition Types In Pricing? Price, Discounts, Freight. PROO, K007, KF00. 182. Which Partner Function Is Relevant When It Comes To Tax Calculation In The Sales Order? Ship-to party. 183. Is Sd The Only Module That Uses Condition Technique? No. 184. Please Explain Graphically The Relationship Between The Four Basic Elements In Condition Techniques? Procedures à Condition Types à Access Sequence à Condition Tables à Condition Records. 185. What Are The Four Basic Elements Of Condition Technique? Condition Types, Condition Tables, Access Sequences, Pricing Procedures. 186. Name Three Areas/processes Which Use Condition Technique In Sd? Material determination, Output determination, Account determination. 187. Can The Delivery Quantity And The Picking Quantity In The Delivery Document Be -different? Yes. 188. Is It Possible To Work Without Specifying A Pick/pack Or Loading Time For A Shipping Point? Yes. 189. Define A Shipping Unit? Combination of materials which are packed together in a shipping material at a particular time. Shipping units contain items which in turn are made up of shipping units or delivery items. 190. What Is A Transfer Order And For What Would You Use It? i. Document used to support every stock movement in the warehouse. ii. It contains all the important movement data, such as the material to be transferred, the quantity to be transferred, the storage bins involved, and so on. 191. How Does The System Automatically Determine The Picking Storage Location In The Delivery? i. Storage Condition. ii. Shipping Point. iii. Plant. 192. Can You Change The Shipping Point Determined In The Sales Order Manually? Yes. 193. Explain The Relationship Between Sales Organizations And Plants? Many to Many. 194. Explain The Relationship Between Sales Organizations, Plants And Company Codes? Many to Many to One. 195. Which Organizational Element Is Central In Shipping? Give A Definition Of It? Shipping Point: Organizational unit at a fixed location that carries out shipping activities. A shipping point could, for example, be a company's mail department or a plant's rail depot. Each delivery is processed by only one shipping point. 196. Can A Sales Organization Sell From A Plant Belonging To A Different Company Code? Yes. 197. How Many Shipping Points Can You Assign To A Plant? Many. 198. Would You Have Different Customer Numbers If Your Customer Was Serviced By More Than One Company Code? No. 199. Would You Have Different Customer Numbers If Your Customer Was Serviced By More Than One Sales Organization? No. 200. A Material Is Produced In Plant Boston, Plant Dallas And In Plant Chicago. How Many Different Material Master Number Do You Need? Only one. 201. Is It Possible To Have Different Data For The Same Customer For Different Sales Areas? Yes. 202. Give Examples Of General Data In The Customer Master Record ? Address, Control data, Marketing, Payment transactions, Contact person, Unloading points. 203. Do You Find Any Sales Prices In The Material Master Record? Yes. 204. Can You Assign A Material To More Than One Division? No. 205. Which Are The Two Partner Functions In Sd That Have To Be Maintained In Fi Too ? sold-to party, payer. 206. If You Want To Create Language Specific Sales Texts For Your Material Master, Would You Have To Create A New Material Master Record? No. 207. What Is A Material Type And Which Material Types Do You Know? Raw materials, semi- finished products, finished products, trading goods, operating supplies. 208. Give Examples Of Objects You Can Classify In R/3? Variant Pricing of configurable products. Objects can be customers, products, condition types. 209. What Are The Two Possible Ways Of Control For The Cost Of A Material In The Material Master Record? Standard Price, Moving Average Price. 210. What Is The Difference Between An Inquiry And Quotation ? i. Inquiry: Request made to a vendor for a quotation for required materials or services. ii. No availability check is done for inquiry. iii. Quotation: Offer from a vendor to a purchasing organization regarding the supply of materials or performance of services subject to predefined terms and conditions. iv. A quotation consists of a number of items, in which the total quantity and delivery date of an offered material or service are specified. v. The total quantity can be subdivided into several partial quantities with different delivery dates in the lines of a delivery schedule. 211. Can You Have Alternative Items In A Sales Order? Yes. 212. If You Reference An Inquiry When Creating A Quotation, Would The Inquiry Be Updated? Yes. 213. Can You Copy One Inquiry To Many Quotations ? No. 214. Can You Copy Several Previous Documents Into One Sales Order? Yes. 215. Do You Always Have To Copy The Entire Quantities At Item Level When You Reference A Previous Document? No. 216. Can You Make Sure That Business Data In A Sales Order Is Only Possible To Maintain At Header Level? Yes. 217. From Where Is The Delivering Plant Transferred Into The Sales Order? Customer Master, Material Master. 218. Which Partner Function Is Relevant For The Delivering Plant? The Sold-to-party , Bill-to-party, Payer, Carrier Or The Ship- To- Party? Ship-to party. 219. Can You Manually Change The Delivering Plant In The Sales Order Once It Was Defaulted From The Master Data? Yes. 220. Can You Have Different Incompletion Logs For Different Item Categories? Schedule Line Categories? Yes. 221. If A Document Is Incomplete Can You Still Save The Document? Yes. 222. Can You Change Addresses Of Partners Manually In The Sales Document? Yes. 223. Name Several Input Tools That Make Order Entry Faster And Give A Definition Of Them? Customer Material Information, Product Proposal , Referencing Documents. 224. In Which Business Environment Would You Use Only The Single-line Entry Screen To Create And Save The Order? Telephone Sales, Simple Business. 225. If You Do Not Specify The Delivering Plant In The Sales Order, What Could The System Then Not Do? Delivery Scheduling. 226. For What Would You Use The Fast Change Function In Sales Entry? Alternate Plants, Delivery or Billing Blocks 227. Name Two Ways To Control That Customers Can Receive Only Certain Materials? Material Listing, Exclusion. 228. Name The Influencing Factors For Determining The Item Category In The Sales Document? Sales Document type, Item Category Group, Higher Level Item, Item Usage. 229. Name The Influencing Factors For Determining The Scehdule Line Category In The Sales Document? Item Category, MRP Type. 230. Can The Sales Document Type Be Determined By The System? No. 231. In R/3, Can You Automatically Substitute One Product For Another? What Would You Have To Create? Yes. Product Selection / Material Determination. 232. Give A Definition Of Replenishment Lead Time? Total time for the in-house production or for the external procurement of a product. In in-house production the replenishment lead time is determined to cover all BOM levels. 233. Name At Least Three Item Categories? i. Standard Items : AFN, AGN, TAN. ii. Free of charge Items: AFNN, AGNN, TANN. iii. Non-stock Items : AFX, AGX, TAX. iv. Text Items : AFTX, AGTX, TATX. 234. Can You Change Existing Standard Item Categories? Yes. 235. Can You Create New Sales Order Types? Yes. 236. If You Run Out Of Stock In A Specific Plant Can You Check If There Are Quantities Available In Other Plants? Yes. 237. Can You Maintain Texts For A Specific Customer And Store Them In The System? If Yes, Where? Yes. Customer Material Information. 238. When The System Checks Availability Which Scheduling Would It Use First? Backward Scheduling. 239. Name The Three Delivery Possibilities When There Is Not Enough Stock Available? One Time Delivery, Complete Delivery, Partial Deliveries. 240. On Sales Order, When The System Confirms 20 Pieces To Be Available At A Certain Date, Would These 20 Pieces Still Be Available For Other New Sales Order Coming In Later? No. 241. What Is A Delivery Group And Why Would You Use It? The complete delivery and delivery group functions enable you to combine some or all of the items in a sales order so that they are delivered to the customer together. The system determines automatically the latest delivery date possible for the delivery group and adjusts the schedule lines accordingly. Corresponding requirements for material requirements planning (MRP) are changed or re-determined. 242. What Is Backorder Processing? i. The backorder processing functions enable you to list relevant sales documents for specific materials and process them from the point of view of availability. You can assign available to promise (ATP) stock to outstanding order quantities. In addition, you can withdraw already confirmed quantities and reassign them to different items. ii. Backorder processing is only available for materials with individual requirements. 243. Can You Link Items In A Sales Order? If Yes, When Would You Do That? Yes. Promotional Items. 244. What Are The Two Techniques In Delivery Scheduling? Backward Scheduling & Forward Scheduling. 245. Credit Limit Checks Is An Example Of A Very Close Link Between Which Two Sap Modules? SD & FI. 246. Name The Several Steps In Consignment Processing? Consignment fill-up, Consignment issue, Consignment pick-up, Consignment return. 247. Can You Control That An End User Cannot Copy A Quote Of Customer A To A Sales Order For Customer B? If Yes, Where? Yes. By customizing Copying Control for header data. 248. How Many Documents Do You Create When You Release, Deliver And Invoice The First Order From A Contract? Three : Sales order, Delivery note, Invoice. 249. What Types Of Output Can You Have In Sales? Printer, Telex, Fax, Mail, EDI. 250. Where Would You Specify Which Data Should Be Copied (at Header, Item And Schedule Line Level)when You Copy From One Document To Another One? Customizing Copy Control. 251. What Is The Difference Between The Availability Check 01 (daily Requirement) And 02 (individual Requirement) In Material Master? 01 and 02 are the checking group. Availability check is carried out with the help of these checking group and checking rule. Checking group 01 and 02 are maintained on the material master. 01 - Individual requirement -For this system generates transfers the requirement for each order to the MRP .So that MM can either produce or procure. 02- Collective requirement.-In this all the requirements in a day or in a week are processed at a time. System stores all request and passes on to the MRP in MRP run. In this system performance is high however you can not do the backorder processing whereas in other you can do. 252. What Is Purpose Of Maintaining Common Distribution Channels And Common Divisions Common Distribution Channel and Common Division are maintained so that if any master data like customer or material maintained with respect to one distribution channel can be used in other DCh. It prevents the multiplication of master records. Eg: A customer is created for say sales area 1000/20/00 then the same customer can be used in sales area 1000/30/00 if we maintain 20 as common distribution channel. Hence no need for extending the customers...the same for materials also. 253. How To And Where To Maintain Copy Controls? Check for yourself in IMG (Sales Document types and Delivery Document Types) 254. What And Where Types Of Copy Controls We Change? Copy Control: is basically meant so that Data is copied from preceding Document to subsequent one. What subsequent Document is required is to some extent determined by Customer Requirements as well as Document Types. e.g. In general case of Standard Order, it will be Copy Control (Order to Delivery) from OR to LF . 255. What Is The Purpose Of Shipping Point Determination Not Menu Path? So that Shipping Point is determined automatically once the settings for the same are done. 256. What Type Of Reports Generally A Support Consultant Maintain And Report? Depends on Customer requirements. 257. What Do You Do Really In Pricing Determination, And What Are The Main Deifferences Between Pricing Procedures? Pricing is determined by combination of Sales Organization, Distribution Channel, Division, Customer Pricing Procedure and Document Pricing Procedure. 258. What Is Meant By Transfer Of Data From Legacy Code To Sap Legacy Code ? It should be legacy data to SAP. What it means is you want to transfer all the customer and materials and all other information from Older (legacy system) to new SAP system. You can do it using many tools, most noticeably MDMs. 259. What Are The Five Imp Fields To Be Maintained In Account Determination? Account Determination: Sales View, Sales Organization, Distribution Chanel, Chart of Accounts, Account Assignment Group for Customer and Material and Account Keys. 260. What Are Some Of The Material Master Data Tables? MARA - Material highest level data MBEW - Data referring to accounting MVKE - Data referring to sales MARC - Data at the plant level WLK1 - Listing information MARD - Data storage locations 261. How Would You Find All The Tables In Sap? SE16 (or) SE11. 262. How Would You Find Which Table Is Being Used In A Particular Field? Bring your cursor to the field in a transaction and press F1 and then technical info. 263. What Are Some Of The Tables In Sap Sd? VBAK - Order header VBAP - Order Item VBEP - Order schedule line LIKP - Delivery Header LIPS - Delivery Item VBPA - Partners VBFA - Document flow 264. What Is A Customer Group? Give Me Some Examples. Customer group is 2 digit numbers that is configured within IMG and allows logical grouping of customers. For example you may want to group International customers, Domestic customers or military customers separately. 265. What Do You Mean By Drop Shipment? A drop shipment is based on an order from a customer to a Distributor. The distributor initiates the shipment by Informing the wholesaler. 266. Can You Have Specific Customer Material Information Entered In Sap? Yes, VD51 is the transaction or inside VA02 also you can add customer material information records. 267. What Is A Base Unit Of Measure In Material Master? This is a unit of measure used as a basis for all the transactions, all movements of quantities will be converted to that base unit of measure which is specific to an article. 268. What Is The Use Of Sales Area? Sales area is the geographical aspect of that particular Company code, from there we can generate the reports. 269. What Are Some Of The Views In A Material Master? Basic data, additional basic data, Accounting views, MRP views, Purchasing views, Storage views, forecasting views, sales views and in IS Retail there is also a Listing view and POS view. 270. How Do You Extend A Material, Which Transaction? MM01 271. How Does The Rule Mala Decide The Picking Location? SHIPPING POINT PLANT STORAGE CONDITION STORAGE LOCATION 272. What Is The Transaction Code For Creating A Material/article In Sap? MM41 for creating article in SAP IS Retail and MM01 in SAP Industry solution for creating a material. 273. What Is The Purpose Of Material Master Data? Master data responsible for representing all information related to products or services that a company produces or sell. 274. Is It Possible To Do Delivery Without Shipping Point? No. Shipping point is the destination of the goods, how we can ship the goods. It is like mailing letter without TO address. 275. Explain About Smart Forms? Smart form - it is a form. Basically it is using in output. 276. How Sales Document Is Structured? Header responsible for all the documents Item for materials Schedule line for quantity and delivery. 277. In Sales Order How System Does Picks Up Plant? We assign particular material master to particular Plant it picks up from there. 278. Without Delivery Can You Do Billing? Without delivery invoice is not possible. 279. Could You Explain About Sales Deals? Company Has Launched a new product, for a that material you Want to have a promotion for this you will creating a sales deal and assign it to sales promotion and you maintain condition groups. 280. What Is The Use Of Pricing Date In Condition Type? It shows date of calculation of pricing procedure for that Particular document. So that in future you can see the date On which pricing calculated for that particular doc. 281. What Does A/c Group Control Customer? Account Group is like a control Parameter for the customer master. Most of the fields in the customer master are controlled Using Field Selection, which is internal function of Account Group. 282. Can You Explain About Higher-level Item Category And Item Usage? Sales Document Type (OR) + Item Category Group (NORM) + Item Usage (FREE) + Higher Level Item Category (TAN) + Item Category of Free Goods (TANN) 283. Why Do You Need Project Img? IMG is required for the purpose of customizing and Configuration. There is no role of functional consultant Without it. 284. How We Assigned Sales Organization To Delivering Plant? Path: SPRO-IMG-Enterprise Structure-Assignment-SD-Assign Plant to Sales Organization/Dist.Channel T.Code: OVX6 285. What Are Some Of The Examples Of Global Settings? Currencies, countries etc. This data is application independent. 286. How To Extend Material And Customer To Other Sales Areas? Sales area is a combination of s.org, dist channel & Division. Division is a logical grouping of products. So u Cannot extend material to other sales areas. But u can Extend customer to other sales areas through common Distribution channel & division. 287. How Can We Process Out Bound Deliveries Without Shipping Point? Shipping point is a mandatory Organizational unit for outbound delivery process. 288. Why Do I Use Condition Indexes? How Do You Activate Them? Condition Index is used to search all the conditions Records for a particular condition type (eg PR00). We Activate condition index in the customizing screen of the Condition type. 289. Is It Possible To Release Change Request, Without Releasing Task? Once we can release the task, then only we can release the Change/customizing request. 290. Product Attributes Means? Product attributes is nothing but the features of product. 291. Can One Have Multiple Packing For Delivery? Yes, we can have multiple packing for a single delivery. 292. Explain Edi And Its Usage? Edi - it helps for data transfer. That means from sap or non sap to sap. 293. To Extend Material One Plants To Another Plant What Are The Configuration You Done In Your Project? We have to create in new plant as we have followed for First plant, where as in first plant system will give Internal number but for second plant we have to mention Material number. 294. What Is The Client Specific Data? Give Two Examples Of Client Specific Data? master data transction data. 295. How To Stop Pgi? In credit management we stop the pgi by through credit limit or through customization. 296. How Sap Support To The Client To Know The Customer Requirements? Support to client: implementation method. Correction method. 297. Can We Assign Multi Distribution Channel To A Single Customer In Sap Sd Sales Process. If Yes Then How? While creating customer we need to assign the customer to The respective sales area, we should copy from previous Sales area in XD01 through reference. 298. What Is The Difference Among Sales Deal Promotion Price, Price Agreement? Sales deal promotion-- specific product for a period of time price will be less than MRP. Price agreement-- means an agreement between customer and Vendor for a specific product or with a specific price mentioned in their agreement. 299. Can You Give Me Some Tables In Sap Sd For Customer Master? Some of the tables are KNVV, RF02D, KNA1 etc. 300. Who Is A Payer In The Customer Master Record? Payer is the individual or company who will settle the invoices for products or services sold. 301. Who Defines The Account Groups? Normally these are defined by the finance team. 302. How Does The Sap System Knows Which Fields To Turn On And Off When You Create A Customer Master Record? Using the account group which is assigned to the customer. 303. What Is The Difference Between Inbound And Outbound Delivery? Out bound delivery--- is Post goods Issue (PGI) In bound delivery--- is Post Goods Received (PGR) PGI will come under Sales Area PGR will come under MM Module PGI decreases physical stock and PGR increases 304. From Which Tcode Can I View Customer Wise Back Order (open Order?) V_RA. 305. What Are Inter Company Customers? These customers represent the sales customers within the same client but between different company codes. 306. What Is Retro Active Billing? Who Is Will Create This? Retro active billing means rebate process. When ever the customer reaches the target quantity or volume in specified time Peried.we issues the credit memo for the customer. 307. What Are The Basic Elements Of A Customer Master Record? The sold to party, the ship to party, bill to party, and the payer record. 308. Where Do You Assign Movement Type? We assign movement type in schedule line category. 309. Can Anyone Explain About Purchase Order & Purchase Requisition? In third party if a customer places an order if the Material is not available in our company if the order Document is saved automatically purchase is raised.withthe help Of this purchase group is created Purchase requisition--- For production of material raw Materials are required, but materials are not available in Stocks, then the production dept. request send to the MM manage simply request him to arrange Materials for production of finished materials. 310. What Is The Transaction Code For Creating A Customer In Sap Sd? VD01, VA01, XD01. 311. What Is A Shipping Point And Loading Points In Sap Sd? Shipping points are the points from where deliveries are initiated. One shipping point can be assigned to more than one store or plant. A Loading point is just a subdivision of a shipping point and manually entered into the header data of the delivery. 312. In One Sales Order There Are Two Materials Can Maintain Two Different Pricing Procedures For These Materials? No, you cannot maintain 2 separate pricing procedure for same Material in single order. But u can change the price Manually by selecting the material and then the conditions Tab....u can also see the changed status as manually later. 313. What Is A Sales Office In Sap Sd? A sales office is a geographically located unit of a sales organization. 314. What Is A Division In Sap Sd? A division is a product group that can be defined for a wide range of products or services. Customer specific arrangements can also be made in a division. A sales organization can have many divisions. 315. List The Basic Steps For Sd Configuration. Enterprise structure Partner determination Master data Business process customization Pricing Output determination 316. How You Can Extent The Rebate? What Are The Procedures, What Is The Customisation For It? The transaction coed for extend rebate is "VB D" in that You should fill the field like recipient and rebate Agreement. 317. What Is Accounting Group? Accounting group is simply the classification of customers, Whether its sp, sh, bp, or py, and it also controls the Fields in cmr. 318. What Are The Differences Between Invoice And Billing Document? Billing Doc is the broad view Invoice (F2) is one of type of billing doc. 319. What Is Pricing? How Will It Affects The Billing Procedure? Pricing has the basic price of the item. It also has the Discounts, Taxes, Rebates, & also the Cost of the item. 320. What Is Act Key? And How It Works? Normally How Many Pricing Procedures Do In Implementation? Account key determine a correct G/L account to be posted the data corresponding G/L accounts. You need to assign a G/L account to account key that is assigned to a condition type in a pricing procedure. 321. Tell Me Account Key And Accruals? A/c keys determine a correct g/l a/c to be posted the data corresponding g/l a/c. All customer Rebate accounts are posted in accruals. 322. What Is The Docu.flow? Inquiry ----->Quotation----->Sales Order----->Delivery ----->Transfer Order----->Post Goods Issue ----->Billing ----->Accounting. 323. What Is The Transfer Order? Transfer order is basically picking order where u pick the Material from storage and loading area or picking area. 324. What Are The Five Imp Fields To Be Maintained In Account Determination? Sales org., A/c keys, condition type, a/c group for the customer, a/c group for the material. 325. What Is Meant By Transfer Of Data From Legacy Code To Sap? Before installation of SAP, Data maintained by Company is called Legacy Data. At the time of installation, it is required to transfer Data from Legacy to SAP like Masters (Material/Customer, etc). 326. What Do You Do Really In Pricing Determination, And What Are The Main Differences Between One Pricing Procedure Determination To The Others, Which Data Control These Differences? Pricing prosier determination-----Pricing is determined by combination of Sales Organization, Distribution Channel, Division, Customer Pricing Procedure and Document Pricing Procedure. Pricing prosier----Pricing prosier is the simple prosier of pricing .It identify different- 2 step, counter of condition. 327. What Is Meant By Transfer Of Data From Legacy Code To Sap Legacy Code? It should be legacy data to SAP. What it means is you want to transfer all customer and materials and all other information from Older (legacy system) to new SAP system. You can do it using many tools, most noticeably MDMs. 328. What And Where Types Of Copy Controls We Change? Copy Control--- is basically meant so that Data is copied from preceding Document to subsequent one. In general case of Standard Order, it will be Copy Control (Order to Delivery) from OR to LF 329. What Do You Do Really In Pricing Determination And What Are The Main Differences Between Pricing Procedures? Pricing is determined by combination of Sales Organisation, Distribution Channel, Division, Customer Pricing Procedure and Document Pricing Procedure. 330. How To And Where To Maintain Copy Controls? Sales Document types and Delivery Document Types. 331. What Is Purpose Of Maintaining Common Distribution Channels And Common Division? Common Distribution Channel and Common Division are maintained so that if any master data like customer or material maintained with respect to one distribution channel can be used in other DCh. It prevents the multiplication of master record. 332. Can You Deference Between Contract & Scheduling Agreement? Scheduling Agreement--- is the agreement between consumer and Company having fixed delivery dates and fixed quantity. Contract--- is the agreement between company and consumer for certain period of time. 333. What Is Pmin? PMIN is a Condition type to define minimum prices. It can be Control minimum prices below which a material should not be sold to the customer. 334. Explain About Dunning Procedure? Dunning procedure is used in credit management if Customer does pay back his amount, then using this dunning Procedure Company sends reminders to customer then after That company has to take legal action. 335. What Is Client Requirement In Schedule Line Category? Schedule line category is nothing but delivery date and Delivery quantity is must. 336. In How Many Places We Can Block The Sales Document? Sales document can be blocked at three places depending on The customer risk categories, they are: Sales order level (high risk customer). Delivery level (medium risk customer). Goods issue level (low risk customer). 337. What Is The Difference Between Reconciliation A/c And Normal Posting A/c? Manual entries can be posted in the normal G/L account and the same is not possible in the Reconciliation account, as these are automatically updated. 338. Can You Make Texts Mandatory For A Customer Master Or A Sales Document? Yes. 339. Where Do You Assign Text Determination Procedures For Customer Master Records And For Documents? Account Group, Item Category. 340. What Happens If We Check 'exclusive' Indication In Access Sequence, And What Happens If We Do Not Check? Basically access sequence finds the exact condition record in cond.table by search statuary with the help of exclusive indication. 341. What Is A Partner Type? Give Some Example? The partner type is an indicator which informs you of the type of partner, for example, partner type customer "KU". 342. Can Anyone Tell About Types Of Free Goods? In paste: 25% extra more -it’s inclusive When you buy paste you get a brush free, it’s exclusive. 343. What Are The 14 Steps In The Pricing Procedure? Step, Counter, Condition type, Description, Form, To, Manual, Mandatory Statistics, Print Subtotal, Requirement, Alt condition type, Alt condition base value, Act key and, Accruals. 344. Difference Between Plant And Storage Location? A plant is a manufacturing unit and it is a place where Materials have to be kept. Storage location is a place in plant, where in materials Has to be stored. 345. When I Creating The Sales Order The System Show Error "no Customer Master Record Exist For Sold To Party". How To Rectify It? Because that customer is not create that sales area. 346. When U Creating The Delivery, The System Shows Like "no Zero Ea Material Available". How To Rectify? The system is giving error because material is not available in plant so check the material mb1c. 347. Do U Have Any Link For Customer Master And Credit Management? We can maintain individual customer credit limit in customer Master. In t.code (fd32).we can define the total credit limit For sales area and credit limit for individual sales area. 348. What Should You Do If The Ship To Party & All Other Partner Functions Are Not Being Determined At The Time Of Sales Order Creation? The Net Price Is Zero. Can Any Body Tell What The Problem Would Be? Because we not maintain the base price of material. So that we use vk11 for base price. 349. Explain About Sales Order Cycle? INQUIRY ----->QUOATATION ---- >ORDER ----->DELIVERY BILLING. 350. What Is The Relation Between Sales Organization And Company Codes? Many to One. 351. I Have Created The Outbound Delivery And Have Done Pgi & Made Factory Invoice But When I Try To Make The Final Invoice , It Is Not Allowing To Make The Final Invoice's System Is Showing The Error "delivery Type Zinc Cannot Be Invoiced With Billing Type F2 ". Just go to sales Document Type (VOV8), Check for Sales Order - > Delivery Type -> Billing type assignment and correct accordingly. 352. Can One Create Delivery With Reference To The Project? Yes. 353. What Is The Difference Between Cash Sales And Rush Order? In rush order if a customer places an order delivery will Take place immediately billing will be letter. In cash sale if a customer places an order delivery and Billing will be on the same day. 354. How System Picks Up Pricing While Doing Billing? From Sales Order. 355. Diff Between Business Sale Cycle Nd Customer Sale Cycles? Contract is the business sale cycle and schedule line is the cust.sale cycle. 356. How Do We Control The Credit Checks With Specific To Distribution Channel And Division? By assigning credit control area to specific sales area. 357. What Is Erp And Sap? And Why Implementing Sap In An Organization? Explain The Special Features Of Sap Over Other Erps? ERP---- ERP is a package with the techniques and concept for the integrated management of business as a whole enterprise. ERP is software designed for basic process of company software. SAP----sap is an enterprise information and management package in word wide use of this package it makes possible to track and manage. Is an ERP package. SAP can be fit it any language. Using of sap means there is no need to maintain SAP is able to integrate all functional organizational units. SAP are usually use because SAP there are no. of technical reasons no. of company are planning to implementation Sap highly configurable, secure data, minimum redundancy, maximum consistency. 358. Can U Give Some Master Data In Mm And Sd.? Master Data MM: Material Master, Info Records, Source List, Vendor Master. Master Data SD: Customer Master, Condition Records, Metrical Determination, Item Proposal. 359. Assigning Sales Organization- Distribution Channel- Plant (tvkwz) ? Plant is created by MM Consultant. IMG -> Enterprise Structure -> Assignment -> Sales and Distribution -> Assign sales organization - distribution channel - plant. 360. Can You Configure Two Diff Free Goods Items For One Single Item? Example- On Purchasing Of Item A U Wants To Give Item B & C Free .is It Possible? How? Yes , it is possible by the exclusive free goods. 361. Assigning Shipping Point To Plant (tvswz)? This assignment ensures that goods from different Plant can be dispatched from different Shipping Points. IMG -> Enterprise Structure -> Assignment -> Logistics Execution -> Assign shipping point to plant. 362. Define, Copy, Delete, Check Plant (t001w)? Plant is created by MM Consultant. IMG -> Enterprise Structure -> Definition -> Logistics - General -> Define, copy, delete, check plant. 363. Can You Delete Order? You can delete the order but there should not be any transcations on the particular order. 364. Define Shipping Points (tvst)? Shipping Point is the Organizational element, which is responsible for shipping the Materials to the Customers. IMG -> Enterprise Structure -> Definition -> Logistics Execution -> Define, copy, delete, check shipping point. 365. Mwst? Pl Explains In Detail? MWST is Tax Condition Category which will be Assigned to Country IN. 366. Assign Sales Group To Sales Office (tvbvk)? you can assign as many sales groups as desired to the sales offices. Any one sales group can belong to several sales offices. IMG -> Enterprise Structure -> Assignment -> Sales and Distribution -> Assign sales group to sales office 367. What Makes Listing & Exclusion Work Differently Than Each Other? Listing--- only the materials which is applicable to the Customers. Exclusion--- The materials which is not applicable to the Customers. 368. Assign Sales Office To Sales Area (tvkbz)? IMG -> Enterprise Structure -> Assignment -> Sales and Distribution -> Assign sales Office to Sales Area. 369. Maintain Sales Office (tvbur)? you define the sales offices in your company. The definition of sales offices is optional. For each sales office, you can determine the printer for output based on the sales documents in different ways. IMG -> Enterprise Structure -> Definition -> Sales and Distribution -> Maintain Sales Office. 370. How To Do Customization Of Rebate Processing In Sap Sd? activate rebate in customer master data selling material should be activated in MM data sales org. should be activated billing doc should be activated 371. Setting Up Sales Area (tvta)? All the sales are made from a particular sales Area. For creating a Sales Order Sales Area is compulsory. IMG ->Enterprise Structure -> Assignment -> Sales and Distribution -> Set up sales area. 372. Assigning Division To Sales Organization (tvkos)? IMG -> Enterprise Structure -> Assignment -> Sales and Distribution -> Assign division to sales organization. 373. Which Partner Function Realent For Credit Limit? Sold to party is relevant for credit limit. 374. Maintaining Division (tspa)? Division is a way of grouping materials, products, or services. IMG -> Enterprise Structure -> Definition -> Logistics - General -> Define, copy, delete, check division. 375. Name Three Areas/processes Which Use Condition Technique In Sd? Material determination, pricing determination, Output determination, Account determination. 376. Assigning Distribution Channel To Sales Organization (tvkov)? This assignment ensures, a Sales Organization can supply Materials to Customers through this Distribution Channel. IMG -> Enterprise Structure -> Assignment -> Sales and Distribution > Assign distribution channel to sales organization. 377. Explain What A Condition Table And An Access Sequence Are And The Relationship Between Them? Condition table defines the combination of fields (the key) that identifies an individual condition record. Access sequence is a search strategy that the system uses to find valid data for a particular condition type. 378. Maintaining Distribution Channel (tvtw)? Distribution Channel is the way, in which Products or Services reach Customers. IMG -> Enterprise Structure -> Definition -> Sales and Distribution -> Define, copy, delete, check distribution channel. 379. What Is A Condition Type? What Are The Two Main Groups Of Condition Types? Condition type is a representation in the system of your daily pricing activities. Fixed Amount & Percentage. 380. Assigning Sales Organization To Company Code (tvko~bukrs)? This assignment ensures all the sales made through this Sales Organization are accounted for in the assigned Company Code (Company Code is created by FI Consultant). IMG -> Enterprise Structure -> Assignment -> Sales and Distribution -> Assign Sales Organization to Company Code. 381. Which Partner Function Is Relevant When It Comes To Tax Calculation In The Sales Order? Ship*to party. 382. Maintaining Sales Organization (tvko)? Sales Organization is an organizational unit responsible for the sale of certain products or services. IMG -> Enterprise Structure -> Definition -> Sales and Distribution -> Define, copy, delete, check Sales organization. 383. Where Would You Specify That A Condition Type Is A Discount Or A Surcharge? In Condition Type Details Screen. 384. Define Credit Control Area (t014)? Company is created by FI Consultant. The credit control area is an organizational unit that specifies and checks a credit limit for customers. A credit control area can include one or more company codes. It is not possible to assign a company code to more than one control area. Within a credit control area, the credit limits must be specified in the same currency. IMG -> Enterprise Structure -> Definition -> Financial Accounting-> Define Credit Control Area. 385. You Want To List All Condition Records For A Certain Material Or A Certain Sales Organization. How Would You Do That? By creating pricing Reports. 386. Edit, Copy, Delete, Check Company Code (t001)? Company is created by FI Consultant. The company code is an organizational unit used in accounting. It is used to structure the business organization from a financial accounting perspective. IMG -> Enterprise Structure -> Definition -> Financial Accounting -> Define, copy, delete, check Company Code. 387. Can You Explain What A Statistical Condition Is? Give An Example For A Statistical Condition? VPRS. 388. For What Do You Use Customer Hierarchies? Pricing, Rebate. 389. Name The Influencing Factors For Pricing Procedure Determination During Sales Order Entry? Customer, Sales Document Type and Sales Area. 390. Can You Copy Condition Records? If Yes, Are There Any Restrictions? Yes. Field specific. 391. Tax Jurisdiction Processing Is A Close Link Between Which Two Modules? FI & SD. 392. What Is The Difference Between Erb And Eru Account Keys? Erb--- is the sales deduction account key used for rebate processing. Eru--- is the accruals key used in pricing For rebate processing it is used for difference in sales Revenues. 393. From Which Documents Can You Create A Performa Invoice? Sales order or delivery. 394. What Is The Difference Between Pgi Cancellation And Returns Order? PGI cancellation--- is done before the transportation of goods. Return order--- means it’s already transported reached customer in requested date. 395. When You Create A Credit Memo Request Do You Always Have To Refer To A Sales Order Or Any Other Previous Document? Only sales order. 396. What Are Incoterms? Where Do We Fix Them? Where Do You Find In Regular Process? Incomers or international comm. terms and u find in CMR - Sales area Data - billing Tab. 397. Can One Business Area Be Valid For Several Company Codes? Yes. 398. Explain The Business Flow Of An Implementation Project? Project preparation -------->Business blue prints, Realization-------->Support. 399. There Is An Interface Between Sd And Fi In Invoicing. Can You Think Of Another Interface Between Sd And Fi? Credit check, Tax calculation, and Cost estimate. 400. An Order Item With Different Shipping Point Copied Into The Sales Deliveries? Yes,but delivery split will be resulted. 401. How To Close The Backorders? Through availability check and TOR you can close the back Order process. 402. Tell Process Of Ticket Flow From Client Side To You? Normally tickets will come to the helpdesk which were sent By End-users thru client specific internal mail id, then we will take up the tickets ans then access the production Server according to the ticket. 403. What Is The Team Size? Duration Of The Project.? Hardly the team of the SD will be 4 to 5 and entire team of the project will be around 20-24 (all modules like fi/co, SD, mm, pp, hr, QM, pm). If its big project, it will be around 40. Team size means the employees who you are working on sap r/3 implementation. For the project completion it will take around 8-10 months to get into golive. After that, post implementation for 3 months. After that supporting it depends as project time line for every company is different. 404. What Is Sap R/3? A third generation set of highly integrated software modules that performs common business function based on multinational leading practice. Takes care of any enterprise In R/3 system all the three servers like presentation; application server and database server are located at different system. 405. What Are Wf And Its Importance? Business Work Flow: Tool for automatic control and execution of cross-application processes. This involves coordinating the persons involved, the work steps required, and the data, which needs to be processed (business objects). The main advantage is reduction in throughput times and the costs involved in managing business processes. Transparency and quality are enhanced by its use. 406. What Two Ways Of Number Assignment For Documents Or Master Data Do You Know? Explain The Difference Between Them? Internal & External. 407. What Is Ides? International Demonstration and Education System. A sample application provided for faster learning and implementation. 408. Can You Share Master Data Between Several Sales Areas? Yes. 409. Why Do You Usually Choose To Implement Sap? There are number of technical reasons numbers of companies are planning to implement SAP. It’s highly configurable, highly secure data handling, min data redundancy, max data consistency; you can capitalize on economics of sales like purchasing, tight integration-cross function. 410. What Does The Account Group Of The Customer Control? Number assignment, Screen Layout. 411. What Is Sap? SAP is the name of the company founded in 1972 under the German name (Systems, Applications, and Products in Data Processing) is the leading ERP (Enterprise Resource Planning) software package. 412. Different Types Of Erp? SAP, BAAN, JD Edwards, Oracle Financials, Siebel, PeopleSoft. Among all the ERP’s most of the companies implemented or trying to implement SAP because of number of advantages aver other ERP packages. 413. What Are The Two Influence Factors For Field Selection For Customer Master Record Maintenance? Account Group, Transactions. 414. Can Bw Run Without A Sap R/3 Implementation? Certainly. You can run BW without R/3 implementation. You can use pre-defined business content in BW using your non-SAP data. Here you simply need to map the transfer structures associated with BW data sources (Info Cubes, ODS tables) to the inbound data files or use 3rd part tool to connect your flat files and other data sources and load data in BW. Several third party ETL products such as Acta, Informatics, Data Stage and others will have been certified to load data in BW. 415. Name At Least Five Features That You Can Control For The Sale Document Type? Text, Partner, Pricing, Taxes, Output, Delivery. 416. Why Do You Want To Leave Your Current Employer? State how you are looking for a new challenge, more responsibility, experience and a change of environment. 417. What Are Datasets? The sequential file is called datasets. They are used for file handling in SAP. 418. What Are The Different Types Of Source System? SAP R/3 Source Systems, SAP BW, Flat Files and External Systems. 419. Name At Least Five Features That You Can Control For The Schedule Line Category? Relevance for delivery, Availability check, Transfer of Requirements, Goods Movement, Purchasing and Incompletion log. 420. Can One Specify User Specific Dates In Delivery Documents? we can sepcify the dates but with respect to avilability,check and schdule line combination. 421. Explain How The System Can Automatically Determine The Item Category In The Sales Order? Sales document type + Higher level Item category + Item category group + Item Usage. 422. Explain How The System Can Automatically Determine The Schedule Line Category In The Sales Order? Item category + MRP type. 423. Once The System Determined The Item Level Schedule Line Category Automatically In The Sales Order, Can You Still Change It Manually? Yes. 424. At Which Levels In The Sales Document Can You Have Different Incompletion Procedures? Sales Document Type, Item Category, Schedule Line Category, Partner Functions, Sales Activities. 425. What Is The Item Category Group? Where Do You Maintain It? Item category group is define the features of item and it represent the’s the function and it how will work in sales process. 426. You Want To Set Up A New Condition Type. Name The Necessary Steps You Have To Do If You Want The System To Determine The New Condition Type Automatically During Sales Order Entry? Use this vk11 transaction code. 427. When You Think Of The Five Possible Elements Necessary For The Account Determining During Posting Of A Sales Invoice - Where From Does The System Get The Information? Chart of a/c group, customer a/c group, material a/c group, sales org., and a/c keys. 428. Name The Necessary Steps To Setup A Route? Define the transportation connection points Define the modes of transport and shipping type 429. During Route Determination The System Also Needs To Know The Departure Zone Of The Goods To Be Shipped. How Does This Information Come Into The Sales Order? Customer Master. 430. What Do You Mean By Condition Index, How You Configured In Your Project? Condition index means keep the all condition records what Ever you maintained for particular condition type. If you want process this you should be active index in Condition type. 431. If I Want To Configure The Partner Determinations For Sales Manager And General Manager If The Sales Manager Is Bossiness Partner In Sales Order He Should Only Give 5% Discount And General Manager Should Can Give 10% Discount How Could I Configure This? By using ASAP Methodology we can implement according to There requirement. 432. Can You Specify When Output Should Be Created? If Yes, What Possibilities Do You Have? Yes. Print out, Mail, EDI, Fax. 433. What Does The Material Type Control? Finished goods. 434. What Is The Purpose Of The Request Number Which Is Generated When U Save A Customization? That is used to move your non-cross client customizations. 435. What Makes A Customer A Sold-to? How Can You Check? Customer is regarded as sold to party when he is acting as Person who is buying goods, products can be shipped, he is Billed, and he is Paying for the invoices generated. You can clarify your doubt while creating a Sold to party, Ship to party, Payer, by using respective account groups, Ex :Payer will not be having a Shipping Tab in Sales area Data. 436. What Is The Difference Between General Item Category Group And Item Category Group? Item category group--- is used for SD to configure the item Category and how this item behaves in sales order. General Item category group--- determines the category of the Item like, trading goods, service goods, finished goods Etc... 437. In Which Scenario Order And Billing Has Different Pricing Procedure? When we use rebate. 438. Is It Possible To Block A Material For Sales Order? Is It Possible For The Blocking Customers In The Same? Way...if So.how? Yes u have to go to the MM02 & there go to sales Org 1 tab .Page there u maintain cross distribution chain after that This material is block for sales. If block a material for Plant then u should maintain in MM02 basic data 1 Cross Distribution plant & also if u block a material for Procurement then u should maintain in cross distribution Purchasing data. 439. What Is The Use Of Update Groups In Credit Management? Update group check the how many orders are open &order Reference, how many orders are open in delivery and delivery Reference, how many orders are open in billing. 440. What Is Cr (change Request) In Support Project? The Change Request is that request when you do some thing New in customizing or configuration in the system. Example: When ever working with pricing condition record, the Current Support project has only 3 Key combinations, but user Wants to have one more key combination or need to change the Combination means, it is consider as a change request. 441. Explain How Diff Between Item And Schedule Line Sales Document? ITEM:-In this the system shows all the details of the Item, like material, pricing, or it may be free good, ship-to- Party, batch, etc. SCHEDULE LINE:-It is about delivery date and delivery Quantity. 442. How Many Shipping Points Can You Assign To A Sales Organization? None. 443. If You Generate Bill More Than Credit Limit Then What Will Happen? How can you go for billing? System will block at order level Or delivery level only. 444. Can We Rename Movement Types? We cannot rename movement types. 445. What Do You Assign Distribution Channels And Divisions? Sales Organizations. 446. How We Maintain One Material At A Time For Two Company Codes? We have to extend the material from one plant to another Plant. 447. What Are The Highest Organizational Units In Sd, Mm.pp, Fi, Co? A: SD: Sales Organizations. MM: Plant PP: Plant FI: Company Code CO: Controlling Area 448. Basic Elements Of Condition Technique? There are 5 basic elements of condition technique: Creating condition table(s), Access Sequence, Condition Type, Procedure, Placing the Condition type in the Procedure. 449. Is It Possible To Automate Output Processing? Yes, we can use output determination procedure to automate Output processing. This is based on Condition technique. We Have to assign the output determination procedure. 450. What Is A Credit Control Area? What Relationship Exists Between Credit Control Areas And Company Codes? Credit control area. Organizational unit in an organization checks credit limits for customers. A credit control area can include one or more company codes. 451. What Are The Steps In Consignment Processing? Company fills the goods at customer site, Still it is the property of company, is called as Consignment fill up, (CF) .When the customer consumes the material company issues the Invoice is called as consignment issue (CI) .If the customer finds that he got any material defective he Returns is called as consignment return (CR) .Which is not sold by the consumer, the company will pick This stock consignment Pick up (CP). 452. Name The Three Internal Organizational Elements Within A Sales Organization And Briefly Explain Their Function. Sales Office--- Geographical aspects of the organization in business development and sales are defined using the term sales office. A sales office can be considered as a subsidiary. Sales offices are assigned to sales areas. If you enter a sales order for a sales office within a certain sales area, the sales office must be assigned to that area. Sales Group--- The staff of a sales office may be subdivided into sales groups. For example, sales groups can be defined for individual divisions. Salespersons--- Individual personnel master records are used to manage data about salespersons. You can assign a sales person to a sales group in the personnel master record. 453. What Are The Techniques In Delivery Scheduling? Backward scheduling & forward Scheduling. Backward scdg-- System calculates Requested delivery date. Forward Scheduling--- If the material is not avl. On that date the system calculates the earliest possible delivery date based on the material avl. Date. 454. What Is The Difference Between Condition Type Ek01 And Ek02? EK01 is a calculated cost EK02 is estimated cost 455. Which Three Organizational Elements Make Up A Sales Area And Briefly Explain Their Function? Sales organization: --- An organizational unit that sells and distributes products, negotiates terms of sale, and is responsible for these transactions. Distribution channel: --- Channel through which salable materials or services reach customers. Typical distribution channels include wholesale, retail and direct sales. You can assign a distribution channel to one or more sales organizations. Division: --- Product groups can be defined for a wide-ranging spectrum of products. For every division you can make customer-specific agreements on, for example, partial deliveries, pricing and terms of payment. Within a division you can carry out statistical analyses or set up separate marketing. 456. Is It Possible To Create New Sales Order Types? Yes it’s possible to create a new sales order type but Generally it is advised to copy standard one and proceed as It is connected in so many places 457. Is It Possible To Change Existing Standard Item Categories? Yes, its is possible in SAP but u never do this method Because u have a lot of problems because suddenly u need for Standard functionality in this case u couldn't remember. 458. What Are The Delivery Possibilities, When There Is Not Enough Stock Available? When there not enough stock system will give the next Delivery date by checking the availability of that quantity of Material. 459. What Is Delivery Group And What Is Its Purpose? Delivery group is grouping of all sub items to be delivery at one time. Mostly used in bill of materials. It is more required in bom when u specify the delivery of diff material at the same time which comes under a header item. let’s say if u wants to deliver the monitor of pc today, cpu tomorrow etc how it would be? to avoid that we specify the delivery group so that all the sub items under header items are delivered togther. 460. How Can We Delete The Sales Orders? How Can Invoices Be Cancelled Or Deleted? You can very well delete sales order using transaction VA02, but with a constraint that no subsequent document is created against it. You cannot delete an Invoice. You can only cancel it with (VF11) if the relevant accounting document is not been generated. Ask your FI guy to reverse the accounting doc. Only after the accounting doc is reversed and/or deleted, you can cancel your invoice. You also need to check if any TAX documents are generated with your Invoice. You need to reverse/delete those documents also. 461. Relation Ship Between Sales Organization And Plants? Many too many. 462. What Is Partner Type? Example It? One type of Partner-- who supplies goods is called VENDOR. One type of Partner-- who Purchases from you is called CUSTOMER. One type of Partner-- who works for you is called Employee or Personnel. One type of Partner-- who helps in improving your business is Called CONTACT PERSON. 463. We Can Define Our Own Exchange Rate Types And Use Them Instead Of The Defaulted Types, 'm', 'b' And 'g'. How Can We Overwrite Default Types In Sd? Exchange rate gets copied from the customer master record. Exchange rate types are to be maintained for the customer in the sales screen. 464. Item Category Group? Where You Maintain It? For standard material item category group is Norm For Bom material item category group is Erla/lumf For Third party material item category group is BANS. 465. What Are The Influencing Factors For Account Determination For Invoice? Chart of a/c AAG of customer AAG of material A/c key 466. What Is Condition Type? Tell Me The Main Groups? A condition type is one which describes the what the purpose Of that condition types are used to define how the particular condition is going to perform. 467. What Is Pricing Procedure? Pricing procedure is a systematic and sequential use of Condition types to arrive at a right value of the product. 468. Explain The Steps To Setup A Route? A Route is part of shipping which is determined Departure Zone Shipping conditions Transportation Group Transportation zone 469. Diff. Between Inquiry And Quotation? Inquiry--- is just a simple document showing the interest Your customer on products and services. Quotation--- is a legal agreement you offer to you Customer. You agree to the customer that you will charge a Particular amount. 470. What Is Material Type Control? Material type control is similar to account group control For customer master. The material type and the industry Are working helps to control the data Material. 471. Can We Get Deleted Sales Order Numbers? Firstly u cannot delete the sales orders once they are saved You can only cancel the sale order or reject the sale Order, in that case you can get the rejected sales order Numbers. 472. What Is Difference Between The Header Level Condition And Item Level Condition? Header level conditions are for the whole document, while Item level condition is for the particular item only. 473. What Is Main Purpose Of Maintaining The Master Data? Coz master data is responsible for all the records like Sales order, delivery and billing and as well as in Customer payments. It is mandatory. 474. Tell Me Some Different Partner Functions? Sold to party --- The person who places the order. (SP). Ship to Party --- The person who receives the goods. (SH). Bill to party ---The person who receives the Bills (BP). Payer ---The person who pays the payment (PY). 475. On What Tax Is Calculated On Base Price Or Net Price? We can calculate tax on both (net price/gross price) as per Requirement because options are available. 476. Bill Of Material Means? Bills of material means combining a group of materials in Two products. In which included header level item and item level item. When header level item is relevant for pricing then item level item is not, when item level item is relevant for pricing then header level item is not. 477. What Is The Difference Between Vk11 And Vk31? Tcode vk11 used for individual Maintenance of condition record And Tcode vk31 used for mass Maintenance of condition record. 478. Bom Used In Which Modules? MM, PP, SD, CRM. 479. What Is Backorder Processing Or Partial Delivery? While doing sales order the material is not available some Times at that time we give the delivery date if the goods available earlier than delivery date can go back with sales order and deliver the goods before first delivery date. This process called as Backorder processing. 480. How Can We Assign One Credit Limit To Two Customers? Create a customer group and then assign it to CCA. 481. What Is The Access Sequence For Header Conditions? Access sequence is a search strategy which finds the right Condition record from the condition table. 482. What Is Difference Between The Item Proposal And Dynamic Proposal? Item proposal--- in which we will manual selects the items from the list of items for that particular customer, It contains material and quantity what the customer regularly purchase. Next time if the customer comes and places an order system copies material and quantity from item proposal. Dynamic proposal--- sale order is raised items are automatically determined in that order. 483. What Does U Mean By Accruals? All customer Rebate accounts are posted in accruals. 484. What Is Material Determination? Can You Do Two Materials For One Material? Material Determination is nothing but an alt. material to the original material. With 2 materials we cannot swap. 485. Where Do You Maintain Factory Calendar? Factory calendar is maintain in plant Factory calendar is used to fix up the working dates and Holidays. 486. How Is Credit Control Determined? Credit control is determined in the combination COMPANY CODE + CUSTOMER RISK CATEGORY + CREDIT GROUP = CREDIT CONTROL AREA. One Company code can be assigned too many credit control areas And multiple company codes are not assigned to one credit Control area. 487. What Does U Mean By Exclusive In Access Sequence? Exclusive is a track point for access sequence if the Exclusive indicator is set, if a valid condition is found by the system in a cond. table, it will stop Searching and will not go to next cond.table. 488. What Are The Parameters That U Can See In Fd32? you can see address of the customer, Central data, status and payment history of the customer. 489. Difference Between Discount And Rebate? Rebate--- is an agreement between Sales Org. rebates is a special discount which occasionally gives. Special discount paid to a customer once he achieves sales volume in a given period of time. Discount--- is a general disc. Normally applicapable in the business transactions in a regular base. Discount is the one which all the customers can get. 490. What Is The Difference Between General Item Category And Item Category Group In Mm01 Sales Org 2? Item category: It is an indicator that determines the characteristics of a Document item. Item category group: It define the characteristics of the material and what the role in sales order. 491. Relationship Between Company Code And Sales Organization? ONE to MANY. 492. How You Change Sold-to-party Into Ship-to-party? You can’t change sold to party to ship to party. But you can Change ship to party to sold to party because sold to party will be having all the partner Functions. 493. If One Company Can Maintain One Customer Number For Different Sales Areas Is It Possible With Out Any Changes? No it is not possible because one company can have only use one customer number. Customer Number is a unique feature in SAP. 494. How Is Pricing Procedure Determined? Sales Area, Customer pricing procedure & Document pricing Procedure. 495. How Is Item Category Determined? Sales doc type, Item category group, item usage, higher level item and item category all these purpose by default item category come. 496. What Is Condition Exclusion? Condition exclusion groups contain group of discount Condition types from this customer will not receive all Discounts but receives one best discount of all (ov32). 497. How To Configure Partial Deliveries? Check the box in customer master or in delivery type (LF) Check partial delivery indicator. 498. What Is Condition Supplement? Condition supplement: If company wants to give discount irrespective of any Combination till certain period condition supplement will Use. System by default proposes the discount along with Base price in the pricing procedure 499. What Is The Purpose To Differentiate The Sales Document Type? If there are different business process, if you want to In that case you can configure different document types (For ex. domestic sales you can create order type DOR & for export sales you can configure EOR). You can also assign different number range to different Document types for different business process. 500. Third Party Sale? A third-party sales process generally happens when you Can’t make delivery to the customer due to insufficient Stock or some other reasons. In that situation normally you Will go for third party sales process. 501. If We Have Three Plants & One Material No. Then How To Extend Single Material To All Three Plants? Use T_Code MM01 and enter the same material with Organization and plant as you require. The message will Appear "Material has been extended". 502. How Revenue Account Is Determined? Application Chart of accounts Sales Org Condition type Account assignment group from customer Account assignment group from material Account key 503. If We Have Three Sales Areas & Single Customer. How To Extend One Customer To Three Sales Areas? You will go to xd01 transaction code and you will use Reference data to copy another sales area. 504. What Is Transfer Order? Transfer order is an internal document to move goods from Storage to picking area. 505. What Is An Mrp Type? MRP is Material Resource planning which is based on Transfer of Requirements while processing the Sale Order. 506. Fields In Material Master? Basicdata1, basic data2, sales org1, sales org2, sales general plant data, sales text, mrp, purchasing data and accounting. 507. Types Of Billing? order related billing delivery related billing Performa invoice for order Performa invoice for delivery credit memo debit memo cash sale 508. What Is The Diff. Between Billing And Invoice? Invoice is whenever we can send to the goods send to the customer because to check the Goods. Billing document is a total goods bill. 509. How Is Access Seq. Controlled? Access Sequence is controlled by the accesses. It can also be Controlled by requirements, but requirements only determine. 510. How Is Step And Counter Differentiated? Step--- Number is used to specify the sequential order for Condition types. Counter--- is used when two or more Condition Types required The same Step Number. 511. What Is Line Item? Line item is a row where all the details of particular item whenever you get the all information of particular item then double click on the row. 512. What Is Use Of Customer Group? Customer group is represented the different-2 customer statically point and it define the customer pricing and discount. 513. Where Is Shipping Conditions Stored? In material master data, and shipping determination. 514. How Is Plant Determined? Plant is determined by material and shipping point determination. 515. How Can We Supers The Field I.e. Sales Office And Sales Group In Va01 Create Order Initial Screen? you goes for sales area data and in that you can Supers, optional, and also mandatory, you can done which Element u wants like sales office. Sales group and, etc. 516. Why Does U Maintain Sales Office? A Sales office establishes contact between the firm and the Regional market. It represents the business different areas. 517. How Is Storage Location Determined? It is determined by Plant + Storage condition + Shipping Point. 518. How Is Shipping Point Determined? Shipping point will be determined based on the shipping Conditions, loading group and delivery plant. 519. In Third Party How Sales Order Changes To Purchase Req. Automatically? In a third party in schedule category we have a field Called purchasing requisition. Scheduling category is cs purchase req is automatically generate and we want generate with transaction code me51 to create purchase requirements. 520. Which Data Is Updated When You Create A Billing Document? Financial document is going to generated . Billing due list up dates . Credit management up dates. 521. List The System Modules That Are Included In The Financial Application Component? The following SYSTEM modules are included in the financial application component: FI — Financial Accounting. CO— Controlling. EC— Enterprise Controlling. IM— Investment Management. PS— Project System. 522. List The System Modules That Are Included In The Human Resource Application (human Capital Management) Component? The following SYSTEM modules are included in the human resource application component: PA — Personnel Administration. PT— Personnel Time Management. PY— Payroll. 523. List The System Modules That Are Included In The Logistic Application Component? The following SYSTEM modules are included in the logistic application component: SO__ Sales and Distribution. MM__ Materials Management. PP__ Production Planning and Control. LE__Logistics Execution. QM__Quality Management. CS__Customer Service. 524. What Is The Purpose Of Transaction Code In System? The transaction code is the short path to reach to a specific screen in SYSTEM. Instead of going through the routine menu, you can enter the Transaction Code and then press "Enter", which would directly take you to the specific Transaction. For example, you can access the VA22 transaction code, to reach to the Change Quotation screen. However, the VA01 transaction code is used to create Sales document in SYSTEM. 525. What Is Meant By Match Code In System? The comparison key that helps you to find the key of a specific database record depending on the field value entered in the record is known as match code. On the basis of the match code, the System then displays a list of records from which you can select the appropriate one. 526. Explain The Three Main Areas Of Customer Master Data? Customer master is a part of the SD module and forms the basis for customer-related transactions. It is divided into three areas: General Data — It is used for the maintenance of general customer details such as name, address, phone/fax nos. and so on. Sales Area Data — It is used for Sales related data maintenance. Company Code data — It used for accounts related data maintenance. 527. What Is The Purpose Of Implementation Guide (img Menu) In The System? The Implementation Guide (IMG Menu) is used to collectively group the areas that must be configured & customized and form a basic structure of an organization in the System to run. 528. How Will You Maintain A Company Code In The System? To maintain a company code, navigate the following menu path: Customizing Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)-> Enterprise Structure->Definition -> Financial Accounting-> Edit, Copy, Delete, Check Company Code. 529. What Do You Mean By Enterprise Resource Planning (erp)? ERP is a way to integrate processes and data of an organization into a single system to provide Easy access and workflow in an organization. It refers to the way in which large organizations efficiently plan to use resources to their fullest. 530. List The Advantages Of Implementing An Erp System In An Organization? The advantages of implementing an ERP System in an organization are as follows: Various processes and workflow of an organization are integrated in a single System. Efficient utilization of resources in an organization. Ability to easily share organizational data across different departments. Improves efficiency and productivity levels. Lower costs. Better customer service. 531. Specify The Role Of The Sales And Distribution (sd) Module In An Erp System? The SD module is an application module for supply chain and operational performance management and provides support to customers. This module is integrated with the Material Management (MM) and Production Planning (PP) functional modules. It also allows organizations to input Sales price of products for customers and check for open orders. 532. What Are The Functions Of The R/3 System? The R/3 System provides the following functions: Integration — Provides a complete integration of the various data transfers, which, in turn, is helpful in making good-quality reports. Saving time with integration — Helps reduce the time needed to close the books of account. Automation of consolidation procedure — Saves time and cost as there is no need to manually enter all the documents. Customizing the software according to the needs — Provides the facility of creating new programs whenever the requirement arises. Cost effective audits — Provides the facility to the auditor for performing interactive analysis of special information. Easy to learn and use — Provides context-sensitive functions and extensive online documentation that is easy to understand and learn. Information System — Includes functions for creating reports. It provides information through exceptional and interactive reporting. International accounting — Allows parallel valuation approaches at all levels for external and internal accounting purposes by using different currencies. 533. What Is R/3 System Landscape? Landscape is an architecture of servers. The following are three different landscapes for SYSTEM: Development —In a development server, a technical/function person creates the programs or configures the System as per the company's requirement and sends it to the quality server. Quality— In this server, team members test the development/ configuration with various parameters. Then the final configuration is transported from Development Server to Production Server. Production — Through this server, the software is finally handed over to client for users. 534. What Are The Databases Supported By The System R/3 System? The SYSTEM R/3 System provides support for the following databases: ADABAS D. DB2/400. DB2/Common Server. DB2/MVS. Microsoft SQL Server. Oracle. Oracle Parallel Server. 535. What Is The Role Of An Abaper In The Sd Module? The ABAPer uses the data transfer tools, such as BDC/LSMW, to upload huge data, such as Customer master data. ABAPer writes the Z-Development and programmes as specified by the functional consultant as per the business requirements. 536. Who Can Be The Business Partner In The System? A business partner in the System can be: Customer. Vendor. Contact person. Employee recognized as Sales personnel. Customized as per the specific requirement of business. 537. Explain Badis And Its Relevance? In the R/3 System, System provides an enhancement technique called business add-ins (BADis). BADis are business transaction events helpful to bundle program, menu, and screen enhancements into a single business add-in. 538. What Is The Quick Viewer? The Quick Viewer is a very useful tool to create reports in System. It helps create reports without actually doing any programming. It is similar to an ABAP Query; however, it does not have all the capabilities that the ABAP query procedure has. 539. Which Kinds Of Servers Are Used To Define The Functioning Of A System? There are three servers in the SYSTEM application modules: Development server. Quality server. Production server. 540. What Is The Role Of Erp In A Business Environment? Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) is a software package, which is designed for the integrated management of the various business processes, such as inquiry, order placement, invoicing, and billing. It was initially designed for manufacturing industries to manage the core business areas, such as production and finance. With the popularity of the ERP package, its functionalities also extended to cover the complete business management. 541. Define Ides. IDES stands for International Demonstration and Education System and is an application used to quickly learn and implement ERP. 542. What Is R/3? R/3 means the three-tiered architecture used by the system. The three tiers are as follows: Database Server. Application Server. Presentation Server. 543. What Is A Division In The Sales And Distribution Module? A division refers to a product group that can be defined for a wide range of products or services. In Sales organization, there can be multiple divisions, which can also include customer-specific arrangements. 544. What Do You Mean By A Sales Office In The Sd Module? The geographically located unit of a Sales organization refers to a Sales office in the SD module. 545. What Do You Mean By A Shipping Point And Loading Point In The Sd Module? A shipping point refers to the point from where the deliveries of products are shipped and, one or more plants can have the same shipping point. However, the subdivision of a shipping point refers to a loading point, which is manually entered in the header data of a delivery as per customization. 546. What Do You Mean By The Terms Sales Office, Sales Groups, And Sales Employee In The Sd Module? The geographical groups created for an organization to structure a Sales team are known as Sales office. A Sales office is then assigned to one or more Sales Area. The staff of a Sales office is divided into Sales groups and then Sales employee is assigned to a Sales group. A Sales employee refers to the individual with personnel master records that are used to manage data of that Sales employee. 547. What Does The Prefixes Va, Vl, Vt, And Vf Of A Transaction Code Stand For? The definitions for the prefixes VA, VL, VT, and VF of a transaction code are as follows: VA —Sales Order. VL —Delivery. VT—Shipment. VF—Billing. 548. What Do The Suffixes 01, 02, And 03 Of A Transaction Code Represent? The suffixes 01, 02, and 03 of a transaction code represent the following: 01 —Create. 02—Change. 03—Display. 549. How Can You Configure The Sales Districts? Navigate the following menu path to configure the Sales district: Customizing Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)->Sales and Distribution->Master Data->Business Partners->Customers-> Sales->Define Sales Districts . 550. How Can You Assign A Shipping Point To A Plant? You can assign a shipping point to a plant by navigating the following menu path: Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)->Enterprise Structure-> Assignment->Logistics Execution->Assign Shipping Point to Plant. 551. Suppose That A New Info Structure Is Created And The Update Rules Are Activated For It. How Would You Then Transport It To Production Client? After the approval from the QA team the info structure can be transported in the time when no documents are created or posted. 552. How Is The Company Code Created? Perform the following steps to create the company code: Customization Implementation Guide(IMG Menu)->Enterprise Strurture->Definition->Financial Accounting->Define Company Code. 553. What Is The Relationship Between Sales Organizations And Company Codes? There exists many to one relationship between sales organizations and company codes. 554. Give The Name Of The Central Organizational Element Used In Purchasing? The central organizational element used in purchasing is called the Purchase Organization. 555. What Is The Relationship Between Sales Organizations Or Distribution Channel And Plants? There exists many to many relationship between sales organizations and plants. 556. What Is The Relationship Between Sales Organizations, Plants, And Company Codes? There exists many to many to one relationship between sales organizations, plants, and company codes. 557. Mention The Total Number Of The Shipping Points That Can Be Assigned To A Sales Organization? You do not assign shipping point to sales organization but assign it to plant only. 558. List The Transaction Codes Used To Create A Customer In The Sd Module. VD01 is the transaction code used to create a customer in the SD module. To create customer centrally, the T.Code is XD01 559. List The Basic Elements Of A Customer Master Record? The following are the basic elements of a customer master record: General Data. Company Code Data. Sales Area Data. 560. State Few Examples Of Common Material Types? The examples of common material types are as follows: DIEN— Service Item. HALS— Semi Finished Good. FERT—Finished Good. HAWA —Trading Item. NLAG—Non Inventoried. ROH— Raw Material. UNBW—Non-Valuated Item. 561. List Few Common Material Master Views? The following are few relevant material master views: Accounting 1, 2. Material Requirements Planning (MRP) 1, 2, 3. Purchasing. General Plant Data Storage 1, 2. Sales Org Data 1, 2. 562. How Can You Create Customer-material Info Records In The Sd Module? Navigate the following menu path to create Customer-Material Info Records: SYSTEM menu->Logistics->Sales and Distribution-> Master Data->Agreements->Customer Material Information | - Create. 563. Which Transaction Code And Movement Type Help In Adding Stock (from Legacy Stocks) For The Newly Created Material Type Into A Particular Plant After Creating A New Material Type In System? For such a situation, you can use transaction code MB1C and the movement type 561. 564. How Can You Define Your Own Hierarchy Types? Perform the following steps to define your own hierarchy type: Enter a one-character alphanumeric key and description. Enter a default partner function that is valid for the hierarchy type. Save the hierarchy type. 565. How Will You Create Material In Both Company Codes While Working On Inter Company Sales? While working on Inter Company Sales, the transaction code MM01 is used to create material related to the plant and Sales organization. For the other company code, this material can be extended if the server being used is common. 566. Which Factors Do You Need To Verify If The Tax Field In The Customer Master And Material Master Is Not Displayed? We need to make sure that for all the countries in the OVK1, we have defined a tax category. At the same time we also need to verify whether the tax classes are defined in OVK3 and OVK4. 567. List The Sequence Of Steps Performed By Underlying System To Determine Tax Number And Tax Classification? The underlying System uses the following sequence of steps to determine tax number and tax classification: If the payer has a VAT registration number and is identical to the sold-to party, the tax number and tax classification are copied from the payer. The tax number is copied on the basis of the "country of destination relevant for taxes." If step 1 does not apply and If the Ship-to Party has a VAT registration number and the Sold-to Party does not have the same, tax number and tax classification are copied from the Ship-to Party. If step 2 does not apply, then tax number and tax classification are copied from the Sold-to Party. 568. How Do You Define Tax Relevancy Of Master Records? The following menu path is navigated to define tax relevancy of the master record: Customizing Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)->Sales and Distribution->Basic Functions->Taxes->Define Tax Relevancy of Master Records->Material Taxes. 569. Imagine You Are Defining Tax Determination Rule For A Country Which Has Regional Tax Code Also. How Will You Define Regional Code? The following menu path is navigated to define regional tax codes: Customizing Implementation Guide (IMG Menu) -> Sales and Distribution -> Basic Functions -> Taxes -> Define Regional Codes -> Define County Code. 570. What Are The Transaction Codes That Are Used To Create And Change Customer Master? The following are certain T-codes used to create and manipulate Customer master: XD01 — Creates a customer. XD02— Changes a customer. XD03— Displays a customer. XD04— Changes customer changes centrally. XD05- Blocks a customer centrally. XD06— Marks a customer for deletion. XD07— Changes a customer Account Group. XD99— Maintains customer maintenance. XDN1 — Maintains number ranges for a customer. 571. Which Transaction Code Is Used To View Messages In System? The T.Code SE91 is used to view all messages in SYSTEM. 572. What Do You Understand By Transferring The Legacy Data To System? It means to transfer the legacy data to the newly installed & configured System. The data such as customer and material maintained by an organization before the installation of ERP System is known as the legacy data. You can use various tools to transfer the legacy data to the System, such as Batch Data Communication (BDC) and Legacy System Migration Workbench (LSMW) Programs. 573. Specify A Way To Block The Transaction For A Material Flagged For Deletion? You can block the transaction for a material flagged for deletion by customizing the Sales status feld in the Sales organization view of the material master. 574. List The Master Records From Which A Sales Order Receives The Organizational Data For A Specific Sales Area? The master records from which a Sales order receives the master data are as follows: Customer Master Record. Material Master Record. 575. Which Document Do You Use To Enter Shipping Conditions And How Are These Conditions Used In Determining The Shipping Point? The customer master record in the shipping screen and in the Sales document type is used to specify shipping conditions. The shipping conditions are used to decide the shipping point by copying them into the Sales document during order creation. 576. Suppose That You Have Blacklisted A Customer And Now Want To Block That Customer. How Can You Do That? A customer can be blocked by navigating the following menu path: SYSTEM Menu->Logistics->Sales and Distribution->Master Data->Business Partner->Customer-> Block . 577. Give The Menu Path To Define The Customer Hierarchy Types? The menu path to define the customer hierarchy types is: Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)->Sales and Distribution->Master Data ->Business Partners -> Customers -> Customer Hierarchy -> Define Hierarchy Types. 578. Give The Menu Path To Set The Partner Determination For Hierarchy Categories? The menu path to set the partner determination for hierarchy categories is: Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)->Sales and Distribution->Master Data->Business Partners-> Customers -> Customer Hierarchy->Set Partner Determination for Hierarchy Categories. 579. List The Items For Which You Can Define The Customer Hierarchy? The customer hierarchy can be defined for the following: Customer Master. Sales Document Header. Sales Document Item. Delivery. Shipment. Billing Header. Billing Item. Sales Activities (CAS). 580. Give The Menu Path To Assign A Sales Area To The Customer Hierarchy? The menu path to assign a Sales area to the Customer Hierarchy is: Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)->Customer Hierarchy-> Assign Sales Areas. 581. Give The Menu Path To Define The Product Hierarchies? The menu path to define the product hierarchies is: Implementation Guide (IMG Menu) -> Logistics-General -> Material Master -> Settings for Key Fields -> Data Relevant to Sales and Distribution -> Define Product Hierarchies . 582. Suppose That You Create A New Customer Account Group And The System Increments It By An Arbitrary Value. What Would You Do? The existing problem is called number range buffering. You need to perform the following step: Transaction code->SNUM->debitor-> change mode and change the numbers. 583. What Are The Customer Tables For Sd Module? The following are the Customer tables of the SYSTEM SD module: KNA1 — general data. KNB1 — customer master. KNB4— customer payment history. KNB5— customer master. KNBK— bank data. KNKA — credit management. KNKK— credit control area data. KNVI— sales area data. KNVP— Partner Function key. KNVD__output type. KNVS__customer master ship data. KLPA__customer vendor link. 584. List The Standard Output Types In The Sales And Distribution Module? The following are the standard output types in the SD module: Sales Order Confirmation —BAOO. Outbound Delivery Note —LDOO. Billing document —RDOO. Inquiry —AFOO. Quotation —ANOO. Contract —KO00. 585. What Do You Mean By User Exit? A user exit is implemented as a call to a function module. A customer's developer can access data objects and program components with the help of user exit. User Exits are used in case there are some specific needs which are not met by the Standard System. 586. What Is The Need Of User Exit? User Exits are used in case there are some specific needs which are not met by the Standard System. The purpose of user exit is to add a particular business-related functionality to standard SYSTEM. 587. What Do You Mean By Rebate Processing? Rebate refers to a specific discount given to a specific customer for Sales within a specific period of time. For example, a customer gets 2% discount on buying 500 kgs in a particular month and another customer gets 5% discount on buying 2000 kgs in the same month. 588. Imagine You Are Facing A Problem With Logistics Information System (lis) Due To Which After Client Copy, Your Test System Does Not Update Lis Info Structures. When You Save A Delivery, Sales Order, Or Billing Document, An Error Message "update Was Terminated" Is Displayed. How Can You Resolve Such A Problem? In such a problem, you should generate the Info structure and update group again for the client in which your Error Message is displayed. 589. What Do You Mean By Subtotals? Subtotals are generally used in pricing procedures. Subtotals are not tied to condition types. However, you can control the value entered in the fields by assigning subtotals within the pricing procedure. 590. How Can You Configure A Distribution Channel As A Default In The Transaction Field That Requires Distribution Channel Data? Perform the following steps to set a Distribution Channel as default for the transaction field that requires distribution channel data: Use the SU01 transaction code and enter the user ID. Go to the parameters tab page and add VTW parameter. Enter the default Distribution Channel in the parameter value. 591. Can You Perform An Availability Check On A Plant By Excluding A Storage Location? Yes, you can perform availability check in MM by excluding a storage location. 592. List The Transaction Codes With Respect To Rebate Agreement Processing? The following are the transaction codes in the context of rebate agreement processing: VBOl—Create. VB02 —Change. VB03 —Display. 593. What Do You Mean By Payment Terms? The terms of payment that a company offers to a customer based upon which a discount may be given for prompt payment or penalties can be charged in case of late payment made is known "Payment Terms". 594. What Is The Purpose Of Condition Indexes And How Can You Activate Them? The purpose of condition index is to search all records for a specific condition type. For example, you can search all the condition records for the condition type PR00 condition type. You can activate the condition index in the customizing screen for the condition Type PR00 by navigating the following menu path: SPRO->Sales & Distribution->Basic Functions->Pricing->Pricing Control->Deflne Condition Types-> Maintain Condition Types-> Enter PROO. 595. What Is The Role Of User Exit? The empty ABAP forms at particular points in the standard system, where the system allows customers to make enhancements to the way the code functions are called user exits. These are helpful tools to meet the specific business requirements. 596. Which Transaction Code Is Used To View Enhancements In The System? The transaction code SMOD can be used to view all the enhancements in the System. 597. Which Menu Path Should Be Followed To View All The Enhancements In The System? The following menu path can be navigated to view all the enhancements in the system: SYSTEM Menu ->Tools ->ABAP Workbench ->Utilities ->Enhancements -> Definition. 598. List User Exits For Partner Determination? The following are the user exits for partner determination: EXIT_SYSTEMLV09A_001. EXIT_SYSTEMLV09A_002. EXIT_SYSTEMLV09A_003. EXIT_SYSTEMLV09A_004. 599. Describe The Relevance Of Condition Technique In Sales And Distribution (sd)? The condition technique is the most important technique used for configuration in the Sales and Distribution module. It is used for different types of determinations in SD such as pricing, text determination, output determination, account Determination and material determination. It is called condition technique, because it provides a technique to select one from alternative choices, based on conditions, access sequence and condition tables. 600. Which Rounding Rules Are Available In The Course Of Maintaining Condition Types? The following three rounding rules are available while maintaining condition types: Commercial rounding — In case of commercial rounding, a value less than 5 is rounded down to nearest value while the values greater than 5 is rounded up to the nearest value. Always round up — In this case, regardless of the fact whether it is greater than or less than 5, the value is always rounded up to the nearest value. Always round down — In this case, regardless of the fact whether it is greater than or less than 5, the value us always rounded down to the nearest value. 601. How Do You Begin With Defining And Assigning Pricing Procedures? Navigate the following menu path to begin with defining and assigning pricing procedures: Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)->Sales and Distribution->Basic Functions->Pricing ->Pricing Control-> Define and Assign Pricing Procedures->Maintain Pricing Procedures. 602. List The Sequence Of Steps Used To Customize Pricing Procedure? Perform the following steps (in sequence) to customize Pricing Procedure: Put the required fields into the field catalog. Create the required condition tables. Create the required access sequence. Assign the condition tables to the access sequence. Create the condition types. Assign the access sequence to the condition types. Create the determination procedure, if necessary, and assign the condition types to it. Assign the determination procedure. Lastly, create the condition records. 603. Which Topics In Sd Have Impact On Pricing Procedure? The following topics in SD have impact on pricing procedure: Credit management. Payment terms. Cost of Sales. Rebate. 604. How Do You Activate Pricing For Item Category? We can activate pricing for item category by navigating the following menu path: Customizing Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)->Sales and Distribution->Basic Functions-> Pricing->Pricing Control-> Define Pricing by Item Category->Activate Pricing for Item Categories. 605. What Is The Relevance Of The Condition Exclusion Group? The condition exclusion group is a technique to ensure that the customer does not receive all types of discount; rather, the customer receives the best discount out of all given discount condition types. A best condition type is chosen from this "Condition Exclusion Group" based on your configuration. 606. How Do You Maintain Condition Exclusion Group? The following menu path is navigated to maintain condition exclusion group: Customizing Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)-> Sales and Distribution-> Basic Functions-> Pricing-> Condition Exclusions-> Condition Exclusion for Groups of Conditions->Define Condition Exclusion Groups. 607. What Do You Understand By Condition Supplement? The condition supplement is a group of conditions that is applied every time a condition is matched condition supplements will come for a condition if you have maintained pricing procedure under master data of the condition. 608. Explain The Tax Determination Process In Brief ? The tax determination is performed automatically by system. The tax determination is based on the structure of the organization, country, region or city of the plant delivering the products and the country of the receiving customer. It works in coordination with the tax relevancy indicators on the customer master record and material master record. Condition Technique is used for tax determination procedure. 609. How Do You Define Tax Determination Rules In Sd? The following menu path is navigated to define tax determination rules in SD: Customizing Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)->Sales and Distribution->Basic Functions->Taxes-> Define Tax Determination Rules. 610. How Do You Define Dependencies Of Revenue Account Determination? The following menu path is navigated to define dependencies of revenue account determination: Customizing Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)->Sales and Distribution->Basic Functions->Account Assignment/Costing-> Revenue Account Determination->Define Dependencies of Revenue Account Determination. 611. Where And When Are Requirements And Data Transfer Routines Available To Be Assigned Within The System? The general rule of availability of requirements and data transfer routines are as follows: Copying requirements are available to be assigned during transfer of data between documents and texts. Data transfer routines are available during copying between documents and texts. Requirements are available to be assigned to any access sequence as well prior to most functions. Formulae are available to be assigned during pricing determination. 612. List The Divisions Of Data Transfer Routines? The data transfer routines are categorized as: Orders. Deliveries. Billing documents. Sales activities. Shipping units. Texts. Text names. Shipments. 613. How Do You Define And Assign Account Keys In Sd? The following menu path is navigated to define and assign account keys: Customizing Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)->Sales and Distribution->Basic Functions->Account Assignment/Costing-> Revenue Account Determination->Define and Assign Account Keys. 614. How Do You Set Price Limits In Sd? Price limits can be set by navigating the following menu path: Customizing Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)->Sales and Distribution->Basic Functions-> Pricing->Pricing Control-> Define Condition Types-> Define Upper/Lower Limits for Conditions. 615. List The Transaction Codes Related To Condition Record Selection By Condition Type? The following are the transaction codes relating to condition record selection by condition type: —Creates a condition record. —Changes a condition record. —Displays a condition record. 616. What Is Access Sequence In Material Determination? The access sequence is a sequence of steps, which is used by the underlying system to obtain a condition record used for material determination. All the condition records have specific values assigned to it, which determine the order in which the system will read the access sequence. The system starts reading the access sequence with the lowest number step assigned to it and tries to process everything assigned to that particular access sequence through condition table & fields. The whole process is called 'condition technique'. 617. List The Steps For A Condition Technique? Perform the following steps to create a condition record: Place the required fields into the field catalog. Create condition table. Create access sequence. Assign condition table to the access sequence. Create the condition types. Assign the access sequence to the condition types. If needed, create the determination procedure and assign the condition types to it. Assign the determination procedure. Create the condition records. 618. How Do You Configure Transfer Of Requirements? Navigate the following menu path to configure transfer of requirement: Customizing Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)->Sales and Distribution->Basic Functions-> Availability Check and Transfer of Requirements->Transfer of Requirements. 619. Differentiate Individual And Collective Requirements? You can have a transfer of requirement either with an individual requirement or with collective requirements. In the individual transfer of requirements, a single transfer of demand occurs to the MRP for each schedule line. In case of individual transfer, the order quantity, the sales document number, the item number, and requirement class for each schedule line for which the demand has been created are shown by the requirement overview. The collective requirements are group of requirements created over a certain period of time such as on the daily basis, weekly or monthly and transferred to MRP. In this case, requirement overview does not show the single transaction wise descriptions of the requirements, rather it shows details of the group of requirements. The collective requirement is beneficial for the organizations that deal large volume of sales orders daily. 620. List The Key Transaction Codes Relating To Integration Between Logistics In Mm And Sd? The following are the key transactions related to integration between logistics in MM and SD: MMBE—Stock Overview. MD04— Stock / Requirement List. MB53— Plant Stock Availability. CO09—Availability Overview. MB52— Warehouse Stock. MB5M—Expiration Date List. MB5B— Stock for Positioning Date. MB5T—Stock in Transit. MBBS— Valuated Special Stock. MBLB— Stock with Subcontractor. 621. List A Menu Path To Access Stock Requirements Lists? The shortest and simplest menu path to access the stock requirement list is as follows: SYSTEM Menu->Logistics->Materials Management->Material Requirements Planning (MRP)-> MRP Evaluations-> Stock/ Requirements List . 622. What Are The Data On Which The Transfer Of Requirement Is Dependent? The transfer of requirement is dependent on following data: Requirements type. Requirements class. Checking group. Schedule line category. 623. How Do You Define Requirement Class? Customizing Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)->Sales and Distribution->Basic Functions-> Availabiiity Check and Transfer of Requirements->Transfer of Requirements->Define Requirements Classes. 624. What Is Requirement Type? After creation of the requirement classes we need to assign a requirement types to requirement class. A requirement class can be assigned with more than one requirement type, whereas a requirement type cannot be assigned to more than one requirement class. The requirement type can be changed during creation of sales order. 625. List The Search Strategy That The Underlying System Uses To Determine The Requirement Types? The following are the pre-defined search strategy that the underlying system uses to determine the requirement types: The system uses strategy group in the material master to find a requirement type. If the strategy group is not maintained, the system uses MRP group to determine a requirement type. If the MRP group is not defined the underlying system uses material type to determine a requirement type. If none of the above is found, the system follows a special rule and tries to determine a requirement type with the help of item category and MRP type. In case, when the MPR type is not defined the system uses only the item category to determine requirement type. 626. Define The Role Of Availability Check In Sd? Availability checks play an important role in the business sales process. It is a process to determine whether the delivery quantity requested by a customer can be made available for shipping on the delivery date. The availability check is performed at the plant level. 627. Define The Types Of Availability Checks? The following are the three types of availability checks: The availability check on the basis of Availability to Promise (ATP) quantities. The availability check against product allocation. The availability check based on the stand-alone Advanced Planner and Optimizer (APO). 628. What Are The Advantages Of Individual Requirements Over Summarized Requirement? The following are the advantages of individual requirement over summarized requirement: In case of individual requirement processing the back order processing, where as it is not possible in case of summarized requirement processing. In case of individual requirement processing you can access the order line items and schedule line in stock requirement list. 629. What Is The Disadvantage Of Individual Requirement Over Summarized Requirement? The disadvantage of individual requirement processing is in the terms of system performance. It affects the system performance as; each demand is placed immediately into the stock requirement list, which results in processing overhead and may affect the system performance. 630. How Do You Define/maintain Procedure For Each Schedule Line Category? Navigate the following menu path to define a procedure for each schedule line category: Customizing Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)->Sales and Distribution->Basic Functions-> Availability Check and Transfer of Requirements->Transfer of Requirements-> Define Procedure For Each Schedule Line Category. 631. Which Types Of Stock Are Available To Select From While Carrying Out The Availability Check? The following types of stocks are available to select from while carrying out availability check: Safety stock. Stock in transfer. Quality inspection stock. Restricted use stock. 632. What Is The Relevance Of The "product Allocation Found Changes To The Confirmation" Message? The "Product allocation found changes to the confirmation" is displayed during availability check on a line item. It means that the quantity allowed to a customer for a particular stock has exceeded its maximum limit. 633. What Is The Relevance Of The "no Feature Combination Exists..." Message? The "No feature combination exists.." message is related to the product allocation and availability check. This message indicates that no availability check will be carried out. This is because, the underlying system has attempted to do availability check according to product allocation, but errors are found in the setup of the process. 634. What Is Change Request? How Is It Done? The change request is the request which is intended to adopt a new change in the system. After the submission of the change request, the system pops up the change request and shows it in the pop up box. The request name is entered and the requested change is named accordingly. A new request number is generated automatically which consists of the client system name and system generated request number. 635. How Is A Request Released? To release a request, the transaction code associated with a request is entered in the system. The requests are stored under the modifiable or released heading. We need to select the modifiable option that contains the internal request number which needs to be released first and then the external request number. 636. What Is Automatic Posting In Fi? Automatic posting is the process of posting the accounts in the Finance module. The automatic posting configuration does the posting automatically in accounts as determined by the system. This process works as per your configuration as per your business requirements. 637. What Is Item Category And Item Group? The item category is the key field included in the sales cycle. It affects the sales data and schedule line category. Unlike the sales document type which is entered manually in the sales order, the item category is automatically determined by the system by using the determination rule. Whereas item category group examines how a material is processed in the sales document. When processing sales document, the system uses the item category group to examine the item category and suggests it in the respective document. Item category group is defined in the sales Org View 2 of Material Master Record. 638. What Are Outline Agreements? In a business process, the agreements are the type of relationship between the customers and the business. They are done upon the business entities such as material, price, and quantities. These contracts are represented in the system as outline agreements. 639. What Is Quantity Contract? The quantity contract is a contract that is prepared after the issue of quotation but before an order. Quantity contracts are used to limit the quantity of products which a customer can buy. It is a type of arrangement which is followed when the demand for a material is greater than the available supply and the business needs to ensure the product supply evenly among the branches. The standard sales document type for quantity contracts in the system is KM or CQ. 640. What Activities Are Exempted From The Quantity Contracts? The quantity contract does not create a requirement for stock within the plant. Therefore, there is not any assurance on the stock of product availability in the contract. There is not any binding from the organization to produce items or to purchase the items to satisfy the contract. It also have not any schedule lines or a validity date. Also the contract does not mention any specific delivery dates. 641. How A Quantity Contract Can Be Set Up? The quantity contract can be set up by performing the following step: Customizing Implementation Guide(IMG Menu)->Sales and Distribution-> Sales->Sales Documents->Sales Document Header -> Define Sales Document Types. 642. Which Are The Contracts That Appear In The Implementation Guide (img) Menu? The IMG (Customizing Implementation Guide ) contains the menus that are related to the following contracts: Master contracts. Value contracts and contract data related to contract profiles and cancellation. 643. Which Table Is Used To List The Partner Functions In A Delivery? The VPBA table is used to view the partner functions in a delivery. 644. How Is The Pricing Procedure Determined? How Can You Define The Right Pricing Procedure In The Sales Order? The pricing procedure is determined according to the various factors such as: sales area, customer master, and sales documents type. For determining the right pricing procedures in the sales order the transaction code OVKK is used. The rule for pricing procedure determination is as follows: Sales Area. Customer Pricing Procedure. Document Pricing Procedure. 645. How Would You Resolve The Problem "mswt Is Missing" Even When It Is Present In The Rvaa01 Procedure? In such case you need to maintain the condition record for this condition type by using the T.Code VKll.Here you maintain the condition record with a validity period. 646. How Is The Item Text Copied From Sales Order To Delivery? The item text is copied from sales order by performing the following step: IMG Menu -> Sales and Distribution->Basic Function->Text Control. 647. Why Text Determination Is Used In Sd? The text determination is used to transfer information from the material or the customer document to the order or to the Invoice document. 648. Why Is The Partner Determination Done In Sd? The partner determination is used to determine the partners, such as "Sold to Party" /Payer"/Ship to Party", "Bill to Party" and Sales Employee etc. for sales document. You maintain the Partners in the system as per your business requirements and configure a partner determination Procedure. This partner determination Procedure determines the partners in a sales document. The whole process goes as follows: Defining the Partner Functions Assigning the partner functions to the Account Group Defining the partner determination procedure Placing the required partner functions in the procedure Assigning the procedure to the Account Group 649. Why Is The Output Determination Used In Sd Module? The output determination is used to decide that which output mode is used to send an output notification to a partner (customer). Some of the output forms are- e-mail, electronic data exchange (EDI), and fax. 650. List The Five Important Fields That Need To Be Maintained During The Account Determination. The following fields need to be maintained during the account determination: Chart of Accounts. Sales Organization. Account Assignment Group for Customer. Account Assignment Group for Material. Account Keys. 651. What Do You Mean By The Copy Control? The copy control is meant to copy data from a preceding document to the succeeding document. The succeeding document is decided on the basis of the document type and the customer requirements. 652. Specify The Purpose Of Maintaining The Common Distribution Channels And The Common Divisions? The Common Distribution Channels and the Common Divisions are maintained to prevent the master record's multiple maintenance. For example, if you have created a customer 550 for Sales area 0105/30/01 then 550 can be used in the Sales area 0108/40/01, if you maintain 30 as the common distribution channel. 653. Why Is Availability Check Required? The availability check is used to determine that whether the requested order quantity would be delivered on Customer Requested Delivery Date or not. The availability check takes care about the time required to produce or obtain the material and picking or packing time, loading & Transit Time for the material. 654. Which Kind Of Requirements Does The Checking Group 01 And 02 Represent? The checking group 01 represents to the daily requirements while 02 represent the individual requirements. 655. Which User Exit Can Be Used To Copy Data Into The Planning Table? The user exit that you can use to copy data into the planning table is: User exit MCP20001 along with ZXSOPU01 656. List The Forms Of Number Ranges In Sd? There are two forms of number ranges in SD and those forms are as follows: Internal — In this form, the system automatically assigns a number range to a document. External— In this form, the system allows a user to assign a number range to a document. 657. What Is The Purpose Of Using Copy Control? The purpose of using copy control is to decide what document type, item category, and schedule line categories can be proposed to proceeding document. 658. What Is Contract Grouping? The contract grouping can be defined as the process to link lower level contracts to one master contract to maintain data consistency. 659. Is It Required To Create Condition Record For The Customer And Material Defining The Scale While Creating The Customer Rebate? No, it is not required to create condition record for every customer and material while creating the customer rebate. Rebate is customer or material specific in nature. 660. How Can You Create A Pricing Procedure That Calculates The Price For The Industrial Customers When They Also Purchase The Domestics Goods? You can create a pricing procedure that can calculate the price for the industrial customers by performing the following steps: Create a VOFM subroutine that is VOFM->Formulas->Condition value. Now set this subroutine in your procedure as V/2 transaction code in the AltCTy field. You can describe your requirements in the ABAP coding. 661. How Does System Show Storage Condition? How Can The Storage Condition Be Defined? System uses two-character alphanumeric key, storage condition to show the storage condition of a material. The storage condition is used in co-ordination of the plant and shipping point to decide the storage location. You can define the storage condition of a material by navigating the following menu path: Implementation Guide (IMG Menu)->Logistics Execution->Shipping->Picking->Determine Picking Locations-> Define Storage Conditions. 662. Suppose You Have Customized The Customer's Credit Limit In Your Company In Such A Way That When A Customer Exceed His/her Credit Limit, The System Responses You About That. What Is The Name Of This Management In System And What Data Do You Use For This Management? This management is known as the credit management. The data you use for the credit management is the credit management master data. The Finance module is used to assign credit limit to customers. 663. Give The Menu Path To Assign Credit Limit To Customers? The menu path to assign credit limit to customers is: SYSTEM Menu->Accounting->Financial Accounting->Customers -> Credit Management->Master Data-> Change . 664. In System There Is Functionality, Which Is Used To Manage The Customer Credit Limits. That Functionality Can Be Assigned With One Or More Company Codes. By Using The Company Code The System Decides That Organizational Unit When A Sale Occurs. What Is The Name Of That Functionality? Name of that functionality is credit control area. 665. What Is The Consignment Stock? The consignment stock consists of the items which are kept either at the customer or the business site for the consumption by the customer on the basis of a written agreement between them. The customer has the right to return the goods if not further sold or used. Till the time of sales or consumption of such stocks, it remains legally as company's property. Customer only pays to the company only when the stocks are sold/consumed, otherwise he returns the stocks to company. This scenario is used in some special sales related scenario such as pushing of stocks to meet an increased sales requirement or, is used for exhibition purpose as well. 666. Define The Risk Category? It is a grouping category, which is used to control the process to check the credit limit when the credit control takes place automatically. You use this category to segregate customers group on the basis of different credit rules. For example, you can put high-risk customers in one group and low-risk customers in another group. 667. List The Places Where A Credit Check Can Occur? The credit check can occur at the following three places: The Sales order. The delivery. The goods issue. 668. List The Credit Management Checks That The System Uses To Check The Credit? The various automatic credit management checks that the system uses are: Simple Credit Check. Automatic Credit Check-Static or Dynamic. 669. List The Items For Which You Can Create Incompletion Logs? The incompletion logs can be created for the following items: Sales document header data. Sales document item data. Sales document schedule line data. Sales activity data. Partner data in Sales documents, deliveries, and Sales activities. Delivery header data. Delivery item data. 670. What Is An Output? An output can be defined as a media that link various business partners. An output media can be one, such as e-mail, fax, Electronic Data Interchange (EDI), and printouts. An output media is generally created for invoices, delivery notes, and order confirmation. 671. List The Sales And Distribution Related Output Determination Activities? The output determination activities that are related to the Sales and Distribution are: Sales Activities. Sales Documents. Outbound Deliveries. Inbound Deliveries. Handling Units. Groups. Shipments. Billing Documents. 672. How Is The Transaction Code Ct04 Related With Characteristics? When the desired class of material is selected in the Material Master then the characteristics of that class needs to be chosen. The CT04 transaction code is used to define these characteristics. 673. What Is Excise Tax And How Is It Related To The System? The excise tax or excise duty is a type of tax which is charged on the goods that are produced for selling within a country. It is different from the customs duties which are charged on imported goods. As per the system guidelines, the procedure of excise tax calculation is country-specific. Therefore, the ERP software, which are implemented in India, have built-in Country India (CIN) version. You need to configure CIN for excise tax calculation. 674. What Are The Pricing Procedures Of Cin? The Country India (CIN) version comes with the following four pricing procedures: JINFAC (Sales from Manufacturing Plants). JINEXP (Export Sales). JINDEP (Sales from Depots). JINSTK (Stock Transfers). 675. What Are The Major Settings In The Contract Configuration Setting Screen? The following are major settings in the contract configuration screen: Price Procedure Condition Header. Contract Profile. Billing Request. Group Reference Procedure. Contract Data Allowed. Follow UP Activity Type. Update Lower Level Contract Fields. Check Partner Authorization Type. Subsequent Order Type. 676. What Is The Service And Maintenance Process? The Service and Maintenance process or service contract is a type of agreement between the supplier and receiver of the goods or service. This contract forms a basis on which the regular activities of the business, such as billing, cancellation, and other related items are done. A service contract contains validity dates, cancellation conditions, price agreements, and information. 677. Which Is The Standard Sales Document Type For The Service Contract? The WV is the standard sales document type for the service contract. 678. What Are Service Items? The service items are used by the service contract documents and can be one or all of the following: Service task. Material used in the service. Time charged by the technician as per hourly rate. 679. What Is Standard Service Item Category? The standard Service item category represents a service that is carried out and billed periodically. In Standard System, the standard item category for a service is WVN. 680. What Is The Standard Material Type For Service Items? There is a standard material type for service items. DIEN is the material type which is generally used for services in standard system. 681. What Is A Master Contract? A master contract is a contract which groups contracts that are at the lesser levels than master contract. It contains the information which are relevant to rest of the contracts. The main objective of the master contract is to ensure the consistency at all the levels. The documents included in the master contract are as follows: Quantity Contracts. Value Contracts. Service Contracts. 682. What Is Standard Application Logic? If any field in the new reference procedure screen is changed in the master contract, then only those fields of the master contract will be copied by the system which has the same value of master and lower level contracts. This is known as application logic. 683. What Is Workflow? Name The Person Who Can Assist You While Configuring A Workflow For A System. It is a sequence of steps either processed manually or automatically by the system for implementing a task, such as updating a contract. It is handled by a workflow resource. A workflow consultant is a person who looks after the problems associated with a workflow. 684. What Is Scheduling Agreement? The scheduling agreements are the type of agreements which are done between the customer and the business organization. It includes the details related to the delivery of the products such as delivery date and quantities which are to be delivered. The delivery dates are then passed to the schedule line for further activities. 685. What Is Planning Delivery Schedule? The planning delivery schedule is a type of delivery schedule which is used to manage the planning requirement of a project. The planning delivery schedule is conducted for limiting the planning period of schedule lines in forthcoming delivery schedules. 686. What Is The Correction Delivery? The correction delivery done when a product is wrongly delivered to the customer and returned. And the good receipt is not processed. As a result, the cumulative quantity in the scheduling argument is updated and the original delivery quantity is called off in the scheduling agreement. 687. What Is A Rebate Agreement? The rebate agreement is a type of agreement which is done between the customer and the buyer for the discount that is paid to the customer. It depends upon the conditions such as buying certain amount of the goods over a certain time period. This agreement specifies the rebate amount agreed on for each product. 688. List The Components Of Rebate Processing In System? Rebate processing in System is divided into the following three components: Configuring rebates. Setting up rebates. Managing rebate agreements and payments. 689. How Can You Define A Change Request? How Can You Release A Saved Change Request? A change request is defined as a request that is automatically generated by the SYSTEM when you do any new customizing or configuration task in the SYSTEM. Once you save the change request, the SYSTEM generates a request number, which you have to save for further processing. A change request can be released by using the SE10 transaction code. 690. What Do You Understand By Intercompany Customers And One-time Customer? The Sales customers who deal within the same client between different company codes are known as intercompany customers. One-time customers refer to those customers for whom you do not want to create a separate record, so that such type of customer account group can be reused. 691. Explain The Terms Minimum Order Quantity And Minimum Delivery Quantity. The Minimum Order Quantity refers to the minimum quantity that a customer needs to order. The concept of Minimum Delivery Quantity refers to the minimum quantity that you need to deliver to a customer. 692. What Is The Difference Between Confirmed Quantity And The Order Quantity? The quantity ordered by a customer is referred to as Order Quantity and the quantity allocated by Availability Check (ATP) is known as Confirmed Quantity. 693. How Can You Assign Movement Type? The movement type is assigned while defining the schedule line category. 694. Suppose, In A Particular Case, Customer Requirements For The Sales Order Do Not Appear In The Md04 Transaction. How Can You Resolve Such A Problem? To resolve the problem of non-appearance of customer requirements for the Sales order, you need to check whether the requirement class and schedule line category of your document are activated for requirement transfer. 695. What Do You Mean By Backorder Processing? Backorder processing is functionality in the System where you change the commitments and over-ride the blockage of stocks marked against sales documents/deliveries. For e.g. you receive an order from a very important customer for material "X" but the entire quantity of X is committed to another customer "Y" via earlier orders and this is where Backorder processing works to change the commitment and shift stock due for Y to X. 696. What Are Order And Target Quantities? The quantities mentioned as available in the quantity contract are called Target Quantities. Similarly, the quantities that are ordered are called the Order Quantities. 697. Can You Create More Than One Customer Hierarchy For The Same Payer? If Yes, Then How? Yes, it is possible to create more than one customer hierarchy for the same payer. We can do it by first creating the order and delivery and then performing the PGI for the first and second customer hierarchy. 698. A Sales Document Is Divided In To Three Levels. List Those Three Levels? The three levels in which a Sales document is divided are as follows: Header Level (Table VBAK) — All the master data, such as the customer material master, the Sales area, and the organization data of a Sales document is stored at Header level in the VBAK table. Item Level (Table VBAP) — All the material item data, such as the order quantity and the material master data of a Sales document is stored at Item level in the VBAP table. Schedule Line (Table VBEP) — Information about the material delivery dates and the delivery quantity of a Sales document is stated at Schedule line in the VBEP table. 699. What Is A Sales Order? A Sales order is defined as an order given by a customer to an organization for product or services. A Sales Order then is processed in the System to determine the basic organizational data and requirements for the entire Sales Process. 700. Define An Item Proposal? In case if a customer frequently orders the same combination of materials, or if you recommend a particular selection of products for an opening order, you can store the frequently used data as an item proposal in the system. If you want, the item proposal may also include proposed order quantities. During sales order creation, you can then copy all or some of the materials and quantity data from the item proposal directly into your document (sales order, quotation, and so on). You can assign a particular item proposal to a specific Customer Master Records. The system can then automatically propose the number of the assigned item proposal whenever you process sales orders for the relevant customers. 701. What Is A Quotation? The Quotation can be defined as a Sales document that you create before a Sales order and after an inquiry. Quotation is a legally binding document which informs the proposed prices and the terms and conditions of Sales to a customer. 702. When Is The Cash Sale Process Used? The Cash Sale Process is used when a customer places an order, picks goods, and pays for the goods at the same time. When the cash Sales process is used the System proposes the current data as the goods delivery and billing date. After you save the Sales order, the System creates a delivery and prints a cash sale receipt. Cash Sales concept is generally used for Sales to employees scenario where no customer specific master is maintained rather customer is billed as One Time Customer. 703. When Is The Rush Order Process Used? The Rush Order process is used when a customer places an order and picks the items immediately. Once you save the Sales order, the System creates a delivery; however, the invoice is generated later & sent to customer. 704. List The Various Business Functions That Are Performed To Meet The Delivery Date? The business functions that are performed to meet the delivery date are as follows: Scheduling the time required to procure the material. Scheduling the time required to pick or pack the material or transportation planning time. Scheduling the time required to load the material. Scheduling the time required to shift the material to the customer's site. 705. List The Activities For Which You Can Set Up The Partner Determination? The partner determination can be set up for the following activities: Customer Master. Sales Document Header. Sale Document Item. Delivery. Shipment. Billing Header. Billing Item. Sales Activities (CAS). 706. What Is The Consignment Issue? The consignment issue is the allotment of products for the customers. Its Standard document type is KE and the Standard order type using which it is recorded is the same. The standard item category used for the consignment issue is KEN.CO and CI are the standard schedule lines used for consignment issue. To create a consignment issue order, the Document Type KE is selected. 707. What Is Consignment Returns? It is the sales process flow which includes the material or the product which are defective and either returned by the customer or sold by the consignee. These types of products are returned back to the consignment stock and stored as a faulty item. The sales document type for the consignment return is KR. 708. Why Is The Consignment Not Returned Into Plant Stock? When a consignment is issued to the customer the business process is abstracted at the level of two parties; the customer and supplier. Therefore, customer maintains his own records related to the stock issue or return. If it is returned to the plant stock then it would be difficult for the customer to manipulate his transaction from the huge database of products at the plant level. 709. What Is Customer Pick-up? The customer pick-up is the last process of the consignment procedure. It includes picking of the faulty as well as the unused/unsold materials which are left by the customer. The specific return shipping point is determined for the products. There is no need of any invoice while consignment pick-up, because the ownership of goods is not changing. KAN is the standard item category for the consignment pick-up. 710. Name The Standard Overview For Consignment? SYSTEM contains a standard overview for the listing of all the consignments for all the materials issued to the customers in the plant. It is called Display Consignment and Returnable Packaging Stocks at Customer. 711. What Are Sales Document Lists? The sales document lists are similar to the lists that are usually prepared throughout the business process. They are many sales documents lists that are prepared during the selling process. For example, the sales order list is very common in sales and distribution module. 712. What Are The Common Sales Document And Work Lists? The common sales document and work lists are as follows: List of Sales Orders Outbound Delivery Monitor List Billing Documents Sales Documents Blocked for Billing Sales Documents by Objects or User Status Display Backorders Incomplete Sales Orders Incomplete Sales Documents Outbound Delivery Monitor Transportation Planning Lists Blocked Billing Docs 713. What Is The Sales Document Status? In the sales documents, there is status at header and item levels. It is used for knowing and controlling the stages in the sales documents. 714. What Are The Fields Of The Processing Status? The processing status indicates the stages of an item whether it is processed or not. It includes the following fields: Overall Status. Delivery Status. System Status. 715. List The Tables That Are Used To Display The Status Of Sales Documents? The following are certain tables used to display the status of sales documents: VBUK— Displays header status and administrative data. VBUP— Displays item status. VBAKUK— Displays sales document header and status data. 716. What Is General Table Display? The General Table Display screen displays the populated fields of a table. The transaction code used for this purpose is SE16. 717. What Is Document Flow? Right from the enquiry through quotation, ordering, shipping and finally billing of the products many documents are prepared. The chain of such type of documents created in a sales process is called a document flow. 718. What Are The Sales Document Types? The sales documents may have several types but the most commonly used are as follows: Standard Order. Returns. 719. What Is Sales Order Stock? The sales order stock is a stock with a stock type E. It is the stock of items which is reserved as per the sales order issued. 720. What Is Backorder Processing? The backorder processing is the process of changing of the previous commitment of the delivery of goods from one customer to another due to strategic reasons. 721. What Are The T Codes Used For Backorder Processing? The T codes used for backorder processing are as follows: OMIH. OPJL. OPJJ. V_RA. 722. What Is Trading Process? Let's consider three organizations such as A the service provider, B the service receiver and, C works as a vendor which provides the services to service providers. In this situation when A receives a purchase order from B it either manufactures it or purchases it. If the option of procurement is chosen, then after receiving the purchase order from B, A creates a sales order for it. Also it creates a purchase order for C to arrange the goods. C prepares the product and sends to A which delivers it to B, that is the ultimate buyer. This process is called the trading process. 723. What Is Third Party Order Process? Let's consider three organizations such as A the service provider, B the service receiver and, C works as a vendor which provides the services to service providers. In this situation when A receives a purchase order from B it either manufactures it or purchases it. If the option of procurement is chosen, then after receiving the purchase order from B, A creates a sales order for it. Instead of preparing the purchase order for C as in case of the trading process A authorizes C to deliver the product to B on behalf of A. This process is called third party order processing. 724. What Is Invoice Verification? Name The Transaction Code For It? Invoice Verification is the process used when a Purchase is made. For every purchase made, an Invoice is received from Vendor/supplier. In this process the data related to invoice is posted in the system which also creates payment liability for the supplying vendor. MIRO is the transaction code that is used for invoice verification. 725. What Is Product Group? The product group is the categorized as the group of the products which are allocated for specific customer order. The product group can be either multi-level or single-level. The single level product group contains only the materials whereas the multi-level group can contain more than one product group. 726. List The Various Types Of Special Stocks? The various types of special stocks are: Consignment stock related to vendor. Consignment stock related to customer. Components provided to vendor. Project stock. Pipeline material. Orders on hand. 727. How Can You Link The Automatic Packing Procedure With Delivery Type Or Item Category? The Automatic Packing Procedure is assigned in the OVHU2 transaction code; therefore, you need to assign the procedure to 0002 Outbound Delivery there. This would help control packing in the delivery item category to some extent. However, to have a better control, you can design the access sequence with the available fields. 728. What Is The Most Important Concern That Needs To Be Taken Care Of While Creating Delivery Notes In Different Languages? While creating delivery notes, the language of the notes are decided by the destination country for which the delivery notes are created. Therefore, the most important concern to be taken care of is to ensure that the country is identified accordingly in the program and the respective form is being used to create the delivery note. 729. Define Consumption Modes? The Consumption mode defines the direction of the consumption of the customer requirements on the time axis from the requirement date, with planned independent requirement should occur. Here the requirement date is the date on which the Sales order items were created. 730. What Is The Purpose Of Shipping Point Determination? The purpose of the shipping point determination is to determine dispatch related data and conditions for a particular delivery to be supplied to a particular customer. The Transaction code used is OVL2. 731. What Is The Purpose Of Using The Delivery Process? The delivery Process is used to send the items from the plant to the customer through Shipping Point. The delivery process is also used to receive the items back from a customer. 732. In What Reference Is A Delivery Document Created? You can create a Delivery document with reference to a Sales document or with reference to an inbound return Sales document. 733. Which Delivery Document Type Can Be Created Without The Reference Of The Sales Order Document? The delivery document type LO can be created without the reference of the Sales order document. 734. List The Transaction Codes To Execute The Delivery Due List? The transaction codes that can be used to execute the Delivery Due List are as follows: VL10A — Sales orders fast display. VL10B— Purchase orders fast display. VL10C— Sales orders items. VL10D— Purchase orders items. VL10E— Sales orders schedule lines. VL10F— Purchase orders items schedule line. VL10G— Sales and purchase orders fast display. VL10H— Sales and purchase orders items fast display. VL10I— Sales and purchase orders item schedule line. 735. How Will You Describe A Shipping Point? The Shipping Point can be described as a location linked to a plant from where items are delivered to/received from a customer. A plant may have more than one shipping point assigned to it. 736. Suppose That You Do Not Have Stock But You Can Successfully Press Pgi, Which Is Wrong. How Can You Configure The System That Cannot Press Pgi Without Stock? To configure the System in such a way that PGI cannot be pressed without stock, you must ensure that negative inventory is not allowed in MM. 737. What Is Special Stock? Which Transaction Code Is Used To View The Special Stock? The special stock is the stock, which is delivered along with the packaging material. The special stock is considered as the company's property even when it is placed at the customer's location. You can view the special stock by using the MMBE transaction code. 738. Why Are The Factory Calendars Used? The factory calendars are used for various purposes and few of them are: To decide the working days at a specific location. To decide the day to create delivery so that a customer can receive the delivery on a working day. 739. Compare The Milestone With Periodic Billing? The concept of billing a customer on completion of particular work milestone or activity is known as Milestone Billing. However, the concept of billing a customer on completion of a specified time period is known as Periodic Billing. 740. What Happens If There Is A Negative Posting In Billing Document? Negative posting on the debit side reduces the credit side of an account. However, when a negative posting is done on the credit side, then it reduces the debit side of an account. 741. Compare Billing And Invoice? When the goods are supplied to a customer, then an invoice is also sent. In other words, an invoice is a billing document. Apart from invoice, the other billing documents are Credit memo and Debit memo. 742. How Can You View The Due Date Of The Invoice After Making A Delivery And Invoice? You can view the due date of an invoice in the AR module. If you go to fbl5n and search for the customer, the due date appears in the overview screen. 743. List Few Commonly Used Sales Documents That Result In Order-related Billing? Few commonly used Sales documents that result in order-related billing are: CR —Credit memos. DR —Debit memos. 744. What Is The Role Of The Cancellation Invoice? The Cancellation Invoice is generated by the System when you cancel an Invoice because of any business related decision. The Cancellation Invoice reverses the related transactional effects made by the Invoice which is cancelled. 745. What Is The Role Of Inter-company Invoice? The Inter-company invoice refers to an internal invoice which is not passed to an external partner or Sold-to party rather it is passed between two company codes belonging to the same business. 746. Which Setting Is Used To Activate The Account Setting At The Header And Item Level? The VKOA transaction code is used to activate the accounts assignment settings at the item and header levels. 747. How Can One Send An Invoice By E-mail? You first need to define the output type and use the NACE transaction code. Then correct transmission medium needs to be defined in V3 application. If the dispatch is being sent as own transaction, then dispatch time is selected as 3. After the attachment of correct output type the VF31 Transaction Code is used to send the message. 748. Why Is The Account Determination Used By The System? The Account Determination is used to determine that which ledger should be used to contain the accounts related information & posting should be made to the relevant account only. 749. Describe Two Types Of Credit Processes. Two types of the credit process are as follows: First —The credit process in which a customer returns the previously purchased items and request for the credit. Second—In this credit process, a customer is credited without returning any item but against some additional offer or scheme. 750. When Is The Debit Process Used? The debit process is used when a customer is charged because of any specific reason such as late payment, excess scheme paid etc. This is nothing but to charge customer due to specific business related requirements. 751. What Is Invoice Correction Request? This is the document that helps you to correct the quantity and price of items on an incorrect invoice and to generate credit and debit memos. The procedure is called as Invoice Correction Request. For each item two entries are created, one is Credit Item & other is Debit item. You can only correct the Debit Item & that's how you correct the invoice. 752. Define Dunning? What Do You Need To Configure Before Dunning? The dunning is defined as a process, which is used to generate a bill or invoice against a customer when a customer does not pay amount according to the payment terms offered by a company. Before performing dunning, you must configure the following: Define the dunning area. Define the dunning keys. Define the dunning block reasons. Configure the dunning procedure. Assign the dunning procedure to customer accounts. Define the correspondence types. Configure the dunning run. 753. What Is Sales Return? Sales Return is the process of returning the purchased goods by the customer because of various reasons, such as Damaged during transportation, Inferior Quality, Over Stocking, Less or No Sales Uptake, or Winding up of business by the customer (e.g.-in case of trader or dealer). In these situations, a customer returns the goods purchased. As per the business agreement between the organization and customer, a Credit Note is issued in the name of the customer to settle the accounts. 754. What Do You Exactly Mean By Credit Note And Debit Note? Credit Note —It is a kind of billing which you generally raise when you need to credit a customer due to Sales Return or because of some extra incentive or bonus offered. Debit Note —It is a kind of billing when you need to charge customer for reasons, such as delayed payment made by the customer or Customer Payment cheque dishonor penalties. 755. What Is Return Invoice? Return Invoice is nothing but the Credit Memo issued to a customer for the Sales Return affected by him. 756. Which Concepts Of The Sd Module Are Crucial Implementing Pricing Requirement And Formulas? The following concepts of SD are crucial while implementing requirement and formulas: Requirements. Copying requirements. Data transfer routines. Formulas. 757. Define The Determination Procedure? The determination procedure is related to the Sales order preparation. During the Sales order creation, the determination procedure is accessed to validate the records in the condition table. The determination procedure accesses the condition table and calls the condition types according to the access sequence and checks to see if a valid condition record exists. 758. Is It Possible To Choose The Pricing Procedure In Customer Master Or Material Master On The Basis Of Material Used? No, it is not possible to change the pricing procedure once the main document is prepared at the material level. 759. What Kind Of Records Are Updated By The System When You Post Goods Issued In A Delivery? When the goods are transferred to the customer then the goods issue is posted in a delivery. Once the goods issue is posted, the System updates various records, such as reducing the stock in hand and increasing the amount of goods sold that is Debit COGS & Credit Inventory account. 760. Which Block Is Used To Prevent The System From Creating Deliveries By Using The Delivery Due List Function? The block used to prevent the System from creating deliveries by using the delivery due list function is called the delivery due list book. 761. Which Block Stops The System From Creating The Picking List? The block used to stop the System from creating the picking list is called the picking block. 762. Which Are The Sales Object Types? The most common sales object types are as follows: VBK Sales order header. VBP Sales order item. VBEP Sales Order Schedule Lines. 763. List The Erp Packages Available In The Market? The other ERP packages available in the market are: BAAN. JD Edwards. Oracle Financials. Siebel. PeopleSoft. 764. Define The Term Consignment Stock? The material available in the company premises but is not added in the stock is called the consignment stock. The consignment stock is added to the company stock when it is either sent to the production department or marked as the material to be sold. 765. What Do You Mean By Cross-company Stock Transfer? Instead of delivering the sales order from another company code, the material can also be delivered from a plant of one company code to the plant in another company code. This process can be accomplished by a cross company stock transfer order. 766. What Is A Credit Control Area And How Is It Related To Company Codes? An organizational unit is an organization that checks credit limits for customers. Although a credit control area can include one or more company codes, but you cannot assign a company code to more than one credit control area. 767. What Is The Difference Between An Inquiry And Quotation? The inquiry is the process to register the customer's probable requirements. The quotation is a legally abiding document given to customer conforming the terms & condition to deliver the product or service to customer. SAP SD Questions and Answers Pdf Download Read the full article

[siva3155]

300+ TOP SAP PP Interview Questions and Answers

SAP PP Interview Questions for freshers experienced :-

1. what is SAP PP? SAP PP process is related to production planning of a company and it encompasses all activities like MRP (Material Requirement Planning), BOM (Bills Of Material), Routing, Capacity planning, etc. but mainly it contains two segments Material Planning: Material requirements planning, long term planning, Execution Planning: Creation of production order, workflow, conformations, technical completion and good movement 2. what are the production process in SAP? There are three types of production process in SAP Discrete Manufacturing Repetitive Manufacturing Production- Process Industries 3. List out the activities carried out in Production Planning? Activities involved in Production Planning includes Processing material master Creation of Bill of Material Displaying work center and routing Maintaining planning calendar Maintaining production lot Maintaining quota file Defining range of coverage profile and profile for safety time Defining MRP views 4. what is Routing in SAP PP? Routing in SAP PP is referred to a list of activities which are required to produce any material. For example, when you do cost estimation for the material, the system triggers the relevant routing and activity rates for all those described in routing. Which will helpful to calculate the processing cost in product costing. 5. What are the steps of Production Execution Process? Production Execution steps include Converting planned order to production order Releasing the production order Goods issue for production order Confirmation of production order Goods receipt against production order 6. What are the reports generated in product cost controlling information system? Product Cost Controlling information system generates information for following areas Product cost planning Cost object controlling with the subcomponents Product cost by period Product cost by order Product cost by sales order Costs for intangible goods and services Actual costing / Material Ledger 7. what is “work center” in SAP PP and what is the use of Data in Work Centers? “Work Centers” are business objects in SAP-PP that is used in task list operations ( routings, maintenance task lists, inspection plans) and work orders. Data in work center is used for Scheduling: Formulas and operating time are entered, so that the duration of an operation can be calculated Costing: Formulas are entered so that the costs of an operation can be calculated Capacity Planning: The available capacity and formulas for capacity requirements is entered Simplifying operation maintenance: Various default values can be included in the work center 8. What is the use of MRP PP evaluations? This role contains a function for evaluating the MRP result. This function can be used to find information about the availability of material and to identify any material shortage situation. 9. what is the purpose of using Capacity Planning? Capacity Planning supports planning in all phases Long term rough cut planning Medium term planning Short term planning It can be integrated with various SAP applications like SAP-SD, PP, PP-SOP, PP-LTP, PP-SFC, etc. 10. Explain how can you create production order without routing and BOM? Without BOM and routing you can create a production order by changing the config in OPL8 ( order type dependent parameters) as routing optional. When we try to create an order using C001 it may ask for a sales order. 11. what happens to planned after it has been converted into production order? When planned order is converted to the production order, the planned order are offset by production order. The planned order reference can be seen in the production order.

SAP PP Interview Questions 12. what is the difference between stock transport order and stock transfer order? Stock transfer order: It is referred to the transfer of stock for the usage in the same company Stock transport order: It is referred to the change of title of stock in the name of the buyer 13. what is PRT (Production Resource Tools) in SAP PP? PRT (Production Resource Tools) are moveable operating objects used to perform repeated activities in plant or production maintenance, for example, documents such as drawings or programs for which document management functions are used. Various other PRT components include Engineering drawings Jigs Fixtures Measurement Instruments 14. Explain how to create PRT master records? To create PRT master records you have to follow the following steps Choose logistics/Accounting -> Project System -> Basic data -> Master data -> Production resources and tools -> Create The initial screen for creating a PRT appears Enter a number for the PRT and choose continue The basic data screen appears Maintain the basic data Choose Goto -> Defaults and enter the default values Save the PRT 15. what is the t-code for changing production order and to display production order? T-code to change the production order = C002 T-code to display the production order = C003 16. what is PLM (Product Lifecycle Management) in SAP PP and what is the use? It is a collection of solutions with which you digitally create, maintain and make product information, available in the whole company and for the entire life cycle of the product. PLM provides you the function with which you do following things The workplace is an open portal in the world wide web and allows you to access all application and information that you need to work with all external and internal business partners It can link with other internet applications like program management, change and configuration management and engineering collaboration. 17. In SAP-PP what are the costing parameters? In SAP-PP, the costing parameters are as below Work Center: Activity types and the formulas, cost center Routing: The time, activity types 18. In cost controlling information system mention the fields that are listed in the list screen of the report? Following fields are listed in the list screen of the report Key Figures Costing/MM %Costing/MM Revaluation VarCstRuns %VarCstRuns Basic data Valuation Cost component group 1/ Cost component group 2 CostCompGr(fix)1 / CostCompGr( fix)2 19. what is the use of SAP Material View and list out other parameters where SAP Material View is applicable? SAP Material View is an SAP object that not only hold name of the material, but various other information related to material like Material production related information Material planning related information Material sales related information Material purchase related information Material storage and warehousing related information Material costing and accounting related information Material batch specification information 20. what are the types of Master Views for Production and Planning? For production and planning types of Master Views are SAP MRP1 View SAP MRP2 View SAP MRP3 View SAP MRP4 View SAP Work Scheduling View 21. Mention how MRP (Material Requirement Planning) types are classified? MRP types are classified in two leagues Materials for consumption based planning Planning based on demand 22. what are the keyfields found in MRP View 1? MRP views 1 are mostly maintained for production purposes. General Data MRP Procedure Lot size data 23. List out the basic procedure for dispatching operations in capacity leveling? For dispatch operations basic procedure includes Either the user determines the date of dispatch or else it is specified by scheduling A dispatching sequence needs to be determined if several operations need to be dispatched The systems checks for The dates to which operations are to be dispatched The work center to which operations are to be dispatched Finite scheduling is performed Operation check is performed Status for the operation is set as “dispatched.” System carries out midpoint scheduling 24. what is the need of MRP list if the stock requirement list is already given? MRP list displays the result of the last planning run, changes that occurred between planning runs are ignored in the MRP list. While contrary to this, in the stock or requirement list all changes that occurred in the stock, issues and receipts are displayed by the system. 25. what are the t-codes for creating, changing and summarizing BOM? BOM transaction codes for Creating BOM= CS01 Changing BOM= CS02 Summarized BOM=CS13 26. what is the use of t-code CS20 in BOM? With t-code CS20 you can do Mass changes to BOM like Change the item data Creating new material Replacing it with another material 27. Can’t one material be assigned to more than one operation in a routing? One material from a BOM CANNOT be assigned to different Operations. It can be done by defining the material for so many times as required in the BOM 28. How to insert an inspection checkpoint at the end of an operation? If in process sample is to be defined, assign inspection type 03 in the Material Master. Then create MICs and assign them in the Routings. System automatically generates the Inspection Lots 29. Where we have to specify the teardown time in one operation? Teardown time can be defined as one of the Standard Parameters… 30. How the process time is calculated in a WC when both labour, Machine categories exist? Scheduling is done based on the Capacity Category we define in the Workcenter 31. How to create opbject dependencies in a BOM FOR A CONFIGURABLE MATERIAL? Go to Extras -> Object Dependency -> Assign For this U need to create Characteristics and Class (of Class Type 300) earlier SAP PP Questions and Answers pdf Download Read the full article